Bridge Construction Manual Dec 2015

Bridge Construction
Inspection Manual
Edition 2
2015
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION MANUAL
EDITION 2
Technical Standards Branch
Alberta Transportation
September 2015
© Copyright, September 2015
The Crown in right of the Province of Alberta, as represented

by the Minister of Transportation
Permission is given to reproduce all or part of this document

without modification. If changes are made to any part, it
should be made clear that that part has been modified.
PREFACE
The Bridge Construction Inspection Manual (Manual) is a documentation of Alberta Transportation’s bridge
construction inspection practices and policies and is intended to supplement the requirements of the Standard
Specifications for Bridge Construction and the Engineering Consulting Guidelines for Highway, Bridge, and
Water Projects.
Bridge construction inspection is a significant activity, requiring consistent and thorough administration and
documentation to achieve performance, durability, and an adequate level of safety. It is intended that this
document will be used as a valuable technical resource to help facilitate the achievement of this goal.
It is not the intent of this Construction Manual to limit progress or overrule the exercise of proper engineering
judgment in the carrying out of bridge construction inspections. Consultants should satisfy themselves that the
requirements of both this Manual, the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction, and the Engineering
Consulting Guidelines for Highway, Bridge, and Water Projects are appropriate for a specific bridge project.
Approved:
Date:
Des Williamson
Director, Bridge Engineering Section
Date:
Moh Lali
Executive Director,
Alberta Transportation Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Edition 2 page ii

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The Bridge Construction Inspection Manual was prepared in collaboration with ISL Engineering & Land Services
and with significant contributions by the following individuals:
Greg Whyte
Dave Besuyen
ISL Engineering and Land Services Ltd.

Martin Maier – Technical Content
Charles Bradford – Technical Content Section 22
Michael Kovac – Checklists
Max Goodwin – Photographs
Jordan Allen – Editing
Nick Horobec– Review
Alberta Transportation Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Edition 2 page iii

Table of Contents
Section A - Introduction
Section B - Administration
Section C - Role of the Inspector
Section D - Safety
Section 1 - Excavation
Section 2 - Backfill
Section 3 - Foundation Piles
Section 4 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
Section 5 - Reinforcing Steel
Section 6 - Structural Steel
Section 7 - Precast Concrete Units
Section 8 - Bridge Bearings
Section 9 - Drain Trough Terminal Protection
Section 10 - Heavy Rock Riprap
Section 11 - Ducts and Voids
Section 12 - Bridgerail
Section 13 - Miscellaneous Iron
Section 14 - Guardrail
Section 15 - Non-Skid Polymer Overlay
Section 16 - Bridge Deck Waterproofing
Section 17 - Asphalt Concrete Pavement
Section 18 - CSP and SPCSP Structures
Alberta Transportation Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Edition 2 page iv

Section 19 - Painted Roadway Markings
Section 20 - Deck Overlay and Concrete Rehabilitation
Section 21 - Removal and Salvage of Bridge Structures
Section 22 - Painting
Section 23 - Structural Lumber and Piling
Section 24 - Sign Structures and Panels
Section 25 - Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls
Section 26 - RCP and PBC Structures
Alberta Transportation Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Edition 2 page v

INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A.1 General ......................................................................................................................... A-1

A.2 Qualifications of the Inspector.................................................................................... A-1
A.3 Definitions .................................................................................................................... A-2
A.3.1 Activities Related to Inspection ......................................................................... A-2
A.3.2 Quality Roles Defined....................................................................................... A-3
A.3.3 Language Defining Accountability .................................................................... A-4
A.4 The Inspector’s Tools .................................................................................................. A-4
A.4.1 Basic Equipment .............................................................................................. A-4
A.4.2 Survey Equipment ............................................................................................ A-4
A.4.3 Specialized Equipment ..................................................................................... A-4
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section A, Introduction
A.1 General
Bridge construction inspection includes inspection of major bridge structures, bridge

rehabilitation work, standard bridge structures, bridge-size culverts and related structures, such
as earth retaining walls.
Successful bridge construction requires careful coordination between the designer, Project
Manager, materials inspectors and the bridge construction inspector (Inspector), who are on the
Consultant’s team. The effectiveness of bridge construction inspection relates directly to the
Inspector’s capabilities, knowledge, experience, aptitude and competency of the project team.
An effective Inspector can prevent the incidence of construction issues and conflict through
proper planning, communication and technical knowledge.
It is the Inspector’s responsibility to review, witness, assess, measure and otherwise determine
the acceptability of the work. It is also the Inspector’s responsibility to document, photograph
and record the progress of the work and his communications with the Contractor.
“Informed inspection is the link between design and construction.” This quotation summarizes
the essence of the Inspector’s job.
The purpose of this Manual is to:
 Describe the Department’s expectations for bridge construction inspection relevant to each
section of the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction, with discussion about specific
activities that need to be reviewed, witnessed, assessed, measured, documented and
photographed.
 Describe the Inspector’s role with respect to contract administration, coordination with others
and technical interpretation.
 Provide consistency in inspection effort for the Department and their Consultants.
 Provide supplemental technical commentary and photographs to the Standard Specifications
for Bridge Construction.
 Provide guidance and reference to the junior Inspector, and be a resource for the
experienced Inspector.
 Provide comprehensive inspection checklist templates and activity photographs.
A.2 Qualifications of the Inspector
Appendix J3 of the Engineering Consulting Guidelines for Highway, Bridge, and Water Projects
– Volume 1 provides qualification requirements for the Inspector. Inspectors lacking the
necessary project experience requirements must work under the direct on-site supervision and
guidance of an Inspector with extensive field experience. An effective and experienced
Inspector:
 is certified in the field of civil engineering and maintains an ongoing program of relevant
training, including periodic review of specifications and technical standards referenced in the
Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction
 has excellent written and oral communication skills
 has a fundamental knowledge of bridge design
 understands and has extensive experience with all relevant bridge construction methods,
equipment and practices
 understands and has experience in surveying and other common forms of dimensional and
positional checks
September 2015 A-1

 understands construction limitations, sequencing and duration of activities

 has specific technical knowledge in concrete, steel, earthworks and other products and
materials, and has an understanding of bridge material fabrication and testing processes
 is knowledgeable about current environmental legislation and permitting
 understands the current Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations
 is skilled in the interpretation of contract documents, specifications and drawings
 thoroughly understands construction contract administration and contract law principles
 understands the roles and responsibilities of the Contractor, the Owner and other
stakeholders
 understands the role of and relationship to the design engineer
 understands the role, responsibilities and protocol of his team, the Contractor and the
Department with respect to decisions and actions
 can anticipate potential conflicts and problems, thereby promoting a proactive instead of a
reactive solution.
The Inspector’s aptitude is equally as important as the qualification requirements. An effective

Inspector must possess the following characteristics:
 pragmatic and logical approach to the resolution of problems and issues

 ability to use direct, clear, incisive language
 confident, assertive and firm, not timid
 skilled at negotiation and diplomacy
 observant, insightful, vigilant and able to anticipate through familiarization with Contract
documents
 pleasant in disposition and positive in attitude, slow to anger and staid, patient demeanor,
skilled at maintaining a professional relationship with all parties
 meticulous and diligent in record keeping, energetic not indolent
 deliberate and circumspect when making determinations, not easily coerced or intimidated to
make incautious or hasty decisions
 ability to repudiate work without hesitation when project requirements not met
 skilled at processing information and understanding the perspective of others, continuously
demonstrating an attitude of ‘partnering’ through actions and words, able to consider the
implication of decisions on all parties
 a sense of “the big picture” and a great deal of patience and perseverance
A.3 Definitions
A.3.1 Activities Related to Inspection
Inspect: To view, witness, investigate, study or examine closely and critically, formally or
officially. Inspectors use observation, measurement, testing and judgment to evaluate
conformity. The Inspector is required to inspect the Work.
Review: An evaluation of a document, procedure, construction activity or process for general

conformance to contract documents. A review is an activity, and its purpose is to determine
whether or not the document, procedure, construction activity or process being evaluated is
adequate to meet requirements. The Inspector does not accept responsibility for accuracy or
compliance to contract documents as the result of a review. The Inspector is required to
review the Work.
September 2015 A-2

Audit: A systematic, independent and documented process for obtaining records and other
information and evaluating it objectively to determine the extent to which procedures and
requirements are fulfilled. The Inspector may be required to audit aspects of the Work.
Supervise: To oversee a process during execution or performance, and to have oversight and
direction of. The Inspector does not supervise the Work. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor to supervise, and thereby take responsibility for the Work.
Accept: To acknowledge review without accepting responsibility for (in contract terminology).
The Inspector is required to provide initial acceptance but not final acceptance of the
Contractor’s Work. Conversely, the Inspector may reject the Contractor’s Work.
Approve: To confirm or sanction formally. The Inspector does not approve the Contractor’s
drawings, procedures or Work; however, he may be authorized to approve changes to
the scope of Work.
Certify: To attest as certain, give reliable information of, to confirm, to testify or to guarantee.
The Inspector does not certify aspects of the Work.
Ensure: To secure or guarantee, to make certain. As with the term “certify”, the Inspector does
not ensure that aspects of the Work are adequate or acceptable.
A.3.2 Quality Roles Defined
Quality Control (QC): The comparison of a product against the Contract documents, as in the
case of an inspection. Persons responsible for QC must be fully conversant with project
documents and be capable of evaluating the Work against the Contract documents. QC must be
independent of production, be allocated sufficient time to perform its function, and have the
authority to reject non-compliant work or to require changes to it prior to acceptance. It is
reactive and can result in rejection of the work. QC must be performed by the Contractor.
Quality Assurance (QA): This involves establishing, monitoring and modifying a process of
production or construction so that the final product must comply with the Contract documents.
Persons responsible for QA must be conversant with both the project requirements and the
construction processes used to do the Work. QA is a product of management, but it is
implemented by production personnel. In principle, perfect QA would eliminate the need for QC.
QA must be performed by the Contractor.
Inspector’s Quality Role: The terms QC and QA as defined above are consistent with ISO
9000 but are frequently misused, which can lead to confusion. Unless specifically identified in
the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction, it is best to avoid stating that the Inspector
has either a QC or QA role. The Inspector reviews or inspects the work at various stages
of completion for the purpose of assessing compliance to Contract documents. The
Inspector may reject work if non-compliant. Rejection of work must result in a review by the
Contractor of his QA process. Exceptions exist when the Inspector does QA backfill or concrete
site testing; this testing is done at the Department’s and Consultant’s discretion for the purpose
of verifying the accuracy of the Contractor’s testing.
September 2015 A-3

A.3.3 Language Defining Accountability
Shall: An auxiliary verb, used in contract terminology when reference is made to the second
and third person (you, they). Therefore, the verb “shall” is used when providing written
instruction to the Contractor.
Will: An auxiliary verb, used in contract terminology when reference is made to the first person
(I, We). Therefore, the verb “will” is used when making reference to the Owner or Consultant’s
actions in a written instruction.
A.4 The Inspector’s Tools
Certain equipment is required by the Inspector. All equipment should be in good working
condition and be readily available throughout the Work.
A.4.1 Basic Equipment
 Project Journal
 Writing Instruments: Pens, highlighters, felt markers, soapstone, paint markers, spray
marking paint.
 Tape Measure: This includes a short steel pocket tape (minimum 5 m) and a long survey
chain.
 Camera: Digital and video.
 Thermometers: Traditional, max/min and hand-held LASER to record surface temperatures.
 25m String Line, Clamps, Plump Bob: Used to check form alignments.
 Chipping Hammer: Used for sounding.
 Lights: Pocket flashlight and high-power light for inspecting deep forms and pile excavations.
 Carpenter’s Levels (torpedo 1 m)
 Straight Edges (aluminum 3 m and polystyrene 3 m): Used for checking trueness of concrete
surfaces.
 Vest: This is often also a safety vest and is required so that the Inspector’s gear can
accompany him while at the site.
A.4.2 Survey Equipment
 Survey Level: Used to check structure elevations from a given benchmark elevation.
 Automatic Theodolite (Total Station): Used to check structure stations or coordinates from
given control points.
 Survey Flagging Tape, Lath, Hubs, Steel Pins
 Prism and Level Rod
A.4.3 Specialized Equipment
 Optical Hand Level or Clinometer: Used to estimate slope angles.

 Dry Film Thickness Gauge: Used to measure coating thickness.
 Feeler Gauge and Crack Template: Used to determine crack widths and deck finger joint
tolerances.
 Pachometer: Used to determine reinforcing steel cover after concrete has been placed (as
required).
 Anemometer: Sailing-type wind gauge, used to determine evaporation rate for Class HPC
Concrete.
September 2015 A-4

 Humidity Meter: Used to check RH in hoardings and to determine evaporation rate for Class
HPC Concrete.
 Plunger Gauge: Used to measure waterproofing membrane thickness.
 Mirror: Used for inspecting pile excavations.
 Watch and Stopwatch: For counting ‘Blows per 250 mm’ and ‘Blows per Minute’ during pile
driving.
 Pocket Penetrometer: Used to estimate soil densities.
 Telescoping Measuring Rod or Laser Level: Used for measuring rise and span of culvert
barrels.
 Torque Wrench: Used to check bolt tightening for culverts and structural steel.
September 2015 A-5

ADMINISTRATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B.1 General ......................................................................................................................... B-1

B.2 Contract Terminology .................................................................................................. B-1
B.2.1 Project Team Definitions B-1
B.2.2 Contract Definitions B-1
B.2.3 Generic Document Definitions B-2
B.3 Construction Contract Documents ............................................................................. B-2
B.4 Department Requirements of the Consultant ............................................................ B-2
B.5 Department Construction Documents ........................................................................ B-3
B.5.1 Standard Documents B-3
B.5.2 Project Specific Documents B-4
B.6 Hierarchy of Documents and Drawings...................................................................... B-4
B.7 Extra Work .................................................................................................................... B-4
B.7.1 Supplemental Work B-4
B.8 Claims, Negotiations, Disputes ................................................................................... B-5
B.9 Avoidance of Claims .................................................................................................... B-5
B.10 Documentation Records and Forms ........................................................................... B-6
B.10.1 Project Journals B-6
B.10.1.1 Instructions for Maintaining the Project Journal ................................ B-6
B.10.1.2 Minimum Daily Information to be Recorded in the Project Journal ... B-7
B.10.2 Weekly Progress Report B-8
B.10.3 Field Memo B-8
B.10.4 Monthly Progress Estimate B-8
B.10.5 Survey Book B-9
B.11 Deficiencies .................................................................................................................. B-9
B.12 Final Acceptance ......................................................................................................... B-9
B.13 “As-Constructed” Documents .................................................................................... B-9
B.14 Final Reports .............................................................................................................. B-10
B.15 Sample Records and Forms ...................................................................................... B-10
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section B, Administration
B.1 General
The Department requires written project field records, including forms, reports, photographs and
journals. The Inspector must diligently and regularly prepare and maintain these records.
Written records support the Department’s position when quality and payment disagreements
arise.
The Department maintains various documents that describe requirements and provide
reference information to the Consultant and the Contractor. These include requirements for
project administration, which must be followed to achieve consistency from project to project.
B.2 Contract Terminology
B.2.1 Project Team Definitions
Consultant: Retained by the Department to administer a construction contract between the

Department and the Contractor. The Consultant is not a party to the Contract. The Inspector
represents the Consultant at the project site. The Inspector reports directly to the Project
Manager, who manages and administers the Contract on behalf of the Consultant. The term
Project Manager is used to describe the role of overall responsibility for the Consultant’s project
team. The Project Manager will consult with design engineers and other specialists before
providing direction to the Inspector. It is important that Contract Construction Inspectors have
contract with a single point of authority on the Consultant’s project team.
Department: Her Majesty the Queen, in right of Alberta, as represented by a person authorized
by the Minister and represented by Alberta Transportation. The Project Sponsor is appointed by
the Department to act as a direct liaison between the Department and the Consultant.
Contractor: The corporation agreeing to perform the Work set out in the Contract documents.
B.2.2 Contract Definitions
Contract: The written agreement describing the performance of the Work and furnishing the
labour, equipment and materials necessary to complete the Work. The Contract is a legally
binding agreement between the Department and a Contractor for the purpose of completing
Work at specified rates of payment. Only documents specifically referenced in the Contract are
binding.
Work: All of any part of the Work to be performed under Contract.
Warranty: A stipulation, explicit or implied, of some particular aspect of the Work. A statement
of promise or a statement of formal assurance (i.e., an assurance that the Work will be
performed as intended is an implied warranty).
Guarantee: A statement of promise or assurance that the Work is of a specified quality, or that
it will perform satisfactorily for a given length of time; a pledge to take responsibility for
performance.
Procedure: The sequence of actions or instructions to be followed by a Contractor in

accomplishing a task, while maintaining compliance to Contract requirements. Procedures are
prepared by the Contractor.
Deficiencies: Items that are non-compliant and were not corrected are considered deficiencies.
September 2015 B-1

B.2.3 Generic Document Definitions
Manual: A reference document that provides information or instructions.
Regulation: A principle, rule or law prescribed by authority, designed to control, regulate or

govern conduct.
Guideline: A document of policy or procedure by which to determine a course of action.
Shop Drawings: A set of drawings produced by the Contractor, supplier, fabricator or

manufacturer for construction of the Work. Shop drawings detail the construction, installation or
erection of work items. Shop drawings must be compliant with and meet the intent of the
Consultant’s design drawings. The Consultant typically reviews shop drawings.
Specification: Describes an explicit set of requirements to be met by a material, product or

process.
Technical Standard: A document referenced in a Specification that establishes uniform

engineering or technical criteria, methods, processes and practices. An established norm or
requirement.
Bid Documents: A set of documents produced for the process of bidding. Note that the
contractual relationship between bidders and the Department is different than the contractual
relationship formed between the successful bidder and the Department. Bid documents are not
construction contract documents.
B.3 Construction Contract Documents
General Condition(s): Stipulates minimum performance requirements of the Contractor, and

describes the rights, responsibilities and relationships of parties to the Contract.
Special Provision(s): A clause or condition that modifies or qualifies a requirement of the

Specifications. Special Provision requirements supersede Specification requirements in the
hierarchy of construction contract documents.
As-Constructed Plans: A set of final drawings prepared by the Consultant and submitted to the
Department. As-Constructed Plans are revised original plans that include changes known to the
Consultant. These include dimensions, locations and quantities of the Work.
B.4 Department Requirements of the Consultant
The Department’s Engineering Consultant Guidelines for Highway, Bridge and Water Projects,
Volume 2 – Construction Contract Administration Manual:
 outlines the Department’s expectations for the provision of engineering services for the
administration of provincial highway, bridge and water management construction projects
where a Consultant is hired directly by the Department.
 outlines specific responsibilities and authorities of the Consultant when providing these
services.
 ensures uniformity and consistency in the provision of these services to the Department.
September 2015 B-2

The Department does not utilize Consultants for:
 tendering and award of construction contracts

 administration of holdback and contract security monies
 warranty inspections
B.5 Department Construction Documents
The list of construction documents below is comprehensive and consists of all written materials
needed to execute the Contract.
 Department Construction Contracts: These consist of a schedule of work items and

prices, Standard Specifications, Specification Amendments, Supplemental Specifications,
Special Provisions, typical drawings, Plans and permits.
 Contract Specifications and Standards: The Department Construction Contracts contain
reference to specific elements or editions of one or more of the following Contract
Specifications and Standards, which include:
o Standard Specifications for Highway Construction

o Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction
o General Specifications
o Specification Amendments and Supplemental Specifications for Highway and
Bridge Construction
o Civil Works Master Specification for Construction of Provincial Water
Management Projects
o Bridge Standard Drawings and Highway Standard Plates CB6 Standards
o Traffic Accommodation in Work Zones
 Construction Bulletins: These are issued by the Department if an ambiguity is identified in

the standard specification or manuals. The Bulletin will clarify the intent of the applicable
clause until the ambiguity is addressed in a new edition of the Department’s document.
B.5.1 Standard Documents
The Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction is revised regularly to incorporate changes
in construction materials and processes. These requirements have been developed through
consultation with industry, academia, expert practitioners and other transportation departments.
The text is written to be precise in meaning. The Standard Specifications for Bridge
Construction also references additional Department documents, approved products lists, CSA
and ASTM Standards, guidelines and other industry documents of practice.
The General Specifications, Specification Amendments, and Supplemental Specifications for

Highway and Bridge Construction documents are used in conjunction with the Standard
Specifications for Bridge Construction. The general specifications describe the contractual
relationship between the Department and the Contractor, and the role of the Consultant in
administering the Contract. The amendments serve the purpose of providing standardized
specifications for project-specific issues that do not occur for all projects. The supplemental
specifications are intended to address certain requirements that are not yet included in the
Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction.
September 2015 B-3

B.5.2 Project Specific Documents
The schedule of work items, Special Provisions and the Plans are unique to a particular
contract.
 Project-specific Construction Plans provide general layouts, site details, utility details,
dimensions, quantities and information required to complete the Work.
 Special Provisions provide project-specific or unique requirements and details that may
relate to technical, scope, schedule, quantity, environmental, safety or payment aspects of
the Work. Special Provisions may be used to modify or replace other specifications. They
also identify which amendments and supplemental specifications apply.
 Schedule of Work Items include a unit or lump sum price schedule, estimated quantities
and specification references.
B.6 Hierarchy of Documents and Drawings
The Contract between the Department and the Contractor includes all provisions of the following
documents:
1. Contract Forms
2. Tender Forms
3. Special Provisions
4. Specification Amendments
5. Supplemental Specifications
6. Plans and Permits
7. Addenda
8. Specification Amendments and Supplemental Specifications
9. Supplementary Specifications
10. Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction
11. Bridge Construction Drawings
B.7 Extra Work
Extra Work is described in the General Specifications and in the Construction Contract
Administration Manual. It includes work not specified or of a class not included in the Contract
but is necessary for the completion of the Work.
An ‘Order for Extra Work’ will be prepared by the Project Manager. This document must be
signed by the Contractor, reviewed by the Inspector and approved by the Department before
any Extra Work may begin.
Sometimes the exact scope of Extra Work is not possible to define. It is sometimes necessary to
approve the Extra Work in principle, then proceed with the Work and measure quantities at the
time the Work is performed. In this case, it is necessary to agree on the method of
measurement and payment before the Work starts.
B.7.1 Supplemental Work
Supplemental Work includes work that is outside the scope or intent of the Contract.
Supplemental Work may only be done with the Department`s consent. This may result in a
Contract Scope Change or Contract Extension.
September 2015 B-4

B.8 Claims, Negotiations, Disputes
A claim arises when the Contractor believes that he has been required to perform Work that is
beyond the scope of the Contract for which he has not been adequately compensated. A claim
may also arise when the Inspector refuses to pay for Work that he considers non-compliant. Any
disagreement of this nature is considered to be a claim.
Claims may be resolved at the Consultant–Contractor level. If the claim is not resolved, it is then
escalated to the Department–Contractor levels. If the claim is still not resolved, it becomes a
dispute.
A claim is a formal term as defined by the Public Works Act. In making a claim, the Contractor
must submit a Notice of Claim to the Department. If a dispute arises, the Contractor must submit
a Notice of Dispute as described in the Dispute Resolution Process for Government of Alberta
Construction Contracts. The terms “claim” and “dispute” must not be misused by the Inspector
in discussions and when preparing written correspondence. If the Contractor fails to provide
formal notice within the period specified, he forfeits his right under the Contract to proceed with
claim or dispute action.
 The Inspector must immediately notify the Project Manager of a discussed claim or claim
circumstance.
 The defence of the Department’s position in a claim situation depends greatly on the
accuracy, completeness and appropriateness of the Inspector’s records. The project journal
and site photographs are by far the most valuable sources of information used to defend a
claim.
 It is important that the Inspector give no assistance, advice or gratuitous information to the
Contractor to help formulate the basis of a claim. The Contractor must not have access to the
Inspector’s project journals or Departmental correspondence; however, information relating
to progress estimates and quality assurance testing may be provided.
 If errors discovered by either the Contractor or Inspector are found to exist in the content of
the Contract Documents, these errors must immediately be brought to the attention of the
Project Manager.
 When a claim arises, the Inspector must act in the Department’s best interests. The Inspector
must make genuine efforts to resolve the claim at the site level. The Inspector is not a
mediator between the Contractor and the Department; rather, the Inspector represents the
Department in all respects.
 The Inspector may not compensate the Contractor for a claimed amount by increasing the
quantity of an unrelated item that is measured and paid on the basis of a unit-rate. This may
seem to be a simple mechanism for deserved payment, but this action is fraudulent. All
claims must be justified, properly processed and be paid on the basis of their merit alone.
When claims are deemed payable, the supporting details must be well documented in the
project record.
B.9 Avoidance of Claims
The Inspector must, through planning and effective communication, try to anticipate where
disagreements may arise. The source of the potential disagreement must be discussed in an
effort to avert a claim.
September 2015 B-5

When the Inspector suspects that the Contractor does not understand the project requirements,
he must proactively discuss his concern with the Contractor. In this way, the Inspector can
prevent re-work and the potential for claims due to a misunderstanding. It is essential that the
Inspector be familiar with all aspects of the project requirements.
The Inspector must never require that the Contractor perform work that is not in the scope of the
Contract. Extra Work must always be approved in advance by the Project Manager and the
Department.
The Inspector must promptly measure and calculate all items for payment, and must not delay
payment to the Contractor for Work performed.
The Inspector’s instructions to the Contractor must always be supported by project requirements
and be documented.
The Inspector must never interfere with the Contractor’s progress and may only delay the Work
if it has been found to be non-compliant. The Inspector must be decisive and not delay the
Contractor when accepting or rejecting Work. However, when the Inspector has grounds to
suspect that the Work may be deficient, he must investigate in a timely fashion, even if this
results in delay to the Contractor.
B.10 Documentation Records and Forms
The task of keeping complete, current and accurate records is a key role of the Inspector. The
Construction Contract Administration Manual contains various forms that are to be completed by
the Inspector.
B.10.1 Project Journals
It is very important that the Inspector maintain a project journal containing a comprehensive
account of daily site activities and information. The journal is a legal document that will be
submitted to the Department with final project details and must be treated as such. Its content
consists of eyewitness observations that may be used to defend the Department against a claim
or dispute.
During a claim or dispute, the journal will be submitted for review by others. The content will not
be considered credible if the entries are inconsistent in their detail.
B.10.1.1 Instructions for Maintaining the Project Journal
 The journal should consist of a weather-resistant hard-cover book with printed page
numbers. The pages must not be removable. The journal must be safeguarded against loss
as it contains sensitive and valuable record. The journal must be regularly scanned and
stored within the project directory to protect against loss.
 It is best to develop a template for journal entries so that the Inspector develops a routine in
making his entries. A journal sample template is included at the end of this section. It is better
to strike through a forced entry heading in the journal instead of being silent on a matter,
since the former demonstrates that the matter had been considered and reported on.
 The Inspector’s name, address and phone number or email address must be clearly written
on the inside cover.
 Make all entries in indelible ink, not pencil. Do not erase, but instead cross out and rewrite if it
is necessary to change an entry. Never remove pages from the journal.
September 2015 B-6

 Use sketches if they clarify the entry.

 Write legibly, concisely and preferably in point format.
 Only record factual information. Do not include opinions or comments of a personal nature.
Do not enter libelous remarks.
 Always be specific regarding location, distances, stations, quantities, etc.
 Make entries each day and as events occur. It is very difficult to recall specific details or
conversations after time has passed.
 The journal is the source of information for all other Department progress forms. Do not use
information from forms to prepare journal entries.
 The Inspector must sign each daily entry in the event that relief Inspectors use his journal.
 If electronic tablets are used to complete journals, similar considerations must be given in
making the entries credible, unalterable and permanent.
B.10.1.2 Minimum Daily Information to be Recorded in the Project Journal
 Weather conditions for each day.

 Identification of the period of time that the Inspector was physically at the site.
 Description of work activities underway, equipment on site whether in use or not, size and
utilization of labour force.
 Equipment and manpower hours where hourly rate is the payment method.
 Record of any verbal instructions or agreements made with the Contractor, and identification
of subsequent written documentation.
 Record of any verbal disagreements, disputes or requests that the Contractor makes
regarding interpretation of Contract Documents.
 Information pertaining to the relocation of utilities and note of any delay to the Contractor.
 A record of visits and discussions held with the Project Sponsor and other government
officials, and any resulting instructions and decisions.
 All changes from original plans and/or design quantities and an explanation of the reasons.
Include record of discussions with Project Manager or designer. Details regarding errors in
Contract Documents.
 All irregularities on any item during the stages of construction.
 Explanation of incompleteness of field records.
 Details of accounts that were not directly observed by the Inspector.
 Identification of the supervision, QC personnel, foremen or other Contractor personnel on site
who were present during the activities.
 Explanations of non-conformance, including when and how they were remediated, with
reference to pertinent photographs.
 General progress of the Work and an account of any difficulties encountered by the
Contractor. Description of any problems or incidents that may affect the quality, schedule or
cost of the Work.
 Special notations or items pertaining to Extra Work or possible Extra Work. Details on the
validity of any claims or changed conditions.
 The Contractor’s claims, intention to claim, complaints, disputes, etc., including photographs
as applicable.
 Any significant or unexpected event that may affect the Contractor’s schedule or cost.
 All discussions or dealings with property owners and other public personnel.
 All discussions or dealings with officials of municipalities.
 All discussions or dealings with safety officers pertaining to safety matters, information
pertaining to work safety, tail gate meetings, etc., and subsequent action taken.
 Record of environmental issues and subsequent action taken.
September 2015 B-7

 All discussions or dealings with emergency personnel or police.

 Record of all accidents within the Contract limits, a record of conditions at the time of the
accident and relevant photographs, including description of all pertinent signing in place at
the time.
 Discussions with the Contractor regarding work schedules and quality of work.
 Status of traffic accommodation, detours, construction signs and flag persons.
 Full description of construction photos or videos taken, with reference made to journal entries
when possible.
 Signature and date.
B.10.2 Weekly Progress Report
The Inspector’s weekly progress report is submitted on a standardized form with entries that
must be completed daily. At the beginning of each week, the report is reviewed by the
Contractor and subsequently submitted to the Project Manager and the Project Sponsor by the
Inspector.
Daily entries must include a brief description of the activity for that day and the progress made
for those activities during that day.
Daily entries must include a summary of the Contractor’s hours worked for that day for each
activity, as they relate to Site Occupancy and Lane Rental.
All information contained in the report must be taken from the Inspector`s journal. The form
must not replace the journal.
The report must be signed by the Contractor’s superintendent, which confirms that he is in
agreement with the Site Occupancy and Lane Rental days charged.
B.10.3 Field Memo
The Field Memo is issued to the Contractor at the project site to document instructions given. It
should include a summary of the issue, instruction given, specification references, and the basis
of payment if applicable. The Field Memo should be hand delivered and also submitted
electronically. It must also be sent to the Project Manager and the Project Sponsor.
B.10.4 Monthly Progress Estimate
The Monthly Progress Estimate must be submitted promptly to the Project Sponsor on the 25th
of each month, identifying the appropriate pay quantity for each bid item.
For items paid by unit, the Inspector must measure and calculate the quantities of work items
that the Contractor has acceptably constructed during the past month.
The Inspector must enter the appropriate quantities and submit the estimate to the Project
Manager for processing.
Whenever Extra Work is progressed, an approved Extra Work Order must be submitted with the
progress estimate.
September 2015 B-8

B.10.5 Survey Book
The Bridge Inspector must maintain a survey record book. Entries must include complete notes
for:
 All level notes, kept in proper levelling note format. The notes and calculations must be
explicit and clear. The calculations must be reproducible from the notes. The entries must be
well explained and must include date and specific location of benchmarks.
 All measurements with sketches and calculations recorded to calculate quantities for
payment.
 All sketches used to check quantities during inspection.
 All sketches used to track locations of concrete batches during concrete pours.
 Survey books must be submitted with the project’s As-Constructed records.
B.11 Deficiencies
The Inspector must keep an accurate record of all deficiencies and review them with the
Contractor as they occur.
B.12 Final Acceptance
At the completion of the project, the Contractor is required to request an inspection for Final
Acceptance of the completed Work. Prior to this final inspection, the Bridge Inspector must
confirm that the Contractor has corrected all known deficiencies.
The inspection for Final Acceptance must include the Project Manager, the Inspector, the
Project Sponsor, any other Department personnel requested by the Project Sponsor and the
Contractor.
Additional deficiencies noted during a final inspection must be corrected by the Contractor prior
to a request for re-inspection. All deficiencies must be corrected before Final Acceptance is
given.
The Project Manager, after the Final Acceptance, will issue a Contract Completion Certificate
(CCC) to the Contractor indicating that the project has been satisfactorily completed in
accordance with the Contract requirements. The warranty period begins at Final Acceptance.
B.13 “As-Constructed” Documents
The Inspector will be issued one full-size set of Plans designated as the “As-Constructed” set.
This set of plans is only to be used for the purpose of recording the details of any changes to
the actual construction, as it is done. These plans must be protected, and they usually remain in
the site office. All information must first be recorded on a half-scale set of plans, which the
Inspector carries with him at all times. The As-Constructed information is then transferred to the
official full-size plans. All significant deviations from the plans must be noted, including, but not
limited to:
 Exact footing elevations and dimensions.

 Pile penetrations shown as an average, maximum and minimum for each element.
 Any additional piles required, or defective piles.
 Any revision to pier or abutment geometry.
 Any variation in the placing of the reinforcing steel or additional reinforcing used.
September 2015 B-9

 The actual dimensions of rock riprap or concrete slope protection.

 The elevation of the stream bed at each pier and at other critical locations, such as the toe of
riprap.
 Drain trough lengths and locations.
 Additional concrete, tremie seals and blinding courses, even if these are not paid items.
 All quantities on each applicable drawing.
 Measurement of the gap in deck joints, including gap measurements between plates after
installation, and the position of the expansion bearings, including the date and ambient air
temperature when measured.
 The elevation for the wingwall “Bench Mark Tablet”.
 Measurement of clearance boxes on railroad overpasses and grade separations.
 Exact location of the ends of ducts and conduit in approach fills.
 Misalignment of MSE walls.
As-Constructed drawings must be forwarded to the Project Manager together with the final
estimates, including the final quantity calculations and all pertinent field notes.
B.14 Final Reports
A Bridge Construction Completion Report, including appropriate BIM inspection report and BIS
coding sheet, will be required at the end of the project. The report is a standard form and
includes a list of deficiencies identified at the Final Acceptance inspection and confirmation that
the deficiencies have been corrected. The report is submitted at Final Acceptance, and it
signifies the beginning of the warranty period.
A Final Bridge Construction Report is also required. It provides a comprehensive summary of

construction events.
B.15 Sample Records and Forms
 Inspector’s Project Journal

 Inspector’s Meeting Record Journal
 Field Memo
September 2015 B-10

INSPECTOR’S PROJECT JOURNAL
September 2015
INSPECTOR’S MEETING RECORD JOURNAL
September 2015
FIELD MEMO
September 2015
ROLE OF THE INSPECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
C.1 General ......................................................................................................................... C-1

C.1.1 Responsibilities of the Inspector ....................................................................... C-1
C.1.2 Duties of the Inspector ..................................................................................... C-1
C.2 Authority of the Inspector ........................................................................................... C-2
C.2.1 Interpretation .................................................................................................... C-2
C.2.2 Defective and Unauthorized Work .................................................................... C-2
C.2.3 Temporary Suspension of Work ....................................................................... C-3
C.3 Relations with the Contractor ..................................................................................... C-3
C.4 Communication with the Contractor .......................................................................... C-4
C.4.1 Verbal Communications ................................................................................... C-4
C.4.2 Written Communications .................................................................................. C-5
C.5 Relations with the Public ............................................................................................. C-5
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section C, Role of the Inspector
C.1 General
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to supply materials for construction that comply with all
requirements of the Contract documents. It is the Inspector’s role to reasonably confirm and
document that the Contractor’s Work is compliant with the Contract.
The Contractor is responsible for his own construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences, procedures and adaptation of good construction practices. The Inspector is not
responsible for the Contractor’s acts and omissions, but it is the Inspector’s duty to take
appropriate action to bring the Contractor into compliance with the Contract.
The inspection is critical in nature but must be approached with a positive attitude since it
benefits the project as a whole and contributes to the Contractor’s successful completion of the
project.
The Inspector must apply his own good judgment in making determinations as to whether
project requirements have been met.
C.1.1 Responsibilities of the Inspector
 It is the responsibility of the Inspector to review and understand the full content of the
standard documents, their purpose and their intent. The Inspector must continuously review
the Department’s library of documents to be aware of changes and updates.
 It is the responsibility of the Inspector to review the full content of the project-specific
documents. The Inspector must discuss any discrepancies, conflicts and omissions with the
Project Manager as they are identified.
 Prior to the commencement of construction, the Inspector must review project details with the
Contractor and become familiar with the Contractor’s proposed work methods and
procedures. Any anticipated inability to meet the project requirements must be discussed well
in advance of the activity.
 The Inspector must calculate or confirm the accuracy of quantities prior to processing
payment.
 The Inspector must review all project submittals that pertain to the Work.
 The Inspector must suspend Work under certain conditions.
 The Inspector must effectively and professionally communicate with the Contractor.
 The Inspector must diligently document and photograph the Contractor’s Work.
C.1.2 Duties of the Inspector
The Inspector must be present at the work site during all major phases of construction that
require measurement, review or documentation.
 The Inspector must protect and safeguard the environment by understanding the relevant
project requirements.
 The Inspector must review the effect that the Contractor’s operations have on the travelling
public and require that corrective action be taken if these are hazardous or will cause undue
inconvenience.
 The Inspector needs to be able to anticipate issues through familiarity with project details and
documents.
September 2015 C-1

C.2 Authority of the Inspector
The Inspector is the Department’s representative at the project site. The Inspector therefore
assumes many of the Consultant’s responsibilities described in the General Specifications.
C.2.1 Interpretation
The General Specifications describe the Authority of the Consultant, which includes the right to
provide the initial interpretation of the Contract documents and the authority to be the initial
judge for the acceptability of the Work.
 The Inspector and the Project Manager may not relax or waive the Contract requirements.
The Inspector must use his own judgment and, when necessary, seek the advice of the
Project Manager for interpretation.
 Final Acceptance of the Work may only be given by the Department at the time of final
construction completion. The Inspector is the judge of initial acceptability and compliance;
however, he is not authorized to give Final Acceptance of the Work.
 The Inspector must NOT complete or sign documents produced by the Contractor that
indicate that the work has been certified, accepted, approved, witnessed or “signed-off” by
the Department. Initial acceptability of a completed activity for the purpose of continuing
work, or acceptability of preparations for an upcoming activity are often requested by the
Contractor. The Contractor may request initial acceptance from the Inspector for driven pile
capacities before piles are cut to elevation, and the Contractor may request that initial
acceptance of formwork and reinforcing steel be given prior to concrete placement. It is not
necessary for the Inspector to provide written documentation for initial acceptability; however,
it is the duty of the Inspector to bring any items of non-compliant work to the Contractor’s
attention.
 It is beneficial for the Inspector and the Contractor to discuss and agree to inspection
schedules. It is not the Inspector’s duty to act as the Contractor’s superintendent, field
engineer or Quality Control. An efficient and knowledgeable Inspector will schedule the
inspections to be timely and efficient. The Inspector may advise the Contractor that, in his
judgment, the Work thus far is deemed initially acceptable and may continue. The Inspector
must promptly notify the Contractor of non-compliant work so that the Contractor may
immediately rectify the deficiency prior to proceeding.
 The Inspector must report the lack of adequate Quality Control or supervision by the
Contractor to the Project Manager. The Inspector must not allow the Contractor to become
dependent on his services where his effort is lacking for work which the Contractor is
responsible for.
 The Contract documents are precise in their meaning, and it is important that the documents
are interpreted consistently with their intent. The Inspector must rely on his knowledge and
judgment when interpreting the Contract documents. The Project Manager must consult with
the Department to obtain further clarification and opinion if necessary and subsequently
advise the Inspector.
C.2.2 Defective and Unauthorized Work
The General Specifications describe Defective Work. The Inspector has the authority and duty
to reject Work that, in his judgment, does not conform to the requirements of the Contract
documents. The Inspector does not have a contractual relationship with the Contractor and has
no duty to the Contractor to identify deficiencies or defects in the Work.
September 2015 C-2

The General Specifications describe Unauthorized Work. The Inspector must identify Work
done or material supplied that is beyond what is required by the Contract documents but is
unauthorized by the Department or Consultant. Unauthorized Work must not be included in
monthly payment quantities.
C.2.3 Temporary Suspension of Work
The General Specifications describe Temporary Suspension of Work. The Inspector has the
authority to suspend the Work, in whole or in part, for such a period as he deems necessary due
to conditions that he considers unfavourable for the execution of the Work, or due to the failure
of the Contractor to comply with any provision of the Contract documents.
The Suspension of Work is an action that negatively affects the Contractor, often significantly.
The Contractor may suffer a loss in productivity, schedule and reputation. The Contractor may
strongly oppose the suspension and elect to submit a claim for compensation for standby if he
believes that the suspension was not the result of his performance. The Inspector must be
certain that the suspension is necessary for compliance to the requirements, and that the
Contractor has previously been advised of the exact cause of the suspension.
The Inspector must make reasonable efforts to rectify a situation before suspending Work. Clear
and ongoing communication is essential to prevent a situation that results in a suspension. The
Inspector’s communication with the Contractor must be well documented. The Inspector must
be sure that no miscommunication or misunderstanding has resulted in the escalation of an
issue that inappropriately leads to a suspension.
The Inspector must prepare and serve the Contractor with a written notice of temporary
suspension that includes details and conditions of the suspension.
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to remove, replace or otherwise correct deficient Work, and
he must be given the opportunity to efficiently do so. If the Contractor refuses to acknowledge
the Inspector’s instruction to correct deficient Work but instead chooses to build upon it, then a
temporary suspension may be appropriate.
The Project Manager must be consulted before the Inspector suspends Work, except in
situations where immediate action needs to be taken. The following are instances where the
Inspector may need to suspend work immediately without first consulting with the Project
Manager:
 Inadequate or non-compliant traffic accommodation measures that pose an immediate

danger to workers or the public.
 Work that is deficient and will immediately and permanently be covered, obstructed or
otherwise be inaccessible.
 Work that does not comply with the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations and
poses an immediate danger to workers or the public.
C.3 Relations with the Contractor
The Contractor/Inspector relationship has the common objective of ensuring that the Work fully
meets the requirements of the Contract.
September 2015 C-3

The Inspector must maintain a productive, cooperative, and professional relationship with the
Contractor at all times. An appropriate relationship exists when the Inspector:
 maintains the best interests of the Department while providing the Contractor with the
opportunity to control the means, methods and procedures that are efficient and cost
effective.
 maintains ongoing and open discussions with the Contractor for the purpose of scheduling
activities and inspections, clarifying the intent of the specifications, identifying potential issues
and preventative measures, reviewing quantities and responding to requests for information.
 is fair and impartial in his actions and makes reasonable decisions that are based on fact and
not on speculation.
 performs inspections promptly and efficiently.
 is decisive and consistent in his instructions and actions throughout the project.
 does not hinder or delay the Contractor and is diligent in identifying non-compliant Work.
 does not impose requirements onto the Contractor that are not supported by the Contract.
 makes attempts to resolve disputes at the site level but, when necessary, escalates these
promptly to the Project Manager.
 does not accept gratuities, favours or other personal benefits from the Contractor that may be
intended to influence his judgment.
 maintains appropriate lines of communication for project discussions and, when warranted,
recognizes and commends good workmanship.
 is cordial but firm in his discussions, does not show anger or resentment, does not use
offensive or inappropriate language, does not make comments of a personal nature.
 is confident in his decisions and discussions and is unintimidated yet respectful when
challenged.
 does not slander or criticize the Contractor’s staff or organization, their work, methods, or
failures, and is not vengeful.
C.4 Communication with the Contractor
Effective communication with the Contractor is extremely important. At the pre-construction

meeting, the lines of communication between the Contractor and the Inspector need to be
clearly established. The Inspector must strictly follow the communication protocols and must
encourage the Contractor to maintain them as well. Generally, the Inspector will establish the
lines of communication with the Contractor’s site superintendent, the foremen and the Quality
Control personnel. The Contractor’s relief or alternate personnel must be identified.
C.4.1 Verbal Communications
 The Inspector must initiate discussions when beneficial. The Inspector must be thorough in
his discussions yet not verbose. Discussing an upcoming task and identifying potential
challenges is far more productive than discussing solutions to non-compliant Work.
 The Inspector must not provide direction to the Contractor, or instruct the Contractor with
regard to means, methods, techniques, procedures or sequences.
 The Inspector must discuss the upcoming activities with the superintendent on a daily basis.
The Inspector must have a clear understanding of what activities the Contractor is
scheduling.
 The Inspector needs to coordinate inspection schedules with the superintendent or Quality
Control personnel. Advance planning will avoid delays to the Contractor’s schedule since the
Inspector will be reviewing the Work at the appropriate time.
September 2015 C-4

 The Inspector must not directly criticize the Contractor’s actions, but instead identify
circumstances that have the potential to result in non-compliant work.
 The Inspector must not provide any instructions to or reject the work of subcontractors
without first providing this information to the Contractor.
C.4.2 Written Communications
Written instructions must be factual, brief and respectful in tone. Instructions must not contain
opinions but must instead be based upon observations, measurements and the requirements of
the Contract.
Instructions that are deemed significant and requiring immediate action must be written. Before
issuing written instructions, the Inspector must be confident that his determination is consistent
with the Contract. The Project Manager must be notified of all written instructions.
An Order for Extra Work, Accident-Motor Vehicle Traffic Collisions in Work Zones, Accident
Notification and Utility Accident Report must always be made in writing using Department
standard forms.
C.5 Relations with the Public
The Inspector’s relationship with the public must be cordial and discreet, and should not discuss
costs or Contractor’s performance or progress. The Inspector is the sole representative of the
Department at the project location and may be subject to public scrutiny, which should be
referred to the Project Manager or Department for appropriate action, if required.
September 2015 C-5

SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
D.1 General ......................................................................................................................... D-1

D.1.1 Prime Contractor Designation .......................................................................... D-1
D.2 Contractor’s Health and Safety Program ................................................................... D-1
D.2.1 Worksite Hazards and Responsibilities of the Inspector ................................... D-2
D.2.2 Safety Meetings ............................................................................................... D-2
D.2.3 Temporary Structures....................................................................................... D-3
D.2.4 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) .............................................................. D-3
D.3 OHS and Inspector’s Role ........................................................................................... D-3
D.4 Department’s Role ....................................................................................................... D-3
D.4.1 Reporting ......................................................................................................... D-4
D.4.1.1 Standard Department Forms ........................................................................ D-4
D.5 Specialized Training .................................................................................................... D-4

D.6 Utility Safety and Accident Reporting ........................................................................ D-5
D.7 Traffic Accommodation ............................................................................................... D-5
D.8 Sample – Contractor’s Field Level Risk Assessment................................................ D-5
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section D, Safety
D.1 General
Safety incidents have occurred at bridge construction sites, including injury and death to
construction personnel and to the travelling public. Safety procedures, policies, training and
equipment are needed for every project to prevent incidents at the construction site.
In Alberta, construction safety is administered by the Occupational Health and Safety Act,
Regulation and Code (OHS). These documents are published by the Province and must be
accessible to the Inspector at the project site. They identify the minimum requirements for health
and safety at the workplace.
 The Act identifies obligations of employers and workers, defines the Prime contractor, and
identifies safety processes, obligations and rights.
 The Regulation identifies requirements and penalties for infractions to both corporations and
individuals.
 The Code provides specific safe-work requirements by activity.
Work Safe Alberta is an initiative to reduce work-related injuries, illnesses and fatalities. This
program provides safety awareness through education, development of industry resources, public
awareness and statistics.
D.1.1 Prime Contractor Designation
A Prime contractor is required when two or more employers are working at the site. The Prime
contractor is generally the party that contracts directly with the Department (the Contractor). The
Prime contractor is responsible for coordinating the health and safety program for all other
subcontractors and all other agencies, organizations and visitors that require access to the site.
This includes the Consultant and the Department.
The obligation of the Prime contractor is to establish and to implement reasonably practicable
measures that comply with OHS legislation.
The Prime contractor must maintain a physical presence at the site at all times when Work is
occurring and, for certain situations, formally delegating his responsibilities to other site personnel
under his employ.
D.2 Contractor’s Health and Safety Program
Certificates of Recognition (COR) are awarded through the Partnerships in Injury Reduction
program. They are provided to Contractors in recognition of the development of a health and
safety program that meets OHS requirements. A valid COR is required for all Contractors working
on Department bridge projects.
The General Specifications require that the Contractor identifies all work site hazards and keeps
a copy of the safety policies, procedures and plans available at the site at all times. The
Contractor’s safety manual must contain these documents and also include the following:
 Safety Policy and Objectives

 Job Hazard Analysis: assigns safety priorities based on an evaluation of severity and
probability.
 Safe Work Practices: general guidelines describing how to perform a task safely.
 Safe Job Procedures: step-by-step process describing how to complete a task.
September 2015 D-1

 Project Hazard Assessment: used to identify all project hazards at the onset of the project.
 Field Level Risk Assessment / Job Hazard Assessment: used to identify changing hazards, or
hazards for new activities.
 Site Evacuation Procedures and Muster Points
 Personal Protective Equipment
 Specialized Training Requirements
 First Aid Record
 Emergency Response
 Health and Safety Evaluation
 Company Rules
 Fire Protection
 Maintenance of Equipment Requirements
D.2.1 Worksite Hazards and Responsibilities of the Inspector
The Prime contractor communicates his means for hazard assessment and control to the
Inspector through his Project Hazard Assessments, Field Level Risk Assessment/Job Hazard
Assessments, Worksite Inspection Reports and meetings. The Prime contractor’s subcontractors
may have their own unique procedures that the Prime contractor will adopt as his own.
The Inspector must follow all requirements of the Prime contractor’s safety program in addition to
his firm’s own safety program. In the event that there exists conflicting or omitted conditions
between these safety programs, the most stringent will apply.
In some instances where personnel at the site are working as sub-consultants to the Consultant
and under the Inspector’s direction, the Inspector must provide all necessary safety information,
and confirm that the necessary orientation has been completed.
The Inspector must be aware of the typical hazards that exist at bridge construction sites
including:
 Traffic on active roadways

 Mobile equipment
 Fall hazard from ladders, aerial lifts and falsework
 Impaling hazard from projecting reinforcing steel
 Trench or excavation cave-in
 Restricted and confined spaces
 Inadequate hoarding ventilation
 Drowning
 Inhalation of concrete or cement dust
 Contact with concrete and harmful substances
 Eye damage caused by welding arc, dust or flying debris
 Hearing damage caused by work near heavy or pile driving equipment
 Trips on uneven surfaces or reinforcing steel
D.2.2 Safety Meetings
At the commencement of the project, the Project Manager must conduct a preconstruction
meeting. In addition to the technical items, the meeting agenda must include the Contractor’s
health and safety plan, Traffic Accommodation Strategy (TAS) status, emergency contacts, work
site inspection reports and requirements for standard Department forms.
September 2015 D-2

The Contractor must require that all workers, subcontractors and others who enter the site,
including the Inspector, are aware of general safety requirements. This is done through the
Contractor’s mandatory site orientation, which is conducted at the start of the project and is
generally repeated annually for multi-year projects. The orientation is administered by the
Contractor’s superintendent or safety officer who is the safety representative for the Contractor.
Any safety-related concerns must be raised by the Inspector to the Contractor’s superintendent.
The safety requirements for specific activities are discussed by the superintendent at daily
“toolbox” or “tailgate” meetings. These meetings are informal and are conducted at the site.
D.2.3 Temporary Structures
The Inspector must frequently use temporary structures for construction access. These may
include stair towers, ladders and scaffolds. The Contractor is required to engineer certain
structures as required by OHS. The superintendent must verify that such structures are
adequately constructed and inspected and must retain all drawings at the site.
D.2.4 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
The minimum PPE generally required for the Inspector includes a hard hat, high visibility vest,
safety glasses and steel-toed boots. The specific characteristics for these items is regulated by
CSA Standards. Additional PPE may be required for certain activities, such as hearing protection
for pile driving and bolt torqueing procedures.
D.3 OHS and Inspector’s Role
Regulators may conduct work site inspections that result in orders being issued to the Contractor.
The Contractor must immediately submit these to the Inspector, who must then immediately
submit them to the Department.
The Inspector may suspend work if:
 A situation of recognized imminent danger exists to workers or the public.

 The Contractor fails to comply with safety orders.
 The Contractor fails to rectify previously identified worksite hazards.
It is important that the Inspector takes action when a safety violation occurs. Indifference to an
unsafe condition may contribute to an incident, and the Inspector may incur liability as a result.
D.4 Department’s Role
The Department’s Regional staff includes a Safety Officer. The Safety Officer may visit the site to
confirm that the Contractor and Consultant are following Department safety requirements. The
Safety Officer is a resource to the Inspector. When requesting information from the Safety Officer,
it is important that the Department’s Project Sponsor also be advised of any changes to safety
procedures or any instructions given to the Contractor.
September 2015 D-3

D.4.1 Reporting
D.4.1.1 Standard Department Forms
 At Project Commencement: The Project Manager will complete the Safety TAS OH&S
Review form, which identifies Prime contractor status, minimum PPE requirements, the
Inspector’s authority in circumstances of imminent danger, accident reporting, TAS details and
site-specific safety considerations. The Project Manager will also complete the Traffic
Accommodation Strategy Component Checklist form, which confirms that the minimum traffic
accommodation requirements have been met. The Inspector must understand the content of
these documents.
 During Project Activity: The Monthly Health and Safety Summary is completed by the
Contractor each month. It is signed by the Inspector and is submitted to the Department with
the progress estimate. The form identifies the number of workers hired during the period and
confirms that they have participated in a formal site safety orientation. It also identifies incidents
and corrective actions taken.
The Project Completion Health and Safety Review is completed and signed by the Contractor at
project completion. It is reviewed for completeness and accuracy and is then signed by the
Inspector and submitted to the Department. The form identifies that the Contractor has performed
his OHS-related obligations. The Inspector must review the content of the form on a monthly basis
at the time that the Monthly Health and Safety Summary is prepared. Assessment of the
Contractor’s compliance is an ongoing activity, and the Inspector must not wait to evaluate
performance only at project completion.
The Notification of Highway and Bridge Construction Operations is completed by the Project
Manager and is distributed to the Department’s Project Sponsor and Safety Officer.
Traffic incident reporting must be done as soon as practicable and submitted to the Department.
The form Report of Motor Vehicle Collisions Occurring in Work Zones provides a summary of the
collision details and identifies how the Contractor’s operations have contributed to the event. If
the Contractor or his subcontractors were involved in the incident, then an Accident Notification –
Incident Report Involving Third Party or Contractor’s Equipment must also be completed by the
Inspector and submitted to the Department.
The Inspector must immediately notify the Contractor of any health and safety violations. Any
orders issued to the Contractor by OHS must be immediately distributed by the Inspector to the
Department’s Project Sponsor and Safety Officer. Also, any written correspondence by the
Inspector to the Contractor related to safety must be immediately distributed to the Department’s
Project Sponsor and Safety Officer.
D.5 Specialized Training
OHS requires that specialized training be completed before certain activities are performed. The
Inspector must be aware that:
 Fall protection training is required when working above a certain height, or when impaling
hazards exist. Fall protection can be achieved by means of fall arrest devices, setbacks or
railings.
 Restricted or Confined space training is required when working in restricted or confined
spaces. These may include excavations, culverts, hoardings and inside trapezoidal girders.
 Aerial lift training is required to operate aerial work platforms/lifts.
September 2015 D-4

D.6 Utility Safety and Accident Reporting
Utility locations may or may not be identified, and if identified they may not be accurately located
on the Plans. Locations of utilities must always be done by the Contractor before carrying out any
sub-surface work. If a utility accident occurs, the Inspector must promptly complete the form Utility
Accident Report and submit to the Department.
The Contractor is responsible for safeguarding all existing and relocated utility installations.
D.7 Traffic Accommodation
Whenever construction activities are performed on or adjacent to a public highway, the Contractor
must take appropriate precautions to safely accommodate the travelling public.
The Department’s manual entitled Traffic Accommodation in Work Zones provides guidelines for
accommodating traffic in a consistent, safe and effective manner. This document identifies the
primary roles and responsibilities of each of the three parties (the Department, the Consultant and
the Contractor) regarding public safety, outlines general considerations for developing an effective
traffic accommodation strategy, and provides guidelines for the use of various Traffic Control
Devices. Included are typical drawings identifying the minimum temporary signing requirements
for Work Zones.
Traffic accommodation requirements are identified in the Special Provisions. These requirements
must be implemented by the Contractor, in addition to the information contained in the Traffic
Accommodation in Work Zones manual, to develop the site-specific Traffic Accommodation
Strategy (TAS). The Inspector must confirm that the TAS has been accepted by the Project
Manager and the Regional Safety Officer prior to any site work.
The Inspector is responsible for monitoring the traffic accommodation measures used by the
Contractor and for confirming that these measures comply with the Contract to safely and
effectively accommodate vehicular and pedestrian traffic through and around the work zone.
Changes may be required after the effectiveness of the measures have been determined. If any
apparent danger to the public is identified, the measures must immediately be modified by the
Contractor.
The Contractor must have available a designate who is responsible for inspecting the traffic
accommodation measures for conformity to requirements and for making changes as necessary.
D.8 Sample – Contractor’s Field Level Risk Assessment
September 2015 D-5

EXCAVATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Classification .................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Equipment ........................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Environmental Considerations ................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Safety Considerations ................................................................................................. 1-3
1.4 Competency of Soil Materials ..................................................................................... 1-3
1.5 Foundation Improvements .......................................................................................... 1-4
1.5.1 Temporary Slope Stability ................................................................................ 1-5
1.6 Water Management ...................................................................................................... 1-5
1.7 Material Disposal ......................................................................................................... 1-6
1.8 Hauling of Waste Material ........................................................................................... 1-6
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 1, Excavation
1.1 General
Excavation is necessary to construct foundations, substructures, retaining walls, culverts and

other works at the elevations shown on the Plans. Further requirements for excavation are
described in Sections 3, 9, 10, 18, 25 and 26 of this Manual. Excavation of all types of existing
materials is required, including vegetation, soil, boulders, bedrock, refuse, rubble, wood,
abandoned structures or utilities, ice and water.
1.1.1 Classification
Excavation is generally described to be either ‘Structural’ or ‘Channel’.
 Structural Excavation is required to construct bridge substructure foundations and culverts.

The limits of this type of excavation are defined by the Plans. Often, this excavation is paid
as a lump sum.
Structural excavation can include the removal of embankment material for abutment
construction. Often, fills are built in advance of the bridge to enable the soils to consolidate. The
process of consolidation and subsequent settlement may take months or years. Since the
bridge fill material is engineered and consists of non-granular material, unexpected conditions
are not typically encountered.
The construction of piers, whether for grade separations or watercourse crossings, often
requires that cofferdams, berms or other retaining structures be used to separate water and soil
from the base of the excavation.
 Channel Excavation is usually carried out within a watercourse channel and includes the
construction of a new channel and improvements to the alignment of the existing channel.
Channel excavation is also required to properly key-in rock riprap aprons and bank
protection. Grubbing and stripping are often necessary to remove vegetation. Material types
may consist of granular and silty channel alluvium and embankment clay. The limits of
excavation are sometimes adjusted to suit actual field conditions. Dewatering is often
required, and excavated materials may be saturated. Environmental permits limit the period
in which channel excavation may occur.
1.1.2 Equipment
Excavation is normally done using tracked hydraulic excavators of varying size, which load the
excavation spoil into haul trucks. The excavator’s function can be modified by tools attached to
its boomstick:
 Ripper: This attachment can dislodge pieces of rock and break or separate softer rock into
manageable pieces. Rippers may have one or multiple ripper teeth.
 Breaker: This attachment consists of a percussion hammer and is used for demolition of
concrete, boulders and weathered bedrock.
 Digging Bucket: Buckets of varying size exist, but these are fitted with bucket teeth and are
used for large-scale excavation of common materials and for dense materials like clay and
rock.
 Grading Bucket: These buckets are also called ‘finishing’ or ‘clean-up’ or ‘ditching’ buckets.
They are generally larger than digging buckets and have no teeth, but instead have a cutting
edge. They are used for excavating gravels and sands, and for neatly trimming the base of
excavations.
September 2015 1-1

 Tilting Bucket: This attachment permits a grading bucket to also tilt. This is advantageous
when trimming slopes.
 Bucket with Thumb: This attachment is useful when dealing with broken rock from an
excavation and can be used with both a digging and grading bucket. It is also used to
accurately place heavy rock riprap into a watercourse.
The installation of sheet-piled cofferdams requires specialized equipment, such as a crane and
vibratory driving hammer.
1.2 Environmental Considerations
Permitting and approvals may exist from various agencies, including Fisheries and Oceans
Canada (DFO), Transport Canada and Alberta Environment and Sustainable Resource
Development (SRD). The permits and approvals are contained in the Special Provisions.
1. DFO administers the Fisheries Act and is responsible for protecting fish habitat. This
agency issues formal Authorizations.
2. Transport Canada is responsible for maintaining navigable waterways.
3. SRD is responsible for environmental protection. Permits make references to Codes of
Practice that must be followed and place restrictions on the time when in-stream work
may be done. This period is called the Restricted Activity Period (RAP). During the RAP,
the Contractor may not disturb the natural watercourse or the diverted watercourse. Fish
spawn may exist on the bed substrate, and this spawn may be damaged if disturbed.
The Contractor is responsible to prepare an Environmental Construction Operation (ECO) Plan

consistent with the Department’s document entitled Environmental Construction Operations
(ECO) Plan Framework. This Plan must be completed and accepted by the Consultant prior to
the commencement of construction. This document needs to address:
1. Environmental sensitivities
2. Schedule and drawings
3. Potential impacts and controls
4. Waste management and hazardous materials
5. Emergency response
Silt curtains and booms are often used to isolate turbid water and prevent pluming downstream.
These details will be described in the Contractor’s ECO Plan.
When excavating within or adjacent to a watercourse, turbidity monitoring may be necessary.

The Contractor’s Environmental Specialist must collect turbidity baseline measurements and
then compare those to measurements taken downstream of the bridge site. Turbidity monitoring
is important during the Contractor’s de-watering operations. If water removed from an
excavation is too turbid, the Contractor must treat this water by settlement, filtration or other
means before reintroducing it into the watercourse. He must obtain prior approval for his
methods of pumping and treating or otherwise dewatering from the excavations. Natural
drainage of surface water must be maintained.
Certain special limitations exist when excavating within and near wetlands. These conditions will
be described in the Special Provisions.
Berms that exist within an active channel may cause local scour holes. As material scours from
the channel bed, it is transported and deposited downstream of the construction site. The
September 2015 1-2

Contractor and the Project Manager must immediately be advised if scour holes or deposition of
bed materials is observed. Corrective measures may need to be made to the Contractor’s berm.
The recovery of materials deposited downstream may be necessary, and this is generally
difficult due to access limitations.
When excavating a watercourse diversion, fish capture and salvage may be necessary. The
Inspector must understand all requirements specified in the Special Provisions and
Supplemental Specification, including the responsibilities of the Contractor’s Qualified Aquatic
Environmental Specialist, the requirement for a Fish Research License and the requirements of
the ECO Plan.
If the Contractor’s activities contravene the requirements of the environmental permits, the
Inspector must instruct the Contractor to cease operations and advise the Project Manager.
1.3 Safety Considerations
Excavation faces may slump, cave-in or otherwise fail. The failure can occur rapidly and without
prior warning. It is very important that excavated faces be constructed at the specified slope
angle and benched where specified. Surface water must not be allowed to flow into the
excavation from above or otherwise saturate the excavation faces. If any sloughing, tension
cracks or other indications of instability exist, the trench must be abandoned until the Contractor
can obtain geotechnical recommendations. Requirements for sloped excavation are provided in
the Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) documents.
Slope stability structures are to be designed by the Contractor’s engineer and inspected by the
Contractor as they are constructed. These structures must be monitored for any movement and
leakage.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and protect all utilities within the work area.
1.4 Competency of Soil Materials
The Plans often include soil logs, and the Special Provisions may provide direction regarding
the excavation and stabilization of soils.
The presence of water and certain soil types affects the stability of an excavation. A high
groundwater table or the presence of granular layers may increase the rate and volume of water
entering the excavation. The ingress of water may de-stabilize the excavation slopes. Standing
water may soften clay soil at the base of the excavation, lowering the bearing strength. The
presence of standing water may also saturate fine grained soils composed of silts and clays,
resulting in heaving if these saturated soils are exposed to frost. Clays with high plasticity may
tend to swell and shrink with changes in moisture content.
Fine sand, silts and weak clays are easily disturbed during construction. They are sensitive to
flows of groundwater when excavations are carried below the water table and are subject to
erosion, frost heave and piping.
Some materials, including clay shale, are competent at the time of excavation but can weaken
rapidly when exposed to the elements. The slope of a stable excavation may become shallower
over time as the face of the excavation for these materials weathers.
September 2015 1-3

When excavating into engineered fill, the excavated material is generally consistent in type and
density. However when excavating into in-situ or non-engineered fill, the nature of the material
is often unknown and variable, and the quality of the soil at the base of the excavation may be
inadequate. An unsuitable base may consist of soft or saturated soils, lenses or seams of
differing materials, or organic materials. When the base of the excavation appears unsuitable,
the Project Manager must be consulted.
The competency of the base of an excavation depends on its bearing strength and consistency
of the soil type. The acceptable quality of the base of an excavation depends upon the structural
requirements of the bridge element. Often, an on-site geotechnical review is required. The
Inspector must discuss the excavation schedule with the Project Manager and determine if a
geotechnical review is needed. The review must be planned in advance since the geotechnical
reviewer must be present immediately after excavation has been completed. The Inspector
must also discuss with the Project Manager the need for test pits, test drilling, over-excavation
or similar means to confirm that the minimum foundation requirements have been met.
The Inspector must understand any specific requirements for the bearing strength or
competency of the excavation base in advance of the work. A firm foundation generally does not
have seams of weaker dissimilar material, nor does it consist of loose and disturbed material,
and it does not have standing water on the surface. An estimate of the density of the excavation
base can be made using a field soil penetrometer.
For piled structures, poor soil quality at the base of the excavation will not cause the concrete
element to settle; however, this may result in other problems. A soft excavation base may
prevent the construction of a neat base for the concrete element. Where a soft base is
encountered, a mud slab or a work slab is normally cast.
For bearing structures such as MSE walls and structures supported by spread footings, a poor
quality of soil at the base of the excavation may cause increased settlement of the element.
For culverts, a poor quality bed may cause the culvert to sag more than expected at its
midspan, resulting in a final camber that does not meet the geometric requirements.
1.5 Foundation Improvements
Variability of soil types, or saturated, soft and yielding soils at the base of the excavation will
often require improvement. A geotechnical review is required to recommend measures for
foundation improvement. The Inspector must discuss this need with the Project Manager in
advance. Improvement measures may consider the following:
 When excavating soil that softens in the presence of water, placement of concrete may be
required to immediately follow excavation.
 All loose material must be removed before erecting forms or placing reinforcing steel.
 Where a shallow layer of weak material exists, it may be practical to over-excavate the bed
materials and replace them with a compacted granular material or concrete.
 Where excavations for foundation elements and culverts must be de-watered, drainage
trenches, well points and sumps must be constructed beyond the work area. The excavation
area must be sufficiently large enough to accommodate de-watering devices without over-
steepening the cut slopes.
September 2015 1-4

1.5.1 Temporary Slope Stability
Depending on the soil type and depth of excavation, temporary slope stability may be required.
Slope stability is required when there is an insufficient work area to construct sufficiently shallow
cut slopes to prevent their failure. Slope stability measures are temporary construction
measures and are therefore not designed by the Consultant; instead, they are designed by the
Contractor’s engineer.
 Shoring is commonly used to stabilize slope faces and trenches. Shoring systems prevent
failure of the cut slopes. They protect the structure and workers from collapse and sloughing
of the cut slopes. Shoring should not be confused with shielding, which is the protection of
workers from a collapse.
 “Shotcrete” is a method of shoring that may prevent the surface of an excavation from
eroding.
 Soil nailing is a technique that may be used in conjunction with pile-and-timber shoring.
Slopes are reinforced by the insertion of relatively slender steel reinforcing rods. The bars
are usually installed into a pre-drilled hole and then grouted into place. The rods may then
be tensioned to the face of the slope or wall.
 Shoring may also be used to stabilize tall formwork. Raking shores consist of angled
members that are supported by the adjacent ground. They are usually fastened to a
deadman weight or to driven stakes.
1.6 Water Management
Keeping water from flowing into an excavation is challenging and requires careful planning and
engineering by the Contractor. Surface water and groundwater must both be managed.
Generally, two types of water-management structures are used to prevent the ingress of water:
 Cofferdams: These are walled enclosures that are constructed at the perimeter of the
excavation. Their purpose is to act as barriers for water that may seep through the cut faces
of the excavation. Their secondary purpose is to steepen the excavation face where the
work area is not sufficiently large enough to cut a stable excavation face. Cofferdams are
often built by driving interlocking sheet piling into the ground to form an enclosed area. The
soil within the enclosed area can then be excavated. Sheet piling can be driven through
shale, sandstone or clay soils.
Water may seep into the excavation through the base of a cofferdam. This seepage from the
base may be prevented by driving the sheets deeper or by placing a concrete mudslab, which
provides a seal between the bed and the sheet piling. The mudslab concrete may need to be
placed into water, in which case it must be placed by the tremie method, as described in Section
4 of this Manual. Mudslab construction must normally incorporate a sump from which any
surface runoff or cofferdam leakage may be removed.
Cofferdams must be designed by the Contractor’s engineer. The Contractor must continuously
check the cofferdam and note lateral movements or increased leakage through the seams.
Other types of cofferdams may consist of corrugated pipe or water-filled bladders.
 Dikes and Berms: These terms are often used interchangeably in the context of bridge
excavation. A dike is constructed by excavating a ditch and placing the spoil material into a
mound to direct water flow. A berm is a raised earthen embankment built for the purpose of
isolating an excavation. ‘Berm’ is the more commonly used term for bridge excavation.
September 2015 1-5

Berm construction requires special planning and design by the Contractor’s engineer. Berms
that constrict the watercourse will cause the local velocity to increase. Often, rock riprap will be
prescribed to reduce the likelihood of scour, both at the berm and also the opposing bank.
Surveys are done to determine the bathymetry of the watercourse, which is needed to
determine the necessary depth and plan area of the berms.
Berms placed into the active watercourse channel need to follow a specific sequence and
method of construction to comply with environmental approvals. Rock riprap and clay are
generally placed simultaneously until the entire berm has been constructed.
Water leakage or seepage is managed by utilizing pumps or well point systems.
After the construction of the foundation element is complete and access is no longer required,
removal of the cofferdam and berms is done in the reverse sequence to that followed for
construction. It is essential that all fill materials be removed down to the original channel bed
elevation. The bathometric survey is used to re-establish the original channel bed. The
Contractor must accurately locate the channel bed and must not simply excavate by trial and
error.
1.7 Material Disposal
Excavated material suitable for re-use is usually stored at the site. The Contractor must confirm
that this stockpiled material is not placed on private property without prior permission, nor in a
manner that will interrupt the flow of surface drainage, nor at a location that will interfere with
subsequent construction operations. Unsuitable or surplus excavated materials must be
disposed of by the Contractor in a location and manner approved by the Inspector. When
disposing of waste material onto private property, the Contractor must provide the Inspector with
a letter of permission from the landowner accepting the materials.
 Excavated materials must not be disposed in the vicinity of a watercourse where there is the
risk that this material will erode into the watercourse.
 Some excavated materials like topsoil need to be stockpiled and salvaged instead of being
disposed. These materials need to be excavated with care so as not to contaminate them
with other excavated materials.
 The Inspector must be aware of any excavated materials that have been contaminated by
fuel and oil spills, creosote oil, concrete washout or any other chemicals. These soils need
to be disposed at an appropriate waste facility. The Inspector must confirm through the
Contractor’s documentation that these materials have been acceptably disposed.
1.8 Hauling of Waste Material
When hauling excavated material to a disposal area, material can be spilled onto the highway,
creating a hazardous condition for the travelling public, especially during winter.
 The Contractor must have an approved traffic control plan in place for trucks entering and
leaving the highway.
 The Contractor must clean the roadway as required.
 The Contractor may only be permitted to haul during certain hours.
September 2015 1-6

Bridge Construction Inspection Manual 2015
Section 1 – Excavation Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Bridge File No: Inspector:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Reference Observations and Comments
Section
SSBC
1 General
Have the specifications, Plans and borehole logs been reviewed?
Have the arrangements for access routes and disposal area been
reviewed?
Has compliance with environmental permits been confirmed?
Have soft or saturated bed materials been identified?
Has the Project Manager been advised of any seepage during

excavation?
Have the excavation limits that extend beyond required depth been
surveyed?
2 Preparation of Foundations for Footings

1.4 Is all rock or other hard foundation material free of loose material,
cleaned and cut to a firm surface as shown on the drawings?
1.4 Have all seams been cleaned out and filled with concrete, mortar or
grout?
1.4 Is the bottom of the excavation of a non-rock surface confirmed to be

prior to placing concrete?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1.4 In the case of spread footings placed against the ground without
forms, has the lower part of the excavation for a depth corresponding
to the height of the footings been made neatly to the plan dimensions
of the footing?
1.4 Has seepage water been collected and drained or pumped away
before it could enter the neat portion of the excavation?
3 Cofferdams, Dikes and Berms

1.5 For substructure work, has the Contractor submitted drawings and
associated work procedures of the proposed cofferdam, shored
excavation, dike or berm construction?
1.5 Are the drawings and work procedures signed and sealed by a
Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Alberta?
1.5 Have the Contractor’s submittals been reviewed by the Project

Manager?
1.5 Has any timber or bracing been left in the cofferdams in such a way as
to extend into the substructure concrete, without written permission of
the Consultant?
1.5 Has pumping from the interior of any cofferdam been done in such a
way as to cause the flow of water through any fresh concrete?
1.5 Has pumping to de-water a sealed cofferdam commenced before the

seal has set sufficiently to withstand hydrostatic pressures?
1.5 In cases where turbid water is to be pumped from any excavation, has
a suitable settling pond been provided so that only water free from
suspended material enters the watercourse?
1.5 Have cofferdams, dikes and berms been removed after completion of
the work for which they were installed?
1.5 Was all required backfill placed prior to removal of cofferdams, dikes
or berms?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4 Inspection of Excavation
1.6 Was the completed excavation consistent with that shown on the
drawings?
1.6 Was the need for test pits, test drilling or further excavation assessed
before any further work proceeded?
Details and Summary:
Signature Date
3
1.1 Pier excavation for pile cap. Piles cut off at 1.2 Channel excavation for culvert construction.
elevation. Safe slopes and good access to Channel bed crowned and graded to shed water.
excavation shown. Existing stream diverted with sheet piling and clay
berm. Slopes cut at 1:1 for safety.
1.3 Pier excavation for pile cap. Piles cut off at 1.4 Sheet piling installed for pier piling cofferdam.
elevation. H-piles and lagging for temporary H piles placed horizontally as bracing. Ladder
retaining wall shown. access to excavation.
September 2015 Photographs

1.5 Installation of berm. Silt curtain downstream to 1.6 River berm construction. Perimeter placed first to
control turbidity. isolate the work area. Riprap being placed for
scour control.
1.7 River berm construction. Infill material and riprap 1.8 Berm construction and infill work.
being placed, pumping out water from work area. Pumping water from work area.
Equipment access from top of berm.

1.9 River berm construction complete. Sides armored

with riprap and filter fabric.
1.10 Cast-in-place concrete bridge constructed on 1.11 Cofferdam excavation for pier foundation piles and
existing grade. Excavation of roadway beneath, pile cap. Piling rig installing foundation H-piles.
after superstructure is cast.

1.12 Steel H-beam frame set at perimeter of excavation. 1.13 Sheet piling and frame for pier offerdam.
Vibratory hammer advancing sections of sheet
piling.

BACKFILL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.4 Materials ....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.5 Quality Control Testing ............................................................................................... 2-2
2.6 Placement and Compaction ........................................................................................ 2-2
2.6.1 Equipment ........................................................................................................ 2-2
2.6.2 Compaction Density Testing............................................................................. 2-3
2.6.3 Special Considerations ..................................................................................... 2-3
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 2, Backfill
2.1 General
Backfill is placed to fill excavations, construct embankments, divert water and raise grades.
Backfill is also used as a structural material for culverts and MSE walls where it acts
compositely with other materials. In-place backfill must generally have certain properties of
strength, density, capacity, permeability and corrosivity. Backfill is compacted to reduce voids
and consequent settlement.
The requirements identified in Section 1, Excavation of this Manual are also relevant to this
section.
Generally, the placement of backfill material directly into a watercourse is only permitted for the
construction of cofferdams. The Special Provisions and environmental permits will contain
specific requirements for material properties and placement techniques, which must be strictly
followed.
Specific safety hazards may exist during backfill construction, including the inhalation of silica
dust from crushed aggregate backfill and having to work in close proximity to earthmoving and
compaction equipment.
2.4 Materials
Backfill material is categorized into 2 types:
 Compacted Non-Granular Material: This is a cohesive material consisting primarily of

clays. This material may be imported, but it may also be excavated from a borrow source
within the project limits. The performance of a material will be affected by the presence of
silt, sand and organics. Material must be free of topsoil, vegetation or other organic material.
Material used for clay seals at culverts requires special properties. This material must be able to
prevent water from flowing through the culvert’s structural backfill. It needs to be highly plastic
and free of voids and seams after placement.
 Compacted Granular Material: This material may consist of either gravel material or
crushed aggregate material. These materials are graded with coarse aggregates to achieve
strength and drainage properties, and are graded with fine aggregates to achieve
compaction density requirements. They are identified by a Designation and a Class. The
Designation “2” refers to base course aggregates, and the Designation “6” refers to gravel
fill. The Class refers to the maximum size of coarse aggregate material.
o ‘Gravel Material’ is commonly called pit-run gravel. This is gravel found in natural
deposits and is not crushed. However, some processing may be needed to meet
gradation requirements. Pit-run gravel has inferior properties and is less
expensive than crushed aggregate material. Pit-run gravel is seldom used for
backfilling of bridge elements; however, it is commonly used for the construction
of embankments.
September 2015 2-1

o ‘Crushed Aggregate Material’ is a manufactured product. It is highly processed by

screening, sorting, crushing, washing and blending to produce material with a
specific gradation. This material has superior properties and is often used as
culvert backfill and MSE wall backfill. The designations for crushed aggregate
used for backfilling of bridge structures are Des 2 Class 40 and Des 2 Class 25.
2.5 Quality Control Testing
Prior to any backfill placement, a sample must be taken from the source to a qualified testing
firm. Tests are conducted on this sample to confirm that the proposed material meets the
requirements for gradation, durability, plasticity and compacted density.
For granular material:
 A sieve analysis is performed in a lab. The material is deposited into successively finer
sieves by a mechanical shaker, and the percent passing by volume is recorded. The particle
size distribution (gradation) is plotted against the sieve size. If the material gradation does
not fall within the limits specified, the material is not acceptable for use.
 The ‘percent of two-face fractures by weight’ test is performed in a lab, where a sample is
visually assessed. This parameter is important to achieve strength and density.
 The ‘plasticity index’ is measured in a lab as the difference between the liquid and plastic
limits for fine-grained soil components. This limit has a direct correlation to soil strength.
 The ‘L.A. abrasion loss percent maximum’ is a test measure of degradation of aggregates
resulting from abrasion, attrition, impact and grinding in a steel drum filled with the granular
sample and a specified number of steel spheres. The test measures aggregate durability.
For non-granular material:
 The source of the material needs to be approved prior to acceptance. If the quality and
potential density of the proposed material falls into question, the soil type must be sampled
and visually identified using ATT-29 or ASTM D2487 and the density determined using ATT-
8 or ASTM D6938. For culverts, the minimum plasticity index for material used as culvert
seals is specified.
For both granular and non-granular material:
 A Proctor test is performed on the sample. This test is used to determine the soil’s
compaction properties. It determines the optimal water content at which the soil can reach
its maximum dry density. The results of this test are used to determine acceptability of field
density tests, where 95% of the maximum (lab-determined) Procter density is required for a
test to pass.
2.6 Placement and Compaction
2.6.1 Equipment
Compaction of soil is the process by which a stress applied to the soil causes densification by
the removal of air. There are several methods of achieving compaction. Some are unsuitable in
certain circumstances where they may cause damage to structural components:
 Static: Stress is slowly applied to fill and then released.

 Impact: Stress is applied by dropping a mass onto fill.
September 2015 2-2

 Vibrating: Stress is applied repeatedly and rapidly by a mechanical plate or roller.

 Rolling: Stress is applied by a heavy smooth cylinder.
 Kneading: Shear is applied by rolling action.
Typical compaction equipment consists of:
 Self-powered mobile compaction equipment: These are rollers that may operate in static
or vibrating mode. The rollers may have smooth-drums that compact granular soils, or they
may have sheeps-foot drums that compact non-granular soil by kneading.
 Plate tampers: These are vibratory walk-behind machines of different weights, typically
used to compact granular materials in confined spaces including near MSE wall panels and
near culverts.
 Excavator-mounted plate tampers: These are vibratory attachments to an excavator stick
used to compact granular materials.
 Pogo sticks: These are narrow, hand-operated vibratory rammers used to compact backfill
material at culvert haunches.
 Vibratory rammers: These are impact rammers that contact the soil through a small plate.
They are used to compact non-granular soils in confined areas.
2.6.2 Compaction Density Testing
Two different methods are used to confirm that the specified compaction density has been
achieved:
 For Crushed Aggregate Des 2 Class 25 and Non-Granular Material, moisture and density
testing is done at the frequency specified. Acceptable density is specified as 95% of the
maximum Proctor dry density at optimum moisture content achieved during the lab testing.
 For Crushed Aggregate Des 2 Class 40 and Gravel Material, density testing is done using
the Control Strip Method. This method is described in ATT-58A and is used to determine the
minimum number of passes of compaction equipment needed to achieve maximum density.
The Contractor compacts an area of production backfill, keeping track of the number of
passes used to achieve an apparent maximum density. Moisture and density testing is done
at the prescribed frequency. The control strip is repeated if the Contractor changes
equipment or materials.
A nuclear moisture-density gauge, sometimes called a nuclear densometer, is used to measure

soil moisture and density by comparing field density to the lab Proctor maximum density. The
device discharges gamma photons that can measure density. The gauge is set in the
“Backscatter” mode to test the density of the top few centimeters of the backfill lift. The bottom
surface of the gauge must be in a clean condition, and the soil surface to be tested must be flat
with the gauge properly seated.
2.6.3 Special Considerations
The sequence of placing and compacting backfill can be an important construction

consideration depending on the structural element being backfilled.
 Backfill must not be placed against concrete elements that have not yet achieved sufficient
strength. Tall slender elements like wingwalls may crack or deflect under earth pressure
loading if backfilled too soon after casting. The Inspector must receive direction from the
Project Manager before permitting the Contractor to backfill recently cast concrete elements.
September 2015 2-3

 The curing of concrete patches must be acceptably completed before backfilling against any
concrete element.
 A weak plane may result at the base of the backfill. Steps or terraces must be excavated
into slopes so that the backfill material can be mechanically “keyed” into the slope.
 Backfill must be in an unfrozen state prior to placement. The Inspector must closely examine
material that is at near-freezing temperatures. Ice particles indicate that some of the water
needed to achieve compaction is unavailable.
 Proper placement and compaction of culvert backfill material is important since backfill is a
structural component.
 Proper placement and compaction of backfill at abutments is important to prevent approach
settlement.
September 2015 2-4

Section 2 – Backfill Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Have the specifications and drawings been reviewed?
Was the Contractor compliant with the project environmental

requirements?
Has the Project Manager accepted the backfill material?
2 Material Testing
2.2.3 Has the Contractor submitted, two (2) weeks before placing of the
granular material, a sieve analysis representing the material to be
used at the site?
2.2.3 Has the sampling and testing been done no more than 90 days prior
to usage unless otherwise approved by the Consultant?
2.2.3 Do the test methods and minimum frequencies meet the requirements
as shown in Table 2.2.3 Quality Control Testing Requirements?
3 Placing
2.3 Were all excavated spaces not occupied by permanent work backfilled
with compacted material up to the elevation indicated on the
drawings?
2.3 Have all excavations been surveyed prior to the start of backfilling?
1
Section 2 – Backfill Check Sheet
Compliance
Section
SSBC
2.3 Were all backfill materials, regardless of type, placed in lifts not
exceeding 150 mm in thickness of loose material, each lift
mechanically tamped with pneumatic tampers or approved
equivalent?
2.3 Is Crushed Aggregate (Des 2 Class 25) and Non Granular Material
(Soil), compacted to a minimum of 95% Proctor density at optimum
moisture content?
2.3 Is compaction of Gravel Material and Crushed Aggregate (Des 2

Class 40) acceptable as determined by the Control Strip Method?
2.3 Has backfill material been placed against any concrete abutment,
wingwall or culvert without acceptance from the Consultant?
2.3 Has placement proceeded before the concrete has been in place at
least seven (7) days or before the compressive strength of the
concrete is 75% of the required 28 day strength?
2.3 Has backfill material around culverts and concrete elements been
placed simultaneously on both sides at the same elevation to avoid
unbalanced loading?
2.3 Have special precautions been taken to prevent wedging action

against concrete and the slope bounding the excavation for abutments
and wingwalls?
2.3 Have the slopes been stepped to prevent wedge action?
Signature Date
2
2.1 Compaction of backfill between abutment pipe 2.2 Soft soil at base of excavation removed and
piles and grade beam H-piling. replaced with competent granular back fill.
2.3 Compaction of granular backfill behind abutment 2.4 Hydraulic excavator placing granular backfill
diaphragm and wingwalls using walk behind material against abutment backwall. Sheet drain
remote controlled compaction equipment. placed against abutment seat.

2.5 Hand-operated plate tamper used for compacting 2.6 Skid steer loader used to spread 150 mm granular
granular material between H-piles and against fill for MSE wall fill.
MSE wall fascia panels. Smaller compaction
equipment must be used near fascia panels.
2.7 Culvert foundation material in loose state, spread 2.8 Smooth-drum roller compacting culvert bedding
by dozer. material. Geotextile and safe side slopes shown.

2.9 Compaction of bedding. 2.10 Backfill placed at culvert haunches.
2.11 Placing backfill evenly on both sides of culvert in

150 mm lifts.

FOUNDATION PILES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.4 Driven vs. Bored Foundation Piles ............................................................................. 3-2
3.5 Pile Lay-out .................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.6 Geotechnical Investigation and Soil Properties ........................................................ 3-3
3.7 Pile Driving Equipment ................................................................................................ 3-3
3.7.1 Impact Hammers .............................................................................................. 3-3
3.7.1.1 Drop Hammer .............................................................................................. 3-4
3.7.1.2 Diesel Hammer ............................................................................................ 3-4
3.7.1.3 Hydraulic Hammer ....................................................................................... 3-4
3.7.2 Vibratory Hammer / Extractor ........................................................................... 3-4

3.7.3 Drill Rig ............................................................................................................ 3-5
3.7.3.1 Temporary Casing ....................................................................................... 3-5
3.7.3.2 Drill Rig Tools ............................................................................................... 3-5
3.8 Criteria for Achieving Pile Capacity............................................................................ 3-6

3.8.1 Challenges with Achieving Pile Capacity .......................................................... 3-6
3.9 Determination of Pile Capacity ................................................................................... 3-7
3.9.1 Bearing Formulas ............................................................................................. 3-7
3.9.2 Efficiency Factor............................................................................................... 3-7
3.9.3 WEAP Analysis ................................................................................................ 3-8
3.9.4 WEAP Analysis with PDA and Signal Matching Analysis .................................. 3-8
3.10 Static Load Tests ......................................................................................................... 3-8
3.10.1 Inspector’s Records.......................................................................................... 3-9
3.10.1.1 Field Documentation .................................................................................... 3-9
3.10.1.2 Using Bearing Formulas .............................................................................. 3-9
3.10.1.3 Using WEAP Analysis .................................................................................. 3-9
3.10.1.4 Using WEAP Analysis with PDA and Signal Matching Analysis.................. 3-9
3.10.1.5 Using Static Load Tests ............................................................................. 3-10
3.11 Driven Pile Materials .................................................................................................. 3-10

3.12 Types of Driven Piles and Installation ...................................................................... 3-11
3.12.1 Timber Piles ................................................................................................... 3-11
3.12.2 Steel H-Piles .................................................................................................. 3-11
3.12.3 Steel Pipe Piles .............................................................................................. 3-11
3.13 Final Acceptance of Driven Piling............................................................................. 3-12
3.14 Drilled Piles ................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.14.1 Soil Logs ........................................................................................................ 3-12
3.14.2 Equipment ...................................................................................................... 3-12
3.14.3 Casing ............................................................................................................ 3-12
3.14.4 Drilling ............................................................................................................ 3-13
3.14.5 Reinforcing Steel Cage .................................................................................. 3-13
3.14.6 Placing Pile Concrete ..................................................................................... 3-13
3.14.7 Crosshole Sonic Logging................................................................................ 3-14
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
 Pile Data Form
FIGURES
 Figure 3 – 1: Typical Diesel Pile Driving Hammer and Fixed Lead

 Figure 3 – 2: Typical Components of a Single Acting Diesel Hammer
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 3, Foundation Piles
3.1 General
Foundations provide support for structures, transferring their loads to layers of rock or soil that
have sufficient bearing capacity. Foundations are broadly categorized as being either shallow or
deep. Shallow foundations include spread footings, and deep foundations include piles. Bridge
substructure elements are most commonly supported on pile foundations.
Piles offer advantages over spread footings in the following ways:
 Piles can penetrate to deeper ground where greater strength and capacity exists. Piles
are often driven to a layer of competent bedrock.
 Pile foundations can extend across slip planes beneath the structure, which may cause
movement and failure with shallow foundations.
 Piles will resist failure caused by scour, which can undermine shallow foundations.
 Piled foundations do not require regular inspection, whereas elements on shallow
footings do.
Piles have the following characteristics:
 Piles behave as slender columns; however, they are also laterally supported by the
surrounding soil.
 When used as substructure foundations, piles are placed in groups. Often, the ends of
wingwalls are also supported on piles.
 For some bridge piers, foundation piles are driven and extended to provide a laterally
unsupported length above grade, which are the pier columns. The row of piles/columns
in the transverse direction, connected with bracing and a pier cap, is often referred to as
a ‘pile bent’.
Piles achieve their performance capacity as follows:
 Friction Piles: Most of the pile capacity is developed by shear stresses caused by skin
friction from direct contact with soil. Some capacity may also be developed by soil
adhesion. These piles are used when hard soil or bedrock is too deep to use for a
bearing surface. Friction piles often need to be long to develop their required capacity.
 End-Bearing Piles: Most of the capacity is developed at the toe of the pile, since the
pile tip bears on a competent strata. To improve bearing capacity, the tips of driven pipe
piles can be closed, and the tips of bored piles can be belled. The competency and
cleanliness of the bearing surface for bored piles is important for end-bearing piles.
In practice, most piles provide capacity through both friction and end-bearing.
The Inspector must be aware of the following environmental concerns:
 Damage to adjacent structures or foundations may occur during pile driving. Pre-
condition inspections must be done if this risk exists.
 Noise bylaws exist for some municipalities, limiting the hours during which pile driving
may occur.
 Diesel hammers generally discharge soot, oil and fuel. Special precautions are required
when working near watercourses.
September 2015 3-1

The Inspector must be aware of the following safety concerns:
 Noise from the hammer impact may contribute to long-term hearing damage.
 Hammer components — including the piston, helmet, bridle and winch cables — may fail
during driving and fall from the leads. Working beneath pile sections and the hammer
must never occur.
 Open holes may exist during pile drilling or pipe pile driving and must be marked and
covered.
 Gas poisoning and suffocation from pile excavation collapse may occur. Entering
excavations must never occur except under carefully planned circumstances and only
with proper safety measures in place.
 Timber piles may split during driving.
3.4 Driven vs. Bored Foundation Piles
The choice of utilizing driven or bored piles depends on many factors, such as soil conditions,
cost, water table elevation, headroom, size of foundation and substructure loading
requirements.
Driven Piles: These are installed with a driving hammer. Driven piles may consist of either H-
Pile shapes or pipes. Pipe piles may be driven with closed ends to provide end-bearing, as
detailed in Standard Drawing S-1479. Precast concrete piles may also be driven, though their
usage is very limited for bridge work.
Bored Piles: These are drilled to the design tip elevation and then immediately filled with cast-
in-place concrete. Bored piles are typically used when geotechnical conditions warrant their
usage.
Specialty Piles: Micropiles are arrays of small piles used to increase capacity for footings. They
can be installed by jacking, driving or vibrating. Continuous Flight Augered (CFA) piles are
bored piles where boring and concrete placement are done simultaneously to avoid excavation
failure or water ingress.
3.5 Pile Lay-out
The lay-out of pile locations by the Contractor and the checks by the Inspector are very
important. The bridge substructure elements must be accurately located to meet the design
requirements. If concrete bridge elements are constructed onto incorrectly located piles,
significant re-work, cost and project delays may result. The Inspector must make every effort to
confirm the completeness and accuracy of the Contractor’s pile lay-out.
For driven piles, the Contractor normally marks the theoretical centre of each pile location with a
soil nail. Batter boards are often used at each end of the pile row so that the alignment and
locations can be easily re-established, as required.
For bored piles, the Contractor normally locates the pile centre using offset soil nails. The offset
marks must be established such that the theoretical pile centre can be quickly determined after
the completion of concrete placement to confirm that the reinforcing steel cage is accurately
positioned before the concrete reaches initial set.
September 2015 3-2

3.6 Geotechnical Investigation and Soil Properties
The Plans contain a geotechnical information sheet which provides soil log information. The
information provided by the soil logs is used to anticipate the degree of driving difficulty and the
expected penetration of the piles.
Pile driving usually affects the properties of the soil through which the pile is being driven. When
piles are driven in the ground, they displace soil. The soil can be pushed down, up or sideways
or a combination of these.
For some over consolidated materials and saturated clays, soil displacement may cause
heaving of the surrounding soil, which can lift previously driven piles or push them out of
alignment.
3.7 Pile Driving Equipment
The pile driver consists of a crane, hammer, leads, frame, guides, and template. Hammers are
generally classified as impact or vibratory hammers.
3.7.1 Impact Hammers
An impact hammer is the device that imparts the load into the pile. The hammer components
consist of the weight or ‘ram’, an impact block or striker plate, and a hammer cushion.
It is important that the hammer does not damage the piles during driving. The pile helmet
cushion transfers the impact from the hammer to the pile. Helmet or drive head components are
positioned between the hammer and the pile. The helmet cools and dampens the impact from
the hammer. The helmet may rest on a pile insert that neatly fits onto the pile top and helps to
maintain alignment during driving. A second cushion is placed between the pile and the helmet
assembly.
The pile hammer travels along guiderails within frame rails that are called “leads”. The leads are
tracks along which the hammer moves, and these help to position and steady the pile during
driving. The positioning of the leads is critical to achieving accurate pile alignment. It is
important that the leads be rigidly attached, or “fixed”, to the crane boom. Fixed leads may be
either underhung or extended, the latter being attached by a swivel boom adapter. “Fixed”
vertical travel lead systems are connected to the crane boom with a sliding connection. Some
“fixed” vertical travel lead systems are also connected to the crane with an adjustable hydraulic
ram to maintain the pile location and alignment.
The crane is used to position the leads. The crane boom must have sufficient capacity and size
to suspend leads for the full length of the pile section.
A ground template or driving frame is required to accurately locate and maintain alignment and
location of piles during driving. Custom templates are fabricated by welding together sections of
steel to create slots within which to place pile tips at the start of driving. Templates are usually
secured in place with soldier piles. The Contractor is responsible for the accuracy of pile
alignments and location.
September 2015 3-3

3.7.1.1 Drop Hammer
Drop or gravity hammers consist of a weight, guides or leads, a supporting framework and a
means for raising and dropping the weight, such as a crane. The weight is raised along the
leads to a desired height above the pile top, then released onto the pile. Gravity hammers are
only permitted when the specified pile capacity is less than 350 kN. In hard soil formations,
using a drop hammer may cause damage to the pile top.
3.7.1.2 Diesel Hammer
A diesel hammer consists of a two-stroke diesel engine with the engine’s piston acting as the
hammer ram.
A diesel hammer can be a single or double acting hammer. The diesel hammer is a precision
pile hammer and has a high-energy rating. It is efficient and compact since it carries its own fuel
from which it generates its power internally. However, there can be unknown variability in the
hammer’s energy output due to uncertain performance characteristics of its components. The
hammer may not reach its full energy output if it is not at operating temperature or if it is pre-
igniting. The hammer will experience energy losses and inefficiency due to its helmet and
cushioning, and these losses are often difficult to quantify.
Diesel hammers use rapid combustion of fuel to directly drive the pile down and the ram up. The
unit contains a fuel-injection system, ram, anvil and vertical cylinder.
To start the hammer, a cable lifts the ram and a trip drops it. As it falls, it actuates a fuel pump
that injects fuel between the ram and the anvil. The compression on impact ignites the fuel, and
the resulting explosion drives the pile down and the ram up for the start of another blow cycle.
For double-acting diesel hammers, fuel is injected at the top of the ram travel and the resulting
explosion also drives the ram downward, giving additional energy to the ram weight as it falls. A
lighter ram weight is used, but more blows per minute are obtained.
3.7.1.3 Hydraulic Hammer
Hydraulic hammers operate the ram by means of a hydraulic cylinder that lifts it from the
bottom. They may be used in place of diesel hammers. Hydraulic hammers:
 generally require less headroom than diesel hammers

 may produce more consistent energy output as compared to diesel hammers
 are sometimes encased in the leads, and the hammer stroke is not measureable
 are generally equipped with calibrated metering that measures performance and energy
 must be properly adjusted so that the hydraulic cylinders that lift the ram are activated at
the correct time to produce the rated energy.
3.7.2 Vibratory Hammer / Extractor
Vibratory pile hammers contain rotating eccentric weights that produce vibrations at a given
frequency. A vibratory pile hammer drives a pile while rigidly connected to the pile, and it
advances the pile through the soil by vibration. Vibratory pile drivers are effective for advancing
piles in granular soil conditions and especially in sandy material.
The operation of vibratory pile drivers is more complex than other pile installation equipment.
September 2015 3-4

Vibratory pile hammers are efficient for driving sheet piles at cofferdams.
Vibratory pile hammers can be used to extract piles.
Vibratory pile hammers are sometimes used to install the upper portions of long production piles
that are initially driven at low resistance. It is difficult to maintain pile alignment using a vibratory
hammer, and use of this equipment and its permitted range of driving must be approved by the
Project Manager in advance.
3.7.3 Drill Rig
The pile drill rig is used to excavate drilled piles. It can drill through sandy, silty, clay or
sandstone soils. The rig is mounted on a hydraulic crawler chassis. The mast utilizes an
automatically adjusted telescopic drill pipe, or Kelly bar. The Kelly bar transfers torque and
crowd force from the rotary drive to the drilling tool. Various drilling tools can be attached to the
Kelly bar.
3.7.3.1 Temporary Casing
The ingress of water or sloughing of the freshly drilled pile hole must be managed by use of
temporary casing. Piles constructed in this way are often called “caissons”, with the casing itself
acting as the caisson.
Small diameter and short casings are often pushed into the excavation and subsequently
extracted using the rig’s Kelly bar.
Hydraulic casing oscillators are used to drive and extract large steel casings. The required
hydraulic power is supplied by either the rig or by a separate power compressor and pump.
Casing must extend to a sufficient depth so as to intercept sloughing soil or seepage. The
casing is removed during concrete placement.
3.7.3.2 Drill Rig Tools
Various tools may be attached to the end of the Kelly bar:
 Augers of varying pitch are used to excavate softer soils. The cutting edge of the auger
is fitted with maintainable blades. As the auger flights become filled with soil, the auger
is retracted and the tailings are wasted.
 Rock auger bits are used to drill through harder soils.
 Pilot bits are used to drill smaller cores through hard materials.
 Core barrels are used to excavate rock.
 Clean-out tools are used to remove loose material from the base of the excavation.
 Belling tools are used to increase the diameter of the shaft at the base.
 Submersible pumps are used to remove standing water from the pile base, prior to
placing concrete.
September 2015 3-5

3.8 Criteria for Achieving Pile Capacity
The acceptability of the piles is assessed for each individual pile driven. The Inspector must be
aware of important criteria that must be met to determine the acceptability of piles:
Refusal Criteria: This is a measure of the driving resistance encountered. If the refusal criteria
has been met, the pile is considered to have adequate capacity. Its value is a measure of the
number of hammer blows per distance of pile advancement, usually designated as ‘Blows per
250 mm’. The number of hammer blows required to advance a 250 mm section of pile will
depend on the particular hammer efficiency at the time of driving. The hammer efficiency will
vary depending on the rate of blows and the physical components of the hammer itself.
Pile Tip Elevation: This is the design tip elevation, as indicated on the Plans. The tip elevation
is theoretical, and the actual tip elevation will likely vary from theoretical. If the tip elevation is
reached but the refusal criteria has not been met, then the pile is not acceptable and driving
must continue. If a pile reaches refusal at a tip elevation higher than designed, the Inspector
must consult with the Project Manager and geotechnical engineer. Often, structural
considerations dictate an acceptable pile length and not only capacity. Piles often need a
minimum length for proper bearing, scour protection and stability of the substructure element.
3.8.1 Challenges with Achieving Pile Capacity
Generally, driving effort becomes more difficult as the length of driven pile increases. However,
sometimes a locally hard strata or the incidence of boulders can cause hard driving, which
satisfies the refusal criteria at a higher elevation than design tip. If the refusal criteria is achieved
at an elevation significantly higher than the design tip, the driving should continue so that it can
be determined if a locally hard strata is encountered. Often, with continued driving, the pile will
break through the hard strata and easier driving will again occur. The soil log information must
be reviewed by the Inspector to determine if the problematic soil has been identified. Sometimes
boulders can only be removed by excavation. The Inspector must consult with the Project
Manager and his geotechnical engineer if clarification is needed.
The Inspector must be aware that when refusal has not yet been achieved and the pile flanges
or pipe are seen to become damaged due to high driving forces, driving must stop until he
consults with the Project Manager.
Pile deflection may occur when driving through soils containing cobbles, boulders or other
inconsistent conditions. The Inspector must monitor pile alignment during driving. If piles deviate
from the specified tolerances, the Inspector must require that driving operations stop. The
Contractor must correct his methods, and the Inspector must seek the advice of the Project
Manager.
Some soil types, such as clays and silts, offer relatively little resistance to the penetration of a
pile as it is being driven, but then “tighten-up” to grip the pile at some time after driving has
stopped. This is called pile “set-up”. If a pile has been driven to the required tip elevation but the
refusal criteria has not been met, the driving may be stopped and the pile allowed to set-up in
anticipation that the refusal criteria will be met at a later date. Generally, many days are required
after driving for set-up effects to be realised. The requirements to re-strike will be addressed in
the Special Provisions.
September 2015 3-6

Some foundation piles are driven through vertical Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP) sleeves. This is
typical for integral-abutment type substructures and for pilings placed through backfill materials
at MSE walls.
Where piles are driven through fills that are expected to settle or consolidate in the future, the
piles are coated with a bond-breaking material that will reduce or eliminate the soil’s adhesion to
the pile.
3.9 Determination of Pile Capacity
3.9.1 Bearing Formulas
The bearing formulas provided in the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction are
generally used to determine pile capacities.
The bearing formulas are used to calculate the ‘Minimum Number of Blows per 250 mm’ of pile
length, which is the pile refusal criteria or the point at which the design capacity is attained.
These values are calculated for each corresponding energy output value of the hammer. This
energy output and corresponding value of ‘Blows per Minute’ will vary during driving as the
driving resistance changes, therefore the refusal criteria also changes with the hammer’s energy
output.
The hammer parameters are provided by the manufacturer of the hammer.
3.9.2 Efficiency Factor
The efficiency factor must be confirmed by the Inspector by observing that the operational
‘Blows per Minute’ falls within the range of values provided by the manufacturer of the hammer.
Energy determination is important with diesel hammers. The number of blows the hammer
produces per minute must be recorded so the hammer energy output can be determined. The
accuracy of the bearing formulas depends on the condition and efficiency of the hammer and
may be inaccurate compared to other test methods.
For some hammers, the operator can vary the fuel supply, which directly effects the energy
output. Pre-ignition or other malfunctions may also result in lower efficiency.
Hammers may bounce, thereby reducing their delivered energy.
A cold hammer will not generally have the efficiency of a hammer that is at operating
temperature.
The length of ram stroke varies with pile resistance, and as driving resistance increases, the
‘Blows per Minute’ is reduced.
The energy output of a specific hammer is provided in the hammer manufacturer’s data,
supplied by the Contractor. When evaluating the performance of a specific hammer, it must be
understood that the relationship between the number of ‘Blows per Minute’ and the efficiency of
the hammer is not linear.
September 2015 3-7

3.9.3 WEAP Analysis
As an alternative to the bearing formulas, a Wave Equation Analysis of Piles (WEAP) can be
used to determine the refusal criteria. The WEAP analysis will provide a more accurate and
sometimes less conservative refusal criteria than the bearing formulas.
A WEAP provides theoretical refusal criteria. The analysis is based on hammer data provided
by the manufacturer and local soil conditions.
The WEAP provides a value of ‘Blows per 250 mm’ for the full range of possible ‘Blows per
Minute’ from the hammer. The analysis requires specialized knowledge and is therefore
performed by the Contractor’s geotechnical engineer and reviewed for acceptance by the
Project Manager. The Inspector must obtain the results from the Project Manager prior to the
start of pile driving.
3.9.4 WEAP Analysis with PDA and Signal Matching Analysis
In addition to a WEAP, a Pile Driving Analysis (PDA) may be done to field-verify the results of
the WEAP. PDA is a method for dynamic load testing of piles at the end of the initial driving
stage. PDA also can evaluate the pile shaft integrity, driving stresses and hammer energy. The
PDA system equipment consists of strain transducers that compute force and accelerometers
that measure velocity caused by the mechanical wave as it travels down the shaft with each
hammer blow. The soil resistance and its distribution can then be measured.
Sometimes a signal matching analysis is done, which helps to interpret the PDA data accurately
and determines a capacity. This is normally done for test piles but may be done for production
piles.
The PDA field results are compared to the theoretical WEAP to determine if the values match. If
the values do not match, the WEAP parameters may be refined within permissible limits until the
values match. In this way, the PDA results are used to confirm the WEAP.
This method is generally used on major bridges or on standard bridges that have multiple spans
or more than 10 substructure piles. The analysis reduces the magnitude of the design safety
factors and may result in a more economical pile configuration since it is more reliable when
compared to the bearing formulas or WEAP with no PDA. When the cost of PDA is offset by a
savings in piling materials, it becomes practical. PDA can be used on representative test piles
during design to reduce pile lengths, pile size and the number of piles. If PDA is only used
during construction on production piles, it may reduce the pile length since PDA is more
accurate than the bearing formulas.
The use of PDA requires specialized knowledge and is therefore performed in the field by the
Contractor’s geotechnical technician, following the requirements of the technical standard
referenced in the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction.
3.10 Static Load Tests
Static load testing is a method to determine pile capacity that is more accurate than PDA. If
required, it will be specified in the Special Provisions. These tests are normally not done on
production piles. Rather, they are used on test piles for complex multi-bridge projects where
value may be realized to the Department by refining the pile design to be more efficient. Static
load testing is expensive, and the potential savings must offset this cost. The analysis reduces
September 2015 3-8

the magnitude of the design safety factors further and may result in a more economical pile
configuration.
Static load testing requires specialized knowledge and is therefore performed in the field by the
Contractor’s geotechnical technician, following the requirements of the technical standard and
frequency of testing referenced in the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction.
3.10.1 Inspector’s Records
3.10.1.1 Field Documentation
Prior to driving, each pile is marked by the Contractor for its full length while the pile is on the
ground. The pile is marked in 250 mm increments. The Inspector must request that the
Contractor’s marks be made neatly using a square and a brightly coloured paint stick. If the pile
needs to be spliced, a new section is ‘stacked’ onto the driven section and again marked with
numbers in continuing sequence.
Prior to the start of driving, the Contractor must establish elevation control for each pile since it
is necessary to determine if the piles have reached the theoretical tip elevation. The Inspector
must determine and confirm the actual pile tip elevation for each pile.
The Engineering Consultant Guidelines for Highway, Bridge, and Water Projects – Construction
Contract Administration manual contains the Bridge Construction Administration Form titled ‘Pile
Data’. This form is completed by the Inspector for each pile.
3.10.1.2 Using Bearing Formulas
During driving, the Inspector must monitor and record the number of hammer ‘Blows per Minute’
for each 250 mm of pile driven, so that he can confirm the depth at which the refusal criteria has
been met. The criteria must be determined by the Inspector using the appropriate bearing
formula given in the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction. The calculated values
must be confirmed through a discussion with the Project Manager in advance of the work.
3.10.1.3 Using WEAP Analysis
The Inspector must confirm that the refusal criteria provided by the Contractor’s geotechnical
engineer has been accepted by the Project Manager.
The Inspector’s records during piling are maintained on the ‘Pile Data’ form in the same way as
is done for the bearing formulas.
WEAP is generally used to determine the refusal criteria in terms of ‘Blows per 250 mm’. Since
it is difficult to measure ‘Blows per Minute’ for hydraulic hammers, a calibrated gauge is often
provided from which performance and energy can be determined. The Inspector needs to
identify the hammer efficiency from the gauge and then determine the appropriate refusal
criteria from pre-determined tabulated values.
3.10.1.4 Using WEAP Analysis with PDA and Signal Matching Analysis
The Inspector must confirm that the refusal criteria provided by the Contractor’s geotechnical
engineer has been accepted by the Project Manager.
September 2015 3-9

The Inspector must be aware of the required frequency and distribution of piles tested, and must
further confirm that the required frequency of testing is properly performed by the Contractor.
The Inspector must advise the Project Manager when changes in hammer type, hardware or
procedures occur.
The Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager that the Contractor’s PDA equipment has
been adequately calibrated.
The Inspector does not maintain records during piling on the ‘Pile Data’ form; however, a
representative sample of piles may need to be logged in the same way as is done for the
bearing formulas. The Inspector must discuss this requirement with the Project Manager in
advance of the Work.
The Contractor’s geotechnical technician determines when refusal occurs for each pile. The
Inspector must confirm with the geotechnical technician and Project Manager that the piles have
met the design refusal criteria.
The Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager that the Daily Field Reports referenced in
the Standard Specification for Bridge Construction and final test results are acceptable.
3.10.1.5 Using Static Load Tests
The Inspector must confirm that the required frequency and representation of testing is
accurately performed in accordance with the technical standard referenced in the Standard
Specifications for Bridge Construction.
Due to the specialized nature of the work, the Consultant will typically have his geotechnical
engineer review the Contractor’s work and take sample readings to verify the Contractor’s
values. The Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager that all site deficiencies identified
by the Consultant’s geotechnical engineer have been addressed before the testing is accepted.
3.11 Driven Pile Materials
Materials for driven piles generally consist of structural steel. Steel must be fabricated to the
requirements specified in the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction. The Inspector
must confirm with the Project Manager that all piles delivered to the job site have been accepted
on the basis of the mill certificates provided. The Inspector must confirm that the tags on the
shipments match the identification numbers of the mill certificates.
Splicing must be done to the requirements of Standard Drawings S-1414 and S-1415. The
Inspector must be knowledgeable of the requirements of the Standard Drawings. The Inspector
must also review the requirements of Section 13 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge
Construction, which provides field welding requirements for structural steel. The Inspector must
confirm with the Project Manager that the welding procedures and welder qualifications have
been received and accepted. The Inspector must confirm that the accepted weld procedures are
followed, including requirements for pre-heat, warming of welding rod, and maintenance of
temperature by hoarding. The Inspector must further confirm that non-destructive testing is
comprehensive and that the results are acceptable before further driving is permitted.
September 2015 3-10

Care must be taken when handling and driving galvanized piles to prevent coating damage. The
Inspector must inspect all piles to confirm that coating damage, including scratches and blisters,
has not occurred. If significant damage occurs, the Inspector must consult with the Project
Manager to determine if the pile sections are repairable.
3.12 Types of Driven Piles and Installation
3.12.1 Timber Piles
Timber piles are infrequently used for foundations due to safety considerations and their
potential short life expectancy.
3.12.2 Steel H-Piles
Steel H-piles are commonly rolled wide flange square sections varying from 250 mm to 360 mm
in width. H-piles are strong and durable and can be driven into relatively hard ground. They
have a small cross-section, and ground displacement and heaving are minimized.
The pile head must be cut squarely and a suitable helmet and cushion provided so that the
driving force is transferred uniformly over the full cross-section of the pile.
Under difficult driving conditions, a pile “shoe” or end reinforcement may be required at the tip.
When splicing piles in cold weather, the welding area must be sheltered and the splice location
pre-heated. The Contractor must use a bevelling machine to properly prepare the end of the pile
prior to welding.
H-piles have both a strong and weak axis of orientation. Piles must only be placed in the
orientation shown on the Plans.
3.12.3 Steel Pipe Piles
Steel pipe piles may be driven with open or closed ends. All steel pipe piles must be checked for
roundness. It is essential that the pile cap on the helmet fits the pipe piles properly.
Steel pipe piles with closed bottom ends displace a relatively large amount of soil.
Care must be taken during driving to confirm that pipe piles are not damaged by buckling of the
pipe walls. The interior of the pipe pile must be inspected by either lowering a light or using a
mirror to visually confirm that the pile is not buckled or broken.
During hard driving, some local buckling of the pipe wall at the helmet may occur, requiring
removal of the damaged portion.
When splicing in cold weather, the welding area must be sheltered and the splice location pre-
heated. The Contractor must use a bevelling machine to properly prepare the end of the pile for
welding and also use backup rings when making the weld.
The Inspector must discuss all special requirements with the Project Manager, such as cleaning
out the pipe pile after driving, socketing the pile base, concreting and reinforcement.
Temporary covers must be installed onto finished pipe piles for safety up to the time that the
concrete is cast.
September 2015 3-11

3.13 Final Acceptance of Driven Piling
 The Inspector must be present at all times during driving, and must thoroughly
understand the driving criteria before the start of driving.
 The Inspector must, before the start of driving, confirm that the piles are correctly
oriented.
 Pile tops must be cut squarely to accommodate the helmet guide, which holds the pile in
positive relative to the hammer.
 Throughout driving, the Contractor must confirm that the pile alignment is correct, as
verified by the Inspector.
 When using a value of ‘Blows per 250 mm’ as a refusal criteria, the Inspector generally
indicates verbally to the Contractor or his subcontractor that a pile has acceptably
attained both the tip elevation and the required capacity.
 After all piles are driven to refusal and before the end of the day, the Inspector must
carefully record the length of pile driven from tip to the theoretical cut-off elevation.
 Prior to the cut-off of any piles, the Inspector must calculate the length of each pile
driven, to the nearest centimetre.
3.14 Drilled Piles
Drilled piles are commonly designed to be founded at a specific elevation. Their capacity is not
generally determined during production, therefore care must be taken to construct drilled piles to
their specified diameter and depth. All requirements for capacity testing are stated in the Special
Provisions, and the Inspector must identify any inspection and reporting requirements with the
Project Manager in advance. Pile capacity may be determined by PDA but this is uncommon for
bored piles.
3.14.1 Soil Logs
It is necessary that the drilling contractor be experienced and knowledgeable. The Inspector
must confirm with the Project Manager that the drilling contractor meets an acceptable level of
competency.
The Inspector must thoroughly review the pile soil logs to identify the expected soil types,
properties and water conditions. The Inspector must be able to visually identify the soil types.
The Inspector must consult with the Project Manager or the Consultant’s geotechnical engineer
in advance to identify critical aspects of the Work, including the potential for difficult drilling,
condition requirements for the base and the identification of competent bearing soils.
3.14.2 Equipment
The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor has all necessary equipment and tools available
before the start of drilling, including casing, specialty augers, bits, clean-out tools, pumps and
bailing tools.
3.14.3 Casing
Drilled pile holes must be stabilized to prevent sloughing and ingress of water using temporary
casing, as required.
September 2015 3-12

The casing must be of sufficient length to protect the hole from sloughing and to intercept
seepage water. Casing must be removed during or immediately after concrete placement. The
Inspector must confirm that the base of the casing remains below the level of concrete at all
times so that the ingress of soil or water is prevented.
3.14.4 Drilling
The Inspector must review the tailings from the auger to observe that the soil types match those
identified in the soil logs. The Inspector must confirm the elevation at which the soil strata
changes and the elevations where any seepages occur.
The Inspector must pay particular attention in recording the elevations where boulders or
unexpectedly hard drilling has occurred. It is necessary to record any instance that has resulted
in a delay or suspension to drilling operations.
The Inspector must confirm that the belling tool is able to excavate the base of the pile to the
required dimensions. The tool must be tested at the surface to confirm that the cutting wings are
adjustable to the required opening angle and diameter.
If battered piles are required, the batter angle must be checked by measuring the angle of the
Kelly bar.
The Inspector must confirm that the pile hole depth meets the design tip elevation.
The Inspector must confirm that the pile hole base material consists of the material specified in
the Plans. The use of a powerful flashlight or a mirror to reflect sunlight is required to properly
view the base. A special clean-out tool attached to the Kelly bar is required to remove any loose
material.
3.14.5 Reinforcing Steel Cage
The pile reinforcing steel is prefabricated into a cage and lowered into the pile hole. It may be
necessary to install the cages in sections due to the depth of the pile. The Inspector must
confirm that the cages are sufficiently tied to maintain their shape during placement and
splicing.
The reinforcement cage must be adequately chaired so that the required cover is maintained.
Typically, round ‘wagon wheel’ style chairs of appropriate diameter are placed onto cage ties.
The Inspector must confirm that the appropriate size and number of chairs are properly secured
to the cage.
The Inspector must determine if chairs or other approved devices are needed at the base of the
vertical bars to prevent them from depressing into soft ground.
The cage must be installed at its precise location and checked by the Inspector prior to concrete
placement. The cage must be adequately secured to prevent movement during concrete
placement or casing extraction.
3.14.6 Placing Pile Concrete
Concrete must be placed immediately after the cage is acceptably installed and secured. Prior
to concrete placement, it is necessary to confirm that the hole is dry and clean. The Inspector
must view the base of the pile hole to confirm cleanliness and dryness.
September 2015 3-13

The Contractor must make every effort to achieve a ‘dry’ hole prior to placing concrete. An
acceptably dry hole may not in fact be completely dry but may contain a very shallow layer of
water. This may be acceptable only if all precautions, including casing and pumping, have been
performed and the amount of water is determined to be non-detrimental by the Project Manager.
Concrete must be placed through a drop tube to avoid segregation and contamination of
reinforcing steel.
Casing removal may result in a void that will cause concrete to slump. The top section of the
pile may require additional concrete and may need to be re-vibrated after casing removal. Care
must be taken to prevent shifting of the reinforcing steel cage.
The Contractor must check the position and projection of the reinforcing steel cage immediately
after completion of concrete placement.
If pile holes cannot be effectively dewatered, the pile concrete needs to be placed by tremie as
described in Section 4 of this Manual. Crosshole Sonic Logging (CSL) must then be completed.
It is important that advance planning be done to determine if a tremie will be required, since
CSL requires that tubes be placed with the reinforcement cage. If tremie concrete is expected,
the Contractor must submit his proposed methods. The Inspector must confirm that the
Contractor’s methods have been accepted by the Project Manager before any concrete is
placed by tremie.
3.14.7 Crosshole Sonic Logging
CSL is described in Section 4 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction. This
method is used to determine the structural integrity of the tremied concrete.
Testing must be done by a qualified testing agency with a minimum of three (3) years of CSL
testing experience. The Inspector must confirm that the Project Manager has accepted the
qualifications of the testing firm and the personnel.
Results other than “G” are not acceptable, and the Contractor must submit a corrective proposal
for review. No further construction for this element may be done until the Contractor’s proposal
is deemed acceptable by the Project Manager.
September 2015 3-14

Section 3 – Foundation Piles Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Have the specifications and plans been reviewed?
Have the driving equipment and methods been accepted by the

Project Manager?
Is pre-boring permitted?
Has refusal criteria been determined?
Has the driving operation been reviewed and the results reported to
the Project Manager?
2 Handling
3.3 Has piling been handled, hauled and stored in a manner that prevents
damage to the materials?
3.3 Has loading and unloading been done by crane, loader or other
appropriate hoisting equipment?
3.3 Have fabric slings, wood blocking and other approved methods been
used to support and separate galvanized piling when handling,
hauling or storing?
3.3 Has any repair to damaged galvanizing been by metallizing in

conformance with ASTM A780, Method A3 to a thickness of 180 µm?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
3.3 Has the Contractor avoided breaking through the surface treatment of
treated timber piles?
3.3 Have any cuts or breaks in the surface of treated timber piles been
given three brush coats of preservative material of approved quality,
and has preservative material been poured into all bolt holes?
3 Driven Piles
3.4.1 Have all pile driving equipment, driving methods and procedures been
reviewed and accepted by the Project Manager before pile driving
commences?
3.4.1 Has driving of piles with driving extensions been performed only with
acceptance by the Consultant?
3.4.1 When driving extensions were used, has one pile from each group of
10 been a long pile driven without extensions and used as a test pile
to determine the average capacity of the group?
3.4.1 Has the Contractor painted markings on each pile at 0.25 m intervals
with a label at each 1.0 m interval starting from the toe of the pile?
3.4.1 Has the Contractor taken proper measures to ensure in proper

position and alignment by the use of driving frames and fixed leads?
3.4.1 Were any piles out of the horizontal position by more than 150 mm
after driving?
3.4.1 Were any piles for fully integral abutments out of horizontal position by
more than 50 mm?
3.4.1 Was the variation in position between the pile casing center and the
pile centre more than 25 mm for fully integral abutments?
3.4.1 Were any piles driven with a variation of more than 20 mm per metre
from the vertical or the batter as shown on the drawings?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
3.4.1 Were any piles in exposed bents out of position by more than 50 mm
at the ground line or 25 mm at the pier cap?
3.4.2 Were all required Pile Data forms completed?
3.4.2 Were all piles confirmed to be driven to capacity prior to cut off?
4 Steel Piles
3.4.3 When pipe piles are to be driven closed-ended, has lower section
been supplied with a welded pipe pile end plate in accordance with
Standard Drawing S-1479 “Standard Closed Pipe Pile End Plate”?
3.4.3 Has all foreign material adhering to the inside walls of the pipe piles
been removed?
3.4.3 Has the Contractor reinforced the driving end of the piling or provided
other suitable equipment or procedures to prevent buckling at the
driving end?
3.4.3 Were the piles cut-off level at the accepted elevation?
3.4.3 Has the Contractor supplied and secured temporary caps on all open
pipe piles or drilled holes?
5 Steel Pile Splices

3.4.3.1 Has all field-welding been done in accordance with Section 13.4.1?
3.4.3.1 Where the upper portions of piling are galvanized, has excess piling
been removed from the ungalvanized portion of the piling to ensure
that the galvanized portion extends to the elevation shown on the
drawings?
3.4.3.1 Has all damaged galvanizing been metallized in accordance with
ASTM A780, Method A3 to a thickness of 180 µm?
3
Compliance
Section
SSBC
3.4.3.2 Has the Contractor performed ultrasonic testing for a minimum of 20%
of all full penetration compression splice welds at all piles for each
bridge component?
3.4.3.2 Has ultrasonic testing been completed for welds in which visual
inspection indicates the presence of a potential defect?
3.4.3.2 Has the Contractor tested 100% of full penetration tension splice
welds as identified on the drawings?
3.4.3.2 Has ultrasonic testing been done by a company certified to CAN/CSA

W178.1?
3.4.3.2 Were ultrasonic testing technicians certified to Level II of Canadian

General Standards Board (CGSB)?
6 Field Welding – Structural Members – Section 13

13.4.1 Has all welding, cutting and preparation been done in accordance with
the American Welding Society (AWS) – Bridge Welding Code D1.5?
13.4.1 Were the welders performing the weldments approved by the

Canadian Welding Bureau in the particular category, and was their
qualification current and available for examination?
13.4.1 Have the welding procedures been approved by the Canadian

Welding Bureau and submitted for review prior to welding?
13.4.1 Were low hydrogen filler, fluxes and welding practices used in
accordance with SSBC Section 6.2.5.1?
13.4.1 When the air temperature is below 10°C, has all material to be welded
been preheated to 100°C for a distance of 80 mm beyond the weld
and sheltered from the wind?
13.4.1 Has welding been permitted when the air temperature is below 0°C,
other than with suitable hoarding and heating provided?
4
Compliance
Section
SSBC
7 Drilled Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles

3.5.2 Have all equipment, drilling methods and procedures been reviewed
and accepted before drilling started?
3.5.4 Have drilled pile holes been stabilized and sealed by means of
temporary casings or other methods to prevent the possible collapse
of the pile holes or ingress of water?
3.5.4 Was temporary casing, if used in drilling operations, removed from the
hole as pile concrete was placed?
3.5.4 Has the bottom of the casing been maintained below the top of the
concrete during withdrawal and placing operations unless otherwise
permitted?
3.5.4 Have the walls and bottoms of the pile holes been cleaned to remove
all loose and extraneous material?
3.5.4 Has pile reinforcement and pile concrete been placed with acceptance
of the Inspector?
3.5.5 Has the Contractor covered all open holes at the site until the time
they are filled with concrete or otherwise properly backfilled?
3.5.5 Were the covers of adequate strength and securely fitted so that
machinery and workmen were protected against cave-ins and so that
surface water was prevented from entering the pile hole?
3.5.6 Has steel reinforcement been fabricated to the sizes and dimensions
shown on the drawings and placed, centered and braced in the pile
hole?
3.5.6 Has projecting reinforcing steel been located to a tolerance not

exceeding 10 mm in any direction?
3.5.6 Have adequate “shoes” or spacers been firmly attached to the

reinforcement cage to ensure that it is kept centered in the pile hole?
5
Compliance
Section
SSBC
8 Concrete Placement for Drilled Piles – Section 4

4.15.1 General – Has the Contractor made all attempts necessary to obtain a
dry pile hole prior to placing pile concrete?
Note: If, in the opinion of the Consultant and the Department, all
attempts to achieve a dry pile hole have been taken and proven
unsuccessful, placement of pile concrete by tremie will be required.
4.15.2 Concrete Placed in the Dry – Was pile concrete placed by means of a
hopper equipped with a centre pipe drop tube with concrete in the
upper 3 m of the piles consolidated?
4.15.3 Concrete Placed Under Water – Was placement of pile concrete

under water in accordance with Section 4.22 of the Standard
Specifications for Bridge Construction?
4.15.3 Crosshole Sonic Logging (CSL) – Did the Contractor submit the
proposed method for review two (2) weeks before beginning drilled
pile work?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor supply and install four (4) 50 mm inside diameter
tubes in each drilled pile with a diameter of 1.5 m or less and six (6)
tubes in each pile with a diameter of greater than 1.5 m?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor install the tubes in a manner such that the CSL
probes pass through the entire length of the tube without binding?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor fit the tubes with watertight shoes on the bottom
and removable caps on the top, and did he ensure that the CSL tubes
were not damaged during the installation of the reinforcement cage?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor make CSL measurements at depth intervals of 65

mm from the bottom of the tubes to the top of each pile, and upon
completion of testing and acceptance of the pile concrete, were the
tubes filled with an approved grout mix?
4.15.3 Qualification – Did the testing agency hired by the Contractor have a
minimum of three (3) years’ experience in CSL testing?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor provide written evidence of completion of all CSL
tests by the testing agency?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor’s submission include personnel qualifications and

descriptions of testing equipment?
6
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.15.3 CSL Results – Did the Contractor submit two (2) original copies of the
CSL report to the Consultant within five (5) working days of completion
of CSL testing, signed and sealed by the CSL engineer, including test
summaries, results, analyses and an opinion of the pile concrete’s
suitability for intended use?
4.15.3 Were the summaries in accordance with the criteria listed in Section
4.15.3 Concrete Condition Rating Criteria?
Note: Test results with ratings other than “G” will be considered
unacceptable and will result in rejection of the pile.
4.15.3 Were any piles considered unacceptable by the Consultant and the
Department?
4.15.3 If remedial action is required, has the Contractor submitted a remedial

action proposal with supporting calculations to the Department and the
Consultant for review and acceptance?
9 4.20 – Concreting in Cold Weather

3.5.8 If the ground against which pile concrete was placed was below -5°C,
was the pile hole oversized by 100 mm?
3.5.8 Was the top exposed surface of the pile concrete protected with
insulated tarps or other means to adequately cure the concrete for a
period of seven (7) days?
3.5.8 If the pile extended above the ground, did the Contractor protect the
concrete as per Section 4 “Concreting in Cold Weather” of the
Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction?
4.21 Did the Contractor submit details of his proposed cold weather
concreting plan to the Consultant for review and acceptance a
minimum of two (2) weeks prior to any concrete placement?
4.21 Did the Contractor enclose the structure in such a way that the
concrete and air within the enclosure was kept above 15°C for a
period of 21 days after placing the concrete.
4.21 Was the enclosure constructed large enough to comfortably

accommodate the men and equipment necessary to place, finish and
cure the concrete?
4.21 Was the relative humidity within the enclosure maintained at not less
than 85%?
7
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.21 Were heaters kept well clear of the formwork housing and was
adequate ventilation provided for combustion, and prevention of
carbon dioxide accumulation?
Note: The use of salamanders, coke stoves, oil or gas burners and
similar spot heaters that have an open flame and intense local heat is
prohibited without the Consultant's specific acceptance.
4.21 Was adequate pre-heat provided to raise the temperature of
formwork, reinforcing steel, previously-placed concrete and/or soil to
between 10°C and 20°C before placing concrete?
4.21 Was fully insulated formwork used as an alternative to providing

further heat during the curing period?
4.21 Was concrete curing in accordance with the requirements of

Subsection 4.23 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge
Construction?
4.21 Was the adequacy of protection monitored and recorded a minimum

of every four (4) hours for the first 72 hours and every eight (8) hours
for the remainder of the curing period, including measurement of
internal and surface concrete temperatures?
4.21 Was protection and heating, where used, withdrawn in such a manner
so as not to induce thermal shock stresses in the concrete, with the
temperature of the concrete gradually reduced at a rate not exceeding
10°C per day to that of the surrounding air?
4.21 Did the Contractor measure the temperature of internal concrete,
surface of the concrete and ambient air temperatures a minimum of
every four (4) hours and make adjustments as necessary to keep the
rate of cooling within the specified parameters?
4.21 Did the Contractor demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Consultant
that the requirements of the cold weather concreting plan were met?
10 Pile Tolerance for Drilled Piles

3.5.9 Were the piles within 50 mm of the horizontal position and within 20
mm of vertical or batter position as shown on the drawings?
3.5.9 Did the Contractor make immediate changes to his piling procedures
and correct any piles where tolerances were not met?
8
Signature Date
9
Diesel hammer and crane showing “fixed” box Diesel hammer and crane showing “hanging”
leads. leads.
Hydraulic pile driving hammer. Pile offset line Pile driving frame used to position piles accurately
marked with paint. at the start of driving. Frame is anchored by
welding to soldier piles.

Diesel hammer piling rig shown. Centre of pile Batterboards and string line set up with 2x4s.
marked out by pins or flags. H-pile orientation String line offset to re-establish pile location.
painted on ground.
Pile driving at abutment seat location. Piles are H-pile splice detail. Splice plates are welded to the
marked at 250 mm intervals. pile extension, the pile is stacked on the previously
driven pile, and the extension is then welded to the
pile.

Tack welding of H-pile splices. 50% of final welds Completed H-pile splice welds.
are completed before releasing H-pile from crane.
PDA testing instrumentation consists of PDA testing technicians and instrumentation.

accelerometers that return driving force information
for analysis.

Piling rig with auger and soil tailings. Slush bucket, coring barrel and augers shown.
Rock bit auger. Break-up bucket attachment used to loosen hard

soils and break up rocks and other obstructions.

Large muck or slush bucket, used to clean out the

bottom of wet or muddy holes prior to cage
placement.
Drilling auger and tailings. Offset measurement Belling tool, fully opened. Wings are opened at the
used to confirm pile location. tip elevation to create a belled pile.

Drilling frame used to achieve pile location Drilling pile holes with casing installed. Casing is
accuracy. used temporarily to keep the excavation from
caving in, or to stop seepage. Casing is removed
during concrete placement.
Vibratory hammer used to advance drilling casing. Drilling rig used to advance drilling casing. Kelly
Worker checking if casing is plumb. bar advances the casing into the excavation. For
larger diameters, a vibratory hammer or an
oscillator is used to advance the casing.

Splicing pipe pile. Bevelled edge with backing plate Splicing pipe pile shown after fit-up.
shown.
Splicing of galvanized and plain pipe piles. Hoarding for welding required during cold and
Galvanized pipe piles used above grade. windy conditions.

Vibratory hammer used to advance drilling casing. Wire brush clean up bucket attachment.
Water pump may be required to maintain a dry Plastic spacer chairs attached to bottom of
hole. reinforcing steel cage to prevent the cage from
punching through the base of the excavation.

Wheel spacers are used to maintain required cover Concrete hopper for discharging concrete through
for pile cages. pile cage.
Concrete pumped through tremmie pipe. Cross- Vibrating top of pile. Efforts should be made to
hole Sonic Log (CSL) pipe attached to reinforcing keep reinforcing steel free of paste.
steel (black pipes).

H-pile set into centre of concrete pile. Steel frame Cross-hole Sonic Log (CSL) testing equipment.
used to set location and elevation.
Large 3.0 m diameter pile. Muck bucket attached. Piling ongoing. Checking depth of pile and
condition of base.

Large 3.0 m diameter pre-fabricated cage. Extra Double crane pick for reinforcing steel cage
support / bracing used to retain shape and stability installation. Halo ring and extra reinforcement
for lifting. required to pick large cage.
Concrete discharge down centre of pile by pump. Vibratory hammer used to remove temporary
Pump hose centred so that concrete does not drilling casing.
impact reinforcing steel.

Construction joint at pile top. Galvanized pipe piles at exposed pier columns.

PILE DATA
Date:
Project: Contract No: Bridge File No.
Project Sponsor: Contractor:
Consultant Inspector: Piling Sub:
Ground/Ice Elevation: Location: Sta : m rt/ft Abut/Pier No:
Pile No: Pile Type: Pile Length:
Type of Hammer: Mass/Energy of Hammer: kg/kj
Efficiency Factor:
Remarks:
Depth of Number Drop of Depth of Number Drop of

Pile of Hammer Remarks Pile of Hammer Remarks
(m) Blows (m) (m) Blows (m)
0.00 - 0.25 8:00 - 8.25
0.25 - 0.50 8.25 - 8.50
0.50 - 0.75 8.50 - 8.75
0.75 - 1.00 8.75 - 9.00
1.00 - 1.25 9.00 - 9.25
1.25 - 1.50 9.25 - 9.50
1.50 - 1.75 9.50 - 9.75
1.75 - 2.00 9.75 - 10.00
2.00 - 2.25 10.00 - 10.25
2.25 - 2.50 10.25 - 10.50
2.50 - 2.75 10.50 - 10.75
2.75 - 3.00 10.75 - 11.00
3.00 - 3.25 11.00 - 11.25
3.25 - 3.50 11.25 - 11.50
3.50 - 3.75 11.50 - 11.75
3.75 - 4.00 11.75 - 12.00
4.00 - 4.25 12.00 - 12.25
4.25 - 4.50 12.25 - 12.50
4.50 - 4.75 12.50 - 12.75
4.75 - 5.00 12.75 - 13.00
5.00 - 5.25 13.00 - 13.25
5.25 - 5.50 13.25 - 13.50
5.50 - 5.75 13.50 - 13.75
5.75 - 6.00 13.75 - 14.00
6.00 - 6.25 14.00 - 14.25
6.25 - 6.50 14.25 - 14.50
6.50 - 6.75 14.50 - 14.75
6.75 - 7.00 14.75 - 15.00
7.00 - 7.25 15.00 - 15.25
7.25 - 7.50 15.25 - 15.50
7.50 - 7.75 15.50 - 15.75
7.75 - 8.00 15.75 - 16.00
Revised December 2013 Appendix C.01 Page 1/2
Depth of Number Drop of Depth of Number Drop of
Pile of Hammer Remarks Pile of Hammer Remarks
(m) Blows (m) (m) Blows (m)
16.00 - 16.25 22.00 - 22.25
16.25 - 16.50 22.25 - 22.50
16.50 - 16.75 22.50 - 22.75
16.75 - 17.00 22.75 - 23.00
17.00 - 17.25 23.00 - 23.25
17.25 - 17.50 23.25 - 23.50
17.50 - 17.75 23.50 - 23.75
17.75 - 18.00 23.75 - 24.00
18.00 - 18.25 24.00 - 24.25
18.25 - 18.50 24.25 - 24.50
18.50 - 18.75 24.50 - 24.75
18.75 - 19.00 24.75 - 25.00
19.00 - 19.25 25.00 - 25.25
19.25 - 19.50 25.25 - 25.50
19.50 - 19.75 25.50 - 25.75
19.75 - 20.00 25.75 - 26.00
20.00 - 20.25 26.00 - 26.25
20.25 - 20.50 26.25 - 26.50
20.50 - 20.75 26.50 - 26.75
20.75 - 21.00 26.75 - 27.00
21.00 - 21.25 27.00 - 27.25
21.25 - 21.50 27.25 - 27.50
21.50 - 21.75 27.50 - 27.75
21.75 - 22.00 27.75 - 28.00
SKETCH OF PILE LOCATION
NOTE: SHOW NORTH ARROW Page 2/2

Revised December 2013 Appendix C.01
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.4 Concrete Basics ........................................................................................................... 4-3
4.5 Concrete Construction Activities ............................................................................... 4-4
4.5.1 Concrete Production......................................................................................... 4-4
4.5.2 Trial Batching ................................................................................................... 4-4
4.5.3 Inspection and Testing ..................................................................................... 4-5
4.5.3.1 Mix Confirmation .......................................................................................... 4-5
4.5.3.2 On-Site Batch Testing .................................................................................. 4-5
4.5.3.3 Storage of Cylinders .................................................................................... 4-6
4.5.4 Formwork ......................................................................................................... 4-6

4.5.4.1 Deck Formwork ............................................................................................ 4-8
4.5.5 Reinforcing Steel Placement ............................................................................ 4-8

4.5.6 Pre-Concrete Placement Dry Run Deck Check Procedure ............................... 4-8
4.5.7 Concrete Delivery ............................................................................................. 4-8
4.5.8 Concrete Discharge.......................................................................................... 4-9
4.5.8.1 Chute Discharge .......................................................................................... 4-9
4.5.8.2 Mobile Boom Pump...................................................................................... 4-9
4.5.8.3 Crane and Bucket ...................................................................................... 4-10
4.5.8.4 Tremie Method ........................................................................................... 4-10
4.5.9 Placing ........................................................................................................... 4-10

4.5.9.1 Workability ................................................................................................. 4-10
4.5.9.2 Consistency ............................................................................................... 4-10
4.5.9.3 Consolidation ............................................................................................. 4-11
4.5.9.4 Segregation ................................................................................................ 4-12
4.5.9.5 Initial Set and Final Set .............................................................................. 4-12
4.5.9.6 Pile Caps, Abutment Seats and Pier Caps ................................................ 4-13
4.5.9.7 Decks and Barriers .................................................................................... 4-13
4.5.9.8 Construction Joints .................................................................................... 4-13
4.5.10 Finishing Plastic Concrete .............................................................................. 4-13

4.5.10.1 Evaporation Reducer on Decks ................................................................. 4-14
4.5.11 Curing ............................................................................................................ 4-14
4.5.11.1 Wet Curing ................................................................................................. 4-15
4.5.11.2 Form Curing ............................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.11.3 Curing Compounds .................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.11.4 Maintaining Temperature Differentials During Curing ............................... 4-15
4.5.11.5 Concrete Cracks Resulting from Inadequate Curing ................................. 4-16
4.5.12 Removal of Forms .......................................................................................... 4-16

4.5.13 Concrete Surface Finishing ............................................................................ 4-17
4.6 Special Considerations ............................................................................................. 4-17
4.6.1 Placing Pile Concrete by Tremie Method ........................................................ 4-17
4.6.2 Cold Weather Concrete .................................................................................. 4-17
4.6.3 Hot Weather Concrete.................................................................................... 4-18
4.6.4 Protection of Weathering Steel Girders .......................................................... 4-18
4.6.5 Protection of Concrete Work from Staining ..................................................... 4-19
4.7 Concrete Slope Protection ........................................................................................ 4-19
4.7.1.1 Lay-out ....................................................................................................... 4-19
4.7.1.2 Installation .................................................................................................. 4-20
4.7.1.3 Curing......................................................................................................... 4-21
4.8 Rejection and Payment.............................................................................................. 4-21

4.9 Inspector’s Role ......................................................................................................... 4-21
4.9.1 Inspector’s Role Prior to Concrete Placement ................................................ 4-21
4.9.2 Inspector’s Role During Concrete Placement ................................................. 4-22
4.9.3 Inspector’s Role After Concrete Placement .................................................... 4-22
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
FIGURES
 Figure 4 – 1: Deck Geometry Check Procedure

 Figure 4 – 2: Deck Formwork Position Check Procedure
 Figure 4 – 3: Pre-Concrete Placement Dry Run Deck Check Procedure of Reinforcing
Steel Cover, Concrete Thicnkness, Gradeline and Cross-Fall
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 4, Cast-In-Place Concrete
4.1 General
Cast-in-place concrete is commonly used to construct many bridge elements, including piles,
substructures, wingwalls, decks, barriers, approach slabs and slope protection. Unlike most
other bridge materials that are fabricated off-site and under controlled conditions, the quality of
cast-in-place concrete depends primarily on the Contractor’s construction practices. An
acceptable quality of cast-in-place concrete requires attention to batching, transporting,
sampling, testing, forming, placing, curing and finishing. It is important that the Inspector be
knowledgeable about concrete materials and construction practices.
The Contractor’s Environmental Construction Operation (ECO) Plan must contain provisions for
cast-in-place concreting activities that could potentially have an impact on the environment such
as delivery, placement, wash-out and disposal.
Specific precautions must be taken to prevent concrete from entering a watercourse or water
body. The constituents of concrete — especially hydraulic cement and Supplementary
Cementitious Materials (SCMs) — are harmful to aquatic life. Wash-out water or diluted
concrete is often highly alkaline and sufficiently caustic to harm the environment. Contaminated
soil must be isolated and treated or removed from the job site.
In the event of a mixer truck upset or spill, significant environmental damage may occur.
Prevention is achieved through proper planning. Adequate access and staging for concrete
mixer trucks must be provided. Temporary access road grades and turn-around areas must be
designed to accommodate the size of mixers expected. Access roads must have adequate
surfacing, especially in wet conditions. Mixers must be directed through the site by the
Contractor, and must be spotted when driving in reverse to the discharge location. The
Contractor’s site must be equipped with spill kits.
After mixers have discharged, the drum hopper and chutes must be cleaned before returning to
the batch plant. The location and conditions for the wash-out site must be established prior to
the pour, and this information must be communicated effectively by the Contractor to the
concrete supplier. The contaminated cleaning water must be collected and properly disposed of.
Unusable concrete is often discarded at the job site. The source of this concrete may include
material sampled for testing, initial concrete between the 0% and 10% point of mixer discharge
that cannot be tested, concrete used to prime a pump, clean-out of pump lines, or other
concrete that does not meet project requirements. The location for unusable concrete discharge
must be established prior to placement. Precautions must be taken to prevent leachate from the
disposal area.
Many chemicals used at the jobsite have the potential to enter the environment. Form release
oil may leach from stripped and stockpiled forms after rain. Pre-bagged patching materials may
spill.
Leaking forms or form failures may cause concrete contamination. All forming components must
be in place and checked before the start of the placement. Deck forms must be caulked along
girders to prevent paste leakage. Placement rates must be observed, especially for tall
elements where allowable hydrostatic pressures may be exceeded if concrete near the bottom
of the form has not yet started to set. Catastrophic failures may occur that have the potential to
September 2015 4-1

cause significant environmental damage. Forms and cofferdams must be properly designed and
checked, especially for large elements with significant volume and weight of concrete.
Contact with plastic concrete can cause skin irritation, chemical burns and serious eye damage.
Frequent exposure may be associated with irritant or allergic contact dermatitis. Gloves, glasses
and other protective clothing must always be worn when working near concrete.
Contact with hardened concrete dust — as a result of grinding, cutting or drilling — and
exposure to cement and SCMs can result in serious health issues. Inhalation of crystalline silica
may cause silicosis, pneumoconiosis or other serious lung diseases. The effects of exposure
are cumulative over time.
Concrete mixer trucks may pose a significant safety hazard. Deck placement is done at night,
which increases the risk of collisions. Concrete mixer trucks often congest the jobsite during a
pour. Drivers often need to back-up for long distances and may not see those approaching the
truck. Discharge chutes are controlled hydraulically and may come into contact with those
nearby, causing injury. Chutes are extended in sections and a pinching hazard exists during
assembly and disassembly.
Trucks also frequently need to enter the jobsite from a public highway. This must be done while
safely accommodating traffic. Trucks that need to decelerate or accelerate with traffic or merge
into congested traffic can create a dangerous situation for motorists.
Concrete pumps have hydraulic lines, outriggers and other moving parts that are dangerous,
and pump lines or couplers may rupture. It is best to maintain a safe distance from this
equipment whenever possible. The discharge end of the pump line terminates with a section of
flexible hose. This hose can whip and cause injury if not properly operated.
Concrete deck finishing machines have chains, gearwheels, tracks, rollers and other hidden
moving parts that are dangerous. While the deck finisher is in operation, personnel must not be
near the carriage augers or rollers. The deck finisher may move along the screed rails at
unpredictable rates. Pinching at the screed or carriage rail locations is a significant hazard.
Hands and feet must not be in contact with the finisher or the screed rails at any time during
operation.
Impaling hazard due to protruding reinforcing steel often exists at locations such as barriers and
abutment seats. Projecting reinforcing steel must be protected with high visibility “mushroom”
type caps if there is an impaling hazard due to falling.
When walking on placed reinforcing steel, care must be taken to avoid tripping or falling through
the reinforcing steel mat. Tie wires may detach under the weight of an individual, causing the
bars to shift and creating further hazards.
During cold weather concreting, hoarding and heating is required. If improperly vented,
poisonous gases may be generated by heating equipment. Proper ventilation of hoardings must
be confirmed before entering.
In addition to the minimum Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) required by Occupational

Health and Safety (OHS) and described in Section D, wrap-around safety glasses and gloves
are necessary when working near concrete.
September 2015 4-2

4.4 Concrete Basics
Concrete consists of paste and aggregates. The paste is comprised of hydraulic cement,
supplementary cementitious materials, water and admixutures. Aggregates are classified as fine
and coarse.
 Fine aggregates consist of natural or manufactured sand and are sometimes blended from
different sources to achieve a more desirable gradation.
 Coarse aggregates consist of crushed gravels. Their size limits are prescribed in the
specifications. Strength requirements, formwork and reinforcing steel congestion, mass
concrete and shrinkage limitations are factors which affect the maximum desired size of
coarse aggregate.
 Hydraulic Cement: The types of hydraulic cement currently used for bridge projects in
Alberta include Type GU (general use), HS (high sulphate resistant) and HSb (high-sulphate
resistant blended).
 Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCMs): SCMs are commonly combined with
hydraulic cements to enhance concrete properties and to increase the number of locally
available aggregate sources for concrete production. Fly ash and silica fume are the most
commonly used SCMs in Alberta. The finer particle size of these SCMs contribute most
notably to lower permeability and higher compressive strengths.
 Admixtures are added to concrete before or during mixing to enhance durability, workability
and to maintain the quality of concrete throughout construction processes. Common
admixtures used in Department concrete mixes include air entrainers, water reducers,
hydration stabilizers and anti-washout products.
o Air entrainers introduce, distribute and stabilize microscopic air bubbles into
concrete. The dosage and effectiveness of air entrainers can be affected by
numerous factors. Interaction with superplasticizer may increase air content,
SCMs may decrease air content, hot ambient or concrete temperatures and
delays may decrease air content, and pumping may decrease air content.
Specified test methods must be followed closely to confirm the accurate
measurement of air content.
Too much air content can be detrimental to concrete strength and durability. The
downward adjustment of air is not permitted because methods such as turning
the drum at mixing speed at the job site or addition of air detraining admixtures
do not consistently or effectively reduce air content. If a concrete batch is
determined to have too much air content, it must be rejected.
o Normal range water reducers are used to minimize the quantity of water required
to produce concrete of a given consistency. For ready mix concrete supply, these
admixtures are added at the batch plant and not at the job site. Water-reducing
admixtures are classified into several different types.
Water-reducing admixtures that reduce the amount of mixing water by 12% or

more are commonly referred to as high range water reducers or
superplasticizers. Superplasticizers improve concrete workability and reduce the
vibration effort required for consolidation. Thin elements or those with reinforcing
steel congestion benefit significantly from the addition of superplasticizers. The
effect of superplasticizer is short-lived, generally 30 to 60 minutes, after which the
lubricating effect diminishes and a loss of slump and workability follows.
Superplasticizer is therefore often added at the job site.
September 2015 4-3

o Hydration-stabilizing admixtures (HSAs) coat cementing material particles to

delay hydration processes/set times. The HSA coating breaks down over time.
The use of HSAs is permitted, but only under circumstances where there is a
unique structural need to increase the time of haul, or where time of haul is
significantly increased beyond the Contractor’s control. HSAs are sometimes
used in pile concrete to provide additional working time for cage adjustments and
casing removal. Sometimes, HSAs are used in substructure elements as a
precaution for the prevention of cold joints in the event of a delivery disruption.
HSAs can adversely affect the workability and set times of concrete resulting in
surface crusting, finishing challenges and the delayed application of wet cure
systems. They must not be used in deck concrete unless necessary and only
with the acceptance of the Department.
o Anti-washout admixtures are typically used in tremie concrete mixes where

flowing water is encountered, such as with cofferdams. For placement under very
low flow conditions, an increase in cement content is often utilized in lieu of anti-
washout admixtures. Anti-washout admixtures increase the cohesiveness of
concrete and reduce the loss of cement and fines, but in high doses they may
reduce compressive strength.
4.5 Concrete Construction Activities
4.5.1 Concrete Production
Batching is the process used to measure and combine materials for the production of concrete.
Materials are batched by weight and/or volume according to mix design requirements. The
accuracy of measurement and the sequence in which materials are combined is important to
produce consistent, high-quality concrete.
For bridge projects, concrete is most commonly produced by ready-mix methods. Large volume
suppliers typically produce concrete using highly efficient wet-batching processes, while smaller
suppliers tend to use dry-batching processes. In wet-batching or central-mixed processes, all
materials are mixed at a stationary plant prior to being discharged into a mixer truck for delivery.
Dry-batching or transit-mixed processes charge all materials into the mixer truck prior to
delivery. In both wet and dry batching processes, the only materials permitted for addition to the
batch once it has left the plant are air-entraining and superplasticizing admixtures.
Concrete can be produced on site using portable batch plants or pre-bagged materials, which is
called “site-batching”. Site-batching is more commonly utilized in remote areas where concrete
supply is not readily available or where large project concrete volumes render it cost effective.
Successful site-batching requires experienced personnel and equipment in good working
condition. Trial batches for all classes of concrete are encouraged when site-batching is
considered.
4.5.2 Trial Batching
Trial batches are generally performed at the concrete plant. Trial batches are required for Class
HPC concrete and for any class of concrete containing HSAs. The Inspector must attend trial
batch testing. If any tested properties of the plastic or hardened concrete do not meet the
specified requirements, the mix design must be adjusted and the trial batch repeated. Special
attention must be given to slump retention and to set times for HSA mixes. This information
must be used by the Contractor to plan his pour and schedule finishing operations.
September 2015 4-4

If during the project mix proportions are modified or if sources of mix constituents change, a new
trial batch is required.
4.5.3 Inspection and Testing
4.5.3.1 Mix Confirmation
When concrete arrives at the job site, the Inspector must review the delivery ticket to confirm
that the mix number and corresponding class of concrete is correct. The delivery ticket typically
contains a machine-printed batch time, which the Inspector should use to determine the time of
haul. The punched batch time indicates when the cement first came into contact with the mix
water.
4.5.3.2 On-Site Batch Testing
The Contractor is required to use certified testers to complete on-site batch testing. Air content,
density, slump and temperature must be tested and recorded for each batch of plastic concrete
delivered to site. The on-site testers may be employed either by the Contractor or by the
concrete supplier. The test procedures must be conducted in strict accordance with specification
requirements, and the Contractor is required to provide a proper work area for testers and their
equipment.
The Contractor’s test results become part of the project record. If the Contractor uses certified
testers that are independent from the concrete supplier and the concrete supplier also performs
testing, only one set of these tests may form the project record to be used for acceptance and
payment. The identification of testers and verification of their certifications must be done prior to
concrete placement. The Consultant/Inspector may perform his own testing that may be used to
confirm acceptance of the concrete; however, these results do not form part of the project
record.
When concrete arrives at the job site, slump and air testing is often done by the concrete
supplier’s QC technician. This is to establish a baseline for the site-addition of admixtures and to
confirm that the batching process is producing consistent concrete. Generally, the concrete
supplier will indicate to the Contractor that the delivered plastic concrete is ready for record
testing and acceptance.
The specifications require that, when sampling from a mixer truck, the test sample be taken
between the 10% and 90% points of discharge. A sample taken “off the top of the load” may not
be as homogeneous as the concrete that is between the 10% and 90% points. As the first 10%
of concrete from the mixer truck is not permitted for testing, this concrete is of unknown quality.
If the Contractor initially lacks confidence in the concrete quality, he may elect to discard this
portion of the load. Conversely, he may place it into the forms in anticipation that the testing will
confirm its acceptance. The Contractor assumes all risk for any placed concrete that does not
meet specification requirements. The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor is fully aware
that placed concrete consequently deemed unacceptable needs to be removed, and that this
may result in extensive rework and delay to the pour. The Contractor must be strongly
cautioned against discharging an entire batch of concrete before test results have confirmed its
acceptance.
When concrete is placed by pump, it is important to determine when a new batch is discharging
through the pump hose. The initial 10% of the load is often not discarded due to practical delays
in repositioning the pump’s boom for each batch delivered. The Inspector must closely monitor
September 2015 4-5

that the Contractor accurately determines when a new batch is discharging through the pump so
that proper sampling for testing may be done at the correct frequency. Familiarity with pump
equipment and bore-stroke counts can assist in determination of volumes being transported
through the lines. When concrete is pumped, sampling must be done at the point of discharge.
Where lubricants have been used to prime pump lines, the initial concrete must not be
incorporated into the Work until the lubricants have been flushed.
For large pours, it is common that more than one concrete mixer truck will discharge into a
pump hopper at the same time. In this case, it is important that the Contractor understands that
if tests are not acceptable for one batch then any blended concrete that has already been
discharged from both batches will be deemed unacceptable.
The Inspector must have access to witness sampling and testing. If test results are highly
variable or at the limits of the acceptance criteria, the Inspector may require re-tests or perform
his own quality assurance testing. The Inspector may either accept or reject concrete based on
test results and must communicate this clearly to the Contractor as each batch is tested.
4.5.3.3 Storage of Cylinders
Care must be taken to protect freshly prepared cylinders and must follow the requirements of
CSA A23.2-3C, Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexural Test Specimens.
Cylinders must not be exposed to extreme temperatures or freezing conditions during storage or
transport. Cylinders must not be exposed to damaging vibrations, such as those that exist in a
site trailer. Cylinders on site must be stored in a temperature-controlled curing box in
accordance with specification requirements.
Field-cured cylinders are generally used to determine when formwork and falsework may be
removed. Field-cured cylinders must be exposed to the same environmental conditions as the
element represented. If stored in a hoarding, field-cured cylinders must not be located near
locally hot or cold areas.
Concrete cylinders must be properly labelled and coded for identification. Labels and
identification must be in compliance with the template forms provided in the specifications.
4.5.4 Formwork
All concrete elements require formwork, except for piles that are poured into neatly drilled
excavations. Formwork materials may consist of dimensional lumber, plywood, prefabricated
steel or other materials.
 Deck interior bays are commonly formed using timber materials. Adjustable metal hangers
support wooden or aluminum ledgers, which support joists and plywood. Deck overhangs
are constructed using knee-braces, which bear on the exterior girder webs, which support
joists and plywood.
 Pile caps, columns, abutment seats and pier caps may be formed from timber or pre-
fabricated steel forms. The forming system used may depend on schedule since pre-
fabricated forms may be erected and cycled more rapidly.
 Wingwalls are typically formed of timber due to their irregular shapes. Timber systems
typically use a combination of studs, walers and strongbacks as main structural members,
studs and strongbacks typically being vertical and walers being horizontal.
 Pier columns are typically formed using pre-fabricated steel forms due to their circular cross-
sectional shape.
September 2015 4-6

 Anchor bolt void forms are most suitably fabricated of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with a
weakened cross section to facilitate subsequent removal.
Falsework includes temporary structures used to support formwork during erection. Formwork is
a temporary structure used to contain concrete until it has sufficient strength to support itself.
Often, falsework and formwork are used together. The rigidity, geometry, form facing and joint
details may greatly affect the final performance and appearance of the element. Falsework used
during winter must take into consideration the effects of ground thawing or heaving. Settlement
may occur during pre-heating of hoarding enclosures.
The Contractor is responsible for the design, construction, inspection and performance of
formwork and falsework. Formwork must be designed to withstand concrete pressures without
appreciable deflections and meet specification requirements. Falsework must be designed to
adequately support or brace formwork without settlement.
Formwork and falsework drawings — including all hardware — must bear the seal of a
Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Alberta. Often, the Contractor will have
typical drawings for a type of forming system or detail. These generic drawings may form part of
the drawing package, but the drawing package must be site-specific. The formwork designer
has the responsibility to confirm that the work is completed in accordance with the drawings. A
formwork and falsework inspection must be done by the Contractor prior to the pour. This is
particularly important for large elements where a form failure would pose a safety hazard, result
in discharge of concrete into a watercourse, or cause significant delay or damage.
The integrity of formwork for tall elements often limits the rate of concrete placement. Limitations
are placed to allow the concrete in the lower portion of the forms to sufficiently set before the
pour is complete. If the pour rate is exceeded, or if the concrete sets at a rate slower than
anticipated, the form may fail or distort due to larger hydrostatic pressure. Special
considerations must be given to concrete containing HSAs.
The condition of the formwork will directly affect the appearance of the finished concrete. This is
of particular importance for elements that will receive a Class 2 or 3 finish. Elements with a
specified Class 2 or 3 finish may only be formed with new sheets of plywood having a resin-
impregnated paper overlay and factory treated chemically active release agent.
Plywood panels must be of the approved type and in acceptable condition. Joints must be
neatly and properly aligned with care. Joints must be minimized by planning formwork
construction so that full sheets of plywood are used wherever possible. Where discontinuities in
smoothness occur at the edges of plywood forming sheets, these will be reflected onto the
concrete surface. For highly visible elements, only minor grinding to correct these discontinuities
is permitted by the specifications. Parging to correct deficiencies is never permitted. It is of the
highest importance to correct formwork deficiencies before concrete placement because
finishing operations cannot properly correct formwork deficiencies.
Care and attention must be given to positioning formwork against hardened concrete,
particularly at the construction joints of highly visible elements such as the exterior faces of
curbs/barriers and wingwalls. Pour strips must be used to create a neat construction joint at the
exterior concrete surface. Formwork must be securely attached to hardened concrete. If
formwork is not in intimate contact with the hardened concrete, paste may leak from the form
resulting in hardened fins.
September 2015 4-7

Care must be given in the positioning of chamfer strips, blockouts and fillets. Misalignment of
these strips will be highly visible and unsightly.
4.5.4.1 Deck Formwork
After girder erection is complete, the Inspector must profile the girders at the 10 th or 20th points
independently by conducting his own survey. These values are compared to the Contractor’s
values and must be in agreement prior to the determination of theoretical haunch depths. The
Inspector must compare his calculated theoretical haunch depths to those calculated by the
Contractor prior to the start of deck formwork placement.
The Inspector must check that the Contractor has accommodated any required camber in the
deck formwork and supporting rails for the deck finishing machine. Allowance for deflection of
forms during concrete placement must be accounted for. Formwork hardware mechanisms must
be installed to allow for adjustment. A description of the procedure for verifying the Contractor’s
deck formwork installation and setting is provided in Figures 4-1 and 4-2.
Deck formwork must be adequately sealed to prevent paste leakage.
4.5.5 Reinforcing Steel Placement
Reinforcing steel must be cleaned of all deleterious materials including mud, oil, concrete,
mortar and other substances that prevent the necessary bond between the concrete and
reinforcing steel. Mud and fresh concrete can be removed readily with high-pressure washing or
wire brushing.
Where practical, projecting reinforcing steel must be protected from mortar and paste
accumulation by covering with tubing or polyethylene plastic sheeting. When placing concrete
into deep forms with layers of bars, the discharge end of the pump hose must be as low as
possible to prevent paste contamination of upper bars. Concrete must not be deposited on
upper layers of reinforcing steel, even when upper bars are to be covered with concrete later
during the same placement, since when it dries it may act as a bond-breaker.
When the Contractor applies form oil, he must ensure that no spray contaminates reinforcing
steel. Oil-less air compressors must be used to prevent contamination. Oils can be removed by
using a combination of solvent wiping and high-pressure washing.
4.5.6 Pre-Concrete Placement Dry Run Deck Check Procedure
After reinforcing steel has been acceptably placed over the entire deck area, the dry run may
commence. This process is described in Figure 4-3. The Inspector must review the schedule
and staffing with the Contractor to confirm that the Contractor intends to provide sufficient time
and resources. The dry run is an iterative process and the Inspector plays an integral role in the
determination of the dry run values. The Inspector must review the Contractor’s results and
review the Contractor’s proposed corrective action until the desired results are achieved.
4.5.7 Concrete Delivery
Concrete mixer trucks must be the revolving-drum type for the delivery of concrete to the site.
Mixer trucks can mix concrete as required by the dry-batch process or agitate concrete in a wet-
batch process to keep the mix homogeneous. Mixing or agitating action depends on the speed
of drum revolution. The interior of the drum is fitted with a helical screw blade. When turned in
September 2015 4-8

one direction, the drum mixes or agitates the concrete. When turned in the other direction,
concrete is discharged from the opening in the drum. Worn fins or overloading of the drum can
affect the mixer’s performance. When truck mixing, it is important that the drum spins at
charging speed for the required number of revolutions. It is also important that concrete is
remixed after arrival and after the site addition of superplasticizer and air entrainer. The
concrete must be adequately mixed before any samples are drawn for testing. Evidence of
inadequate mixing or incorrect batch sequencing may include ineffectiveness of admixtures,
clumping of cementitious materials and balling of fibres.
Mixer truck drums have varying rated maximum capacities depending on if it is used as a mixer
or an agitator. Drums typically have capacities that range from 5 m3 for tandem trucks to 8 m3
for tridem trucks to 11 m3 for trailers. Smaller trucks sometimes increase their capacity through
the use of booster axles. Concrete mixer drums may be made of steel or fiberglass, the latter
having greater capacity due to lower drum weight.
4.5.8 Concrete Discharge
4.5.8.1 Chute Discharge
Concrete is most economically placed directly from a mixer truck chute, which may have a
positive impact on quality as handling requirements are minimized. With chute placement, mixer
trucks need additional time to accurately back into position and chutes may not be able to
efficiently reach all areas of pour. If placing by chute causes unacceptable delays in placement
or the chute is unable to deposit concrete to its final position, other methods will be required.
Elements such as barriers, approach slabs and MSE wall foundation strips can typically be
placed by chute if accessible.
When concrete is deposited by chute into an excavation that results in the freefall of concrete, a
drop tube structure must be used. The purpose of a drop tube structure is to prevent the impact
of concrete into reinforcing steel and other obstructions. Impact may segregate the concrete and
contaminate reinforcing steel with paste. Pile concrete is typically placed using a drop tube
structure.
4.5.8.2 Mobile Boom Pump
Mobile boom pump units (pumps) are commonly used in bridge construction. These pumps
have lines attached to articulating booms of varying length. Pumps can deposit concrete
precisely at its final position.
Concrete properties may change as it is passed through pump lines. Typically, air-entrained
content is lowered, especially if sections of the lines are configured, in the vertical position
where concrete may experience freefall. Mixes must be specifically designed for pumping and
must flow steadily from the discharge hose without air pockets. The pump hopper must remain
continuously full of concrete to avoid air from becoming trapped within the lines. Pumps
frequently experience mechanical problems; it is important that backup pumps are available. Set
up of a pump is time-consuming, so the secondary pump should be readily accessible. When
depositing concrete, the discharge hose end must be lowered into position as closely to the
discharge point as possible; concrete must not freefall or be discharged onto reinforcing steel
and other obstructions.
September 2015 4-9

Mobile line pumps are similar to boom pumps except that their lines are placed horizontally
along the ground to a designated outlet location. They are typically used for large deck
placements where access is not available for mobile boom pumps.
4.5.8.3 Crane and Bucket
Concrete may be placed by crane and bucket. This system is commonly used in precast
facilities and where concrete must be delivered to high elevations in building construction. It is
generally inefficient and not frequently utilized in bridge construction.
4.5.8.4 Tremie Method
When standing water exists within a form or excavation and this water cannot be removed prior
to placing, concrete is placed by tremie. The tremie method utilizes a tube fitted with a hopper
into which concrete is discharged. The lower end of the tube is equipped with a valve or seal
such as a ball bladder that will prevent the entry of water. This tube is placed into the water with
the outlet at the bottom of the form or excavation. As concrete is discharged, the water above is
displaced. The low end of the tube remains below the concrete surface at all times during
placement.
Tremie methods are typically used for piles and mudslabs of cofferdams. A small portion of the
concrete at the top of the pour typically consists of a water-weakened concrete or laitance,
which must be removed. Concrete placed by tremie is not vibrated.
4.5.9 Placing
4.5.9.1 Workability
Workability is an important property of freshly mixed concrete. It is related to the amount of

effort required to place concrete using a specific method of discharge. A concrete is said to be
workable if it is easily transported, placed, consolidated and finished without segregation or loss
of homogeneity. Workability is most affected by consistency (ability to flow) and cohesiveness
(ability to resist segregation).
Workability is not a fundamental property of concrete, and workability requirements may differ
from element to element and Contractor to Contractor. A less workable concrete may be
acceptable for a pile or mass pour, but not for a wall or deck which has thinner sections and
more reinforcing steel congestion. Concrete with reduced workability may result in surface air
pockets or bugholes, honeycombing or other defects.
4.5.9.2 Consistency
Consistency of freshly mixed concrete describes the ease with which it flows. The slump test is
used to measure consistency of different batches of concrete made from the same mix
proportions.
Slump loss is the reduction in slump from the time of batching to the time when concrete is
placed into its final position. Concrete slump decreases with time as a result of hydraulic cement
hydration and evaporation. The rate of slump loss should be predictable and demonstrated
through trial batching when required.
Slump is not an accurate measure of water content where superplasticizers are added at the
batch plant. In some cases, superplasticizer is added both at the plant and at the site. The
September 2015 4-10

supplier may elect to transport the concrete to the site at a slump that is less than that specified,
and then add superplasticizer at the site to raise the slump. This is done to minimize the slump
loss during discharge and placing. The actual value of the slump of concrete arriving at the site
is not necessarily of great significance. What is important is that all batches arrive at the job site
with slumps that are consistent. If slumps differ significantly between batches, an undesirable
inconsistency exists that needs to be identified and addressed.
4.5.9.3 Consolidation
Consolidation is the means by which concrete is compacted to remove entrapped air.

Consolidation is most often achieved through mechanical vibration. Internal vibrators, either
electric or gas, are most commonly used to achieve concrete consolidation by transmitting
pulses through specialized heads. Vibrator heads come in different configurations that are
designed for the application. It is also important that vibrators have a sufficient length to reach
the required location. External vibrators can be attached to forms, but these may only be used if
accepted by the Consultant.
Proper vibration technique includes placing the vibrator into the concrete at a vertical
orientation, as deeply as necessary to consolidate the entire lift and into the lift below as
applicable. The vibrator is slowly withdrawn and will demonstrate a radius of effect. Within this
radius, entrapped air will be released from the surface and paste will begin to rise. The size of
this radius is determined both by the characteristics of the vibrator and by the consistency of the
concrete. The head must remain embedded in the concrete until the entrapped air is no longer
visibly released and before appreciable paste accumulates at the surface.
Vibration must be done systematically following a grid pattern. Without adopting a systematic
method of vibration, regions of concrete may be neglected and not properly consolidated. The
spacing of the grid pattern must be determined by trial and error to determine the radius of
action. When the head is moved to the next position, the radius of action must overlap the
radius of action from the previous position. In this way, no area of concrete will be left
unconsolidated.
Special attention must be given to areas with congested reinforcing steel and slender sections
since entrapped air may be difficult to remove. Similarly, special attention needs to be given
when vibrating near form faces. The form face dampens the energy of the vibrator pulses,
thereby rendering vibration less effective. As a result, honeycombing, bug holes and rock
pockets tend to occur at form faces.
The vibrator must not be dragged or pulled through concrete. It must not be used to transport
concrete within the form, since segregation may result. Excessive or prolonged vibration may
potentially reduce the volume or distribution of entrained air.
Operation of a vibrator is demanding work, and the operator must follow the pace of concrete
placement. It is often necessary to have many vibrator operators and spare vibrators at a pour,
both to keep up with the pace of work and for operator relief when fatigued.
4.5.9.3.1 Pour Lines
As horizontal lifts of concrete are placed, some slight segregation occurs after vibration. A thin
but distinct layer of paste rises to the surface of the lift. As a successive lift is placed on top, it
will similarly segregate slightly, with the coarse aggregate tending towards the bottom of the lift.
If the vibrator extends completely through the current lift and into the underlying lift, then the two
September 2015 4-11

successive lifts will be mixed at their interface through vibrator action. If, on the other hand, the
vibrator does not penetrate both lifts, an interface between lifts will exist where the smooth paste
surface layer contacts the lift above, and this can often be seen as a visible “pour line”.
Deterioration can occur along this line more readily than other locations within the element.
4.5.9.4 Segregation
Segregation typically occurs when coarse aggregate settles out of the matrix, paste separates
from coarse aggregate, or water rises to the surface through a process known as bleeding.
4.5.9.4.1 Bleeding
Bleeding is a form of segregation where some of the water in concrete rises to the surface. It
occurs due to the inability of the solid components to fully react with all mixing water. The free
water rises to the surface as it has the lowest specific gravity of all materials. Bleeding generally
continues until the cement paste has stiffened sufficiently to stop the diffusion processes.
Bleeding may be caused by poorly graded or an improperly proportioned concrete. The

presence of an adequate proportion of fine aggregate and SCMs will reduce bleeding. Over-
vibration can increase the amount of bleeding.
Finishing operations must be performed immediately after screeding. If bleed water is worked
into the concrete surface, a weak surface layer will form, which can result in scaling.
4.5.9.4.2 Settlement
Placement techniques such as excessive vibration, freefall of concrete and the impact of
concrete into formwork or reinforcing steel during placement can contribute to settlement.
Some mixes with low amounts of SCMs and higher slumps may be more prone to segregation.
Settlement can produce microscopic fissures between the paste and the aggregate, thereby
reducing strength and increasing permeability.
4.5.9.5 Initial Set and Final Set
In a laboratory setting, the length of time after which the paste can withstand a defined amount
of pressure signifies initial and final set times. In practice, initial set is defined quite differently.
The initial set of a concrete batch on site represents the point in time at which it can no longer
be adequately placed, mixed, consolidated and finished without detrimental effect. Final set
represents the start of rapid strength development. Initial and final set times are highly
dependent on the environmental conditions during placing, finishing and curing.
The specifications require that concrete be discharged into its final position within 90 minutes of
batching, with the exception of Class HPC that must be discharged within 70 minutes. These
time limits are prescribed so that concrete is placed before initial set begins. It is important to
realize that high ambient or concrete temperature will accelerate the time of initial set, and that
set may begin within the time of haul. If during consolidation the vibrator head encounters
increasing resistance to penetration, initial set may already have occurred. Set may occur
differentially throughout the element due to temperature differences between the top and bottom
of the element. Initial set must not be confused with slump loss, since lower slump makes full
consolidation more difficult. Slump loss results in less flowable concrete, while initial set causes
resistance to vibrator penetration.
September 2015 4-12

4.5.9.6 Pile Caps, Abutment Seats and Pier Caps
Deep and long elements such as pile caps, abutment seats and pier caps are generally poured
in horizontal lifts. Concrete must be placed as closely as possible to its final position and must
not be discharged at one end of the form and made to flow into position across the length of the
form. It must be poured in uniform lifts and consolidated by inserting the internal vibrator head
through the current lift and previous lift below.
If conditions for early initial set are encountered, lift thicknesses should be reduced in an effort
to place lifts more quickly. Lifts must not be placed in a serpentine pattern; rather all lifts must
be placed in the same direction along the form so that the oldest concrete placed is topped-up
first. If it is confirmed that initial set has occurred on a concrete surface and the pour is not
completed, the pour must be stopped and the surface prepared as a cold joint. Cold joints can
be prevented through proper pour planning, and they should only occur as a result of
unforeseeable disruptions.
4.5.9.7 Decks and Barriers
Concrete for decks is placed in transverse pour strips. It is important to locate and map the final
position of each batch of concrete for decks and barriers. In the event of failed compressive
tests, the area where the issue exists may then be easily identified. During the deck placement,
the deck area must be delineated with reference to girder 10th points and girder lines. This
makes mapping of the approximate width and limit of strips a simple matter.
4.5.9.8 Construction Joints
Construction joints must be placed only where indicated on the Plans in accordance with
Standard Drawing, and otherwise only in the event of an unexpected pour disruption.
A cold joint requires bonding new to hardened concrete. The hardened concrete substrate must
be adequately prepared and brought to a Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) condition prior to
concrete placement. SSD is necessary to achieve an acceptable bond and minimize the
potential for cracking of the freshly placed concrete. To achieve SSD, the surface must be kept
continuously wet for hours prior to the pour. Before concrete placement, the hardened concrete
surface must be given sufficient time to dry so that no free standing water exists, and the
surface starts to change from a dark, wet colour to a light, dry colour. The time between wetting
and drying times is variable and depends primarily on temperature and wind. Compressed air
must be used to remove any standing water on the hardened concrete since it must not be wet
and shiny. Water must not be added to a surface immediately before new concrete is placed.
4.5.10 Finishing Plastic Concrete
Finishing is the operation that creates a surface of desired texture and gradient. The finishing
operation consists of consolidation, screeding and floating.
Screeding: The concrete is raked or shovelled into its final position as necessary. The surface
is then screeded to the desired elevation, crossfall and gradient. For substructure elements and
tops of walls, a screed board must be pre-cut to length and run along the top of chamfer strips.
Free-hand screeding is not acceptable since it can result in local depressions and inadequate
drainage. Concrete finishing machines are used to screed decks, but gutters and approach
slabs are screeded with straight edges. It is important that the deck finishing machine has
sufficient screed rail length to “run-off” the deck so as to eliminate the need for hand screeding.
September 2015 4-13

Floating: As soon as screeding is complete and before bleeding occurs, the concrete may be
floated. The float is typically a magnesium tool used to close voids left by screeding to further
smooth the surface and to embed the coarse aggregate below the paste surface. A hand float is
typically used for finishing the top surfaces of substructure elements. A larger bull float is used
on decks with the operator being positioned on a work bridge that spans the deck. Areas near
the gutters are floated with a darby. It is important that the floating operation makes the surface
smooth without sealing or densifying the concrete. Floating must be completed in one or two
passes, since over-floating may seal the surface. Over-floating may also bring excess fines and
water to the surface, which can result in scaling of the surface. Bleeding will occur after floating.
Bleed water must be allowed to evaporate after floating. Trowelling must not be done for most
concrete surfaces since this densifies the concrete surfaces, causing delamination.
Texturing: Texturing is completed prior to curing as the concrete begins to set. If completed too
soon, the intended texture profile can be lost and coarse aggregate plucked and exposed.
4.5.10.1 Evaporation Reducer on Decks
For Class HPC concrete, it is very important to reduce the surface evaporation potential of the
concrete after it has been placed. HPC concrete must not be placed when the evaporation rates
exceed 0.5 kg/m2/hr as calculated using the nomograph found in CSA A23.1, Figure D1. Wind
speed, ambient temperatures, concrete temperatures and humidity contribute to evaporation.
Screeding of deck concrete must follow closely behind placement. Concrete placed too far
ahead of screeding operations increases the time available for mix water to evaporate. If a delay
between placing and screeding is unavoidable due to an unforeseen disruption, placing white
polyethylene sheets over the concrete may help to retain moisture.
Immediately after bull floating, a monomolecular film-forming evaporation reducer must be

applied to the exposed concrete surfaces. The evaporation reducer must not be applied before
bull floating and used as a finishing aid.
Weakness or scaling of the deck surface paste layer may result if bleed water or evaporation
reducer is worked into the surface during finishing operations, or if curing water is applied before
the paste has stiffened sufficiently to prevent wash-out. This is of particular importance for
decks or high performance concrete overlays that will have no ACP wearing surface.
4.5.11 Curing
Effective curing is essential to produce durable concrete. Curing is the process in which
concrete is protected from loss of moisture and kept within a certain temperature range for a
given period of time following placement for the purpose of improving its properties. The curing
process provides conditions for continued hydration. This produces concrete with increased
strength and decreased permeability. Curing also reduces the instance of certain types of
cracks which can otherwise greatly reduce durability.
Temperature control during curing is important. In warm weather, Class HPC concrete is placed
at night when conditions are typically more favourable. In cold weather, effective hoarding and
heating is necessary to maintain the minimum curing temperatures. Curing methods are
intended to protect concrete from temperature extremes and differentials, moisture loss and
water damage. Many methods of curing exist in concrete practice, but only certain methods are
permitted for bridge projects.
September 2015 4-14

4.5.11.1 Wet Curing
Wet curing is the most effective of all curing methods. Wet cure is always required for Class
HPC concrete. The Contractor must follow a curing procedure that has been accepted by the
Consultant. The procedure needs to clearly identify the equipment and methods that will be
used for curing. The Contractor must not deviate from the procedure unless it has been proven
ineffective. The Contractor must continuously monitor the effectiveness of the curing.
Bridge decks require special consideration due to their large surface area. Filter fabric is usually
secured by weighting with dunnage. It is challenging to prevent filter fabric from drying,
especially in warm and windy conditions. Often the dunnage needs to be removed before the
filter fabric can be lifted and some sections of fabric may be wet while others are dry. Locations
receiving direct sunlight and locations higher on the grade or crown may tend to dry sooner.
Polyethylene sheeting (poly) is effective at retaining moisture, but may adversely affect the
concrete by raising surface temperatures due to a greenhouse effect. Poly must be clear and
perforated by the manufacturer and not on site by the Contractor. Filter fabric covered by poly is
more difficult to monitor since the fabric cannot be checked without removing the poly and
dunnage. In checking filter fabric for wetness, it is important to expose the deck concrete since
the filter fabric may feel or appear to be wet, while in fact the deck surface itself is dry.
4.5.11.2 Form Curing
Form curing is acceptable for Class C and D concrete. Top surfaces that are not formed must
be wet cured. Curing must be in place for a minimum 72 hours starting from the time of final
concrete placement. Where forms are removed before 72 hours has elapsed, wet curing must
begin immediately. During form curing, formwork surfaces must remain in intimate contact with
the concrete. Forming hardware may be removed so long as forms are not “cracked”. Forming
materials must not be absorbent since this will wick water out of the concrete surfaces.
Curing in the form for thin elements of Class HPC is not desirable. Class HPC demands
additional water during curing and providing protection only from a loss of moisture that is
already present may be inadequate to prevent surface damage. For barriers, forms must be
stripped as soon as practically possible and the form cure changed to wet cure so additional
water may be introduced. If the form has cured for the entire period, surface crazing cracks may
result at barrier surfaces.
4.5.11.3 Curing Compounds
Curing compounds may be used for certain elements, including slope protection, culvert collars
and deck joint block-outs for rehabilitation projects. These are membrane-forming compounds
that cover a surface and prevent moisture loss. Compounds may be clear, clear with dye, and
white pigmented. Only white pigmented compound is acceptable for bridge projects. It is
important that the manufacturer’s coverage requirements be strictly followed. Compound must
cover the surface entirely with no visible concrete exposed. Curing compound must be applied
after any bleed water has dissipated.
4.5.11.4 Maintaining Temperature Differentials During Curing
During the hydration/setting of concrete, heat is generated that may cause the core of the
element to reach a higher temperature than the surface. Temperature differentials must be
maintained within the specified limit of 20˚C to eliminate the possibility of thermal cracking. In
addition to maintaining appropriate temperature differentials, the concrete at any location must
September 2015 4-15

be maintained to be within 10˚C to 60˚C. Thermocouples are placed just below the surface and
at the core of the element to obtain temperature measurements.
For thin elements such as bridge decks, the temperature differential may be unintentionally
increased if heating occurs from only one side. It is important for the Contractor to monitor
concrete temperatures at the frequency specified and to take immediate action if required.
Temperatures can change suddenly, and adequate planning is required to achieve the desired
temperatures.
Pier caps and abutment seats may be considered “mass concrete” depending on their
dimensions. These large concrete elements will generate a higher core temperature during the
hydration processes, and planning must be taken in advance to maintain acceptable
temperature differentials. Special mix designs, including increased amounts of fly-ash and
coarse aggregate, can slow the rate of hydration and minimize the heat generated. In some
cases, it is necessary to increase an element’s surface temperature to maintain an acceptable
temperature differential, which may include the application of insulating materials. As the core
cools, action may also be required to reduce the element’s surface temperature.
4.5.11.5 Concrete Cracks Resulting from Inadequate Curing
Plastic shrinkage cracks may develop if the evaporation rate of a concrete surface exceeds the
bleed rate. Class HPC concrete with SCMs have very low bleed rates, making them much more
susceptible to plastic shrinkage cracking. Surface evaporation rates can be effectively controlled
by reducing concrete delivery temperatures and placing concrete during cool and calm
conditions. Artificial windbreaks and/or sunshades used to lower evaporation rates are generally
impractical and of unknown effectiveness.
As hydration processes occur, concrete experiences a loss in volume known as drying

shrinkage. While this process is a function of the mix itself, the amount of drying shrinkage can
be reduced through proper curing. Drying shrinkage most commonly appears on bridge decks
because the concrete is significantly restrained by reinforcing steel, girder flanges and a large
surface area of formwork.
All cracks in cast-in-place elements must be identified, measured in width and mapped. Cracks
that are 0.2 mm or greater in width are required to be epoxy injected. Special attention must be
given to cracks in bridge decks because they can have a significant impact on long term
durability. Bridge decks must have cracks mapped before and after shotblasting. Deck cracks
greater than 0.2 mm must be repaired by application of a gravity flow crack filler prior to
waterproofing operations. At all identified deck crack locations — regardless of width —
reinforcing fabric material must be placed within the asphaltic membrane to improve the
membrane’s crack bridging performance.
4.5.12 Removal of Forms
Concrete supports must be allowed to remain undisturbed until the concrete can safely bear its
own weight including any construction live loads. Supports and forms must only be removed in
conformance with the specifications.
 At normal temperatures, vertical forms can typically be removed 24 hours after concrete is
placed.
September 2015 4-16

 Forms directly supporting the weight of the concrete must be left in place for a longer period,
depending on such factors as the type and size of the member, the final set period of the
concrete, temperatures and the expected loads.
 Supports must be removed in such a manner as to permit the concrete to take its share of
the load gradually and uniformly.
 Early removal of forms is desirable for finishing in that surface repairs and treatments bond
better to “green” concrete and wet curing conditions can be applied to any required repairs
and finishing.
 In warm dry weather, it is preferable to remove formwork and implement the specified curing
requirements at the earliest possible time after concrete is placed.
 Concrete strength test results from field-cured specimens will provide an indication as to
when forms may be removed.
 Horizontal spanning elements such as beams and slabs must remain supported for as long
as practicable in order to increase the maturity of the concrete at the time of loading.
4.5.13 Concrete Surface Finishing
 Where practical, finishing must be done immediately following the removal of forms.
Finishing products need to be applied and cured appropriately.
 Repair areas and voids from formwork hardware must be filled with a patching material that
is approved by the Department. Patching materials are approved for particular classes of
application. Grouting materials may not be substituted for approved patching materials.
Proper curing and protection is essential for long term durability.
 The application rate for silane sealers (Type 1C) must be closely followed and monitored.
Type 1C sealer must not be applied to any concrete surface receiving a Class 3 Surface
finish.
 Concrete faces must be checked for trueness. Discontinuities caused by formwork
misalignment that exceed specified tolerances must require that the element be removed
and recast.
 Finishing must be done at an early stage of concrete maturity to assure bonding of applied
materials to the concrete. The concrete surfaces must be saturated before and after
treatment to ensure sufficient moisture for complete curing.
4.6 Special Considerations
4.6.1 Placing Pile Concrete by Tremie Method
Pile concrete placed in water must use a tremie method. It is important that voids, soil
contamination and water contamination is prevented when placing pile concrete by tremie. To
confirm that pile concrete is acceptable, all pile concrete placed by tremie must be tested by
Crosshole Sonic Logging (CSL).
The Contractor must submit a methodology for CSL. To facilitate CSL probes, a number of
tubes must be installed by securing them to the pile reinforcing steel cages prior to cage
installation. These tubes must be clean, dry, capped and installed uniformly and equidistantly.
4.6.2 Cold Weather Concrete
Bridge construction during winter months is common. Special precautions are required when
concreting in cold weather to prevent damage to freshly placed “green” concrete.
September 2015 4-17

Forms, reinforcing steel and substrates, must be pre-heated. This is especially important for thin
sections like walls and for slabs on grade since the materials that come into contact with
concrete may act as a heat sink and result in cooling or freezing of the concrete.
Similar to temperature monitoring required for mass concrete, it is important to monitor the
differential temperatures of an element inside a heated enclosure. The maximum differential
between the core of the element and the surfaces must be maintained as with mass concrete,
but the maximum differential between the surfaces and the ambient air temperature must also
be maintained. This means that following the curing period the forms cannot be suddenly
removed to “shock” the surfaces by exposing them to a larger-than-permitted differential.
Instead, the hoarding air temperature must be gradually reduced until the concrete surfaces are
similar in temperature to the outside ambient temperature. Sometimes, the Contractor will
temporarily remove portions of the hoarding structure during the curing period so that formwork
can be stripped. This must not be permitted until discussed and accepted by the Inspector. It
must be considered only if the permissible temperature differentials will not be exceeded.
Hoardings are susceptible to damage by wind and snow, and their condition must be closely
monitored. Heaters must not create local hot spots. Fans or other methods should be used to
distribute warm air. Leaks and drafts need to be sealed to prevent cold spots.
Heaters must contain breathers and exhaust ducting to the exterior of the hoarding. Exhaust
must not be directed into the hoarding, both for safety and to prevent carbonation of concrete
surfaces.
Often humidity in hoardings is far lower than required. It is much more difficult to control
humidity than to control temperature. The Contractor may need to install humidifiers inside the
hoarding or else keep all exposed concrete surfaces continuously wet by covering with filter
fabric.
Insulated formwork can be proposed in lieu of hoarding enclosures if it is demonstrated that

placing and curing temperature requirements can be met. The adequacy of insulated formwork
is the Contractor’s responsibility, and he needs to regularly monitor concrete temperatures and
make immediate changes if required.
4.6.3 Hot Weather Concrete
Hot weather issues typically concern Class HPC concrete, more specifically decks. Problems
encountered during hot weather may include premature setting, drying by evaporation and
finishing difficulty due to crusting.
In hot weather, concrete pours must be scheduled during the night when calm winds and lower
ambient temperatures exist. The mix must be cooled by inclusion of ice or other acceptable
means, and wet curing must commence as soon as possible after floating.
4.6.4 Protection of Weathering Steel Girders
Steel girders are fabricated of weathering steel, which is a low carbon alloy steel that forms a
surface rust that is initially lightly coloured, fine grained and loose. As further oxidation occurs, a
tightly-adhering stable oxide film or patina forms that is rough, dark brown in colour and adheres
tightly to the surface, preventing further oxidation. It is essential that this uniformity of rust
formation is not impeded as a result of contamination.
September 2015 4-18

Paste leakage onto girders must be prevented. This is both a durability and an aesthetic
requirement. Paste will prevent the formation of the protective patina, and the Contractor must
take whatever precautions necessary to prevent mortar and concrete residue from being spilled
or spattered onto weathering steel components.
If the face of the exterior girder is stained or marked by the Contractor, the entire exterior face of
the girder must be lightly sandblasted and “weathered” to achieve uniformity of colour.
“Weathering” is achieved by repeatedly fogging the exterior faces with clean water while
allowing them to dry between cycles. Fogging should leave the girders wet, but not “running
wet”, and must be repeated only when the girders are completely dry. In the event that
weathering is necessary, all sandblasting dust and grit must be completely removed, with
precautions taken to prevent the grit from settling into the moving parts of bearings, deck joints
or into watercourses.
4.6.5 Protection of Concrete Work from Staining
The Contractor must protect all concrete work and bridge components from staining during
construction activities. If staining occurs, it must be removed and the required surface finish
completed.
4.7 Concrete Slope Protection
Concrete slope protection is typically constructed at the headslopes of grade separations. It

provides a protective surface that is resistant to erosive forces, directs runoff to the roadway
drainage below and is aesthetically pleasing.
Slope protection is cast after the abutments have been constructed and the headslopes have
been trimmed. Generally, slope protection is cast after the bridge superstructure has been
constructed.
Slope protection is typically installed only under the shadow of the bridge where grasses will not
thrive. The edges of the slope protection that run in the longitudinal direction terminate at a
swale. The swale is positioned to capture drip water from the exterior fascia.
Slope protection is less frequently constructed as a river training work. Concrete is often difficult
to place near a watercourse, and the risk of a concrete spill requires environmental protection
measures. Concrete slope protection generally does not offer the same level of scour protection
as does heavy rock riprap since the backfill layer can be washed-out. Heavy rock riprap can
generally be installed and maintained more easily as river training.
4.7.1.1 Lay-out
The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor’s survey lay-out of the slope protection is
correct. For grade separations, the General Layout Plan provides the station and elevation for
each corner of the concrete slope protection. The toe edge of the concrete slope protection will
be parallel to the abutment seat face. The transverse grade of the slope protection will be
constant. The top-of-concrete elevation line must be marked onto the face of the abutment seat,
and the top-of-concrete elevations at the toe cut-off wall must be established on the bulkhead
formwork.
September 2015 4-19

It is important that the constant transverse grade of the slope protection closely matches the
transverse roadway geometry so that the roadway gutter at the toe transfers water away from
the slope protection. Water must never pond at the base of the slope protection.
4.7.1.2 Installation
Concrete slope protection must resist sliding and buckling, and must accommodate a certain
degree of settlement. The performance of the concrete slope protection depends on careful
attention to the construction details.
 The Contractor must trim the slope to within 150 mm of the required elevations as measured
in the direction perpendicular to the slope surface. If the depth of backfill varies significantly,
differential settlement will occur that may cause distress to the slab.
 The vertical face of the toe cut-off wall is formed. The remainder is excavated neatly to the
dimensions shown. If the interior face of the excavation is soft or unstable at the specified
1:1 slope, it must be flattened.
 Placement of granular backfill for concrete slope protection requires special consideration. It
may be necessary for the Contractor to use a mobile conveyor or other unique equipment.
Backfill placement and compaction typically starts at the toe of the slope and progresses
upwards in horizontal strips.
 Compaction of granular backfill is difficult to achieve on the slope. Plate tampers are
generally impractical and dangerous to operate on sloped ground. A vibratory compactor
that is mounted to the stick of a tracked hydraulic excavator is generally effective.
 The Contractor’s Layout and Forming Plan must identify his proposed equipment, backfill,
concrete delivery methods, panel dimensions, chairing system and pour sequence. The
panel dimensions must be nearest to 1200 mm in height and 1800 mm in width.
 Formwork on the slope usually consists of dimensional timber, which must be separated
mid-height to accommodate Welded Wire Mesh (WWM) reinforcement. The WWM must be
continuous across the entire slope and must be lapped between adjacent courses. Panels
are of sufficient size to require appropriate chairing of the WWM between forms.
 It is important that the forms do not vary in grade between courses. Uniformity of grade
between all concrete courses must be checked by string line. The horizontal form alignment
must be checked to confirm that the forms are perpendicular to the abutment face, are
straight over their entire length, are in the same plane and that the formed course width
does not vary.
 Due to irregularities in the compacted backfill surface, gaps may exist between the
underside of the form and the subgrade surface. These gaps must be sealed to prevent
excessive concrete leakage.
 Concrete placement is typically completed by a concrete pump. Planning and control of
concrete consistency is very important when placing concrete slope protection. It is best that
the Contractor use a pump to allow rapid placement of concrete and that quality measures
are implemented to achieve consistent delivery slumps that are at the targeted value.
 After formwork for the first pour has been stripped and cured for a minimum of 12 hours, the
adjoining infill courses may be placed. It is very important that tooling of the joint between
courses be done as soon as practical after screeding.
 Slope protection concrete is screeded and floated as normal; however, it is also trowelled
and broom textured. Edging must be done concurrently with trowelling, and brooming should
immediately follow trowelling.
 Abutment drains normally project from the face of the concrete slope protection. The drains
must be accurately located and care must be taken to prevent concrete from entering the
September 2015 4-20

drains. After concrete placement, the projecting drains are normally trimmed flush with the
face of concrete, and protective screens are installed.
 Following concrete placement and formwork removal, the exposed edges must be
adequately backfilled to prevent entry of runoff, which can cause scouring and undermining
of the slab or softening of the granular subgrade.
4.7.1.3 Curing
Curing for concrete slope protection consists of the application of two coats of an approved
membrane-forming curing compound. It is important to apply curing compound at the time and
application rate specified.
Concrete slope protection is typically cast when weather conditions are favourable as the
required hoarding and heating is cost prohibitive.
4.8 Rejection and Payment
If concrete fails to meet the specified requirements, it must be rejected with a clear explanation
given to the Contractor. The Inspector must be confident of the requirements that have not been
met. If a batch appears questionable, the Contractor must stop placing it until slump and air
tests are completed to determine whether or not the concrete is acceptable.
If the 7-day strength results indicate the possibility of low strength at 28 days, the Contractor
must be notified immediately since he has certain avenues of recourse.
4.9 Inspector’s Role
4.9.1 Inspector’s Role Prior to Concrete Placement
 Confirm that a concrete mix design is in place and accepted for each class of concrete.
 Attend trial batches when specified to confirm that the proposed mix has acceptable
properties for placing.
 Review the Contractor’s pour plan — including access, equipment, discharge method and
pour rate — and discuss any concerns prior to the pour day.
 Discuss target slump with the Contractor considering the geometry and congestion of the
reinforcing steel.
 Calculate the concrete volume of the element and discuss production and delivery
considerations with the Contractor to avoid foreseeable disruptions that may result in cold
joints.
 Attend the Contractor’s pre-activity safety meeting and understand all safety requirements.
 Confirm that the Contractor’s environmental protection measures are in place.
 Inspect formwork materials and construction for compliance to design; check dimensions,
connections, elevations, plywood joint alignment, plywood damage, water-tightness,
cleanliness and trueness of surfaces.
 Check reinforcing steel cleanliness, spacing and cover.
 Confirm that CSL tubes for crosshole sonic logging are installed correctly when required.
 Where formwork is secured to hardened concrete, make sure that forms are in close contact
with concrete to prevent the formation of paste fins caused by leakage.
 Confirm that protection measures are in place to prevent paste contamination of girders and
substructure elements.
 Review the Contractor’s lay-out and agree on proposed panel geometry for concrete slope
protection.
September 2015 4-21

 Confirm the adequacy of the Contractor’s headslope excavation and preparation by

performing string line and survey checks at concrete slope protection.
 Confirm that final shaping and backfilling has been acceptably completed for concrete slope
protection.
 Discuss, monitor and confirm acceptance of the Contractor’s backfill and compaction
methods at concrete slope protection.
 Confirm that the work associated with abutment drain termination and protective end
screens are acceptable at concrete slope protection.
4.9.2 Inspector’s Role During Concrete Placement
 Review concrete delivery tickets for each batch, confirming that the mix number, project and
type of constituents are correct.
 Record time of batching for each load and monitor age of load during placement.
 Record and map locations of concrete batch placement.
 Confirm that precautions are taken to minimize the risk of cold joints.
 Inspect the concrete mix at the point of discharge to confirm homogeneity of batches.
 Monitor slump loss over time as tests are performed to confirm that it is consistent with trial
batch results.
 During consolidation, monitor the ease of penetration of the vibrator to confirm that the
concrete has not started to set. Monitor the frequency and effectiveness of vibration.
 Identify any instances of excessive bleeding and discuss potential causes with the
Contractor.
 Confirm that certification of the Contractor’s designated testing personnel is compliant with
specification requirements and that an adequate work area has been established for on-site
testing.
 Witness the testing process and review plastic batch test results to confirm acceptability.
 Confirm proper storage and handling of test cylinders.
4.9.3 Inspector’s Role After Concrete Placement
 Monitor finishing operations to confirm that they are performed correctly and at the proper
time.
 Confirm that precautions have been taken to minimize evaporation potential for deck
concrete.
 During the curing period, monitor to confirm that wet cure systems are adequate to maintain
moist surfaces and that forms for form-cured elements are non-absorbent and have not
been cracked or opened.
 During the curing period, monitor the Contractor’s reporting of temperature readings and
require that action be taken when non-compliant.
 Map all cracks identified after the curing period and discuss findings with the Contractor.
 Confirm that concrete age and field cure test samples demonstrate that forms may be
stripped.
 Record as-built details on appropriate Plans.
September 2015 4-22

Section 4 – Cast-In-Place Concrete Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Have the aggregate gradations and mix designs been accepted by the
Project Manager.
Have the locations of each concrete test batch been recorded?
Have low strength quantities and penalties been identified to the

Project Manager?
2 Delivery
4.7 Does the concrete supplier have sufficient plant capacity and
satisfactory transporting equipment for continuous delivery at the rate
required?
3 Placement Schedules
4.8 Did the Contractor inform the Consultant of the proposed placement
schedule?
4.8 Is the volume of pour greater than can be placed with the methods
proposed?
4.8 Is the Contractor’s crew size adequate?
4.8 Does the Contractor have adequate lighting to facilitate proper

placing, finishing and inspection?
4 Inspection and Testing

4.9 Has the Consultant been afforded full facilities for random quality
assurance inspection and testing?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.9 Are all site cast concrete cylinders compliant to the relevant
specifications?
4.9 Is the Contractor utilizing ACI or CSA certified testers with extensive
related experience to test at site, and were the results of all tests
provided to the Consultant?
4.9 Were additional tests performed if the results were borderline or
widely variable?
4.9 Did the certified testers personally cast the test cylinders, as specified
in Section 4.9.3 “Test Cylinders”?
4.9 Did the certified testers utilize the “Concrete Test Results” form
contained at the end of Section 4 of the SSBC with the completed
forms accompanying the concrete test cylinders to the testing
laboratory?
4.9 Is the certification of the testers current and available for examination
by the Consultant?
4.9.1 Did the "Strength Test" consist of the compression tests of four (4)
standard test specimens sampled, made, cured and tested in
accordance with CSA Standard Specifications?
4.9.1 Were additional cylinders cast at the discretion of the Consultant or
Contractor?
4.9.1 Did the Contractor take a strength test to represent each approximate
20 m3 portion of the concrete pour, at a minimum of one strength test
for every two (2) batches of concrete for Class HPC and Class HPC
with steel fibres?
4.9.1 Were these tests taken from representative batches as determined by
the Inspector?
4.9.2 Was sampling of concrete carried out in accordance with CSA

Standard A23.2-1C?
4.9.3 Was the making and curing of concrete test cylinders carried out in
accordance with CSA Standard A23.2-3C, with the exception that the
time for cylinders to reach the testing laboratory was between 20 and
48 hours?
4.9.2 Were test cylinders cast by the Contractor in standard CSA approved
heavy duty steel or plastic moulds?
4.9.3 Did the Contractor provide use designed temperature-controlled

storage boxes and further protect cylinders from adverse weather until
removed from the site?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.9.3 Was a max-min thermometer provided for each storage box and were
site curing temperatures recorded for all test cylinders?
4.9.3 Was the storage facility provided, installed and accepted by the
Inspector before any concrete was placed?
4.9.3 Did the Contractor deliver, handle and transport the test cylinders to
an independent CSA-certified testing laboratory in accordance with
CSA Standard A23.2-3C?
4.9.3 Was a copy of the test results forwarded to the Consultant and
concrete producer within two (2) days of the break date?
4.9.3 Did any test cylinders exhibit frost etchings, were they stored at
temperatures below 10°C or above 25°C, or were they otherwise
mishandled?
4.9.3 Has the Contractor provided written reports of the concrete test results
to the Consultant?
4.9.4 Were slump tests conducted in accordance with CSA Standard A23.2-
5C?
4.9.5 Were air content and density tests conducted in accordance with CSA
Standard A23.2-4C and A23.2-6C, respectively?
4.9.6 Were cylinders tested in accordance with CSA Standard A23.2-9C by

an independent CSA certified engineering laboratory?
4.9.7 In the event that slump and/or air content were outside the specified
tolerance range, were adjustments made within the maximum time
allowed as specified in Section 4.6.3 “Time of Hauling”?
5 Falsework and Formwork
4.10.1 General – Were detailed falsework and formwork drawings supplied to
the Consultant for review and examination?
Did the formwork Engineer confirm that the design was followed, prior
to concrete placement?
4.10.1 Was all falsework and formwork fabricated in accordance with the
drawings?
4.10.1 Did the Contractor secure formwork against hardened concrete at

construction joints within the tolerances for formwork misalignments
outlined in Section 4.25.8 of the SSBC?
4.10.2 Design – Were all forms designed and built mortar-tight and of
sufficient rigidity to prevent distortion?
3
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.10.2 Was falsework that could not be founded on a satisfactory footing

instead supported on piling spaced, driven and removed in a manner
acceptable to the Consultant?
4.10.2 Did the drawings for timber formwork specify the type and grade of
lumber and show the size and spacing of all members and the type,
size and spacing of all ties or other hardware, and the type, size and
spacing of all bracing?
4.10.2 In the opinion of the Inspector, do forms appear to be satisfactory?
4.10.2 Are removable panels provided at the bottom of narrow wall and
column forms?
4.10.3 Are forms for exposed surfaces requiring a Class 1 “Ordinary Surface
Finish” made of good quality plywood, or an acceptable equivalent?
4.10.3 Are forms for exposed surfaces requiring a Class 2 “Rubbed Surface
Finish” or Class 3 “Bonded Concrete Surface Finish” all new material
made of “Coated Formply”, consisting of Douglas Fir substrate with
resin-impregnated paper overlay and factory treated chemically active
release agent?
4.10.3 Are re-used forms acceptable to the Inspector?
4.10.3 Are all forms for exposed surfaces mortar-tight, filleted at all corners,
and given a bevel or draft in the case of projections?
4.10.3 Are chamfer strips used at the top edges of exposed surfaces?
4.10.5 Did the Contractor use the standard details shown on Standard
Drawings S-1411 “Standard Concrete Joints”, S-1412 “Standard
Construction Joints” and S-1443 “Deck Waterproofing”?
4.10.6 Are formwork hangers or ties for exposed surfaces of decks, including
underside surfaces, removable threaded type, and were all cavities
resulting from threaded rod removal along the underside of deck
overhangs adequately prepared and filled with an approved concrete
patching material?
4.10.6 Are deck overhang patches true to adjacent surfaces and similar in
colour?
4.10.6 Are cavities resulting from threaded rod removal for interior bays filled
with Sikaflex 15LM or an approved equivalent placed true to adjacent
surfaces and be similar in colour?
4
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.10.6 Is the formwork for decks, curbs, sidewalks and parapets fabricated so
that the lines and grades shown on the drawings were achieved?
4.10.6 Has the Contractor calculated the girder haunch dimensions required
to achieve the specified gradeline?
4.10.6 Has this information been provided to the Consultant for review and
acceptance prior to commencing any deck formwork?
4.10.6 If the actual girder camber values vary significantly from the estimated
values indicated on the drawings, has the Contractor raised or
lowered the gradeline accordingly?
6 Protection of “Weathering” Steel Girders
4.11 Has the Contractor exercised utmost care and provided the necessary
protection to prevent marking or staining of the girders?
4.11 Are all joints between deck formwork and steel members (including
interior girders, and diaphragms) sealed to prevent leakage of cement
paste or concrete?
4.11 Did the Contractor clean off, wash and sandblast any contaminated
areas to the satisfaction of the Inspector, and in the case of an exterior
girder becoming stained, did the Contractor lightly sandblast and
“weather” the entire exterior face of the girder line so that uniformity of
girder colour was achieved?
Protection of Concrete Work and Bridge Components from
7
Staining
4.12 Did the Contractor take precautions to protect all bridge components
from staining?
4.12 Was any staining that occurred removed to the full satisfaction of the
Inspector?
8 Removal of Falsework, Forms and Housing

4.13 Were forms and supports removed prior to acceptance by the
Inspector?
4.13 Was the guide for removal of forms for temperatures above 15°C
followed?
4.13 Did the Contractor furnish evidence satisfactory to the Department

and Consultant that the strength of the concrete had attained the
noted percentage of the specified 28-day strength prior to the removal
of forms?
5
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.13 Was all formwork removed from the completed structure?
9 Handling and Placing Concrete

4.14.1 General – Did the Contractor give the Consultant a minimum of two
(2) days advance notice of a concrete placement date or a change to
a pour date?
4.14.1 Has all equipment proposed for use in mixing, conveying, placing and
compacting the concrete been reviewed and accepted by the
Inspector prior to its use?
4.14.1 Has all the necessary equipment for any particular placement been
proven to be in working condition before the placement commenced,
with backup equipment on site?
4.14.1 Has all extraneous matter like sawdust, wood chips and other
construction debris been removed from the interior of forms in
preparation for placing concrete?
4.14.1 Are temporary struts, spreaders, stays and braces in correct shape
and alignment, and removed when the concrete placement reached
an elevation rendering their service unnecessary?
4.14.1 Is concrete placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the
displacement of the reinforcement?
4.14.1 Is concrete deposited by concrete pump, metal or plastic chute or

other means acceptable to the Inspector when operations required
free dropping concrete more than one (1) metre?
4.14.1 Is concrete deposited in the forms in the order indicated on the
drawings?
4.14.1 Is each portion placed between construction joints placed in one

continuous operation?
4.14.1 Is concrete placement working off or transporting directly over

concrete previously placed?
4.14.2 Is the concrete consolidation done internally by mechanical vibration?
4.14.2 Are vibrators of a type and design acceptable to the Inspector?
4.14.2 Did the Contractor provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly

compact each batch, immediately after placing?
4.14.2 Are vibrators manipulated so as to thoroughly work the concrete

around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the corners
and angles of the forms applying vibration at the point of deposit and
6
Compliance
Section
SSBC
in the area of freshly deposited concrete?
4.14.2 Are the vibrators inserted vertically and withdrawn out of the concrete
slowly with application of vibrators at points uniformly spaced and not
farther apart than the radius over which the vibration was visibly
effective?
4.14.2 Is vibration applied directly or through the reinforcement of sections or
layers of concrete that have hardened to the degree that the concrete
ceases to be plastic?
4.14.2 Is vibration applied in a manner which prevents concrete flow in the
forms causing segregation?
4.14.2 Is vibration supplemented by spading as necessary to ensure smooth

and dense concrete along form surfaces and in corners?
4.14.2 Did the Contractor avoid disturbing concrete after vibration?
4.14.3 Is all accumulation of mortar splashed on the reinforcing steel and

form surfaces removed?
4.14.3 Is concrete placed while fresh and before it had taken its initial set?
4.14.3 Were forms jarred or strain placed on ends of projecting reinforcing

steel following initial set of the concrete?
4.14.3 Did the Contractor take the necessary steps to prevent free water
build-up in the event of unexpected rainfall or similar occurrences for
the first 24 hours?
4.14.3 Was water used to keep equipment clean during the pour, or to clean
equipment at the end of the pour, discharged clear of the structure
and water crossing?
4.14.4 Does the pump produce a continuous flow of concrete without air
pockets?
10 Placing Pile Concrete

4.15.1 Has the Contractor made all attempts necessary to obtain a dry pile
hole prior to placing pile concrete?
Note: If in the opinion of the Consultant and the Department all
attempts to achieve a dry pile hole have been taken and proven
unsuccessful, placement of pile concrete by tremie will be required.
4.15.2 Concrete Placed in the Dry – Is pile concrete placed by means of a
hopper equipped with a centre pipe drop tube with concrete in the
upper 3 m of the piles consolidated by the use of an acceptable
7
Compliance
Section
SSBC
concrete vibrator?
4.15.3 Concrete Placed under Water – Is placement of pile concrete under

water in accordance with Section 4.22 of the Standard Specifications
for Bridge Construction?
4.15.3 Crosshole Sonic Logging (CSL) – Did the Contractor submit the
proposed method for the Consultant’s review two (2) weeks before
beginning drilled pile work and supply and install four (4) 50 mm inside
diameter tubes in each drilled pile with a diameter of 1.5 m or less and
six (6) tubes in each pile with a diameter of greater than 1.5 m?
4.15.3 Are tubes installed by the Contractor in a manner such that the CSL
probes pass through the entire length of the tube without binding?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor fit the tubes with watertight shoes on the bottom
and removable caps on the tops, and ensure that the CSL tubes were
not damaged during the installation of the reinforcement cage?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor make CSL measurements at depth intervals of
65 mm from the bottom of the tubes to the top of each pile, and upon
completion of testing and acceptance of the pile concrete, were the
tubes filled with an approved grout mix?
4.15.3 Did the testing agency hired by the Contractor have a minimum of
three (3) years’ experience in CSL testing?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor provide written evidence of completion of all CSL
tests by the testing agency?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor’s submission include personnel qualifications and

descriptions of testing equipment?
4.15.3 Did the Contractor submit two (2) original copies of the CSL report to
the Consultant within five (5) working days of completion of CSL
testing signed and sealed by the CSL engineer, including test
summaries, results, analyses and an opinion of the pile concrete’s
suitability for intended use?
4.15.3 Were the summaries in accordance with the criteria listed in
Section 4.15.3 Concrete Condition Rating Criteria?
Note: Test results with ratings other than “G” will be considered
unacceptable and will result in rejection of the pile.
4.15.3 Were any piles considered unacceptable by the Consultant and the
Department?
4.15.3 If remedial action is required, has the Contractor submitted a remedial

action proposal with supporting calculations to the Department and the
Consultant for review and acceptance?
11 Placing HPC Concrete and HPC Concrete with Steel Fibres
8
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.16.1 General – Did concrete placing occur when the air temperature was
below 5°C or above 25°C, or in the event of rain or excessive wind or
dust, or when there were other conditions judged by the Consultant to
be harmful to the concrete?
4.16.1 Was HPC concrete and HPC concrete with steel fibres placed
between the hours of 6:00 pm and 10:00 am of the following day,
unless reviewed and accepted by the Department and Consultant?
4.16.1 Was HPC concrete and HPC concrete with steel fibres placed when
the evaporation rate exceeds 0.5 kg/m2/hr as determined using
Figure D.1 of CSA A23.1 – Annex D?
4.16.1 Was the rate of evaporation recorded as concrete placing operations
progressed, with the Contractor making all necessary adjustments to
ensure the evaporation rate did not exceed the specified limit
4.16.1 Was acceptable lighting provided for night pours?
4.16.1 Was the temperature of the concrete during discharge between 10°C
and 20°C?
4.16.1 Were substrate surfaces brought to a saturated surface dry condition

with clean water meeting the requirements of Section 4.2 of the
SSBC, and were substrate surfaces free of standing water?
4.16.1 Did the Contractor’s Project Manager and field superintendent attend
a pre-construction meeting at a location determined by the Consultant,
prior to commencement of any site work?
4.16.1 Was all deck concrete and deck overlay concrete consolidated in
accordance with Section 4.14.2 of the SSBC?
4.16.1 Was screeding for all deck concrete and deck overlay concrete done
using placing/finishing machines as follows (or acceptable
equivalents)?
 Bidwell Models RF200, 364, 2450, 3600 and 4800
 Gomaco Models C450 and C750
4.16.1 Did the Contractor provide two (2) work bridges, separate from the
placing/finishing machine and of adequate length to completely span
the width of the pour?
4.16.2 Were acceptable steel screed guide rails installed to suit the profile of
the required surface and to ensure a smooth and continuous surface
from end to end of the bridge, located outside of the finished surface
of the pour for overlay and deck concrete and extending beyond the
end of the bridge to accommodate finishing of the entire concrete
surface with the deck finishing machine?
4.16.3 Was the finishing machine set up to match the skew angle of the
bridge, and were the finishing machine and guide rails adjusted so
that the height of the screed finished the concrete to the design
gradeline and crown?
9
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.16.3 Was the screed dry-run prior to the pour to confirm the adjustment of
the machine and guiderails, and were clearance measurements taken
at each of the girder points corresponding to the camber diagram and
provided to the Consultant for review and acceptance?
4.16.3 Was re-setting of the machine and/or screed rails done as necessary
to obtain an acceptable dry-run?
4.16.3 Did the Contractor pre-load a test section of a cantilevered formwork

on each side of the bridge to determine deflections that might occur
during concrete placement? Was the formwork, machine and/or
screed rails adjusted to compensate for the expected formwork
deflection?
4.16.4 Was concrete placed as close as practical ahead of the finishing
machine and at no time more than 6 m in front of the trailing end of the
finishing machine’s roller?
4.16.4 Did the screed move slowly and at a uniform rate maintaining a roll of
concrete along the entire front of the screed to ensure the filling and
consolidation of the concrete surface?
4.16.4 Did the Contractor ensure that the required concrete thickness was
being placed by continually probing the concrete behind the finishing
machine?
4.16.4
Were no more than two (2) passes of the screed needed for
completion, and finishing done from work bridges?
4.16.5 Was bull floating and surface texturing done as close as practically
possible behind the screed?
Note: Evaporation reducer or water shall not be finished into the
concrete at any time during finishing operations.
4.16.5 Did the Contractor check the concrete surface with a 3 m long
extended polystylene straight edge immediately after final bull floating
and before texturing and application of evaporation reducer?
4.16.5 Was the surface such that, when checked with a 3 m long straight
edge placed anywhere in any direction on the surface (except across
the crown), there were no gaps greater than 3 mm between the
bottom of the straight edge and the surface of the deck concrete? Did
the Contractor make corrections to any concrete surfaces that did not
meet the surface tolerances described in Section 4.16.6 while the
concrete was still plastic and before curing procedures were
implemented?
4.16.6 Did the finished surface of the concrete conform to the design
gradeline profiles as indicated on the drawings and/or as determined
on site?
4.16.6 Was the surface free from open texturing, plucked aggregate and local
projections?
10
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.16.6 Were any areas higher than 3 mm but lower than 10 mm ground down
to the correct surface?
4.16.6 Were any areas lower than 3 mm but not lower than 10 mm below the
correct surface by grinding down the adjacent high areas?
4.16.6 Where deviation exceeded 10 mm, was the deck removed and
replaced in accordance with Section 20.3.2 Partial Depth Repair of the
SSBC with the perimeter joint waterproofed in accordance with the
details on S-1443?
4.16.6 Did the Contractor submit a proposal for review and acceptance by
the Department and Consultant for all corrective work prior to
commencement?
12 Placing Approach Slab and Roof Slab Concrete
4.17 Was concrete placed in a manner such that the newly deposited
concrete was continually placed against fresh concrete across the
entire face of the pour and the formation of cold joints avoided?
4.17 Was the concrete surface manually bull floated as necessary to

ensure that the surface was free from open texturing, plucked
aggregates and local projections or depressions?
13 Concreting Shear Keys and Diaphragms
4.18 Was form work for shear keys and diaphragms designed to
accommodate variations in girder dimensions, positioning, alignment,
camber and sweep?
4.18 Were girder keyways and diaphragms brought to a saturated surface
dry condition prior to concrete placement with saturation not less than
30 minutes prior to blowing free of standing water?
4.18 Was concrete placed in the keyways adequately consolidated and
finished smooth and level with the top surfaces of the girders?
4.18 Immediately after finishing, were two layers of clean Nilex 4504 white
coloured filter fabric or an approved equivalent placed on the shear
keys and kept continuously wet for 72 hours?
14 Construction Joints
4.20.1 General – Were construction joint locations, other than where
indicated on the drawings or shown in the pouring schedule, reviewed
and accepted by the Project Manager?
4.20.1 Were construction joints where, not detailed on the drawings or in the
case of emergency, installed in accordance with Standard Drawings
S1412 or as determined by the Project Manager?
4.20.1 Were construction joints located to allow a minimum of 50 mm
concrete cover on reinforcing steel running parallel to the joint?
11
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.20.2 Were the forms retightened and the surface of the hardened concrete
thoroughly cleaned and saturated with water, with all free standing
water removed, before depositing new concrete?
4.20.2 Was the placing of concrete carried out continuously from joint to joint
and the face edges of all exposed joints carefully finished true to line
and elevation?
15 Concreting in Cold Weather
4.21 Did the Contractor submit details of his proposed cold weather
concreting plan to the Consultant for review and acceptance a
minimum of two (2) weeks prior to any concrete placement?
4.21 Was all aggregate and mixing water heated to a temperature of at
least 20°C but not more than 65°C with aggregates heated by either
dry heat or steam?
Note: In the latter case, the quantity of mixing water may need to be
reduced.
4.21 Was the temperature of the concrete in accordance with Section 4.4.3
of the SSBC at the time of placing in the forms, or, in the case of mass
pours, did the Contractor follow the Consultant’s temperature
requirements?
4.21 For the HPC and HPC with fibres did the Contractor enclose the
structure in such a way that the concrete and air within the enclosure
can be kept above 15°C for a protection period of 21 days after
placing the concrete?
4.21 Was the enclosure large enough to comfortably accommodate the
men and equipment necessary to place, finish and cure the concrete?
4.21 Was the underside of the deck suitably protected?
4.21 Was the relative humidity within the enclosure maintained at not less
than 85%?
4.21 Were heaters kept well clear of the formwork housing, and was
adequate ventilation provided for combustion and prevention of
carbon dioxide accumulation?
Note: The use of salamanders, coke stoves, oil or gas burners and
similar spot heaters that have an open flame and intense local heat is
prohibited without the Consultant's specific acceptance.
4.21 Was adequate pre-heat provided to raise the temperature of
formwork, reinforcing steel, previously-placed concrete and/or soil to
between 10°C and 20°C before placing concrete?
4.21 Was concrete curing in accordance with the requirements of
Subsection 4.23 of the SSBC?
4.21 Was the adequacy of protection monitored and recorded as outlined in

Section 4.21.6 of the SSBC?
12
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.21 Was protection and heating, where used, withdrawn so as not to

induce thermal shock stresses in the concrete as outlined in Section
4.21.7 of the SSBC?
4.21 Did the Contractor measure the temperature of internal concrete,
surface of the concrete and ambient air temperatures a minimum of
every four (4) hours, and make adjustments as necessary to keep the
rate of cooling within the specified parameters?
16 Depositing Concrete Under Water
4.22 Was concrete deposited under water with the acceptance of the
Inspector?
4.22 Was concrete that was deposited in water of the specified class, with
the mix design modified to provide 170 mm ± 30 mm slump, and a
15% increase in cementing materials?
4.22 Were anti-washout admixtures incorporating viscosity modifiers used
in the mix design, and was the modified concrete mix design
submitted by the Contractor for review and acceptance by the Project
Manager in accordance with Section 4.4.4 of the SSBC?
4.22 Was the concrete temperature at discharge between 10°C and 25°C?
4.22 Was a concrete pump used to place concrete carefully in a compact

mass to prevent segregation?
4.22 Was a properly designed and operated tremie used only when
specifically reviewed and accepted by the Project Manager?
4.22 Was the discharge end of the concrete pump line lowered to the
bottom of the form or hole, with the end of the discharge line being
continually buried no less than 500 mm below the surface of fresh
concrete, until the form or hole was completely filled with fresh
uncontaminated concrete?
4.22 Was water temperature above 4°C?
4.22 Was the surface of the concrete kept as nearly horizontal as practical
at all times?
4.22 Did the Contractor remove all laitance or other unsatisfactory material
from the exposed concrete surfaces, as determined by the Inspector?
17 Curing Concrete
13
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.23.1 Was freshly deposited concrete protected from freezing, abnormally

high temperatures or temperature differentials, premature drying,
water damage and moisture loss during the curing period?
4.23.3 Curing Requirements for Class HPC and Class HPC with Steel Fibres
– Did the Contractor prepare and submit details for his proposed
curing procedures to the Project Manager for review and acceptance a
minimum of two (2) weeks prior to the scheduled pour date, including
a description of equipment, materials and work methods/techniques
employed to carry out the work?
4.23.3 Did the Contractor provide protection to ensure that the temperature of
the centre of the in-situ concrete did not fall below 10°C or exceed
60°C and the temperature difference between the centre and the
surface did not exceed 20°C, as per the requirements of Table 21 of
CSA A23.1?
4.23.3 Did the Contractor supply and install two thermocouples, one in the
centre and one at the surface of the concrete, for every 100 m2 of
deck?
4.23.3 Did the Contractor monitor and record the temperatures every four (4)
hours for the first 72 hours after concrete placement and every eight
(8) hours thereafter for the remainder of the specified cure period?
4.23.3 Were daily temperature records forwarded to the Project Manager?
4.23.3 Immediately after final bull floating and/or surface texturing, was an
evaporation reducer applied by a hand sprayer with a misting nozzle
at the manufacturer’s recommended concentration and application
rate?
4.23.3 Were two (2) layers of Nilex 4504 white filter fabric or an approved
equivalent placed on the concrete surface as soon as the surface
would not be marred by its installation, and was the fabric pre-wet or a
fine spray of clean water immediately applied once placed?
4.23.3 Was the filter fabric in a continuously wet condition throughout the
curing period by means of soaker hoses or other means reviewed and
accepted by the Inspector?
4.23.3 Was curing with filter fabric and water maintained for a minimum of
seven (7) days for rehabilitation projects and 14 days for new bridge
construction?
4.23.3 In cold weather, was curing with filter fabric and water maintained for a
minimum of 14 days, followed by seven (7) days of air drying for both
rehabilitation and new bridge construction projects?
4.23.3 Was wet curing of deck joint blockout concrete for rehabilitation
projects reduced to three (3) days, followed by the application of a
Type 2 curing compound meeting the requirements of ASTM C309 or
ASTM C1315?
14
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.23.3 For locations where formwork was removed prior to the completion of
this specified curing period, were the resulting exposed concrete
surfaces wet cured for the remaining days?
4.23.3 Was any of the curing unacceptable or any portion of the surface dry
during the curing period?
Note: The Consultant will have cause to reject the concrete.
18 Concrete Finishing Under Bearings
4.24 Was concrete on which bearing plates, pads or shims are placed
finished or ground to a smooth and even surface?
4.24 Were air voids created by forming grout-pad recesses filled with an
approved patching material a minimum of seven (7) days in advance
of girder erection, and in cold weather conditions, was this work
completed while the substrate concrete was warm from hydration
processes?
If the filling of air voids did not occur while the substrate concrete was
still warm, was it carried out in accordance with Section 4.21 of the
SSBC?
19 Concrete Surface Finish
4.25.1 General – Were surface finishes on exposed concrete surfaces
600 mm below grade or, in the case of river piers, 600 mm below
lowest water level, as outlined in Section 4.25.1 of the SSBC?
4.25.1 Were wood or magnesium tools of a type and quality acceptable to the
Inspector used for finishing concrete?
4.25.2 Class 1 Ordinary Surface Finish

Unformed Surfaces – Was concrete screeded to conform to the
required surface elevations, then trowelled to ensure that the surface
was free from open texturing, plucked aggregate and local projections
or depressions?
4.25.2 Class 1 Ordinary Surface Finish
Formed Surfaces – Were all fins and irregular projections removed
from all surfaces immediately following the removal of forms, and were
cavities produced by form ties, all other holes, honeycomb areas,
broken corners or edges and other defects, thoroughly chipped out,
cleaned and filled with a Department-approved patching product
acceptable to the Consultant and placed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations?
4.25.2 Were all repairs wet cured for a minimum of 72 hours?
4.25. Class 2 Rubbed Surface Finish – Immediately following the removal of

forms, were all concrete fins and irregular projections removed, and
were surfaces that did not meet tolerance requirements corrected by
grinding or partial depth repair as outlined in Section 20 of the SSBC?
15
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.25. Were surface voids greater than 19 mm diameter but less than
0.05 m2 in area or 30 mm deep filled with a Department approved
patching material?
4.25.3 Were surface voids less than 19 mm in diameter and 30 mm deep
filled with a pre-bagged sack rub material?
4.25. Were sack rub materials placed over the entire prepared surface in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and wet cured
for a minimum of 72 hours?
4.25.3 When the patching and sack rub materials had adequately cured, was
a carborundum stone or approved equivalent method used to finish
the surface to a smooth, uniform and closed texture?
4.25.3 Were all prepared surfaces, including all patching and sack rubbing,
uniform in colour and texture, and did the Contractor apply sealer as
specified in Section 4.26 of the SSBC Type 1c Sealer?
4.25.4 Class 3 Bonded Concrete Surface Finish – Was surface preparation
done as specified for Class 2 Rubbed Surface Finish except that
uniformity in colour was not required?
4.25.4 Was the surface pressure washed to remove all dust, dirt, laitance and
all other bond breaking materials?
4.25.4 Did the concrete surface dry for a minimum of 24 hours?
4.25.4 After the surface dried, did the Contractor apply an approved
pigmented concrete sealer meeting the requirements for a Type 3
sealer of the Material Testing Specifications for Concrete Sealers –
B388 and in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications?
4.25.4 Were a minimum of two (2) coats of sealer applied, and was the
colour acceptable to the Department and Project Manager before
application of the coating?
4.25.4 When spray application was used, was the surface back rolled and is
no colour variation visible and does color match the previously painted
adjoining surfaces?
4.25.5 Class 4 Floated Surface Finish – Unless otherwise noted on the
drawings, were concrete surfaces receiving a waterproofing
membrane and a final wearing surface manually bull floated as
necessary to provide a smooth surface?
4.25.6 Class 5 Floated Surface Finish, Broomed Texture – Was the concrete
surface floated as necessary to produce a smooth surface with no
more than a 3 mm variance, under a 3 m long straightedge?
4.25.6 After the concrete had set sufficiently, was the surface given a
transversely broomed finish using a coarse broom to produce regular
corrugations to a maximum depth of 2 mm?
16
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.25.6 Was an edging tool used at all edges and expansion joints, and where
indicated on the drawings, were sidewalk surfaces laid out in blocks
using an acceptable grooving tool?
4.25.7 Class 6 Floated Surface Finish, Surface Textured – After bull floating,
was the concrete given a suitable texture with a “flat wire” texture
broom having a single row of tines, and was the textured surface
uniform and consistent?
4.25.7 Following texturing, was a 300 mm width adjacent to the curb, barrier
or median finished smooth?
4.25.8 Repairing Concrete Defects – Were honeycomb, cavities, cracking

and other casting defects immediately reported to the Project
Manager, and did the Contractor submit a repair procedure for review
and acceptance by the Department and Project Manager prior to the
commencement of the repairs?
4.25.8 Did the Contractor’s repair procedure include removing and replacing
the defective concrete with the originally specified class of concrete by
saw cutting 25 mm deep and removing defective concrete to 35 mm
below reinforcing steel?
4.25.8 Was exposed reinforcing steel cleaned and repaired to original
condition?
4.25.8 Were repair areas saturated with water for 24 hours and free of
standing water prior to concrete placement? Was the concrete cured
in accordance with the requirements for the class of concrete?
4.25.8 Were concrete elements with formwork misalignments exceeding the
allowable tolerances removed and recast?
4.25.8 Did the Contractor and Inspector jointly inspect and identify all cracks
for class HPC and HPC with steel fibres after the curing period and
before opening to traffic?
4.25.8 Did the Inspector plot the width in millimeters and length in linear
metres of cracks and report the findings to the Department?
4.25.8 Did the Contractor repair cracks with widths greater than or equal to
0.2 mm by cleaning and drying cracks with oil-free compressed air?
4.25.8 After cleaning, did the Contractor seal cracks with an approved gravity
flow concrete crack filler, having a viscosity less than 105 centipoises
(cP) and placed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations?
4.25.8 Was epoxy injection used for full depth cracks?
17
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4.25.8 Did the epoxy resin meet the requirements of ASTM C881 Type IV,
Grade 1, Class B or C, having a viscosity less than 500 cP, and did
the Contractor submit an injection procedure to the Project Manager
for review and acceptance?
20 Type 1c Sealer
4.26 Was an approved Type 1c sealer applied to all concrete surfaces that
received a Class 2, Class 5 and Class 6 surface finish, including all
concrete surfaces to 600 mm below grade or in the case of river piers
600 mm below lowest water level? Were surfaces receiving a
waterproofing membrane, the underside of bridge decks or on
concrete diaphragms in the interior bay areas, not treated with sealer?
4.26 Did the Type 1c sealers meet the current Material Testing
Specifications for Concrete Sealers – B388, and was sealer applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, except for a
30% application rate increased from that indicated on the approved
Product List?
4.26 Before applying the sealer, had the concrete cured for at least 28
days, and was the surface dry, air blasted to remove all dust and
accepted by the Inspector prior to applying sealer?
4.26 Did the Contractor apply measured volumes of sealing compound to
appropriately dimensioned areas of concrete surface, using a
minimum of two (2) coats in order to insure a uniform and sufficient
coverage?
4.26 Were asphalt concrete pavement surfaces adequately protected from
overspray and runoff during sealer application?
21 Concrete Strength Requirements

4.27.1 Did all classes of concrete meet the specified strength requirements?
4.27.2 Was the concrete cured in accordance with Section 4.23 of the
Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction and had it attained the
minimum compression strength of 70% of the design strength prior to
opening to traffic?
4.27.3 Was coring necessary to confirm or contest low concrete strength test
results?
4.27.3 Did the Contractor employ an independent, certified testing laboratory
to take and test cores within seven (7) days of the testing of the 28-
day cylinders representing the concrete in question, and was the
Project Manager’s representative present?
4.27.3 Were cores tested by an independent CSA certified laboratory and in
accordance with the requirements of CSA Standard A23.2-14C?
4.27.3 Was the average strength of each set of three cores equal to or
greater than the 28-day specified strength?
18
Signature Date
19
4.1 Abutment seat partial formwork and reinforcing 4.2 Pile cap partial formwork and reinforcing steel.
steel. Formwork braced from excavation walls.
4.3 Pier shaft formwork being erected. 4.4 Pier cap formwork being erected.

4.5 Partial wingwall formwork.
4.6 Mudslab shown at pier columns. 4.7 Partial wingwall and backwall formwork.

4.8 Formwork bracing for wingwall. Waler form 4.9 Formwork and bracing for wingwall. Full sheets of
construction used. Forms braced using deadman plywood used to reduce form lines.
lock-block anchors.
4.10 Abutment diaphragm formwork and reinforcing 4.11 Pier diaphragm formwork and reinforcing steel.
steel. Asthetic enhancement motif cast into exterior
face of diaphragm.

4.12 Elevated construction. Shoring towers used to 4.13 Pier strut shoring towers and scaffolding. Pre-
construct abutment seat. fabricated reinforcing steel cage installed by crane.
4.14 Pier strut with plain steel reinforcement. 4.15 Pier cap shoring towers and scaffolding.

4.16 Wingwall formwork and plain steel reinforcement. 4.17 Internal form ties with recessed rod inserts. Insert
Asthetic enhancement motif cast into exterior face is removed and void patched.
of wingwall.
4.18 Substructure concrete placement. Long vibrator 4.19 Concrete pump used for pile cap pour. Forms
used to consolidate concrete for deep elements. braced against precast concrete deadmen.

4.20 Pile cap ready for concrete placement.
4.21 Plastic supports or chairs used to maintain 4.22 Crews performing strike off at finished elevation.
required cover to edge of formwork.

4.23 Concrete placement using crane and bucket. 4.24 Scaffolding and shoring towers for straddlebent
Freefall of concrete minimized. pier beam. Heating and hoarding for cold weather
concreting in place.
4.25 Scaffolding and shoring towers for straddlebent 4.26 Aluminum beam whalers and strong backs.
pier beam.

4.27 External vibrator attached to form. Due to 4.28 Cold weather concreting. Hoarding for pier
congestion of reinforcing steel and post-tensioning columns consists of insulated tarps and heaters.
ducts, internal vibration difficult.
4.29 Cold weather concreting. Hoarding for pier cap 4.30 Construction joint preparation at wingwall barrier.
pour.

4.31 Backwall corbel formwork. 4.32 Cold weather concreting. Hoarding for pier cap
pour. Room for workers and equipment to work
within the enclosure. Roof tarps open to allow for
concrete pump access.
4.33 A false deck is typically constructed at the lower 4.34 Timber deck formwork is typically hung from coil
flanges to provide a working surface. bolt hangers supported on girder top flanges.
False deck working surface shown.

4.35 Timber ledger beams are typically hung from 4.36 Joists and plywood are placed onto ledgers. Neat
hanger rods. chamfers must separate the haunch and interior
bay formwork. Holes through plywood to
accommodate coil bolts must be properly sealed.
4.37 All girder-to-form joints must be caulked prior to the 4.38 Prior to installation of reinforcing steel, it is
placement of reinforcing steel to prevent paste important to check form cross-fall to confirm form
leakage during concrete placement, which cause position accuracy.
girder staining.

4.39 Prior to installation of reinforcing steel, it is 4.40 If necessary, formwork position must be adjusted
important to check actual haunch values at all before placement of reinforcing steel begins.
girder 10th points to confirm form position
accuracy.
4.41 Cantilevered formwork at deck overhangs must be 4.42 Typical deck overhang formwork, also showing
pre-load tested to determine anticipated deflections hanger rods.
during concrete placement.

4.43 Adjustable deck overhang brackets. 4.44 Softener wrapped around bracket end to prevent
girder web damage.
4.45 Deck formwork in place on concrete girders. 4.46 Deck reinforcing steel installed, tied, and chaired.
Bulkheads constructed at planned termination of
deck placement sections.

4.47 Finishing machine screed rail cups are installed 4.48 Finishing machine rail and chain system for
and rail is set by instrument to the design carriage shown.
gradeline.
4.49 Carriage rails must be adjusted for cross-fall and 4.50 Carriage rails checked for cross-fall after
crown location. adjustment.

4.51 Finishing machine dry run consists of directly 4.52 During dry run, the constant theoretical depth of
measuring theoretical haunch values at each girder concrete at interior bays is also confirmed.
10th point.
4.53 Deck finishing machine run-off rails. 4.54 Start of deck pour. Plywood walkway on deck
reinforcing steel for safety and protection of
reinforcing steel. Pressure sprayer for cleaning and
wetting deck.

4.55 Bridge deck pour. Screeding closely following 4.56 Deck concrete placement is placed in transverse
placement. Workers avoiding walking on screeded strips so that it can be screeded as soon as
concrete. practical after placement and vibration.
4.57 Deck concrete must be floated as soon as practical 4.58 Concrete testing station set up on deck.
after screeding.

4.59 Full enclosure type heating and hoarding for cold 4.60 Concrete finishers bull floating concrete deck
weather deck pour. immediately after screeding. Finishing done from
work bridges.
4.61 It is important that concrete be screeded and raked 4.62 It is important that paste be removed from barrier
before consolidation. Workers must not walk reinforcing steel prior to initial set.
through or place additional concrete at locations
where vibration has already taken place.

4.63 Straight edge checks must be done in both the 4.64 Line pump used to place deck concrete.
transverse and longitudinal directions along the
gutter as hand floating is done.
4.65 Line pump with adjustable swivel arm for accurate 4.66 Placement of curing fabric from work bridges.
concrete placement.

4.67 Crews applying pre-soaked curing fabric. 4.68 Once the concrete will not be marred, crews apply
pre-soaked curing fabric.
4.69 Placement of second layer of filter fabric after initial 4.70 Dunnage is used to secure filter fabric.
set.

4.71 Soaker hoses are used at the crown to maintain 4.72 Curing material placed. Dunnage used to hold wet
wet filter fabric throughout the curing period. cure in place.
4.73 Approach slab reinforcing steel. Plastic chairs used 4.74 Placing approach slab concrete.
to separate reinforcing mats. Reinforcing steel
placed on skew with deck.

4.75 Heating and hoarding during winter curing. 4.76 Barrier reinforcing steel and formwork. Bridge rail
anchor bolt assembly secured to reinforcing steel.
4.77 Typical gap at barrier reinforcing steel at 4.78 Typical construction joint at outside face of barrier.
control joint. Note pour strip detail.

4.79 Typical rough vibrator-finish at barrier construction

joint. Note that concrete surface at construction
joint slopes towards deck and away from outside
face of barrier.
4.80 Barrier formwork showing anchor bolt assemblies, 4.81 Barrier anchor bolt assembly.
chamfer strip, and control joint crack initiator.

4.82 Wooden forms for barrier and curb formwork.

Form attachment to deck concrete must be
avoided.
4.83 Typical formwork and pour strip at outside face of 4.84 Completed transition barrier.
barrier. Note that forms are tight to the hardened
concrete to prevent paste leakage.

4.85 Median pour. Wooden strike off board built to

maintain desired profile.
4.86 Re-usable steel forms for barriers. 4.87 Crews tooling joints at 3.0 m spacing. Broom finish
to be applied.

4.88 Concrete surface finishing. Form tie voids filled 4.89 Concrete surface finishing at exterior faces of
with approved patching material. Proper patching barriers. Workers using aerial work platform to
techniques must be followed in order to have a access work. Class 2 rubbed surface finish
durable and lasting patch. followed by two applications of pigmented sealer.
4.90 Concrete surface finishing of exterior faces of 4.91 Wing wall after form stripping. Form tie holes to be
barriers. Workers using aerial lift truck to access patched.
work.

4.92 Outside face of wingwall showing patching of form 4.93 Applying pigmented sealer to MSE wall fascia
tie holes. panels and barriers by spraying.
4.94 Applying pigmented sealer to MSE wall fascia 4.95 Honeycomb defect.
panels below grade.

4.96 Transverse-direction deck slab drying shrinkage

crack.
4.97 Crack comparator gauge used to measure crack 4.98 Plastic shrinkage cracks on deck slab surfaces.
width.

4.99 Deck slab soffit drying shrinkage crack. 4.100 Drying shrinkage crack along crack inducer such
as reinforcing steel chairs.

4.101 Crazing -type cracking seen on formed surfaces. 4.102 Drying shrinkage cracks on vertical substructure
surface.
4.103 Drying shrinkage cracks on substructure. 4.104 Concrete washout bin.

4.105 Typical trailer-type concrete mixer and concrete 4.106 Preparation of headslope with telescoping boom
pump. excavator.
4.107 Headslope compaction with hydraulic excavator. 4.108 Toe cut-off wall formwork at base of concrete slope
protection.

4.109 Excavation for toe cut-off wall 4.110 Forming of vertical concrete slope protection
courses.
4.111 Forming vertical courses. Reinforcing mesh 4.112 Pouring vertical courses in alternating sections.
chaired using masonry bricks. Care is required to avoid crushing chairs as pour
progresses.

4.113 Alternate vertical courses placed. 4.114 Checking cover and alignment.
4.115 Pouring fill-in courses.

REINFORCING STEEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.3 Material Types .............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.4 Material Production and Testing ................................................................................. 5-1
5.5 Fabrication ................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.6 Shipping, Handling, Initial Inspection and Storage ................................................... 5-2
5.7 Placing and Fastening ................................................................................................. 5-3
5.7.1 Bar Condition ................................................................................................... 5-3
5.7.2 Bar Placement.................................................................................................. 5-3
5.7.2.1 Bar Tying ...................................................................................................... 5-4
5.7.2.2 Bar Support .................................................................................................. 5-4
5.7.2.3 Field Bending and Cutting............................................................................ 5-5
5.7.2.4 Inspector’s Role ........................................................................................... 5-5
5.8 Acceptance Criteria of Stainless CRR ........................................................................ 5-6
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 5, Reinforcing Steel
5.1 General
The required reinforcing steel is detailed on the Plans. The Plans also contain bar list charts,
which provide a bar mark reference number, bar size, shape type, number of each shape type,
total length and dimensions of each bar leg.
The Inspector must be aware of similar safety considerations identified in Section 4 of this
Manual.
5.3 Material Types
Plain reinforcing steel is commonly used in Class C, D, S or Pile concrete where chloride
exposure is low. Plain reinforcing steel is often called “black” bar.
Corrosion Resistant Reinforcing (CRR) steel consists of either low carbon/chromium steel or
stainless steel reinforcing. This material is used in Class HPC concrete or where chloride
exposure is high.
Epoxy-coated reinforcing steel is not used in new construction except for MSE wall panels.
However, it may be used in concrete rehabilitation work. This application is discussed in
Section 20 of this Manual.
5.4 Material Production and Testing
Plain reinforcing steel is Grade 400 and must meet the requirements of CSA Standard
G30.18M. This Standard provides requirements for carbon steel bars as concrete
reinforcement. The manufacturer must test the material in accordance with the Standard and
must provide mill test certificates to the Consultant that demonstrates the material meets the
project requirements. In particular, the mill test report must include the CSA designation, grade,
size, heat numbers, chemical composition, yield strength, tensile strength, elongation at failure,
bend test results and carbon equivalent.
Low carbon/chromium CRR is Grade 100 and must meet the requirements of ASTM A1035.
Stainless steel CRR must meet the requirements of ASTM A276 and A955M, with additional
testing required to confirm compliance to ASTM A262 and A923. CRR bars must be roller-
marked to identify the mill source, size, type and minimum yield designation.
Stainless CRR is pickled to remove surface oxidation, mill scale and other impurities. The
pickling process involves placing stainless CRR into a bath of pickle liquor, which contains
strong acids. Occasionally, the pickling process is not successful or causes damage to stainless
CRR that can be seen in the form of excessive discolouration or staining. Details of the pickling
process must be submitted to the Consultant by the Contractor. Stained or discoloured bars
must not be accepted by the Inspector, and their occurrence must be brought to the attention of
the Project Manager.
The Inspector must:
 Confirm with the Project Manager that the submitted material test reports represent all
expected reinforcing steel materials and that the content of the reports is acceptable. The
Inspector must have access to the reviewed and accepted mill test reports.
September 2015 5-1

 Confirm with the Project Manager that the pickling process for stainless CRR has been
accepted.
5.5 Fabrication
The Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) provides requirements for fabrication. The bar
leg dimensions provided on the bar list of the Plans are measured out-to-out and are projected
to the out-to-out tangent point of the bend radius. Fabrication tolerances are provided in the
Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada Manual of Standard Practice. Generally, bars are bent at a
constant radius and not at kink points.
 Straight bars must not exhibit gradual bends or sweeps.

 Bar deformations (ribs) must not show loss of depth or other mechanical damage.
 Bars must not exhibit burrs or laminations.
 Stainless CRR must be free of iron contamination as specified. Iron contamination is caused
when steel particles become embedded into stainless bars through the fabrication process.
These particles are small, and contamination generally occurs on the surface of the bar
deformations since these are handling contact points during straightening and bending
operations.
The Inspector must review the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada Manual of Standard
Practice and, prior to reinforcing steel delivery, be aware of the fabrication tolerances.
5.6 Shipping, Handling, Initial Inspection and Storage
Shipments arriving at site must be protected from the elements and be tagged. The information
on the tag typically includes the fabricator’s name, customer’s name, job number, mark,
number, size, quantity, grade, type, length, bend class, run number, number of bundles and
other information.
The Inspector’s role includes the following:
 Confirm that each shipment of reinforcing steel has been protected during transport. Bars
that have not been protected may be contaminated by road salt and sand, which is
detrimental to bond and can consequently reduce the life expectancy of the concrete.
Bundles are usually protected with tarps or shrink-wrap, but may also be protected by
transporting in enclosed trailers. If tarps are used, confirm that they are secure with no
breaches.
 Confirm that reinforcing steel is not placed if there will be a planned disruption to the Work,
such as a winter shut-down.
 Confirm that spreader bars are used to prevent sagging, which results in bar-to-bar abrasion
with long bundles. Bundles or bars must not be dragged to avoid contamination and
damage. Bundles must be stored on platforms to prevent contamination.
 Confirm that the heat numbers on the shipment tag match the heat numbers on the
reviewed and accepted mill test reports. Confirm that the marks rolled into CRR bars match
the information provided on the mill certificates and testing reports. If the heat numbers or
bar markings do not match the documentation, then the reinforcing steel material properties
have not been accepted. Such reinforcing steel must not be incorporated into the Work.
 With the Contractor’s cooperation and assistance, remove one or more sample bars from a
bundle for each bar type to confirm dimensions. For straight bars, confirm that the bars are
the correct diameter and length. Measure all legs for bent bars, confirming that the out-to-
out dimensions match those of the bar list from the Plans. To measure out-to-out
September 2015 5-2

dimensions for bent bars, it will be necessary to use a projecting straight-edge to locate the
curve tangent point. After dimensions have been verified, confirm that protection to the
bundle is reinstated. It is important to check reinforcing steel dimensions as soon as the
materials arrive on site and well before placement.
 Confirm that only one type of CRR is supplied to the project (either carbon/chromium or
stainless).
5.7 Placing and Fastening
The Inspector’s role during this stage is critical. Improperly placed or fastened reinforcing steel
may significantly affect the intended performance and durability of the structure.
5.7.1 Bar Condition
Reinforcing steel must be free of all foreign materials before being placed. Bond strength can be
greatly compromised by contaminants.
Plain reinforcing steel will seldom appear ‘black’ or metallic in appearance. After fabrication,
transportation and storage, it is natural for plain reinforcement to exhibit a surface oxide that is
light orange-brown in colour. This oxide is easily removable by hand or brush and has the
appearance of a fine dust. Generally, a light rust covering is not detrimental to bond, and bars
exhibiting this type of oxide may be accepted. If in doubt, the Inspector must discuss the nature
of rust with the Project Manager.
Plain reinforcing steel may exhibit loose, flaking rust, which is dark brown in colour and is
dissimilar to the surface oxide described above. Often, loose rust results in pitting and section
loss to the bar. Such bars may have been exposed to the elements for a considerable length of
time. These bars must not be accepted.
Oil and paint will reduce bond and must be removed. Form release oil may inadvertently be
sprayed onto bars. Forms must always be oiled prior to the placement of reinforcing steel.
Mud is a typical contaminant commonly tracked onto in-place reinforcing steel by workers.
Temporary wooden platforms, wash stations or other means must be employed to keep
reinforcing steel surfaces clean of mud. Prevention is much more effective than cleaning.
The Inspector must:
 Thoroughly inspect reinforcing steel for any contamination before it is placed and prior to
concrete placement. It is very difficult to clean bars and to inspect the cleanliness of bars
once they are in place.
 Inspect placed bars for straightness and correct positioning/location.
 Inspect bars for laminations, burrs and damage to deformations.
 Inspect stainless CRR for discolouration, staining and iron impregnation.
5.7.2 Bar Placement
Often, reinforcing steel needs to be carried by hand from the storage area to the element being
constructed. It is important that the reinforcing steel not be dragged along the ground.
The work of placing and tying reinforcing steel is specialized. The Contractor typically
subcontracts this work to placers, called “rodbusters”, for reasons of efficiency.
September 2015 5-3

5.7.2.1 Bar Tying
The performance of the structure depends upon accurate reinforcing steel placement.
Reinforcing steel cages may either be assembled by tying them in place or by pre-assembly.
Piles, columns, abutment seats and pier caps are commonly pre-fabricated. Wingwalls,
backwalls and decks are usually tied in place.
Pre-assembly is almost always done at the site, and it allows the Contractor to construct cages
without the access restrictions caused by formwork. Pre-assembly also permits the use of jigs,
which results in more accurate placement. It also allows formwork to be constructed
concurrently with cage pre-assembly, which can improve scheduling. After fabrication is
complete, the cage is “flown-in” using a crane. Prior to placing the cage, it is very important that
the bar count, bar spacing and overall cage dimensions have been carefully checked. It is very
difficult to correct the cage after it is installed into the form.
Bars that are tied in place are usually laid out, spaced and then tied. The bar count and bar
spacing must be thoroughly checked for accuracy before tying. It is important to confirm the
accuracy of lower layers or “mats” before installing reinforcing steel for the upper mat.
5.7.2.2 Bar Support
Cover is maintained by use of bar supports or spacers, typically called “chairs”. It is extremely
important that reinforcing steel be spaced from the forms to obtain the minimum clear cover
specified. The most common direct cause of concrete rehabilitation for existing structures is the
lack of reinforcing steel cover. The Plans identify the minimum cover; it is not permissible to
apply a tolerance to this value. There is no practical way to re-establish cover after concrete has
been cast. Surface treatments or toppings do not provide a durable alternative to the provision
of proper cover.
Chairs are used both to provide cover to forms and to separate bar mats. Chairs are typically
made of high-impact and chemically-resistant polypropylene; however, precast block chairs are
required for exposed faces of curbs, barriers and medians. The CRSI maintains and publishes
standards relating to strength of chairs, to which manufacturers must comply. Two important
considerations need to be made by the Contractor when selecting the chairing system: 1) the
ability of the chairs to support or secure the reinforcing steel in position, and 2) the workability
and consolidation needed for concrete to come into complete contact with the chair’s surfaces.
 Polypropylene chairs are typically used to support deck mats and lighter cages. They are
available in standard heights and each support only a single bar, but some chairs may
support a single bar for both a top and bottom reinforcing steel mat. Chairs must be placed
in a regular pattern consistent with manufacturer’s requirements. Many different types of
plastic chairs are available to contractors. Chairs vary in strength and in detail.
 Polypropylene slab bolsters are a type of continuous chair that supports multiple bars in
the same mat. An advantage of bolsters is their ease of installation and reduction in the
overall number of chairs. These chairs are typically used for large areas, such as decks.
However, without proper care and attention, bolsters can be placed more haphazardly and
less systematically than single chairs. Due to their length, bolsters may create an obstruction
to concrete movement, and honeycombs and voids can result if concrete is not sufficiently
workable to fill the voids beneath the bolster line. Bolsters vary in type and only certain types
are permitted by the Department.
 Precast block chairs are used at exposed concrete surfaces where durability is critical.
Precast blocks are also used to chair heavy cages, like abutment seats and pier caps.
September 2015 5-4

Precast chairs must strictly meet all strength and durability properties of the class of
concrete being placed. Chairs for barriers, curbs and median faces must be pre-fabricated
by an approved supplier. It is very important that the exposed face of these chairs be
carefully aligned with the form face, otherwise a weak concrete paste layer will exist at the
finished face.
 Circular chairs or “wagon wheel” spacers are used primarily for piles, columns or other
pre-assembled cages that are “flown-in” to the formwork. Circular chairs rotate as they move
along a form or an excavation, maintaining cover during cage installation.
 Support bars or “carry bars” are typically heavy bars, not required by design but
proposed by contractors to support other bars efficiently and with minimal chairing. Support
bars must be of the same type and must maintain all cover and clearance requirements.
They are only permitted if approved by the Project Manager. No additional payment is made
for these additional bars.
5.7.2.3 Field Bending and Cutting
Bars must be bent and sheared only at the fabrication facility.
Bars may not be field bent. Certain bar materials, such as carbon/chromium CRR, have high
strengths that make them sensitive to micro-cracking. Bars projecting from concrete that are
field-bent are susceptible to cracking or embrittlement. Bars that are bent abruptly at the
location where they project from concrete may no longer meet their minimum design radius. If
bars are field-bent, it is extremely difficult to visually detect cracks and Non-Destructive Testing
(NDT) methods are needed to determine if damage exists.
Bars may not be flame cut. Special shearing and sawing equipment is required to cut reinforcing
steel.
5.7.2.4 Inspector’s Role
Reinforcing steel inspection is required at delivery, placement and during concrete placement.
The Inspector must:
 Check reinforcing steel position immediately after the first bars of an element are placed and
tied. It is undesirable to wait until reinforcing steel for an entire element is placed before
checking it. Bottom mats become very difficult to correct after top mats have been placed.
 Confirm that lap splicing is only done where shown on the Plans. Any additional splicing
must be approved by the Project Manager.
 Check chairing before reinforcing steel placement to confirm correct cover and spacing.
Chairs must acceptably support the weight of the reinforcing steel and be sufficiently strong
to resist movement as a result of worker activity or concrete placement.
 Confirm that ties are securely made, at the frequency specified, and using the correct type
of wire.
 Be aware that bar substitutions require the Project Manager’s approval.
 Be aware that at congested areas, bars must be spaced so that they may be adequately
covered by concrete at all surfaces. It is important that the coarse aggregate in the concrete
is able to flow between and encapsulate all bars.
 Perform a pre-pour inspection of the completed reinforcing steel installation. Bars may have
shifted, become contaminated or otherwise become noncompliant due to worker activity.
The Contractor must not be permitted to begin placing concrete until the Inspector’s pre-
pour inspection is complete and any identified non-conforming Work has been rectified. The
Contractor must not be permitted to begin placing concrete if reinforcing steel placement
September 2015 5-5

and tying is still occurring at the element. All Work must be inspected and deemed
acceptable by the Inspector before concrete placement may begin.
 Conduct the pre-pour inspection systematically. It is very difficult to track checked bar
without the aid of a Plan drawing that is “checked-off” as the Work is inspected. Bar
numbers, sizes, positions and cover must be recorded accurately during checks.
5.8 Acceptance Criteria of Stainless CRR
Stainless CRR that exhibits staining, discolouration or iron impregnation in excess of that
permitted by the specifications must not be incorporated into the Work. Acceptance must be
deferred to the Project Manager. Stainless CRR exhibiting mechanical damage such as crushed
deformations is not acceptable.
September 2015 5-6

Section 5 – Reinforcing Steel Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Were lap lengths adequate?
Was the mass of reinforcement recorded for unit price payment?
2 Delivery Inspection
5.3 Did all reinforcing steel bundles have tags and markings that matched
the accepted mill test certificates?
5.5 Were bundles acceptably protected during transport?
5.4 Did bars meet the dimensional requirements on the Plans and were
they within acceptable fabricating tolerances?
5.5 Were stored bundles adequately protected?
5.5 Were bundles unloaded so as to prevent bar-to-bar abrasion?
5.4 Did bars exhibit damage to deformations during fabrication or

handling?
5.6 Did bars exhibit staining, discolouration, corrosion, iron contamination

or any other foreign contamination?
3 Placing Inspection
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
5.6 Were any bars field cut or bent?
5.6 Were bars placed accurately?
5.6 Were bars tied securely at the specific spacing and with the
appropriate tie wire?
5.6 Were support chairs of adequate strength, frequency and correct

type?
5.6 Was cover adequate?
5.6 Were support chairs seated firmly against forms?
5.7 Did lapped splice lengths comply with drawings?
5.6 Did bar counts comply with drawings?
5.6 Did bar sizes and lengths comply with drawings?
5.9 Did bars exhibit site contamination?
5.6 Were all non-compliant conditions rectified prior to concrete

placement?
5.10 Was the mass of all reinforcing steel placed recorded for payment?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
4 Post-pour Inspection
5.6 Did any locations exist where cover was inadequate?
5.4 Were any bars field-bent without approval?
5.6 Were any bars contaminated with concrete paste?
5.7 Did any bars lack necessary projection?
Signature Date
3
5.1 Proper storage of plain reinforcing steel on timber 5.2 Abutment seat formwork and plain reinforcing
dunnage in dry location. steel.
5.3 Pier pile cap formwork and plain reinforcing steel. 5.4 Pier strut consisting of plain reinforcing steel.

5.5 Wingwall reinforcing steel. CRR projecting for 5.6 Pier column plain reinforcing steel.
barriers.
5.7 Pier shaft plain reinforcing steel. 50 mm wagon 5.8 Pier shaft plain reinforcing steel. Wagon wheel
wheel chairs attached at open face. chairs attached.

5.9 Crews tying and placing first mat of deck 5.10 Deck and barrier CRR placed on precast concrete
reinforcing steel. deck panels.
5.11 Crews tying barrier CRR. 5.12 Improper chair placement and broken or crushed
chairs. Chairs may impede consolidation and may
cause honeycomb.

5.13 Improper chair placement or inadequate 5.14 CRR showing iron contamination. Contamination is
consolidation does not allow concrete to flow and caused during fabrication but corrosion may begin
may cause honeycombing. at the project site.
5.15 Reinforcement detail at abutment diaphragm

section. Bars are heavily congested in these areas.
Special attention is required during concrete
placement and vibration.

STRUCTURAL STEEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.4 Pre-Erection ................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.4.1 Delivery ............................................................................................................ 6-1
6.4.2 Erection Procedure........................................................................................... 6-2
6.5 Assembly ...................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.6 High Strength Bolted Connections ............................................................................. 6-4
6.6.1 Tightening by the “Turn-of-Nut” Method............................................................ 6-4
6.7 Deck Joints................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.7.1 Types of Deck Joints ........................................................................................ 6-5
6.7.2 Installation of Deck Joints ................................................................................. 6-5
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 6, Structural Steel
6.1 General
Erection of structural steel includes bridge girders, diaphragms and bracing, deck joint
assemblies, and other structural steel components. The work also includes accommodation of
traffic if required, and the protection of the environment.
Steel girder erection is an activity that requires a highly experienced and knowledgeable
Contractor. Damage to girder units can be caused by improper handling and erection. The
Inspector must confirm that proper methods and techniques are being implemented.
Various methods are used to erect steel girder units. Most commonly, girders are erected by
mobile or crawler type cranes. Cranes often require the closure of roadway travel lanes or the
construction of berms within a watercourse. Where crane capacities are exceeded by longer
spans or where cranes cannot be used, girders can be installed using a launching system.
The Inspector must be aware of the following environmental considerations:
 All berm work, temporary pilings, shoring towers and falsework must be acceptably removed
within the time frames specified.
 The Contractor must leave the bridge site, roads, watercourse channel and adjacent
property in an acceptable condition.
It is important to conduct a pre-girder erection meeting with the Contractor to discuss all traffic
and safety issues. The Inspector must be aware of the following constraints:
 Girders may tip from steering dollies during transport, creating a hazard to the public.
Access must be safe and a site inspection must be done prior to delivery.
 Girders may tip if not properly stored on timber blocking.
 Many hazardous situations exist with cranes, including tipping, collision, falling loads and
contact with overhead power lines.
 Access to the Work may involve ladders, scaffold and aerial platforms. Lifelines and fall
protection equipment will be required. Proper training is needed for these activities.
 Trip hazards exist when walking on or near steel girder shear studs.
 Erection work is often done during nighttime when darkness creates traffic and tripping
hazards.
 Load swings over traffic create an unacceptable risk and are not acceptable. Traffic
stoppage at night increases the risk of vehicle incidents.
 Catastrophic failure of girders due to inadequate temporary bracing creates a dangerous
situation for workers and the travelling public.
 Cylindrical erection pins may fall from connections and impact traffic below.
6.4 Pre-Erection
6.4.1 Delivery
The Inspector must be aware of the delivery schedule of girders and confirm with the Project
Manager that the girder units have been accepted for shipment. As the girders arrive at the site,
the Inspector must confirm that the girders are acceptable for erection.
September 2015 6-1

The girders must be free of contaminants, such as road salt and other staining. It is very difficult
to clean girders at the site, especially during freezing conditions. The Contractor must be
encouraged to protect the girders during transport, as is practical. Girders exhibiting staining or
evidence of road salt and other contaminants will require high pressure washing or
sandblasting.
The Contractor must demonstrate, through field-cured concrete test specimens if necessary,
that the substructure concrete has achieved sufficient strength to place girders.
Girders are sometimes unloaded and temporarily stored on site before they are erected into
position. Girders must be supported on timber blocking at the bearing points and never directly
onto the ground or onto concrete or steel blocks. The timber blocking must be sufficient to
support the weight of the girders, and the ground must be level and unyielding. The girders must
be supported so that the bottom flange does not twist, and the girder web must be plumb at all
times.
After unloading, the Inspector must confirm that the girders are free of scratches and nicks. A
thorough inspection is required since even small defects can result in subsequent cracks.
After girders are properly blocked or erected, the Inspector must confirm that the girder sweep
tolerance is not exceeded.
If girders are not transported and stockpiled in the upright position, the Inspector must confirm
that the Contractor’s submission for alternate delivery, handling or storage has been accepted.
Heat-straightening of distorted girders requires special procedures and may not be done at the
site without approval from the Project Manager.
6.4.2 Erection Procedure
Girders are commonly erected using mobile or crawler type cranes. Short girders and light
sections such as bracing are typically erected using a single crane. A spreader bar is used to lift
the girder at each end using one crane. The erection crew assists with positioning the girder by
using taglines. Longer girders and heavier sections are typically erected using two cranes.
Erection of heavy or deep girders may require large cranes. Certain sites are not conducive to
erection by crane due to traffic, swing radius or watercourse limitations. Alternatively, girders
may be erected by launching. Launching systems may include launching girders or trusses and
a restraining system that are specially designed for the site.
Full bolting of girder splices is completed after erection. Cylindrical erection pins are used to
align holes. Shoring towers or other temporary falsework is required to temporarily support a
girder end until the splice is completed.
The Contractor must prepare and submit an erection procedure to the Consultant for review.
Prior to the start of erection, the Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager that the
Contractor’s procedure has been accepted. The Inspector must thoroughly review and
understand the details of the procedure. The Inspector must promptly notify the Project
Manager if the Contractor deviates from the accepted procedure. Important aspects of the
procedure that the Inspector must review include:
September 2015 6-2

 Traffic Accommodation: Girder erection often requires complex traffic accommodation,

including lane closures and cross-over detours. Girder erection is often done during off-peak
nighttime hours when lighting and flashers are required. The Inspector must check that all
traffic control devices are installed, according to the Contractor’s Traffic Accommodation
Strategy (TAS). The Inspector must monitor the effectiveness of the traffic control devices
and require changes if danger to workers or the public is observed. Protection measures are
required to prevent vehicles from entering the closed work area, including barricades and
typically water-filled barriers. The Inspector must confirm that the swing radius of the crane
does not result in loads being over traffic. Generally, it is not permitted to stop traffic at any
time, but short stoppages are sometimes permitted if stated in the Special Provisions. The
Inspector must confirm that all flagging and signage is in place to effectively warn motorists
of the stoppage. The Inspector must record details of traffic disruptions and queues, and
must promptly report all traffic incidents to the Department.
 Survey Layout: Prior to girder erection, the Contractor must lay out the actual centre points
of all bearings and confirm the distance between adjacent bearings. The as-built survey
information must be examined to confirm that the bearings are correctly located with respect
to the stationing of the control line. The Contractor must also survey the actual elevations of
all bearing recesses and determine shim and grout pad thickness requirements. The
Inspector must check all survey work of the Contractor.
 Crane Position: The cranes must be set up as shown in the erection procedure to ensure
that the intended swing radius and lifting capacity are maintained. Reference measurements
must be taken by the Contractor to confirm that crane locations are accurate. The Inspector
must also check the crane positioning. Crane outriggers must bear on adequate foundations
and, if soft soils exist, may require the use of timber mats to distribute loads. Protection to
existing roadway surfacing is required before setting outriggers. Cranes are sometimes set-
up on river ice, which requires special precautions and testing requirements that must be
described in the Contractor’s erection procedure.
 Lifting: It is important that girders are lifted only at their designated lift points. Girders must
not be modified upon arrival at the site by drilling or field welding to accommodate lifting
devices. Only non-marring lifting tongs may be used. Girders must be kept in the vertical
position at all times to prevent damage.
 Shoring Towers: Temporary shoring towers and ground improvements must be constructed
as described in the girder erection procedure. Towers may not be removed until the girder
splice locations have been confirmed to be at their design elevations.
 Temporary Bracing: It is necessary to temporarily secure girders to the substructure
elements. This is especially important prior to the installation of diaphragms and braces, and
when the bridge is on a grade. The girders are normally secured with temporary angle
braces that bolt to the substructure. The Inspector must confirm that the temporary bracing
is installed and removed as detailed in the Contractor’s erection procedure.
6.5 Assembly
Assembly of the structural steel members must be done accurately as shown on the Plans, and
in a manner that will prevent bending or damage to the steel. During erection, the diaphragms,
braces and splices are pinned and bolted to a snug-tight condition so that all components are
secured. Prior to bolt tightening, the Inspector must confirm the following:
 All components must be assembled in accordance with the match marks established at the
shop. Misfits encountered in the field must be reported to the Project Manager for further
review. Before installing and securing splice plates, the faying surfaces must meet the
conditions of cleanliness required by the specifications and must be free of all dirt, oil, loose
scale, burrs, pits, paint or lacquer.
September 2015 6-3

 After the steel girders are erected and the splice locations loosely pinned and bolted, all
shims, wedges or jacks used to support the steel on the falsework must be removed or
lowered such that the steel girders are carrying their own weight.
 The Contractor must perform a survey of the erected girders to check the top of the girder
elevations at all bearing locations and at all splice locations. Adjustments to the bearing
shim stack heights and rotation of the splice locations may be necessary to achieve the
design elevations. The Contractor must make corrections to the girder locations and
elevations until the elevations are correct.
 After all adjustments have been made, the Inspector must record the actual bearing grout
pad depths at each bearing location. If the pad heights are out of tolerance, a proposal for
corrective action from the Contractor with acceptance from the Project Manager is needed.
 The Contractor may begin bolt tightening only when the Inspector confirms that all of the
girder elevations and locations at the bearing and splice locations are correct.
6.6 High Strength Bolted Connections
High tensile strength bolts are used in bolted connections and tightened to a very high tension,
which clamps the joined plates between the head and the nut of the bolt. This clamping action
enables the load to be transferred from one plate to the other by friction with no slip, thus
producing a rigid joint. The frictional resistance is transferred over a relatively large area,
reducing local stresses at the holes. In addition, the high initial tension prevents the nuts from
loosening over their service life.
Frictional resistance depends on the amount of initial tension in the bolt, therefore it is essential
that proper tightening be done to develop adequate clamping forces. Special attention must be
given to installing and tightening high strength bolts. The Inspector must consider the following:
 The Contractor must tighten the bolts to produce the minimum tensions required. Tightening
must always be done by the “turn-of- nut” method.
 The Contractor must use a Skidmore Tension Calibrator or other approved device capable
of measuring bolt tension to verify that the specified bolt tension has been achieved by the
“turn-of-nut” method. The torque wrench must be calibrated to this device for each bolt lot or
at minimum on a daily basis. The Contractor must check torque for at least 10% of all bolts.
 The Inspector must visually check all bolts at splice locations to confirm that the bolts are the
same size, grade and condition as those used in the torque wrench calibration device. The
Inspector must confirm that all bolts have been tightened to the specified values.
 For sloped surfaces, bevelled washers must be used. The bevelled washers must be
designed to produce a bearing surface normal to the bolt axis.
 At splice locations, bolts are to be tightened at the centre first, working progressively
outwards. Each bolt must be tightened to a tension of at least 5% but not more than 10%
greater than the specified minimum tension. All bolts must be tightened in the sequence
specified.
 Bolts may be tightened by turning either the nut or the head of the bolt, provided that a
washer is used at the tightening end.
6.6.1 Tightening by the “Turn-of-Nut” Method
The “turn-of-nut” method of tightening assures proper tension by imposing a set amount of
strain (lengthening) in the bolt. The bolts are first tightened snugly to ensure full contact of
jointed parts, and the nut (or bolt head) is then turned a further specified amount. The nut
moving along the pitch of the thread forces the bolt to stretch, thus developing the required
tension in the bolt. The amount of rotation required depends on the length of the bolt.
September 2015 6-4

In using the “Turn-of-Nut” method, the Contractor must snug-tighten enough bolts to ensure that
the parts of the joint are brought into full contact.
All bolts must be tightened to the minimum bolt tension by rotating the nut or bolt head through
the required portion of a turn, working systematically from the most rigid part of the joint to its
free edges.
During tightening, there should be no rotation (“wheeling”) of the bolt head or nut.
The Inspector must confirm that the joints are being properly snugged, and that the required
rotations are being achieved. The Inspector must also visually confirm that 10% of all bolts have
been checked for tightness with a torque wrench. This must be done continuously as the work
proceeds. The Contractor’s rotation marks must be neatly applied, and must be made using
indelible paint.
6.7 Deck Joints
Deck joints are required for major bridges with non-integral abutments. Deck joints are installed
across the openings between the bridge deck and abutment, and can also be located over
piers. They accommodate thermal, creep and live load movements.
Deck joints have a deck and abutment side and are shipped as assembled units. The deck joint
assemblies must remain joined together, wrapped and adequately supported on timber until
they are installed.
Deck joints are installed into blocked-out sections of the deck and abutment. They must be
installed with care to avoid damage to the galvanized coating, where applicable.
6.7.1 Types of Deck Joints
Finger plated deck joints are common on longer spans. Details for fabrication and installation
are shown on Standard Drawings S-1638, S-1639 and S-1640. These deck joints consist of a
finger support plate attached to the girders that engages finger plates on both the deck and
abutment sides. Finger plate deck joints allow water to pass through the joint, requiring a
drainage system below the joint. This typically consists of a stainless steel trough that directs
water away from the substructure. Proper fabrication and installation of these joints is critical for
the joint to function as intended.
Type 1 strip seal deck joints consist of two extruded metal flanges with keyways that are
designed to accommodate a replaceable, flexible gland. Stop-movement bars prevent the joint
from closing beyond a minimum gap. Details for fabrication and installation are shown on
Standard Drawings S-1810, S-1811 and S-1812. The extrusions are cast into the concrete on
both deck and abutment sides using studs for anchorage.
Cover plated strip seal deck joints are similar to Type 1 joints, but they utilize a steel plate
above the strip seal to protect it from punctures. Details for fabrication and installation are
shown on Standard Drawings S-1800, S-1801 and S-1802.
6.7.2 Installation of Deck Joints
The Inspector must consider the following for proper deck joint installation:
September 2015 6-5

 Deck and backwall reinforcing steel must be carefully adjusted to accommodate deck joint
anchor studs.
 It is important that the deck joints be properly aligned, set to required elevation and gapped
prior to concrete placement.
 Where applicable, field welding at the specified splice location must be done in accordance
with Section 13 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction. Damaged
galvanizing is to be repaired to the requirements of ASTM A380.
 The girder temperature must be measured at the bottom flanges to determine the
appropriate gap from the gap setting table shown on the Plans. The gap is normally
measured on the square of the joint for skewed bridges.
 Placement of Class HPC concrete for deck joint block-outs requires careful attention to
concrete quality control.
 Placement of block-out concrete requires that concrete completely fills the space beneath
the extrusions. Care must be taken to precisely follow the requirements specified on the
Standard Drawings.
 Concrete at block-outs must be finished slightly proud of the extrusions so that the
extrusions are recessed 6 mm, to avoid future damage by snowplows.
 Special finishing and curing requirements exist for block-out concrete.
 It is important that the deck joint to erection angle bolts be loosened after the concrete is
placed so that joint movement can occur before the concrete sets.
 Care must be taken to accurately install the strip seal into position, especially at skewed
bridges. The Inspector must confirm that the strip seal is not torn and that it is turned-up at
the ends. The Inspector must witness the flood test performed by the Contractor.
September 2015 6-6

Section 6 – Structural Steel Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Were the substructure elements surveyed prior to girder erection?

Were all discrepancies of the Contractor’s layout reported to the
Project Manager?
Were the erection procedure and the falsework details approved by
2 Structural Steel Erection

6.3.1 Transportation, Handling and Storing Materials – If girders and beams
were not transported in the vertical position, did the Contractor submit
calculations and associated sketches, signed and sealed by the
engineer who performed the analysis to the Project Manager for
review two (2) weeks prior to shipping?
6.3.1 Did the Contractor, in the presence of the Inspector, check the
elements prior to erection, and was an adequate flat storage area
provided for the inspection?
6.3.1 Did the Contractor immediately report and provide an engineering

assessment report, prepared by a professional engineer experienced
in evaluation and inspection of damaged steel members, for any
structural steel member damaged during transportation?
Did the Inspector arrange for an independent inspection and
assessment of the damaged member?
6.3.1 Was material stored on timber blocking, kept clean and stored in a
properly drained area?
6.3.1 Were girders and beams placed upright and adequately shored?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
6.3.1 Were long members, such as deck joint assemblies, buffer angles,
columns and chords, supported on timber blocking to prevent damage
from deflection?
6.3.1 Was galvanized material handled and stored as per Section 12.2.8 of
the SSBC?
3 Bridge Girders
6.3.2.1 Did the Contractor prepare and submit drawings for the Project
Manager’s review for temporary supporting structures and berms,
where applicable?
6.3.2.1 Were all temporary supporting structures and/or berms removed from
the stream channel prior to spring break-up or runoff periods?
6.3.2.1 Did the Contractor repair any damage to property resulting from the
existence of berms?
6.3.2.2 Was a detailed erection procedure submitted to the Project Manager?
6.3.2.2 Does the erection procedure bear the Seal of a Professional Engineer
registered in Alberta?
6.3.2.2 Did the Project Manager schedule a pre-job meeting with the
Contractor's project manager and field superintendent prior to
commencement of any field work?
6.3.2.2 Did the Contractor do a complete superstructure layout by means of

chalk lines and markings applied to all substructure units, showing
bearing and girder positions in accordance with the Contractor's
reviewed layout plan?
6.3.2.3 Did the Contractor provide 100% fall protection and a safe work
procedure for girder erection and deck formwork?
6.3.2.4 Did the Contractor submit a detailed procedure for the straightening of
plates, angles or other shapes to the Department and Project
Manager prior to any straightening being done?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
6.3.2.4 Following the accepted straightening of a bend or buckled material,

was the surface of the metal carefully inspected for evidence of
fractures, including any non-destructive testing deemed necessary?
6.3.2.5 Were the parts accurately assembled and with all match-marks
followed?
6.3.2.5 Was the material carefully handled to avoid damage?

Note: Hammering, which will damage or distort the members, is not
permitted.
6.3.2.5 Were bearing and faying surfaces cleaned before the members were
assembled?
6.3.2.5 Did splices and field connections have 1/2 of the holes filled with bolts
and cylindrical erection pins before bolting?
6.3.2.6 Did bolted parts fit solidly together when assembled?
6.3.2.6 Were contact surfaces, including those adjacent to the washers, de-
scaled, and were contact surfaces free of dirt, grease, burrs, pits and
other defects?
6.3.2.6 Were bolts in exterior girders installed with the heads on the outside
face of the girder web and on the bottom faces of lower flanges?
6.3.2.6 For bolts that were partially embedded in concrete, were the nuts
located on the side of the member that was encased in concrete?
6.3.2.6 Were connections assembled with a hardened washer under the bolt
head or nut (whichever is the element turned in tightening)? Were
surfaces of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head and nut parallel?
6.3.2.6 Were bevelled washers used for sloped surfaces, and were all bolts of
new quality stored in weatherproof containers to prevent loss of
lubrication or accumulation of dirt?
6.3.2.6 Were all girder elevations and alignments checked by the Inspector
prior to any bolt tightening?
3
Compliance
Section
SSBC
6.3.2.6 Were bolts tightened to at least the minimum bolt tension as shown in
Section 6.3.2.6 Table 1 – Bolt Tension of th SSBCe?
6.3.2.6 Were enough bolts brought to a “snug tight” condition to ensure that
the parts of the joint were brought into full contact with each other?
6.3.2.6 Was additional tightening done based on the specified nut rotation:
 1/3 turn where bolt is 4 bolt diameters or less
 1/2 turn where bolt is over 4 bolt diameters but not 8
 2/3 turn where bolt is over 8 diameters long
and using a tolerance of 1/6 turn (60 deg) over, nothing under?
Note: Bolt length is measured from underside of head.
6.3.2.6 Were high strength bolts tensioned only once and not reused?
6.3.2.7 Were any corrections of minor misfits involving any reaming, cold
cutting and chipping for secondary members required?
6.3.2.7 If reaming was required, was it immediately reported to the

Department and the Inspector, and did the Contractor submit a repair
procedure to the Project Manager for review?
6.3.2.7 If accepted, were repairs made in the Inspector’s presence?
6.3.2.8 Did the Contractor ensure that the structural steel was maintained in
the correct alignment at all times during construction?
6.3.2.9 Before final acceptance, did the Contractor remove all fill material or
temporary supporting structures placed in the watercourse or
elsewhere during construction?
6.3.2.9 Did the Contractor remove all piling, excavated or surplus materials,
rubbish and temporary buildings, replace or renew any damaged
fences, and restore in an acceptable manner all property damaged
during the execution of the work?
] 6.3.2.9 Was disposal of surplus materials done in a manner and location
satisfactory to the Inspector?
6.3.2.9 Did the Contractor leave the bridge site, roadway and adjacent
property in a neatly restored and presentable condition, satisfactory to
the Inspector, and when required, provide written evidence that
affected property owners or regulatory agencies were satisfied?
4
Compliance
Section
SSBC
6.3.2.9 Was all steel left clean and free of oil, grease, mud, dust, road spray
or other foreign matter?
Signature Date
5
6.1 Steel girder delivery and erection. Spreader bar 6.2 Girders stored at bridge site. Storage of girders is
used for unloading and erecting girders when using on timber dunnage and free-draining ground.
a single crane.
6.3 Girder erection. Scaffolding shoring towers used at 6.4 Girder erection. H-pile shoring towers used to
splice connection between girder segments. support girders at splice connection between girder
segments.

6.5 Erecting girder between piers. Spreader bar used 6.6 Temporary bracing, tie downs secured to pier and
to erect girder. girder. Diaphragm installation completed prior to
release.
6.7 Steel diaphragm bracing installation with crane. 6.8 Splice plate detail. All bolts tightened by turn-of-nut
method.

6.9 Bolting of diaphragms. Bolts presently in snug tight 6.10 Girder and rocker bearing. Centre line of bearing
position. Tightening of bolts to be done by turn-of- marked on rocker, base plate and pier cap. Bottom
nut method. Bolt markings shown prior to of rocker plate machine-finished.
tightening.
6.11 Deck joints stored on site and on timber dunnage 6.12 Deck joint installation. Deck joint gap set in
to prevent damage. accordance with the “Expansion Gap Setting
Table” found in the design drawings.

6.13 Deck joint installation. Deck joint gap set in 6.14 Deck joint installation. Deck joint gap set in
accordance with the “Expansion Gap Setting accordance with the “Expansion Gap Setting
Table” found in the design drawings. Erection Table”. Wood spacer block is to maintain gap.
angles left in place to maintain the required gap.
6.15 Checking joint alignment with stringlines and 6.16 Strip seal type joint temporarily supported.
instrument.

6.17 Abutment side coil rod supports shown.
6.18 Casting abutment side of strip seal deck joint. 6.19 Finger type joint showing erection angles.

6.20 Finger type joint showing deck-side block-out. 6.21 Galvanized nose plate for river pier protection.

6.22 Damage to galvanized coating during 6.23 Steel girder delivery. Girder covered in plastic wrap
transportation and/or installation. Metallizing to protect from road salt and contamination during
repairs completed. transportation.
6.24 Fall protection system consisting of uprights and 6.25 Steel girders are sometimes erected in pairs and
cables used during girder erection and deck stabilized with steel diaphragms.
overhang bracket installation.

6.26 Setting elastomeric bearing. Wood wedges used to 6.27 Pancake jack for final adjustment of bearing for
adjust and secure the bearing until girder is in temperature and elevation.
place.
6.28 H-pile shoring towers for splicing steel girders.

Bearing plate and jack adjust girders to required
elevation.

PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.4 Pre-Erection ................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.4.1 Delivery ............................................................................................................ 7-2
7.4.2 Erection Procedure........................................................................................... 7-2
7.4.3 Assembly ......................................................................................................... 7-4
7.5 Post-Tensioning ........................................................................................................... 7-4
7.5.1 Assembly and Installation of Tendons .............................................................. 7-5
7.5.2 Stressing of Tendons ....................................................................................... 7-5
7.5.3 Grouting of Ducts ............................................................................................. 7-6
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 7, Precast Concrete Units
7.1 General
Erection of precast concrete units includes bridge girders, MSE fascia panels, bridge deck
panels and miscellaneous precast components. This work also includes traffic accommodation
and protection of the environment. Erection for MSE fascia panels is discussed in Section 25,
and the erection for bridge deck panels is discussed in the Special Provisions. This section does
not include RCP and PCB structures. Standard Drawings exist for girder Types NU, SL, SLW
and SLC. Post-tensioning of NU girders is included in this section.
Precast concrete girder erection is an activity that requires a highly experienced and
knowledgeable Contractor. Damage to girder units can be caused by improper handling and
erection, resulting in girders that may be damaged beyond repair.
 All berm work, temporary pilings, shoring towers and falsework must be acceptably removed
within the specified time frames.
 The Contractor must leave the bridge site, roads, watercourse channel and adjacent
property in an acceptable condition.
It is necessary to conduct a pre-girder erection meeting with the Contractor to discuss all traffic
and safety issues. The Inspector must be aware of the following safety considerations:
 Girders may tip from steering dollies during transport, creating a hazard to the public.
Access should be safe and a site inspection should be done prior to delivery.
 Girders may tip if not properly stored on timber blocking.
 Many hazardous situations exist with cranes, including upset, collision, falling loads and
contact with overhead power lines.
 Access to the Work may involve ladders, scaffold and aerial platforms. Fall protection
equipment is required. Proper training is needed for these activities.
 Trip hazards exist with projecting reinforcing steel.
 Erection work is often done during nighttime when darkness creates traffic and tripping
hazards.
 Load swings over traffic creates an unacceptable risk. Traffic stoppage at night increases
the risk of vehicle incidents.
 Catastrophic failure of girders due to inadequate temporary bracing creates a dangerous
situation for workers and the travelling public.
 As a post-tensioning strand is pulled or pushed into the duct, it may exit the duct at high
speed. Never stand in front of or look into a duct that is receiving strand.
 During stressing of tendons, failure of anchors or strand may occur. Never stand behind the
jack during stressing operations.
September 2015 7-1

7.4 Pre-Erection
7.4.1 Delivery
The Inspector must be aware of the delivery schedule of girders and confirm with the Project
Manager that the girder units have been accepted for shipment. The Contractor’s post-
tensioning procedure including grout mix design, stressing calculations and equipment
calibration data must be accepted by the Consultant before post-tensioning work may begin. As
the girders arrive at the site, the Inspector must confirm that the girders are acceptable for
erection.
The girders must be free of contaminants such as road salt and other staining. It is very difficult
to clean girders at the site, especially during freezing conditions. The Contractor must be
encouraged to protect the girders during transport, as it is practical. Girders exhibiting staining
or evidence of road salt or other contaminants will require high pressure washing.
The Contractor must demonstrate, through field-cured concrete test specimens if necessary,
that the substructure concrete has achieved sufficient strength.
Girders are sometimes unloaded and temporarily stored on-site before they are erected into
position. Girders must be supported on timber blocking at the bearing points and never placed
directly onto the ground or on steel or concrete blocks. The timber blocking must be sufficient to
support the weight of the girder, and the ground must be level and unyielding. The girders must
be supported so that the girder web is plumb.
After unloading, the Inspector must confirm that the girders are free of cracks, chips, scrapes
and spalls. If pigmented sealer has been applied to the girders at the fabrication facility, any
damage to the sealer must be repaired by an approved method.
After girders are properly blocked or erected, the Inspector must confirm that the girder sweep
tolerance has not been exceeded. Precast girders may sweep due to improper fabrication,
transportation or storage. Excessive girder sweep may be corrected by the Contractor; however,
corrective measures must be approved.
The Inspector must survey the girders for camber immediately prior to erection and compare the
theoretical camber for the girder age with the measured camber. If the camber is out of
tolerance, the Inspector must notify the Project Manager.
The Inspector must inspect the girder ends for cracks that may have occurred since they were
inspected at the fabrication facility. Cracks that do not met tolerance requirements must be
reported to the Contractor and the Project Manager.
7.4.2 Erection Procedure
Girders are commonly erected using mobile or crawler type cranes. Short box girders may be
erected using a single crane. A spreader bar is used to lift the girder at each end when using a
single crane. The erection crew assists with positioning the girder using taglines. Longer girders
are typically erected with two cranes.
September 2015 7-2

Erection of long, heavy and deep girders may require large cranes. Certain sites are not
conducive to erection by crane due to traffic, swing radius or watercourse limitations.
Alternatively, girders may be erected by using a combination of cranes and a launching or
erection truss.
Girder diaphragms are either prefabricated of steel and bolted on at the site, or cast-in-place
after erection. Sometimes shoring towers are required to temporarily support girders before
diaphragms are installed.
The Contractor must prepare and submit an erection procedure to the Consultant for review.
Prior to the start of erection, the Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager that the
Contractor’s procedure has been accepted. The Inspector must thoroughly review and
understand the details of the procedure. The Inspector must promptly notify the Project
Manager if the Contractor deviates from the accepted procedure. Important aspects of the
procedure that the Inspector must review include:
 Traffic Accommodation: Girder erection often requires complex traffic accommodation,

including lane closures and cross-over detours. Girder erection is often done during off-peak
nighttime hours when lighting and flashers are required. The Inspector must check that all
traffic control devices are installed according to the Contractor’s Traffic Accommodation
Strategy (TAS). The Inspector must monitor the effectiveness of the traffic control devices
and require changes if danger to workers or the public is observed. Protection measures are
required to prevent vehicles from entering the closed work area, including barricades and
water-filled barriers. The Inspector must confirm that the swing radius of the crane does not
result in loads being positioned over traffic. It is generally not permitted to stop traffic;
however, short stoppages are sometimes permitted if stated in the Special Provisions. The
Inspector must confirm that all flagging and signage is in place to effectively warn motorists
of the stoppage. The Inspector must record details of traffic disruptions and queues and
must promptly report all traffic incidents to the Department.
 Survey Layout: Prior to girder erection, the Contractor must lay out the actual centre points
of all bearings and must confirm the distance between adjacent bearings. The as-built
survey information must be examined to confirm that the bearings are correctly located with
respect to the stationing of the control line. The Contractor must also survey the actual
elevations of all bearing recesses and determine shim and grout pad thickness
requirements. The Inspector must check all survey work of the Contractor.
 Crane Position: The cranes must be set up as shown in the erection procedure to ensure
that the intended swing radius and lifting capacity are maintained. Reference measurements
must be taken by the Contractor to confirm that crane locations are accurate. The Inspector
must also check the crane positioning. Crane outriggers must bear on adequate foundations
and, if soft soils exist, may require the use of timber mats to distribute loads. Protection to
existing roadway surfacing is required before setting outriggers. Cranes are sometimes set
up on river ice, which requires special precautions and testing requirements that must be
described in the Contractor’s erection procedure.
 Lifting: It is important that girders are lifted only at locations where the designated lifting
hardware has been cast into the units. Girders must be kept vertical at all times to prevent
damage.
 Temporary Bracing: It is necessary to temporarily secure the girders to the substructure
element. Precast NU type girders may tip if not properly secured. This is especially
important prior to the installation of diaphragms and braces, and if the bridge is on a grade.
The girders are normally secured with temporary angle braces that bolt to the substructure,
and blocks are typically used between the girder ends and backwall at the low end of the
bridge. Bearings are often temporarily secured using wooden wedges or blocks, details of
September 2015 7-3

which must be submitted by the Contractor for review by the Consultant. The Inspector must
confirm that the temporary bracing is installed and removed as detailed in the Contractor’s
procedure.
7.4.3 Assembly
The Inspector must confirm the following:
 Installation of bolted girder diaphragms is done after girders are erected. Diaphragms must
be bolted to the girder webs through inserts that are cast into the webs during fabrication.
The diaphragm bolts are tightened to the fabricator’s specifications. After all diaphragms are
installed, the Contractor must confirm that final girder sweep is within allowable tolerances.
 The Contractor must perform a survey to check the top of the girder elevations at all bearing
locations and at midspan, to determine camber values. Adjustments to the bearing shim
stack heights may be necessary to achieve the design elevations. The Contractor must
make corrections to the girder locations and elevations until all requirements are met.
 After all adjustments have been made, the Inspector must record the actual bearing grout
pad depths at each bearing location. If the pad heights are out of tolerance, a proposal for
corrective action from the Contractor, with acceptance from the Project Manager, is needed.
 The Inspector must review the girder surfaces to identify any damage that may have
occurred during erection.
 Lifting hardware must be cut off and lifting pockets and holes filled with an approved
patching material.
 Projecting stirrup reinforcing steel may not be bent in the field since field bending may cause
embrittlement failure.
7.5 Post-Tensioning
Post-tensioning is a method of reinforcing concrete using high strength tendons. Post-tensioning

includes the fabrication, installation, protection and stressing of tendons, and grouting of ducts.
Post-tensioning is normally done for Type NU girders; however, post-tensioning may also be
done for pier caps. All post-tensioning is “bonded”, meaning that the tendon is protected by
grout that is pumped into the duct under pressure after stressing has been completed.
Post-tensioning requires that the Contractor have specialized knowledge and expertise. The
Contractor should utilize site superintendents that possess current Level 2 certification from the
Post-Tensioning Institute (PTI), with the minimum required experience in the areas of stressing
and grouting. The Inspector must confirm that the Project Manager has accepted the
Contractor’s qualifications before the Work begins.
Post-tensioning ducts are cast into girder webs during girder fabrication. The thickened end
section of the girder web contains a block-out for the post-tensioning anchor recess. The end of
the ducts terminate at a steel anchor plate and trumpet, which guide the tendons and protect the
girder web from the high forces experienced during stressing operations. A girder may contain
more than one duct. Ducts are placed at a specified parabolic vertical curve within the girder
webs.
The Contractor must submit a post-tensioning procedure that includes jack and gauge
calibration data, strand data and theoretical tendon elongations. The Inspector must confirm that
the Contractor’s submission has been accepted before starting work.
September 2015 7-4

7.5.1 Assembly and Installation of Tendons
The term “tendon”, if strictly used, describes the complete system, including the anchorages,
pre-stressing strand, duct and grout. The common term “tendon” used in the Standard
Specifications for Bridge Construction describes the assemblage of individual pre-stressing
strands. Tendons are normally assembled on site by drawing strand from a strand dispenser
pack and then welding the ends together so that the individual strands can be pulled into the
duct simultaneously. A pull cord is normally installed into the duct using compressed air. The
tendon is winched into the duct using the pull cord. Alternatively, the strands can be individually
pulled or pushed into the duct by attaching a guide cap to the tip of each strand. The Inspector
must consider the following during tendon assembly:
 Strand must not be dragged or winched over ground or otherwise be allowed to become
contaminated.
 The elongation of the tendon depends on the “E” values of the individual strand. To achieve
the design elongation, the Inspector must confirm that the tags on the strand match the “E”
value used in the Contractor’s elongation calculations.
 Ducts must be clean and dry before tendons are installed. The Contractor’s procedure must
be accepted prior to the start of work. The Contractor must demonstrate that the ducts are
free of obstructions and contamination.
7.5.2 Stressing of Tendons
For multi-span continuous bridges, post-tensioning ducts will need to be extended from girder
ends at the intermediate diaphragms so that the ducts are continuous. The Inspector must
confirm that duct extensions match the geometry shown on the shop drawings. The duct
extensions must be secured so that they do not shift or separate during concrete placement.
Intermediate diaphragms must be cast before post-tensioning work is done.
Tendons may be stressed from one end of the bridge, or they may be stressed from both ends
(called two-stage stressing). Two-stage stressing is normally done when losses due to friction
do not result in sufficiently stressed tendons at the non-stressed end. For two-stage stressing,
the Contractor provides theoretical elongation values for both the 1st and 2nd stage.
The Inspector must consider the following during tendon stressing:
 Jacks are positioned using a crane or hoist. The Inspector must confirm that the jack and
gauge identification numbers match those submitted with the Contractor’s calibration data.
 Tendons must be stressed as an assembly and not as individual strands. The Inspector
must witness the stressing operation to confirm that the specified jacking pressure has been
reached on the gauge. Following this, the actual elongation is measured and recorded. The
Inspector must compare the actual values of elongation with the theoretical values provided
by the Contractor. If the values differ by more than the allowable tolerance, the Inspector
must consult with the Project Manager.
 If the values of elongation are acceptable, the Contractor may proceed to pump grout into
the duct. The Inspector must confirm that all strand wedges have gripped the strand and are
seated properly into the anchor plate. The strands must project by the length specified, and
the strand tails may not be cut off until the successful completion of grouting.
 If stressed tendons are not grouted within 20 days of completion of stressing, strand
corrosion inhibitor is required. If ducts will not be grouted for a significant period beyond 20
days, the Project Manager must be consulted. The Inspector must confirm the Contractor’s
stressing and grouting schedule before tendon assembly. If cold weather suddenly occurs
September 2015 7-5

after stressing, it may not be possible to place grout. In some cases where tendons cannot
be grouted within a reasonable time period and there is a risk of strand corrosion, it may be
necessary to de-stress the tendon to remove it.
 After stressing has been completed, the stressing records must be reviewed and accepted
by the Consultant.
7.5.3 Grouting of Ducts
The grouting procedure is designed to displace all air from within the duct. It is important that
the Contractor’s approved grouting procedure be followed precisely. The procedure should
include measures that will be taken in the event of grout equipment failure. Grout stiffens
quickly, and decisive action must be taken if a breakdown occurs. The Inspector must consider
the following during duct grouting:
 The grout mixer and pump must meet the requirements specified, and a back-up pump must
be set up to be immediately operational in the event that the primary pump fails.
 The inlet and outlet tubes must have adequate valves or caps capable of withstanding the
grouting pressure. The sequence of venting and bleeding grout from the outlets shown on
the Contractor’s procedure must be strictly followed to prevent air from becoming trapped
within the duct. If an outlet tube ruptures after it has been vented and air is introduced into
the duct, the Project Manager must be immediately notified for direction. It is important that
the Contractor follows the approved grouting procedure in the event of a pressure loss.
 The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor performs grout testing using a qualified and
experienced technician and that the frequency of testing is as specified.
 After grouting has been acceptably completed, the strand tails may be cut off and the
protective end caps installed.
September 2015 7-6

Section 7 – Precast Concrete Units Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Was the girder erection and post-tensioning procedure reviewed?
Were all bearings and bearing surfaces of girders clean before

erection?
Was the security and stability of girders checked as erection

progressed?
Were lifting hooks cut off, and all holes and pockets painted?
Was cleanup satisfactorily done and, if private property was involved,

was the owner satisfied?
2 Erection of Precast Concrete Girders

7.3.1 Did the Contractor remove any temporary construction and do all work
required to complete the erection in accordance with the drawings and
specifications?
7.3.1 Did the substructure concrete cure for a minimum of three (3) days
and achieve 80% of the 28 day specified concrete strength prior to
erection of precast girders?
7.3.2 Were the precast concrete units stored upright, shored on timber
blocking, and kept clean? Was the storage area properly drained?
7.3.3 Did the Contractor prepare and submit drawings for temporary
supporting structures and berms and for traffic control and
accommodation, to the Project Manager?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
7.3.3 If temporary supporting structures and/or berms remained in any

watercourse during spring break-up or run-off periods, were all
necessary approvals obtained by the Contractor?
7.3.4 Did the Contractor submit a detailed girder erection procedure to the
Project Manager for review?
7.3.4 Did the drawings contain all the information listed under Section 7.3.4
of the SSBC?
7.3.4 Did the girder erection procedure bear the Seal of a Professional
Engineer registered in Alberta, and was it compliant with the
Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations?
7.3.4 Did the Contractor attend a pre-job meeting prior to the

commencement of any field work?
7.3.4 Did the Contractor do a complete superstructure layout by means of

chalk lines and markings applied to all substructure units, showing
bearing and girder positions in accordance with the accepted layout
plan, before erection began?
7.3.5 Did the Contractor adjust girder position, bearing location and bearing
elevation in order to achieve as closely as possible the lines and
grades shown on the drawings?
7.3.5 Did the Contractor minimize any differential camber (girder to girder)
and the sweep of the girders, and did he provide the necessary
temporary attachments to hold the girders in position?
7.3.6 After the erection of the girders, were all lifting holes on exterior
girders filled with an approved patching material?
7.3.6 Were all lifting hooks cut off 50 mm below surface and all lifting hook
pockets filled with an accepted grout?
3 Post-Tensioning System
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
7.3.7.2 Were applicable requirements of the current edition of the following

standards followed?
 CSA A23.1/23.2 – Concrete Materials and Method of
Concrete Construction
 CSA A23.4 – Precast Concrete Materials and Construction
 Section 4 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge
Construction
 Guide Specification Acceptance Standards for Post-
Tensioning Systems – PTI
 Specifications for Grouting of Post-Tensioned Structures –
PTI
 AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications
7.3.7.3 Did the Contractor or the subcontractor have extensive experience in
this work and utilize only fully trained, competent and experienced
operators?
7.3.7.3 Was the site supervisor responsible for the tensioning and grouting
operations at the site while these operations were being carried out?
7.3.7.4 Did the Contractor submit post-tensioning drawing and calculations to

the Project Manager prior to commencement of post-tensioning work?
7.3.7.4 Did the Contractor provide information for mill reports and stress strain
curves for the stressing strand at least five (5) days prior to stressing?
7.3.7.5 Did the stressing strand conform to the requirements of

Sections 7.2.4.9 and 7.2.5.3 of the SSBC?
7.3.7.5 Was water-soluble corrosion inhibitor if the stressing and grouting

operations were not completed within 20 calendar days of the
installation of the stressing steel?
7.3.7.5 Was stressing steel secured at the ends by means of permanent

anchoring devices and compliant to CSA S6-06 Clause 8.4.4.1
accepted by the Inspector?
7.3.7.5 Did the Contractor provide mortar tight inlets and outlets in all ducts at
the following locations?
 The anchorage area
 All high points of the duct, when the vertical distance
between the highest and lowest point is more than 0.5 m
 Place an inlet at or near the lowest point
 Place free-draining outlet at all low points of duct
3
Compliance
Section
SSBC
7.3.7.5 Did the Contractor provide inlets and outlets with valves, caps or other
devices capable of withstanding the grouting pressure, and were the
ducts and vents securely fastened in place to prevent movement?
7.3.7.5 Did the Contractor provide details of inlets and outlets on the shop
drawings?
7.3.7.5 Was concrete supplied in accordance with Section 7.2.4, with the
maximum size of coarse aggregate being 10 mm and 28 day minimum
compressive strength of 50 MPa unless otherwise specified?
7.3.7.5 Was grout Class C as described in Table 10.9.3-1 and the properties
as described in Table 10.9.3-2 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Construction Specification?
7.3.7.5 Was a test for wet density performed in accordance with the ”Standard
Test Method for Density” ASTM C138?
7.3.7.5 Was pre-bagged grout packaged in plastic lined bags or coated

containers stamped with the date of manufacture, lot number and
mixing instructions, and were copies of the quality control data for
each lot number and shipment sent to the job site and provided to the
Inspector?
7.3.7.5 Were materials with a total time from manufacture to usage in excess
of six (6) months retested and certified by the supplier before use?
7.3.7.5 Was the average minimum compressive strength of three (3) cubes at
28 days, 50 MPa as per CSA A23.2-1B?
7.3.7.5 Did the results for bleed test and fluidity test meet the requirements
noted in Table 10.9.3-2 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications?
7.3.7.5 Was grout testing in the field completed by a qualified and

experienced technician as outlined in Section 7.3.7.5 of the SSBC?
4
Compliance
Section
SSBC
7.3.7.6 Equipment –
a) Stressing
 Were hydraulic jacks and pumps of sufficient capacity for
tensioning of strands?
 Was the force induced in the stressing strand measured
using calibrated jacking gauges, load cells or a calibrated
dynamometer?
 Did the pressure gauge have an accurate reading dial at
least 150 mm in diameter?
 Were the forces to be measured within 25% and 75% of the
total graduated capacity of the gauge, unless calibration data
clearly established consistent accuracy over a wider range?
 Were the measuring devices calibrated at least once every
six (6) months? Was the jack and the gauge calibrated as a
unit? Was a certified calibration chart kept with each gauge?
7.3.7.6 Equipment –
b) Grouting
 Was a high speed shear mixer capable of continuous
mechanical mixing and of producing grout that is free of
lumps and undispersed cement used? Was the water supply
to the mixer measured by an accurate gauge?
 Was the holding tank capable of keeping the mixed grout in
continuous motion until it is used? Did the outlet to the pump
have a screen with 3 mm maximum clear opening?
 Was a positive displacement type pump used capable of
producing an outlet pressure of at least 1.0 MPa, with a
pressure gauge having a full-scale reading of no greater than
2 MPa, placed at some point in the grout line between the
pump outlet and the duct inlet? Was there a spare, fully
functional pump also on site?
 Was standby flushing equipment with water supply available
at the site prior to commencing grouting?
 Was the grouting equipment of sufficient capacity so that
grouting of the longest duct was completed within 30 minutes
after mixing?
 Were grout hoses and their rated pressure capacity
compatible with the pump output and the maximum grout
pressure? Were all connections from the grout pump to the
duct airtight so that air did not draw into the duct?
7.3.7.7 Construction – Did the Contractor demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Inspector that all ducts were unobstructed prior to placing post-
tensioning steel?
7.3.7.7 Where the ends of strands welded together to form a tendon to pull
the strand through the ducts. Was a length of the strands used as an
electrical “ground” or 1 m, whichever is greater, cut off prior to
stressing?
5
Compliance
Section
SSBC
7.3.7.7 Was post-tensioning carried out as per reviewed drawings and

stressing calculations. Was the stressing and release of tendons done
in the sequence specified on the drawings?
7.3.7.7 Were all strands in each tendon stressed simultaneously with a multi-
strand jack?
7.3.7.7 Was the force in the tendons measured by means of a pressure

gauge and verified by means of tendon elongation?
7.3.7.7 Were tendons tensioned to a preliminary force to eliminate any slack,

between 15% and 25% of the final jacking force, before elongation
readings were started?
7.3.7.7 Were stressing tails of post-tensioned tendons kept intact until the
record of gauge pressures and tendon elongations were provided by
the Contractor to the Project Manager for review and acceptance?
7.3.7.7 Was a record of the following post-tensioning operations kept for each
tendon installed:
 Project Name and File Number
 Contractor/Subcontractor
 Tendon location and size
 Date tendon installed
 Tendon pack/heat number
 Modulus of elasticity (E)
 Date stressed
 Jack and gauge identifier
 Required jacking force and gauge pressures
 Elongation (anticipated and actual)
 Anchor set (anticipated and actual)
 Stressing sequence
 Witnesses to stressing operation
 Grout information (brand name)
 Time for grouting each tendon
 Date grouted
7.3.7.7 Were anchorage recesses concreted after tensioning but before
grouting of tendons?
7.3.7.7 Were the concrete surface of the anchorage recesses abrasive

blasted, thoroughly wetted and covered with a thin cement scrub coat
immediately before placing fresh concrete?
6
Compliance
Section
SSBC
7.3.7.7 Were ducts or openings clean and free of all deleterious matter that
would impair bonding of the grout to the ducts and stressing steel, and
were ducts thoroughly flushed out with water and blown out with
compressed oil free air?
7.3.7.7 Were inlets and outlets checked for their capacity to accept injection of
grout by blowing compressed oil free air through the system?
7.3.7.7 Were all grout vents opened prior to commencement of grouting?
7.3.7.7 Was the duct completely filled by continuously injecting grout from the
lowest end of the tendon in an uphill direction until no visible signs of
water or air were ejected at the outlet?
7.3.7.7 Was a continuous, one-way flow of grout maintained at a rate of 5 to
15 lineal metres of duct per minute and completed within 30 minutes
of mixing?
7.3.7.7 Was normal pumping pressure between 0.1 to 0.4 MPa, measured at
the inlet, with pumping pressure at the injection vent not exceeding
1 MPa?
7.3.7.7 Was the air temperature acceptable at the time of grouting?
Note: Grouting not permitted below 5°C or above 25°C
7.3.7.7 Did the Contractor provide 50 mm deep grout tube termination

recesses formed around the tubes projecting from top of the deck?
7.3.7.7 After grouting, were tubes cut flush with the bottom of the recesses,
and the recesses then grouted flush with the top of the deck?
7.3.7.8 Did the Contractor give adequate notice so that the Inspector could be
present for the stressing and grouting operations?
7.3.8 Did the Contractor remove all earth material or temporary supporting
structures placed in the stream channel or elsewhere during
construction?
7.3.8 Was piling, excavated or surplus materials, rubbish and temporary
buildings removed?
7.3.8 Were any damaged fences replaced or renewed?
7
Compliance
Section
SSBC
7.3.8 Was all property damaged during the execution of the work restored in
an acceptable manner?
7.3.8 Was disposal of surplus materials done in a manner and location

satisfactory to the Inspector?
7.3.8 Did the Contractor leave the bridge site, roadway and adjacent
property in a neatly restored and presentable condition, satisfactory to
the Inspector, and if required, provide written evidence that affected
property owners or regulatory agencies have been satisfied?
Signature Date
8
7.1 Precast concrete NU girder delivered to site. 7.2 Lifting precast concrete girder into position with two
cranes.
7.3 First girders erected and stabilized with temporary 7.4 First girder erected, stabilized with temporary
shoring and bracing. Short H-pile section bolted to shoring and braced to the abutment seat.
the abutment to provide additional lateral stability
at the bearing.

7.5 Subsequent girders erected, stabilized with 7.6 Subsequent girders erected, stabilized with
temporary bracing prior to installation of steel temporary bracing until installation of steel
diaphragms. H-piles at bearings for lateral stability diaphragms is completed.
until erection is completed and all diaphragms are
in and bolted.
7.7 Erecting concrete box girders from approach fill, 7.8 Setting elastomeric bearing with wooden wedges.
using a spreader bar to achieve vertical forces at
lifting points.

7.9 Concrete box girder on bearing. 7.10 Concrete box girder on pot bearing.
7.11 Completed erection of concrete box girders. 7.12 Erecting concrete box girders from approach fill.

7.13 Setting NU girder onto bearing. Survey 7.14 Installing deck overhangs and galvanized cross
layout/control visibly marked on abutment seat. bracing. Fall protection system is in place.
7.15 Installing galvanized diaphragm cross bracing. Bolt 7.16 Galvanized diaphragm cross bracing installed.
tightening done from aerial work platform. False deck used as a work platform.

7.17 Cast-in-place girders with post tensioning ducts. 7.18 Post tensioning ducts within NU girders at
U-bars set at 1.0 m spacing to secure duct fabrication shop.
elevations.
7.19 Post tensioning ducting in pier cap. Congested 7.20 Post tensioning tendons in pier cap. Survey at
reinforcing steel exists at pier cap ends. every 1.0 m to confirm proper tendon profile.

7.21 Post tensioning duct anchors in straddlebent.

Congested reinforcing steel at pier cap ends.
7.22 Post tensioning ducts at pier cap. Smooth profile 7.23 Post tensioning ducts cast into pier cap. Tendons
throughout length of tendon. to be installed, stressed and grouted.

7.24 Strand pack dispenser for tendon assembly. 7.25 Tendons pulled through post-tensioning ducts.
7.26 Winch used to pull strands through post tensioning 7.27 Jack used for post-tensioning. Tendon strand
ducts. protruding beyond jack end.

7.28 Tendon elongation measurement taken from 7.29 Tendons cut and capped, ready for grouting. Grout
wedge plate. flow tubes protruding from cap.
7.30 Portable grout mixer. 7.31 Grouting operation.

7.32 Workers open and close bleed tubes as instructed 7.33 Diaphragm end ready for grout. Blockout formwork
by the post-tensioning supervisor. is sealed to prevent grout leakage.
7.34 Grout pump pressure gauge. 7.35 Once grout flow is confirmed at all vents, caps are
closed.

7.36 Grout sampled for testing. 7.37 Grout testing equipment. Efflux test performed with
flow cone, modified bleed test with graduated
cylinder and mud balance used to determine
density. Grout cubes cast for compressive
strength.
7.38 Modified bleed test with graduated cylinder on left. 7.39 Approved grout product stored on site. Expiration
Grout cubes for compressive strength testing cast dates need to be labelled on package.
in brass mould.

7.40 Severe honeycombing on pier cap due to

congestion at post tensioning tendon heads.

BRIDGE BEARINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.3 Bridge Bearing Types .................................................................................................. 8-1
8.4 Bridge Bearing Fabrication ......................................................................................... 8-2
8.5 Construction ................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.5.1 Delivery ............................................................................................................ 8-2
8.5.2 Installation of Bearings with Sole and Base Plates ........................................... 8-3
8.5.3 Installation of Continuous Plain Elastomeric Sheets ......................................... 8-3
8.5.4 Function and Setting of Bearings...................................................................... 8-4
8.5.5 Grouting ........................................................................................................... 8-4
8.5.5.1 Grouting in Cold Weather ............................................................................ 8-5
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 8, Bridge Bearings
8.1 General
Bridge bearings must transfer loads from the superstructure to the substructure, including
superstructure dead loads and live loads, such as traffic and wind. Bearings must be able to
withstand a number of forces caused by vibrations, deflections, girder sliding and rotation,
braking impact, backwall pressure, ice forces and thermal girder movements.
Bridge bearings are vulnerable to deterioration if exposed to chlorides and roadway

contaminants. Deck joint seal failure causes bearings to be exposed to these damaging
conditions.
Bearing replacement is a costly maintenance activity that often requires traffic disruption.
Bearing replacement requires jacking of the superstructure and grout pad removal. It is critical
that new bearing assemblies be installed correctly to maximize their performance.
Bearing installation can involve working from heights. Fall protection is required.
Ladders and scaffolds may be used to gain access to abutment seat tops and pier caps that
must be secured or tagged. Aerial platforms may also be used. Fall protection and a certified
operator are required for these.
Bearings may easily slide off shims, causing injury.
Welding creates hot surfaces, and heating of galvanized surfaces produces harmful gases.
8.3 Bridge Bearing Types
For all bearing types other than elastomeric sheet bearings, the bearing components are
contained within two plates.
 The base plate (also called the masonry plate) separates the bearing components from the
bridge substructure and grout pad. This plate forms the base of the bearing assembly and is
supplied by the bearing manufacturer. The underside of the plate must be treated with a
base plate corrosion protection paint. Anchor rods and grout pads provide fixity of the base
plate to the substructure.
 The sole plate (also called the top plate) separates the bearing components from the bridge
girders. This plate forms the top of the bearing assembly and is also supplied by the bearing
manufacturer. The sole plate is usually tapered to compensate for the camber of the girder
and the longitudinal grade of the bridge. The sole plate is generally designed to be level in
both the longitudinal and transverse directions. The plate is either welded or bolted to the
bottom flange of a steel girder. If the sole plate is galvanized, the plate must be isolated from
the steel girder flange by an epoxy mastic separator. Field-welding for a galvanized sole
plate requires that the zinc coating be removed at the weld location prior to welding.
Acceptable bearing types for bridges include rocker bearings, pot bearings, elastomeric
bearings and elastomeric sheet bearings.
 Rocker Bearings: Rocker bearings are comprised of steel, and they accommodate
unidirectional rotations and displacements around their pins. They require precision
fabrication and are susceptible to loss of performance due to “freezing” or “seizing” caused
September 2015 8-1

by contamination and corrosion. Tall expansion rockers require routine resetting. Rocker
bearings are not suited for wide or highly skewed bridges.
 Pot Bearings: Pot bearings are used when large vertical loads exist. They consist of an
elastomeric disc confined within the “pot”. The elastomer is confined by the pot’s smooth
piston walls and is protected by rings. Pot bearings can accommodate rotations about any
axis and are therefore classified as either unidirectional or multidirectional. They can also
accommodate horizontal displacements when they contain a stainless steel slider plate. Pot
bearings may bind if their components become contaminated.
 Elastomeric Bearings: Elastomeric bearings are the most common type of bearings.
Elastomers include natural rubber or synthetic rubber (usually neoprene). Elastomers have
differing properties of hardness and thermal characteristics. The grade of elastomer required
for bearings generally requires that they are comprised of natural rubber. Tall elastomer
pads are often reinforced with steel shims or plates to limit their lateral displacement under
load. Elastomeric bearings may or may not be designed to slide at the interface with the sole
plate. Sliding bearings contain a PTFE sheet adhered to the top of the elastomer pad and a
stainless steel mirror-finished plate welded to the bottom of the sole plate.
 Continuous Plain Elastomeric Sheets: Elastomeric sheet bearings consist of continuous
strips of elastomer, usually neoprene. These strips of elastomer are used as bearings for
Standard Bridge girders, including types SL, SLW and SLC. They may also be used on all
girder types where girder bearings are encased within the end diaphragms for integral
abutments. The elastomeric sheet is placed directly on top of the concrete or steel
substructure.
8.4 Bridge Bearing Fabrication
Bearings are designed by the fabricator. The fabricator must produce shop drawings, mill
certificates, weld procedures and test reports. Prior to accepting bridge bearings at the site, the
Inspector must inspect the bearings and confirm that all submittals have been received and
accepted by the Project Manager.
8.5 Construction
The Contractor must provide a bearing installation procedure prior to the start of bearing
installation. The Inspector must confirm that the procedure has been submitted and accepted by
the Project Manager.
8.5.1 Delivery
Bearings are typically delivered as assembled units containing the sole plate, bearing
components and base plate. The bearings must not be disassembled at the site because
bearing components include highly machined and polished surfaces that may be easily
damaged by handling. However, in some cases elastomeric bearings may be delivered without
a sole plate. If the sole plate is removed, a risk of damage to the sliding surfaces exists. If the
sliding surfaces of either the elastomer or the sole plate become contaminated, they must be
acceptably cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
When bearings arrive at the site, the Inspector must confirm that the bearings are transported
on pallets and wrapped or otherwise securely protected from road spray and other
contaminants. Bearings must remain protected at the site until they are installed.
September 2015 8-2

8.5.2 Installation of Bearings with Sole and Base Plates
Bearings are normally installed by the girder erection crew. The bearings must be installed by
experienced and competent personnel. The Contractor must survey the substructures to
determine the theoretical locations and alignment of all bearings. Chalk lines are marked on the
top surfaces of the substructure elements from which the bearing locations can be accurately
set.
Prior to the installation of bearings, the Inspector must confirm that the abutment seat and pier
caps have been properly constructed:
 The top surfaces must be sloped so that water will not pond at the bearing locations.
 The bearing pad recesses must be accurately positioned relative to the centre of bearing
and bearing alignment. The recess must be of adequate area to produce a 1(H):1(V) slope
at the grout pad face.
 The bearing pad recess must be constructed to the correct elevation to achieve the design
thickness of grout. Grout pads that are too low are difficult to construct and may result in
trapped air pockets. Grout pads that are too high may have performance issues or may
crack due to heat of hydration. Recesses must be level in both the longitudinal and
transverse directions.
 The bearing pad recess surfaces must be properly prepared. Bearing pad recesses are
formed by casting plywood into the substructure. After the plywood is removed, small air
voids typically exist that are filled with an approved concrete patching product so that the
surface is smooth. Bearing pad recesses must not be sawcut and chipped into the
substructure element after concrete placement.
Bearings are positioned onto galvanized shim stacks, which support and maintain the final
elevation of the bearing assembly until the base plate is grouted. For some bearing assemblies,
the shim stacks are placed underneath the self-rocking pintles, which are welded to the
underside of the base plates. The purpose of the pintles is to allow the bearing to rotate in the
longitudinal direction after the girder is erected. The tapered sole plate will remain level as it
rotates around the pintle axis. For bearing assemblies that do not contain pintels, the shim
stacks are placed directly in contact with the underside of the base plate.
After steel plate girders are erected, the sole plate may need to be field welded to the bottom
flange. The requirements of Section 13 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction
for Field Welding of Structural Members must be followed. Special precautions for pre-heat and
hoarding need to be taken into consideration during cold weather. Additionally, special
requirements exist when welding a galvanized sole plate to the girder. All zinc coating needs to
be removed at the weld location and the damaged coating needs to be repaired in compliance
with ASTM A780 Method A1 or A3 (the method depends on the area of damage).
8.5.3 Installation of Continuous Plain Elastomeric Sheets
Bearing sheets or strips must be in intimate contact with both the substructure element and the
underside of girder. Where the elastomer bears on concrete, the concrete needs to be finished
to provide a continuously smooth bearing surface with no local high or low areas. If gaps exist
between the substructure concrete and the elastomer or between the girder and the elastomer,
modifications to the substructure element are required. Voids may not be filled with lead shims.
September 2015 8-3

8.5.4 Function and Setting of Bearings
Bridge bearings are classified as either “fixed” or “expansion” type. Fixed bearings do not permit
longitudinal or transverse movement. Expansion bearings allow controlled movement and
rotation. Rocker bearings may accommodate deflections by rotation in the longitudinal direction.
Pot bearings may accommodate deflections, longitudinal and transverse movements if they are
unidirectional or multidirectional. Elastomeric expansion bearings may permit longitudinal
thermal movements by sliding of the PTFE sheet and the polished sole plate.
Setting of elastomeric expansion bearings for thermal girder movement is required in the field.
The sole plates of elastomeric expansion bearings contain slotted holes that receive anchor
rods projecting from anchor rod void forms. The range of thermal expansion motion is limited by
the slotted holes. After the bearings are installed and positioned, the anchor rods must be
positioned at the correct location within the slot to match the girder temperature.
At expansion bearings, the rods must be positioned accurately within the slotted sole plate
holes. Normally the rod is centered at 5°C. The Plans include a bearing setting table that
indicates the offset from the centre of the slot for different temperatures. This temperature is not
the ambient temperature, rather it is the temperature of the bottom girder flange. The Inspector
must measure the temperature of the bottom flanges at various locations for all girders, and
then determine a reasonable average for each girder to be consistently used when reading the
table. The bearings must be set on a cloudy day, during the early morning or at night when the
girders will have a more consistent temperature.
Once the average girder temperature is determined, the Inspector must increment the slots to
determine the offset distance from the centre of the slot to the determined setting temperature.
The anchor rods must be moved to the required position so that it can be confirmed that the
distance of at least one anchor rod diameter of grout remains between the rod and the side of
the anchor rod void. The grout must fully encapsulate the rod.
The Inspector must carefully check the Contractor’s installation of the anchor rods for each
bearing.
The Inspector must record all bearing settings for inclusion on the Record Plans.
8.5.5 Grouting
Anchor Rod Grouting: After the girders have been erected and the locations and elevations
approved by the Inspector, the anchor rods must be grouted into place as soon as it is practical
so that thermal movements do not cause the girders to move out of position. The anchor rods at
the fixed bearings are generally grouted into position first, followed by the expansion bearings.
The proper process for grouting anchor rods is as follows:
 Anchor rod voids are formed at the base of the bearing recess. The forms must be removed
and the concrete surfaces roughened.
 Prior to placing grout within the voids, it must be confirmed that the voids are clean and that
no standing water exists. It may be difficult to visually check the condition of the voids since
the access is obstructed by the bearing base plate.
 Prior to grouting, the Inspector must confirm that the Contractor has set the anchor rods so
that they are plumb and their projection is in accordance with the design requirements.
September 2015 8-4

Base Plate Recess Grouting: The recesses are grouted prior to the start of deck concrete
placement. The proper process for grouting recesses is as follows:
 The substructure concrete must be clean and in a saturated surface dry condition prior to
grouting.
 Grout must be batched to the correct proportions and must be used within the time period
specified by the manufacturer. Grout must be tested by certified personnel.
 Normally, the perimeter above the recess is formed with wood. Grout is poured into the
recess, and all entrapped air is systematically removed by rodding. The grout is generally
poured slightly above the level of the underside of the base plate so that air is not introduced
under the plate.
 After the grout has set sufficiently, the perimeter forms are removed and the sides of the
grout are trimmed to the angle specified. The angle extends upward from the edge of the
recess to the lower corner of the base plate.
 The grout is then cured in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
It is important that the galvanized coatings of the bearing assemblies are not damaged during
grouting procedures.
The Inspector must witness the entire grouting procedure.
8.5.5.1 Grouting in Cold Weather
Grouting in cold weather should be avoided. Abutments and pier caps are large heat sinks, and
adequate hoarding and pre-heating must be done for the entire substructure element and not
just locally around the bearing recess. The relatively small volume of grout is highly susceptible
to freezing if the preheat is inadequate.
The Inspector must regularly monitor the curing of the grout. Access to bearings must be
maintained by the Contractor during the curing period.
September 2015 8-5

Section 8 – Bridge Bearings Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
8.4.1 Did the Contractor submit a bearing installation procedure at least four
(4) weeks in advance of scheduled start of installation?
8.4.2 Were bridge seat bearing areas properly finished and not deformed or
irregular?
8.4.2 Were bearings set level in their exact position?
8.4.2 Was anchor rod forming material removed?
8.4.2 Were the concrete surfaces cleaned?
8.4.2 Did the location of the anchor rods in slotted holes correspond to the
setting temperature?
8.4.2 Were the nuts on the anchor rods at expansion bearings adjusted to
allow for free movement of the spans?
8.4.2 Did shim stacks have 75 mm of cover from the edge of grout pads?
8.4.2 Were tops of bearing sole plates within a tolerance of +/- 3 mm of

design elevation prior to girder erection?
8.4.2 If sole plates were welded to flanges, were they welded in the
longitudinal direction only?
8.4.2 Was any damaged galvanizing metalized as per ASTM A780

Method 3?
1
Section 8 – Bridge Bearings Check Sheet
Compliance
Section
SSBC
8.4.3 Was grout mixed, placed and cured as per manufacturer’s

recommendations?
8.4.3 Were testers certified to ACI or CSA utilized by the Contractor to test
the compressive strength of the grout?
8.4.4 Was “Grouting in Cold Weather” implemented when daily minimum air
temperatures were at or below 5°C during the placing and curing
period of the grout?
2 Concrete Finishing Under Bearings
4.24 Was concrete finished or ground to a smooth and even surface where
bearing plates, pads or shims were installed?
4.24 Were air voids, created by forming grout-pad recesses, filled with an
approved patching material a minimum of seven (7) days in advance
of girder erection?
4.24 In cold weather conditions, was this work completed while the
substrate concrete was warm from hydration processes?
4.24 If the filling of air voids did not occur while the substrate concrete was
still warm, was it carried out in accordance with Section 4.21 of the
SSBC?
Signature Date
2
Placing bearings at pier cap. Longitudinal pot bearing on abutment seat.

Erection hardware still in place to hold the bearing
components together during transportation and
installation.
Rocker bearing. Centre line of bearing marked on Reinforced elastomeric bearing pad. Wooden
masonry plate, rocker plate and top of pier. Grout wedges and pintles to set masonry plate level.
pad recess smooth and providing an even bearing
on the shim stacks.

Bearing assembly centred and blocked in position. Block out for grout pad formed and ready for grout.
Bearing elevation set using shim stacks placed Bearing set to elevation.
under pintles. Pintles allow bearing to rotate.
Underside of plate is coated to prevent direct
contact between zinc and grout.

Clean-out prior to grouting.
Placing grout. Rodding grout with thin metal strap to remove

entrapped air from beneath masonry plate.

Trimming grout after form removal. Note that top Bearing plinths for girders cast into pier diaphragm.
of grout pad elevation is not higher than the
underside of masonry plate elevation.
Bearing plinths for girders cast into pier diaphragm. Pot bearing assembly. Once the girder is set in
20 mm neoprene pad is between the girder and place, the wooden wedges are no longer needed.
plinth.

Improperly set bearing resulting in bent anchor

rods and failed grout pad.
Concrete plinths on pier cap. Girder to be set on Damage to grout pad due to improperly set
the plinths and cast with the diaphragm. bearing.

Grout pad constructed at 45 degree slope from Grout pad constructed at 45 degree slope from
abutment seat to bottom of base plate. abutment seat to bottom of base plate.
Bearing pad form work for grouting. Setting bearing offset to “X” value in accordance
with bearing temperature chart, just prior to
grouting.

DRAIN TROUGH TERMINAL PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.4 Material ......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.4.1 Bags Filled with Concrete ................................................................................. 9-1
9.4.2 Rock Riprap Alternate ...................................................................................... 9-1
9.4.3 Preparation and Placing ................................................................................... 9-1
9.5 Bags Filled with Concrete ........................................................................................... 9-2
9.6 Rock Riprap Alternate ................................................................................................. 9-2
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 9, Drain Trough Terminal Protection
9.1 General
Drain trough terminal protection is normally located at the toe of concrete drain troughs. The
purpose of drain trough terminal protection is to dissipate the energy of the surface drain water
and to provide scour protection to the soil at the base of the drain troughs.
The following environmental considerations must be considered by the Contractor:
 Prevent deleterious material from washing into any nearby water channel.
 Transit mix trucks must be cleaned in a suitable area away from any nearby water channel.
 Clean up oil leaks and spills.
 Disturbed areas are to be acceptably restored.
 Excess material must be properly disposed of in a location and manner approved by the
Inspector.
Drain trough terminal protection is generally at the base of a steep embankment slope. Use care
when walking up and down slopes.
Concrete materials are corrosive and can cause burns. Use care when handling bags to prevent
leakage and contact with skin or eyes.
9.4 Material
9.4.1 Bags Filled with Concrete
Drain trough terminal protection is normally constructed with burlap or reinforced polyethylene
bags filled approximately two-thirds with Class S Concrete. Bags are placed on a shaped and
prepared foundation.
The requirements for Class S Concrete used to fill bags is specified in Section 4 “Cast-In-Place
Concrete” of the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction. A mix design submission is
not required.
9.4.2 Rock Riprap Alternate
Class 1M rock riprap may be approved in lieu of bags filled with concrete at the discretion of the
Consultant. Class 1M rock riprap must conform to Section 10 “Heavy Rock Riprap” of the
Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction.
9.4.3 Preparation and Placing
Care must be taken during the construction of the excavation. The Inspector must confirm that
all final grading has been completed and that the subgrade elevations are correct. It is important
that the centre of the terminal protection be located accurately by survey so that the end of the
concrete trough is centred onto the depression and that the trough extends into the terminal at
the proper grade and projection.
September 2015 9-1

The Contractor must neatly excavate the subgrade into a dish shape. The sides of the dish must
gently slope towards the centre, and the edges of the dish must not be overly steep.
The base of the dish must be free of loose material and must be compacted so that no soft
areas remain.
9.5 Bags Filled with Concrete
As bags are placed, they must be rammed and packed into place so that the contact area
between adjacent bags is maximized. No soil can be exposed at any locations. The bags must
also be in intimate contact with the ground.
The outer edge of the concrete-filled burlap bags of the completed drain trough terminal
protection must be level.
9.6 Rock Riprap Alternate
The diameter for a rock riprap terminal protection is the same as for bagged concrete; however,
the depth to the top of riprap at the centre point is 320 mm rather than 450 mm.
Filter fabric is required underneath the rock riprap, and it is important to key this material into the
subgrade.
The outer edge of the riprap terminal protection must be level.
September 2015 9-2

Section 9 – Drain Trough Terminal Protection Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 Materials
9.2 Were the bags approximately 400 mm x 700 mm in size?
9.2 Did the concrete meet the requirements of Section 4 of the SSBC?
9.2 Did the rock riprap meet the requirements of Section 10 of the SSBC?
2 Preparation and Placing

9.3 Was a depression formed at the toe of the drain trough as shown on
Standard Drawing S-1410?
9.3 Was the depression compacted in the shape of a dish approximately

450 mm deep and 3 m in diameter?
9.3 Were the bags filled two-thirds with Class S concrete?
9.3 Were bags sewed, stapled or folded to form a straight-edge closure,

and were they immediately placed in the work?
9.3 Was the first bag placed in the centre (bottom) of the dish, with
subsequent bags placed in a circular direction around the first bag?
9.3 Did each bag overlap the closed end of the bag previously placed, and
also the bag beside it, so that a shingled effect was produced?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
9.3 Was the folded part of the bag on the underside when in place?
9.3 Were the bags rammed and packed against each other so as to obtain
a closed and uniform surface?
9.3 Were the bags in intimate contact with the ground and each other?
9.3 Did the placed drain trough terminal protection have an average
thickness of 130 mm?
9.3 Was the outer edge of the concrete-filled burlap bags level?
9.1 Were all the requirements of Standard Drawing S-1410 met?
3 Rock Riprap Alternate

9.4 Was Class 1M rock riprap placed to a minimum depth of 350 mm?
9.4 Was the size of the terminal dish the same as for bagged concrete
terminal protection?
9.4 Was the bed shaped to the extent that the dimension from the level
surface to the top of rock riprap is 320 ± 100 mm?
9.4 Was the dish formed in the subgrade covered with Terrafix 270R or
approved equivalent filter fabric?
9.4 Was the filter fabric keyed 300 mm into the subgrade at the perimeter
of the dish in order to anchor the fabric?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
9.4 Was the rock riprap placed so that the filter fabric was fully covered?
Signature Date
3
9.1 Riprap drain trough terminal protection. 9.2 Riprap drain trough.
9.3 Drain trough with riprap terminal protection. 9.4 Drain trough with riprap terminal protection.

HEAVY ROCK RIPRAP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
10.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Environmental Considerations ................................................................................. 10-1
10.3 Safety Considerations ............................................................................................... 10-1
10.4 Manufacture ............................................................................................................... 10-1
10.5 Performance Records and Testing ........................................................................... 10-2
10.5.1 Sandstone and Other Weak Rock .................................................................. 10-2
10.5.2 Performance Records and Testing ................................................................. 10-2
10.5.3 Shape............................................................................................................. 10-2
10.6 Installation .................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.6.1 Excavation ..................................................................................................... 10-2
10.6.2 Geotextile ....................................................................................................... 10-3
10.6.3 Inspection of Gradation .................................................................................. 10-3
10.6.4 Placement ...................................................................................................... 10-3
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 10, Heavy Rock Riprap
10.1 General
Heavy rock riprap is highly durable, has a history of superior performance and is readily
available throughout most of Alberta. Headslopes and guidebanks constructed of rock riprap are
flexible, do not easily fail as a result of settlement and can be constructed and repaired using
simple techniques and equipment.
Rock riprap is used at culvert aprons, berms and for watercourse crossings as protection from
scour and erosion. Scour is a common cause of bridge foundation failure and occurs as the
stream velocity increases locally around bridge structures. Erosion describes the more global
process for natural degradation of the stream channel.
Rock riprap resists scour and erosion through a combination of stone size, density, angularity,
resistance to weathering, gradation and thickness of the riprap mat. The interlocking nature of
angular stones and their weight provides resistance to movement.
Riprap may not be cleaned or washed after it has been placed. Runoff water from cleaning must
be properly contained and not be permitted to enter the watercourse.
Riprap must only be placed at the locations shown on the Plans.
Restricted Activity Periods (RAP) exist for most watercourses within which no in-stream work is
permitted. In-stream work includes any activity within the active flow channel.
Precautions must be taken when using heavy equipment near a watercourse, including
refuelling, fuel storage, cleaning and spill management.
Tripping and crushing hazards exist when walking over placed riprap. Pieces may settle or roll
after they have been placed.
Pieces of rock may easily be dropped or rolled during placement. No personnel must be near
the excavator during placement.
10.4 Manufacture
Rock riprap may either consist of screened field stone or blast rock. Class 1M and Class 1
riprap are typically fieldstone, Class 2 may be either fieldstone or blast rock, and Class 3 is
commonly blast rock. The Contractor may need to import suitable riprap over long distances. If
different classes of riprap are required for the project, the Contractor may need to import riprap
from different sources.
Fieldstone is commonly manufactured at a gravel pit and is typically a by-product of aggregate

production. Oversized rock materials are screened-out for riprap. The riprap is dumped onto a
rock separator, which grades the rock into size ranges. The separator has fixed or adjustable
“grizzly” bars that act like sieves. After separating, rocks of certain size ranges are re-combined
into the correct proportions to comply with the riprap gradation requirements.
Rock riprap may be quarried by blasting or ripping. It is then graded using a separator and re-
combined in a similar fashion to fieldstone.
September 2015 10-1

10.5 Performance Records and Testing
Rock riprap must be sufficiently durable to perform over the entire life of the bridge structure.
For Class 1M and Class 1 riprap, angular fieldstone is considered durable and no further testing
is required. If riprap for Class 2 and Class 3 are not fieldstone, then the quality of the material
must be tested by the Contractor. The performance of the riprap is critical to the protection of
both the bridge foundation elements and the watercourse environment.
10.5.1 Sandstone and Other Weak Rock
Proper identification of different rock types is often difficult, and some types of sedimentary rock
may not be sufficiently durable when used as riprap.
Concrete rubble or other recycled materials may not be used as riprap.
10.5.2 Performance Records and Testing
For all Class 2 and Class 3 rock, the Contractor must either produce reliable performance
records or else test the proposed materials for durability and absorption. The durability test
exposes the stone pieces to abrasion with other pieces while in water, and the absorption test
assesses rock porosity.
The reliability of performance records, if available, must be evaluated by the Project Manager.
The records must comprehensively evaluate the performance of the proposed rock from the
same source in similar applications. The records must also confirm that the properties of the
source material have not changed.
10.5.3 Shape
The individual stone pieces must be angular and the smallest dimension must be larger than
one-third of the largest dimension. Angularity is a qualitative parameter that is assessed by
visual inspection as there is no standard test to evaluate angularity.
Pieces of angular stone must have flat faces and defined edges and corners. They must be
block-like and not have a tendency to roll at the placement angle specified.
Fieldstone has been worn by the process of abrasion or glaciation and typically has rounded
corners. Fieldstone that has defined and flattened faces is considered acceptable since it is sub-
angular. Round fieldstone is not acceptable.
Angularity is an important property of riprap as it permits the stone pieces to interlock and form
a stable mat. Riprap placed with greater angularity will have a steeper angle of repose.
Consequently, angular pieces will be less likely to roll or be displaced if the riprapped slope
settles or steepens.
10.6 Installation
10.6.1 Excavation
The top surface of placed riprap must match the channel or bank elevation. Riprap for aprons
must be placed into a neatly constructed excavation of constant depth and at the specified
surface elevations.
September 2015 10-2

10.6.2 Geotextile
Stream banks are often composed of non-cohesive sand and gravel that require a filter layer to
prevent erosion. Where filter fabric is specified, the excavation must be uniform and free of
sharp objects so that the fabric does not tear or span across depressions.
It is important that the fabric be lapped and pinned as specified by the manufacturer. To prevent
shifting, it is also important that the fabric be keyed into the ground at the edges by trenching
beyond the perimeter of the excavation, inserting the edge of the fabric, then backfilling.
10.6.3 Inspection of Gradation
The Class of riprap selected is designed to resist the design velocity of the watercourse. Any
deviations from the required gradation or a substitution with a lower Class of material will render
the riprap ineffective.
Sampling for visual inspection of gradation is required for all classes of riprap. The weight of all
sample pieces must be marked. The Inspector can then determine the average size for each
weight category for the required gradation.
It is important that each load of riprap delivered to the site meets the specified gradation.
Additional material may be added at the site to conform to the specified gradation, prior to the
riprap being placed into its final position. It is important that the gradation is uniform throughout
with no segregation.
The rock must arrive at site clean and free of debris and other contamination.
The Inspector must require the Contractor to schedule the gradation sampling immediately
following the initial delivery of the material to be sampled. The Inspector must be present during
the riprap placement to confirm conformance to all requirements.
10.6.4 Placement
Riprap placement must start at the base of the slope and proceed upwards.
Generally, riprap is dumped near the worksite and placed by hydraulic excavator using a
specialized bucket to permit accurate rock placement.
Riprap must be placed at a uniform thickness and to the specified elevation. The specified
thickness for slopes is typically the nominal diameter of the largest specified stone size, and for
aprons is twice the largest specified stone size.
It is important that no geotextile filter fabric be exposed after placement to the required
thickness. The finished surface must be reasonably uniform without large cavities and without
individual stones projecting above the nominal surface.
September 2015 10-3

Section 10 – Heavy Rock Riprap Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Was the rock riprap measured and the quantities calculated for
payment?
2 Permits
10.2 Did the Contractor obtain all the necessary permits, agreements and
authorizations prior to loading riprap?
10.2 Did the Contractor advise the Inspector of any special provisions
required under such permits and provide satisfactory evidence that the
requirements of the permits were fully complied with?
3 Materials
10.3 Was the supplied rock hard, durable and angular in shape, resistant to
weathering and water action, free from overburden, spoil, shale or
shale seams and organic material, and did it meet the gradation
requirements for the class specified?
10.3 Was the minimum dimension of any single rock not less than one third
of its maximum dimension for the class specified?
10.3 Was the minimum acceptable unit weight of the rock 2.5 t/m3?
10.3 Did the Contractor provide evidence of the acceptability of the rock
riprap material?
10.3 Did the Contractor submit samples of Class 2 and Class 3 rock riprap
for which no performance records are available?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
10.3 Was the proposed material sent to an independent certified testing

laboratory, and was a written report of the test results provided,
stamped by a Professional Engineer?
10.4 Was the slope receiving rock rip-rap graded to provide a smooth,
uniform surface free of stumps, large rocks, brush or other debris, and
were holes and depressions filled prior to placing filter fabric?
10.4 Was loose or unstable soil replaced prior to placing rock riprap?
10.4 Did the non-woven geotextile filter fabric meet the specifications and
physical properties as outlined in the chart under 10.4 of the Standard
10.4 Was the filter fabric laid parallel to the slope with the top edge
anchored 300 mm?
10.4 Was the rock riprap placed on the filter fabric within sufficient time so
as to avoid ultraviolet damage?
10.5 Was the rock riprap finished surface reasonably uniform?
10.6 Did the Contractor provide a minimum of two samples of rock of the
minimum sample size specified?
10.6 Did the samples conform to the required gradation?
2
Signature Date
3
10.1 Load cell used to weigh heavy rock riprap at site. 10.2 Heavy rock riprap sample with weights painted on
each piece.
10.3 Crews placing filter fabric material prior to heavy 10.4 Riprap placed at the end of culvert bevel.
rock riprap placement. Filter fabric keyed into top of
slope.

10.5 Heavy rock riprap at culvert bevel. 10.6 Filter fabric placed around end of RCP.
10.7 Riprap apron placed at RCP end. 10.8 Riprap placement in creek bed by excavator with a
bucket thumb.

10.9 Completed installation of heavy rock riprap as 10.10 Placement of heavy rock riprap, starting from base
channel armouring. and working upwards.

DUCTS AND VOIDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
11.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 11-1

11.2 Materials ..................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.3 Installation .................................................................................................................. 11-1
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 11, Ducts and Voids
11.1 General
Ducts and rigid conduit described in this section include only those service ducts used for utility
containment and do not include the following:
 Post-tensioning ducts used in precast girders

 Displacement voids that are placed into precast box girders to reduce their weight
Often utilities, such as telecommunication lines, must be accommodated in the bridge structure.
In some cases, the utility is needed to provide service to the bridge itself, as with Real Weather
Information System (RWIS) and electrical service for bridge lighting.
11.2 Materials
Utility ducts, conduits and voids may only be made of PVC pipe. The Inspector must make sure
that the Contractor’s Electrician is aware of all specified requirements and referenced
standards. The Inspector must be knowledgeable regarding the content of the reference
standards as they pertain to materials, bending, fittings, expansion sleeves and pull cords.
11.3 Installation
The Inspector must confirm that attention to duct, conduit and void placement and securement
has taken place. This inspection must be done prior to concrete placement.
Ducts and voids contain air and will become positively buoyant when surrounded by concrete.
Vibration of concrete will cause the ducts and voids to float unless they are restrained. Ducts
and voids must be tied adequately to prevent this. The ties must be placed at sufficient intervals
to prevent the ducts and voids from bowing between tie points.
Ducts and voids must not rest directly on hardened concrete. Instead, they must be raised and
secured above the surface of the construction joint. This will allow concrete to completely
encase the duct. The presence of a duct at a construction joint location will also result in a
poorly constructed joint since it may reduce the contact area between the hardened and fresh
concrete. A well performing joint depends on a good interface between the hardened and new
concrete surface.
Any concrete paste leaking into a duct joint can plug the conduit and plug its opening. Air
leaking from a duct joint during concrete placement can result in entrapped air voids within the
concrete above the duct joint.
Ducts placed across deck joints must precisely follow the deck grade and not be skewed to the
direction of expansion since a misaligned joint may break. Some joints may also require
accommodation for rotation.
Ducts installed into column forms must be well secured at the base of the column to withstand
concrete placement operations.
Electrical conduits and junction boxes may be detailed on electrical Plans. The Inspector must
reference these Plans prior to the start of work.
Prior to installation of the pull cord, the Contractor’s electrician must demonstrate that no
blockages exist by pulling an object through the duct. The ductwork must be completed prior to
September 2015 11-1

Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 11, Ducts and Voids
this test, and the Inspector must witness the test. This test must be done twice: first before
concrete placement, and again after concrete placement. If a blockage is encountered after
concrete placement, the Contractor must provide a repair procedure acceptable to the
Consultant.
Duct expansion assemblies must not interfere with the deck joint blockouts and deck joint turn-
up ends. These potential areas of conflict must be investigated by the Inspector and identified to
the Contractor in advance of placing ducts.
Ducts must not interfere with other appurtenances, such as anchor bolts for bridge rail posts.
These potential areas of conflict must be investigated by the Inspector and identified to the
Contractor in advance of placing ducts.
September 2015 11-2

Section 11 – Ducts and Voids Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Was the electrical conduit bent with a standard conduit bender?
Were expansion joints provided, and was the conduit continuous?
2 Installation
11.3 Were ducts, conduits and voids firmly secured to prevent floating
during of concrete placement?
11.3 Were continuous pull wires installed in all service ducts and conduits
unless specified otherwise?
11.3 Were the pull wires 12-gauge galvanized steel, unspliced, extending
with a tight fit through the duct end caps and terminating one metre
beyond in 300 mm loops?
11.3 If the duct was over 75 mm diameter, was 8 mm mono-poly rope or

equivalent used, and if so, was the rope unspliced with the extra
length of 300 mm each end coiled up inside the duct and the duct end
caps secured in place?
11.3 When specified, were lamp standards properly bedded, securely
bolted and painted with two field coats?
11.3 Was the installation of any electrical equipment carried out to

completion by a fully qualified electrician, tested and left in good
working order?
1
Section 11 – Ducts and Voids Check Sheet
Compliance
Section
SSBC
11.3 Were all runs of conduit or duct proven in the presence of the
Inspector to be clear by passing a round object, no less than 75% of
the conduit area, through the entire length?
Signature Date
2
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 11, Ducts And Voids
11.1 Duct for electrical conduit in barrier. 11.2 Properly installed expansion joint at duct. Care
must be taken to properly align the joint.
11.3 Electrical conduit exiting barrier. 11.4 Ducts in barrier for overhead lighting.

Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 11, Ducts And Voids
11.5 Electrical ducts exiting bottom of wingwall below 11.6 RWIS junction box cast on outside face of barrier.
grade. Box must be sealed to prevent contamination with
concrete paste.
11.7 Improper connection at expansion joint using 11.8 Poorly aligned connection at expansion joint.
expanding foam.

BRIDGERAIL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 Material Handling and Storage.................................................................................. 12-1
12.3 Installation .................................................................................................................. 12-1
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 12, Bridgerail
12.1 General
Bridgerail is a critical safety element at all bridge structures. The function of the bridgerail is to
provide protection for traffic and pedestrians at the bridge overhangs. In performing this
function, the railing must have the capacity to withstand a vehicular impact and have the
appropriate geometric configuration to safely redirect the vehicle without causing crushing or
overturning. Bridgerail systems have been crash tested and therefore must be designed,
fabricated and installed in strict conformance.
The type of bridgerail system to be used depends on many factors, including traffic volume,
design speed, bridge geometry and the number of heavy trucks. Various test levels were
established from NCHRP Report 350 and the current Performance Levels from CSA-S6. The
following Performance Levels (PL) and Test Levels (TL) are applicable:
 PL-1 (TL-2) is used for most local roads when no salt application is expected.
 PL-2 (TL-4) is used for the majority of applications on high-speed provincial highways and
freeways with a mixture of trucks and heavy vehicles.
 PL-3 (TL-5) is used for bridges with high-speed, high volume and truck traffic.
12.2 Material Handling and Storage
The Contractor must deliver, handle and store bridgerail materials suitably to avoid damage.
Nylon straps or slings must be used for loading and unloading. Bridgerail materials must be
stored in such a manner as to prevent the formation of wet storage stains and white rusting.
This is done by utilizing wooden blocks, platforms or skids that keep the material off the ground.
12.3 Installation
Bridgerail installation includes casting the anchor bolt assemblies into the deck concrete,
erecting/aligning of the rail and grouting under the post baseplates. The Inspector must be
familiar with the shop and erection drawings. The posts must be installed vertically, unless
noted on the shop drawings. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to accurately locate the
bridgerail anchor bolts. The Inspector must check the location and height of the anchor bolts
prior to casting. The proper projection of anchor bolts must be sufficient to accommodate the
grout pad, thickness of the base plate and full thickness of top anchor nut plus a minimum of
two threads. In order to accurately locate the anchor bolt assemblies, the reinforcing steel must
be installed concurrently in order to avoid potential conflicts.
The Contractor must erect and align the bridgerail true to the required lines by instrument. The
Inspector must check the alignment and the profile. All adjustments must be completed prior to
grouting of baseplates. Expansion joints in the bridgerail must be installed as detailed on the
Plans.
Grouting under baseplates must be carried out using an approved flowable grout. Full contact
with the underside of the post baseplate must be achieved. The grout must be wet cured for a
period of 72 hours. Type 1c sealer must be applied to the exposed grout surfaces after at least
28 days of curing.
When the temperature falls below 5ºC, cold weather grouting procedures must be followed.
September 2015 12-1

Section 12 – Bridgerail Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Was grout for bridgerail anchor bolt pads, mixed in required
proportions?
Was any damage to a galvanized surface repaired by metallizing?
2 Documentation
Did the Contractor supply approved shop and erection drawings, as
well as a method of forming and pouring grout?
3 Material Handling and Storage

12.2.7.4 Did the Contractor notify the Fabrication Inspector 48 hours prior to
shipment to facilitate final inspection of the materials?
12.2.7.4 Were all holes (round and slotted) de-burred and accurately located?
12.2.7.4 Were galvanized surfaces smooth, free of scratches, handling

damage, wet stains and uncoated?
12.2.7.4 Were underside of post base plates coated with barrier coating?
4 Erection
12.3 Were anchor bolts checked for type, location and elevation, minimum
anchor bolt projection of full thickness of a nut plus two threads,
overall alignment and adequate attachment to form?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
12.3 Were all structural bolts tightened by the turn-of-nut method?
12.3 Was the bridgerail checked for secure attachment, and alignment
both horizontally and vertically, location, and gap of expansion joints?
12.3 Was a method of forming and pouring the grout submitted to the
Inspector for review and acceptance?
12.3 Was Sika 212 flowable grout or an approved grouting material mixed
in required proportions as per manufacture’s specifications?
12.3 Was grout poured only to the bottom of base plate and wet cured for
a period of 72 hours prior to applying Type 1c sealer, as per Clause
4.26 of the SSBC?
12.3.1 If the air temperature fell below 5°C, was an adequate preheat
provided to raise the temperature of the adjacent areas to at least
10°C?
12.3.1 Was the temperature of the grout during placing between 10°C and
25°C?
12.3.1 Was the grout pad enclosed and kept at 10°C to 25°C for at least five
(5) days using a system of heating, designed to prevent excessive
drying-out of the grout?
12.3.2 Was the supply and installation of the approach rail transition
included and installed in accordance with Section 14 Guardrail of the
SSBC
2
Signature Date
3
12.1 Installation of bridgerail. Bolting railing to posts.
12.2 Bridgerail alignment and elevation adjusted prior to 12.3 Expansion joint sleeves between rail sections.
grouting. Alignment and elevation to required lines
is important for overall functionality and
appearance of the bridgerail.

12.4 Completed bridgerail grout pad. Acceptable 12.5 Bridgerail to guardrail transition.
projection of bolts shown.
12.6 Sidewalk pedestrian rail. Horizontal and vertical 12.7 Sidewalk pedestrian rail must be installed at
alignment is important for the overall appearance. correct alignment and elevation.

12.8 Completed pedestrian rail grout pad. 12.9 Completed PL-3 (TL-5) bridgerail.
12.10 Anchor bolt assembly cast into barriers. Wooden

blockouts form grout recesses. Bolt projection to be
protected to prevent contamination from concrete
during barrier placement.

MISCELLANEOUS IRON
TABLE OF CONTENTS
13.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 13-1

13.2 Installation .................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.3 Handling Galvanized Steel ........................................................................................ 13-1
13.4 Field Welding ............................................................................................................. 13-1
13.4.1 Structural Member Field Welding ................................................................... 13-2
13.4.2 Non-Structural Member Field Welding ............................................................ 13-2
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 13, Miscellaneous Iron
13.1 General
The term “miscellaneous iron” includes metal bridge components that are generally non-
structural in nature. These may include steel drain troughs, pier drip sheets, deck buffer angles,
dowels, connector angles, anchor bolt sleeves, bridge plaques and benchmark tablets.
Miscellaneous iron items that are included in the Work will be listed in the Special Provisions.
The Inspector must be knowledgeable regarding the content of all applicable Standard
Drawings that provide fabrication and installation details.
The Inspector must review the list of miscellaneous iron items with the Contractor early in the
project to confirm that no items are overlooked.
13.2 Installation
Items of miscellaneous iron that are often embedded into concrete require that:
 The Inspector confirm that all such items and their anchorage devices are positioned at the
correct location and alignment.
 Where the embedded item is required at the edge or face of a concrete surface, it must be
secured tightly against the formwork so that the surfaces are true and free of paste after
concrete placement.
13.3 Handling Galvanized Steel
Many items of miscellaneous iron are hot dip galvanized. Storage stains may occur if items are
not properly stored. These are caused by trapped water that may occur if no air spaces exist
between stockpiled items, or when water ponds at a surface. The formation of a white powdery
deposit may result, which will affect the durability of the coating.
The Inspector must review all items after they are separated from shipment bundles at the site.
Items which exhibit staining, marring, scratches, blisters or other coating damage must be
rejected until they are acceptably repaired.
13.4 Field Welding
Field welding requirements for all bridge items are specified in Section 13 of the Standard
Specifications for Bridge Construction. The differentiation between ‘Structural Members’ and
‘Non-Structural Members’ is made with respect to field welding, and the requirements differ for
each. The Inspector must assume that a field-welded item is a ‘Structural Member’ unless the
Project Manager advises that the item is a ‘Non-Structural Member’. Prior to any field welding,
the Inspector must confirm that the Contractor is aware of those items that are ‘Structural
Members’.
Prior to being delivered to the job site, all miscellaneous iron material is to be inspected by the
Consultant’s Level II certified visual welding inspector. The Inspector must confirm with the
Project Manager that the visual welding inspector’s report has been received, and that the
fabricated materials are compliant to the requirements with no outstanding quality issues.
September 2015 13-1

13.4.1 Structural Member Field Welding
Structural Member field welding is only done when necessary. Many factors can adversely
affect the quality of the welds. Shop welding in controlled conditions is preferred so as to
provide a consistent level of quality.
The Inspector must confirm that the Project Manager has received welder qualifications in the
correct category, and has received and accepted the welding procedures. Prior to the start of
welding, the Inspector must check that only those welders for whom qualifications have been
accepted are performing the welds.
The Inspector must confirm with the welders that they are using the correct weld process as
described in Section 6 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction.
Ambient temperature limits and material pre-heating limits are more stringent for Structural
Members than for Non-Structural Members.
Structural Member field welding is commonly done at the following elements:
 Foundation Pile Splices: Piles requiring splicing are normally sheltered to retain pre-heat
during cool conditions by use of local hoardings. It is generally impractical to hoard the
entire length of the pile. The local hoarding may consist of an insulated box that surrounds
the splice location. The effectiveness of the hoarding is the Contractor’s responsibility.
 Bearing Components: The welding of galvanized plates is often required. Prior to welding,
all zinc coating must be removed. Safety hazards exist when welding over galvanized
coating. After welding, the coating must be repaired as described in the referenced
specifications and documents.
 Steel Substructures: The welding of pile caps to substructures is generally done inside fully
hoarded enclosures.
13.4.2 Non-Structural Member Field Welding
Non-Structural Member field welding is normally done only on culverts and deck joint splices.
The Inspector must confirm that the Project Manager has received and accepted welding
procedures. Prior to the start of welding, the Inspector must check that the welders are qualified
to perform weldments.
The Inspector must confirm with the welders that they are using the correct weld process as
described in Section 6 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction.
September 2015 13-2

Section 13 – Miscellaneous Iron Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 Materials
13.3 Was all lifting and handling for galvanize steel done using devices that
did not mark, mar, damage or distort the galvanized members and
assemblies in any way?
13.3 Was galvanized material stacked or bundled and stored to prevent wet
storage stain, as per the American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association
(AHDGA) publication “Wet Storage Stain”?
Note: Delivery of a damaged product will be cause for rejection.
2 Field Welding – Structural Members
13.4.1 Was all welding, cutting and preparation done in accordance with the
American Welding Society (AWS) Bridge Welding Code D1.5?
13.4.1 Were the welders performing the weldments approved by the

Canadian Welding Bureau in the particular category, and was their
qualification current and available for examination?
13.4.1 Were the welding procedures approved by the Canadian Welding

Bureau and submitted for review prior to welding?
accordance with Section 6.2.5.1 of the SSBC?
13.4.1 When the air temperature was below 10°C, was all material to be
welded preheated to 100°C for a distance of 80 mm beyond the weld
13.4.1 Was welding permitted when the air temperature was below 0°C,
other than with suitable hoarding and heating provided, as accepted
by the Inspector?
1
Section 13 – Miscellaneous Iron Check Sheet
Compliance
Section
SSBC
3 Field Welding – Non Structural Members

13.4.2 Were journeyman welders with Class B tickets performing the
weldments and was their qualification current and available for
examination?
13.4.2 Were the welding procedures prepared and stamped by a

Professional Engineer, and were they submitted for review prior to
welding?
accordance with Section 6.2.5.1 of the Standard Specifications for
Bridge Construction?
13.4.2 When the air temperature was below 10°C, was all material to be
welded preheated to 100°C for a distance of 80 mm beyond the weld
13.4.2 Was welding permitted when the air temperature was below 0°C,
other than with suitable hoarding and heating provided, as accepted
by the Inspector?
Signature Date
2
13.1 Polyurethane coated and galvanized deck drain. 13.2 Cast-in-place bridge plaque. Bridge plaques must
be set true to wingwall and barrier lines.
13.3 Completed H-pile splice plate detail. 13.4 Splicing pipe pile. Bevelled edge with backup ring.

13.5 Pipe pile splice ready for field welding. 13.6 Hoarding setup for welding in windy or cold
conditions.

GUARDRAIL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
14.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 14-1

14.2 Details ......................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.3 Temporary Guardrail ................................................................................................. 14-1
14.4 Material ....................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.5 Installation .................................................................................................................. 14-2
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 14, Guardrail
14.1 General
Guardrail is designed to protect motorists when a vehicle leaves the roadway surface. Guardrail
may protect the vehicle occupants by:
 Preventing a vehicle that has left the roadway from striking other objects or vehicles, which
would result in a more severe crash.
 Deflecting the vehicle back onto the roadway surface.
 Reducing the speed of or stopping a moving, uncontrolled vehicle.
Guardrail end terminals are special treatments installed at the terminus of the system. They are
designed to prevent a blunt vehicular impact or an overturning impact at the end of the
guardrail. Special end terminal treatments include turn-downs and cushions.
Flexbeam guardrails will deflect under crash impact, while bridgerail systems are rigid. The
transition from guardrail to bridgerail is important to ensure that the system prevents a blunt
vehicular impact collision at the end of the bridge barrier or parapet.
14.2 Details
Guardrail is normally installed at all four corners of bridge approaches. The guardrail details
depend on the type of bridgerail barrier system in use. The length of guardrail varies depending
on the design volume and speed of the roadway, as well as on site-specific conditions.
Guardrail is installed after all roadway work has been done, and after bridgerail installation has
been done for PL-1 (TL-2), PL-2 (TL-4) and PL-3 (TL-5) systems. For thrie-beam systems,
guardrail is often installed at the same time that the bridgerail is installed.
Guardrail may also be installed on roadway shoulders or in medians to protect bridge piers.
Guardrail systems are crash-tested to assess their performance, and even slight modifications
to the specified details can significantly and adversely affect their performance:
 Guardrail may itself be a hazard, and must only be installed at the locations specified.
 Guardrail must be installed at the correct height.
 Guardrail post spacing and location must be precise.
 End terminals must be constructed exactly as specified, or they may present an
unnecessary hazard.
The Inspector must carefully measure or otherwise check the location of the guardrail
components. The safety of the travelling public may be compromised if the guardrail system is
not properly constructed as specified.
14.3 Temporary Guardrail
During bridge construction activities, it is sometimes necessary to remove existing guardrail. If

traffic is to be maintained on the roadway, it is necessary to replace this guardrail with a
temporary system that provides similar protection, often in conjunction with reduced speed. The
Inspector must confirm that the Contractor has adequately installed all temporary replacement
guardrail as required before traffic is permitted to travel on the affected roadway.
September 2015 14-1

14.4 Material
The Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction provide references to various other
specifications and standard. These documents provide the material fabrication requirements for
rails, steel posts, wooden posts, special hardware and bolts.
Prior to any materials being incorporated into the Work, the Inspector must confirm with the
Project Manager that a copy of the producer’s certificate — which confirms compliance to the
required material and chemical tests — has been received and accepted.
Prior to any materials being incorporated into the Work, the Inspector must confirm by on-site
measurement and visual inspection that:
 The curvature of rail sections is correct. The curved sections, if fabricated by crimping, do
not have damage to the galvanized coating.
 The sheet thickness is correct.
 Wooden posts are marked with a No. 1 NLGA grade and are date stamped.
 Wooden posts are not excessively waned and not warped.
 Wooden posts are pressure preservative treated after cutting and drilling. If penetration
testing is required, the Inspector must drill a test hole into the side of a sample post at an
above-ground location. The core shavings must indicate that the preservative has
penetrated a minimum of 75 mm into the post. The drilled hole must be plugged with a
disinfectant-treated countersunk dowel and silicone caulk.
14.5 Installation
The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor has taken precautions to accurately install all
guardrail posts.
Locations must be surveyed and marked in advance by the Contractor, and checked by the
Inspector. The location of existing or future curb and gutter or drain troughs must be considered
since these may conflict with guardrail post locations. The location of utility ducts that may be
buried beyond the ends of wingwalls must also be avoided when installing guardrail posts.
The Contractor must inspect the materials once they arrive at the site, including size, thickness
and coating. The Inspector must confirm with the Contractor that the actual measurements of
supplied materials meet acceptable tolerances.
The Contractor must take care when augering holes to ensure that they are accurate in location
and plumb. The Inspector must confirm that there is sufficient space on all sides of posts so that
proper placement of backfill can be done. Posts must not be in contact with the sides of the
hole.
The Inspector must check the material at the base of the holes for suitability. Bases must
consist of firm, dry soil. Unsuitable or loose materials must be removed by over-excavating and
then placing approximately 150 mm of granular backfill.
If the excavated material consists of highly plastic clay, wet clay, silt or organic material, it is
unsuitable for use as backfill and must be replaced with imported granular backfill.
September 2015 14-2

It is very important that the guardrail laps be consistently placed in the direction of traffic so that
vehicles that come into contact with the guardrail do not impact the exposed edge of a rail
section and separate the rail sections at the lap, creating a dangerous condition.
The Contractor must take care not to damage the galvanized coating during installation or
bolting. Guardrail sections must be properly stored until they are erected. Guardrail must not be
erected using equipment that may scratch the coating.
Bolts must be tightened to a torque of 100 Nm. Threaded holes in the embedment mounting
plate in the transition barrier must be kept clean at all times.
Flame cutting of materials is prohibited and should not be considered.
Any damage to galvanizing shall be repaired by Metallizing.
September 2015 14-3

Section 14 – Guardrail Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 Inspection of Materials
14.3.1 Was the size and thickness of 2.67 mm nominal base metal thickness
rails and terminal elements within the tolerance specified:
 Base metal thickness: 2.67 mm
 Galvanized finished thickness: 2.82 mm
 Tolerance: 0.23 mm
Was the size and thickness of 3.5 mm nominal base metal thickness
rails and terminal elements within the tolerance specified:
 Base metal thickness: 3.43 mm
 Galvanized finished thickness: 3.58 mm
 Tolerance: 0.23 mm
14.3.2 For timber guardrail posts, was testing of the penetration of the
preservative carried out?
Note: Warped wood posts will be rejected.
2 Installation
14.4 Was the permissible tolerance for plumb and grade of posts (20 mm
maximum) achieved?
14.4 Was any unsuitable material at the bottom of the holes excavated and
replaced with granular material directed by the Inspector at the
Contractor’s expense?
14.4 Did the Contractor thoroughly compact the bottom of the hole?
14.4 Did the guardrail posts rest directly and solidly on the bottom of the
hole at the time of installation?
14.4 Was the backfill thoroughly compacted using pneumatic tampers in

layers not exceeding 150 mm for the full depth of the excavation?
1
Section 14 – Guardrail Check Sheet
Compliance
Section
SSBC
14.4 For posts installed on paved surfaces, was the top 150 mm of backfill
completed using ACP in accordance with Section 17 of the SSBC?
14.4 Was any guardrail material requiring field modification reported before
work was carried out?
Note: Modification by flame cutting method is prohibited. Modification
by cold cutting method is allowed.
14.4 Were guardrail laps in the direction of traffic flow?
14.4 Were bolts tightened to a torque of 100 Nm?
14.4 Were metal reflectors (Scotchlite or equivalent) supplied and attached

to the top of every third guardrail post with two 50 mm ring nails?
14.4 Did the Contractor take all necessary precautions to eliminate damage
to galvanizing?
14.4 Were minor abrasions and exposed steel areas resulting from cold
cutting repaired in accordance with ASTM A780 Method A2 Repair
Using Paints Containing Zinc Dust?
14.4 Were major abrasions repaired by regalvanizing?
14.4 Was the guardrail connected to bridgerail, parapets or existing

guardrail as shown on the drawings?
Signature Date
2
14.1 Guardrail to bridgerail transition. 14.2 Guardrail to bridgerail transition.
14.3 Guardrail transition posts. 14.4 Guardrail transition post holes in concrete drain
trough take off.

14.5 Guardrail and posts with end treatment. 14.6 Guardrail and posts with end treatment.
14.7 Guardrail and posts with end treatment. 14.8 Installing guardrail to posts.

14.9 Post installation drilling.

NON-SKID POLYMER WEARING SURFACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
15.1 General....................................................................................................................... 15-1

15.2 Environmental Considerations................................................................................. 15-1
15.3 Safety Considerations............................................................................................... 15-1
15.4 Preliminary Work ....................................................................................................... 15-2
15.5 Surface Preparation .................................................................................................. 15-2
15.5.1 Crack Repairs and Deck Patching .................................................................. 15-2
15.6 Batching and Mixing of Polymer .............................................................................. 15-3
15.6.1 Static Mixer .................................................................................................... 15-3
15.6.2 Pre-measured Containers .............................................................................. 15-3
15.6.3 Application of Polymer Resin .......................................................................... 15-3
15.7 Weather ...................................................................................................................... 15-4
15.8 Sealing of Concrete Gutters (Polymer Membrane Only) ........................................ 15-4
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 15, Non-skid Polymer Wearing Surface
15.1 General
Resurfacing concrete bridge decks with a non-skid polymer wearing surface consists of repairs
to the bridge deck and the application of a thin, flexible, multi-layered polymer bound aggregate
surface. The purpose of this repair is to waterproof the deck, restore skid resistance and
reinstate a smooth riding surface.
 The Inspector must confirm that proper traffic control is in place prior to the start of the Work.
 The prepared surface must be clean, dry and free of foreign materials.
 Multiple layers of polymer are applied to seal the concrete deck.
 A broom and seed method of application is used to achieve the polymer-aggregate
composite.
 A fine aggregate is seeded onto the polymer to reduce the potential for shear failure caused
by differences in thermal expansion between the polymer and the concrete deck. This also
provides skid resistance, protects the membrane from UV damage and provides durability.
 Application conditions are important due to the sensitivity of the products.
 Prior to and during polymer application, no strong winds may exist.
 There must be adequate manpower to successfully complete a pour section without
interruption. Larger structures may require several pour sections.
Be aware of the following environmental considerations:
 Concrete chipped from partial and full depth repairs must not be allowed to fall into the
watercourse or roadway surface.
 Sandblasting operations must meet all environmental requirements.
 Excess seed aggregate and debris must not be blown into the water channel or the roadway
below.
 Before acceptance of the surface preparation and final payment, the Contractor must
remove and dispose of all waste material.
The Contractor must supply, install and maintain all necessary signing, flagging, flashing arrow
boards, traffic control lights, barricades, temporary medians and other warning or traffic control
devices as may be required for the safety of the public, inspection staff and Contractor’s
personnel.
 The traffic control plan must be submitted to the Consultant for review and comment two
weeks prior to the pre-construction meeting.
 The Inspector must confirm that proper traffic control is in place prior to work
commencement.
 The traffic control plan must be adjusted as necessary to accommodate the traffic
conditions.
 The Contractor is responsible for monitoring and maintaining the traffic control devices at all
times while traffic restrictions are in effect.
September 2015 15-1

15.4 Preliminary Work
The Contractor must submit a proposed schedule and work plan to the Consultant, which must
address the following:
 Crew size and number of working hours.

 Deck layout diagram, including dimensions, batch sizes and calculations.
 Traffic accommodation plan, when required.
 Equipment and material being used.
15.5 Surface Preparation
Proper surface preparation is important for adequate bond strength between the polymer
surface and deck concrete. Acceptability of the surface preparation must be determined by the
vertical axis pull test. This test consists of bonding a 64 mm diameter sandblasted steel disk to
the prepared substrate by using a fast-setting epoxy, then pulling it from the substrate by
applying a vertical pulling force. Substrate preparation will not be approved unless at least 75%
of the bonded steel disk surface has retained substrate concrete.
The deck surface must be prepared by shot blasting to remove all bond inhibitors, such as
concrete laitance, and to expose the coarse aggregate in the substrate concrete.
Those areas inaccessible to shot blasting, such as the vertical face of the concrete curb, must
be prepared by sandblasting.
The prepared areas must be re-blasted in the event of rain.
The deck is accepted as adequately dry when there is no evidence of moisture, as determined
by the “Plastic Window Test”. This is a condensation test that consists of sealing a sheet of
clear poly to the concrete with duct tape and checking to see if condensation occurs after a
period of hours.
15.5.1 Crack Repairs and Deck Patching
The limits of deck concrete removal must be determined by the Inspector and may vary from
simply sealing a crack to total removal and replacement of an area of deteriorated concrete.
Chain dragging and hammer sounding are used by the Inspector to determine the limits of
deteriorated concrete.
Concrete must be removed completely around any exposed reinforcing steel.
Exposed reinforcing steel must be sandblasted to a white metal finish.
All areas to be repaired must be clean and an approved bonding compound applied to the
concrete surface immediately prior to concrete placement.
Replacement concrete must be properly consolidated.
Sealer may require up to six hours of drying time before the first layer of polymer overlay may
be applied.
September 2015 15-2

Surface patching must be done with polymer mortar for depressions in excess of 6 mm deep.
The surface of the concrete must be shotblasted prior to patching. Aggregate must be placed to
produce a rough surface.
Full and partial depth repairs must be carried out in accordance with Section 20 of the Standard
Specifications for Bridge Construction.
15.6 Batching and Mixing of Polymer
The Contractor’s batching operation must be calibrated each day prior to any production.
Batching may be done either by static mixer or by premeasuring each polymer component in
calibrated pails.
15.6.1 Static Mixer
When calibrating by static mixing heads, the polymer components may be deposited into two
separate measuring containers, each equipped with marks for a given volume.
One of the material components is drawn from a disconnected feed upstream of the static-
mixing head while the other is drawn downstream of the pump.
The calibration is only approved if the quantities of each component drawn correspond to that of
the manufacturer’s recommendation.
The calibration must be repeated if the change in temperature of the polymer component
exceeds 50°C.
15.6.2 Pre-measured Containers
Calibration may also be achieved by measuring each polymer component using marked pails.
 Water is used to calibrate the measuring pails.

 The calibration required on the pails is marked with four screws.
The following points must be noted when batching the polymer for deck overlay:
 Fill polymer components to the permanent mark in the respective container.

 Pour polymer components into the first mixing pail and mix thoroughly according to the
manufacturer’s specified time.
 Transfer mixed polymer into second mixing pail for further mixing.
 Mixing time must not be less than three (3) minutes.
 Each component must be measured to an accuracy of +/- 3% and mixed batches must not
exceed 20 litres.
15.6.3 Application of Polymer Resin
The polymer must be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, otherwise
failures such as improper gelling of the polymer, poor bond or thermal incompatibility may occur.
It should also be noted that a change of deck temperature may cause out-gassing and in-
gassing, which results in undesirable “pinholes”.
September 2015 15-3

 To avoid out-gassing and in-gassing, application of the first layer must be done during
dropping deck temperatures.
 The polymer must be spread uniformly over the pre-measured areas using a squeegee and
obtaining the required depth. The use of spiked footwear will only be permitted prior to
gelling of the polymer.
 Spreading and levelling of fresh polymer must be completed within seven minutes of
batching.
 All cold joints must be offset 100 mm from cold joints of the previous layers.
 The first layer must extend up the concrete curb or parapet face as specified.
 The longitudinal joint must be overlapped 150 mm between the first half and the second half
of the overlay for each layer.
 Aggregate must be seeded uniformly into fresh polymer before gelling.
 All deficiencies must be satisfactorily repaired.
 After curing each seeded layer, the excess aggregate must be swept and collected into old
bagging for calculating of sufficient quantity of aggregate seeded.
 Application of each layer of the polymer must be done in accordance with the
manufacturer’s specification.
 Anchoring of overlay edges may be required for polymer wearing surfaces.
 Rough spots exceeding 3 mm in height must be ground to provide a smooth transition.
15.7 Weather
Polymer overlay work must be done in suitable weather conditions. Mixing and placing of
polymer must be done at ambient air temperatures between 5°C and 27°C.
15.8 Sealing of Concrete Gutters (Polymer Membrane Only)
Sealing of the concrete gutter is required where a paving lip is present. An approved epoxy
sealer must be applied to the concrete gutter in two applications.
 The concrete surface must be lightly sandblasted, cleaned and dried prior to sealing.
 The rate of the first application is 0.38 L/m2, while the second application is 0.16 L/m2.
September 2015 15-4

Section 15 – Non-Skid Polymer Wearing Surface Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Was chain drag and hammer sound testing done to locate and mark
delaminated areas?
Were areas surveyed for payment?
Was the deck surface dry prior to repair?
Were air, deck and polymer temperatures acceptable?
Was moisture of deck present?
Were cube specimens for compressive strength testing made?
Was a pull test for bond strength performed?
2 Installation
15.4 Were all patches consisting of Type NH patching materials cured for
14 days and tested for moisture in accordance with Section 15.7.3 of
the SSBC prior to the application of polymer overlay?
3 Crack Repair
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
15.5 Were all deck cracks more than 2 metres in length and greater than
0.3 mm wide treated with a Type 1c sealer meeting the current
Material Testing Specifications for Concrete Sealers (B388)?
4 Bridge Deck Repair

15.6 Were surface voids and depressions in excess of 6 mm patched by
the Contractor?
15.6 Did the Contractor make the necessary repairs?
15.6.1 Was the surface shotblasted and/or sandblasted in accordance with

Clause 15.7.1 of the SSBC prior to placement of the polymer mortar?
15.6.1 Were the areas to be patched primed with a 75 mm wide band of

liquid polymer along their perimeter while the liquid polymer primer
was liquid or tacky and to the original gradeline?
15.6.2 Was all concrete cured for 28 days and tested for moisture in
accordance with Clause 15.7.3 of the SSBC prior to the application of
polymer overlay?
15.6.3 Were all patches and levelling areas accepted by the Inspector prior to
commencing the overlay?
5 Polymer Construction
15.7 Did the Contractor obtain the Project Manager’s acceptance prior to
increasing the minimum polymer coverage requirements?
15.7.1 Did the Contractor properly prepare the surface prior to placement of
overlay?
15.7.1 Did any areas require re-blasting due to rain, delay in applying overlay
or leakage of contaminants onto the deck?
15.7.2 Did the Contractor submit a sketch to the Project Manager showing
the deck surface divided into segments to be covered by each
polymer batch?
15.7.2 Did the Contractor apply masking tape to the boundaries of the work
areas, as shown on the submitted sketches?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
15.7.3 Were weather conditions and temperatures suitable for mixing, placing
and curing of polymer overlay, and was the concrete substrate
completely dry?
15.7.4 Were the batching and mixing of the polymer done in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions?
15.7.4 Was the deck and adjacent areas protected from spillage of polymer,
solvents and other materials by the Contractor?
15.7.5 Was the polymer applied in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions and only after acceptance by the Inspector of the
prepared deck surface and completion of layout?
15.7.5 Did the Contractor spread the polymer uniformly over the
premeasured area using a squeegee and roller brush to carefully work
the polymer into the surface and obtain the required coverage?
15.7.6 Did the Contractor seed the first and second layer of polymer for Class
A and B wearing surfaces and the first layer for Class C wearing
surfaces?
15.7.6 Did the Contractor seed the basecoat layer when a Degussa Degadur
System (MMA) was used?
15.7.6 After acceptance by the Inspector of the previously placed cured

overlay, did the Contractor remove all excess aggregate prior to
placing a subsequent layer of polymer?
15.7.6 Did the Contractor do vertical pull out tests to confirm the adequacy of
the material when any layer of polymer material was subjected to rain
or any other form of damage?
15.7.6 Did the Contractor repair all bond test locations?
15.7.7 Did any areas of the bridge deck contain larger smoothness defects?
15.7.8 Did the Contractor, two (2) weeks prior to commencement of work,
conduct infrared and gas chromatography analysis (in accordance
with BT008) for each polymer component, compressive strength of the
polymer mortar, modulus elasticity of the polymer and grain size
analysis of the aggregate tests, and did he provide the results to the
Project Manager?
3
Compliance
Section
SSBC
15.7.8 During placement of the polymer, were samples of the mixed polymer
material randomly selected by the Inspector for compressive strength
testing in accordance with test method
ASTM C-109?
15.7.8 Did the Inspector determine the test location of each test, and did the
Contractor cast a set of three (3) cubes to the frequency of test listed
in the table in Section 15.7.8 of the SSBC?
15.7.9 Did the polymer overlay reach a minimum of 60% of the seven-day
compressive strength or 3.0 MPa of tensile strength achieved, based
on the last batch of the day, prior to opening to traffic?
Signature Date
4
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 15, Non-Skid Polymer Wearing Surface
Section 15 Non-skid Polymer Wearing Surface
15.1 Repair area for polymer wearing surface identified. 15.2 Sawcutting perimeter of deteriorated polymer
repair area.
15.3 Surface preparation completed by sandblasting. 15.4 Prepared surface with completed patch and
moisture contents confirmed.

15.5 Polymer component proportioning.
15.6 Polymer component mixing 15.7 1st polymer layer placement seeded with
aggregate.

15.8 2nd polymer layer placement seeded with 15.9 2nd seeded polymer layer trowelled to match
aggregate. existing polymer elevation.
15.10 Spray patching over polymer repairs to blend into 15.11 Rolling final spray patch areas.
existing chip seal coat.

BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
16.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 16-1

16.4 Surface Preparation ................................................................................................... 16-1
16.5 Application of Waterproofing Membrane ................................................................. 16-2
16.5.1 Tack Coating Deck Surface and Curbs........................................................... 16-2
16.5.2 Application of Reinforcing Fabric Material ...................................................... 16-2
16.5.3 Application of Rubber Membrane ................................................................... 16-3
16.5.4 Application of Waterproofing Membrane......................................................... 16-3
16.5.5 Installation of Protection Board ....................................................................... 16-3
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 16, Bridge Deck Waterproofing
16.1 General
A hot-applied rubberized membrane waterproofing system is applied to deck concrete prior to

the installation of the Asphalt Concrete Pavement (ACP) wearing surface. The waterproofing
system is used to prevent the ingress of chlorides into the deck concrete. If chlorides permeate
to the deck reinforcing steel, corrosion may occur, which can result in concrete delamination.
Significant rehabilitation and reduced deck life can result once the concrete has become
contaminated.
The Inspector must be aware of the environmental considerations:
 Environmental conditions must be dry to prevent rain from washing waterproofing materials
into a watercourse.
 Deck shotblast or sandblast spoil must not be allowed to enter into the stream or
surroundings.
The bridge deck waterproofing procedures requires the use of “hot” material and proper
protective equipment, including eye protection, must be worn. A fire extinguisher must be at the
melting/mixing kettle.
16.4 Surface Preparation
It is essential that the deck surface be adequately prepared prior to applying the waterproofing
system. Often, deck finishing and curing operations result in a surface that exhibits “dusting”.
Dusting is a chalky powder at the deck surface called ‘laitance’. The laitance is a weak paste
layer that breaks down easily. This condition is typically caused by finishing operations that
segregate the mix, resulting in bleeding and consequent weakening of the surface. If the
concrete surface is damaged by excessive quantities of water, then this weak surface can be
5 mm or more in depth.
All laitance must be removed by sandblasting or shotblasting the concrete surfaces to be

waterproofed. The extent of blasting must be closely monitored by the Contractor and the
Inspector. Too light of a blast will result in the incomplete removal of the laitance layer, while too
heavy of a blast will remove the entire paste layer and expose the aggregate in the concrete. It
is important that the paste layer not be entirely removed since an exposed aggregate texture is
more permeable and more prone to future contamination.
It is very important that all sand and debris be removed from the blasted surface before the
application of the tack coating. The Contractor must schedule the blasting and tack coating
operations so that there are no delays between these operations and consequently minimal
likelihood of contamination before tacking.
It is also important that the concrete substrate be dry before blasting and tacking. Concrete and
concrete patches must be allowed to cure and dry to prevent free water from becoming trapped
under the waterproofing membrane. Often, the concrete will appear to be dry, but it still may
contain a large volume of free water due to its early age or due to rainfall.
September 2015 16-1

To determine if the concrete is off-gassing water vapour, the Inspector may perform a
condensation test (“Plastic Window Test”) that consists of sealing a sheet of clear poly to the
concrete with duct tape and checking to see if condensation occurs after a period of hours. The
Inspector must approve the surface preparation prior to the application of the tack coat by the
Contractor.
16.5 Application of Waterproofing Membrane
The Inspector must review in detail the Standard Drawing S-1443 for the criteria and
requirements necessary for applying the waterproofing system.
16.5.1 Tack Coating Deck Surface and Curbs
The Inspector must carefully monitor the application of the tack coat.
The Inspector must confirm that the material supplied is compatible with the proposed
waterproofing membrane material, as confirmed by the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The tack coat material must be properly diluted. The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor
has properly measured the volume of the tack coat material and the thinner.
The tack coat material must be applied at the specified rate. The Inspector must confirm that the
Contractor’s methods allow the volume per area to be accurately measured. The Inspector must
pay particular attention to the application rate at the start of the operation.
The Inspector must confirm that no equipment or materials may travel or be stored on the
tacked surface until it is fully cured. Curing guidelines can be obtained from the manufacturer. A
cured surface is not tacky and typically has changed in colour from a dull black to a dull brown.
The tack coat must be applied to all locations that receive hot applied membrane, including the
vertical curb face for the full height of the ACP.
The tack coat may be applied by either brushing or spraying, but brush application is advisable
for the curb face to avoid overspray.
All areas, other than where tack coat is to be applied, must be protected from overspray or
brushing operations.
16.5.2 Application of Reinforcing Fabric Material
It is necessary to install reinforcing fabric at all locations where construction joints, cracks,
patches, lift hook pockets and post-tensioning grout tubes exist.
The Inspector must identify all locations that require reinforcing fabric. This must be done before
the tack coat is applied. Of particular importance is the location of cracks. Cracks typically occur
in the transverse direction, at regular intervals. Cracks may be difficult to detect visually. The
Inspector must inspect the deck for cracks immediately after the curing filter fabric is removed.
As the deck surface dries, the cracks will become more visible. The crack locations must be
mapped and sketched, and reference marks made at the adjacent barriers. The cracks must be
marked so that they can be located after the tack coat is applied.
The Inspector must confirm that the material supplied meets the specified requirements.
September 2015 16-2

16.5.3 Application of Rubber Membrane
At the faces of curbs, barriers and medians, a rubber membrane is placed at the gutter. The
membrane provides additional protection at this vulnerable location where construction joints
exist. The material is supplied in rolls.
The Inspector must confirm that the supplied material meets the referenced standards.
The specification requires that the rubber membrane be lapped when multiple strips are used.
The rubber membrane strip is embedded in the hot asphalt membrane such that it extends
50 mm up on the vertical face and 100 mm on the deck surface.
16.5.4 Application of Waterproofing Membrane
The membrane materials are supplied as solid cakes or bricks. A heating and mixing kettle is
used to prepare the material. The material resides in the kettle until it is drawn for immediate
use. The kettle must properly agitate the material and maintain its temperature. The Inspector
must confirm that the Contractor’s equipment meets the specified requirements through the
entire duration of the operation.
The Inspector must confirm that the material supplied meets the referenced standards.
The waterproofing membrane must be placed after the tack coat has cured. The Contractor
must plan to do the waterproofing membrane application continuously and complete it in a
single operation with no cold laps.
Waterproofing membrane material is also used to secure the reinforcing fabric material and
rubber membrane, at the locations described above. The installation of the reinforcing fabric
material and the rubber membrane is done for the entire deck surface concurrently with the
application of the waterproofing membrane and protection board placement.
Waterproofing membrane material is transported in pails from the kettle to the deck surface and
is spread using a rubber-tipped floor squeegee. The working time for the waterproofing
membrane material is limited, and it is important that the Contractor checks the thickness of the
material immediately after it is placed and before the protection boards are placed. The
Inspector must continuously and systematically check the waterproofing membrane thickness
using a device such as a tire tread thickness gauge or a calibrated probe.
The Inspector must confirm that wick drain pipes are flush with the deck and that the wick drains
have been installed along the full lengths of the gutters when the asphalt membrane is still hot
and tacky.
16.5.5 Installation of Protection Board
The protection board serves the following functions:
 It protects the waterproofing membrane from the heat of the ACP as it is being placed.
 It protects the waterproofing membrane from the abrasive action of the course aggregate in
the ACP, both during placement and in service.
 It protects the waterproofing membrane from equipment used during ACP placement.
 Through proper lapping, it prevents water from coming into direct contact with the
waterproofing membrane.
September 2015 16-3

The Inspector must carefully and continuously monitor the installation of the protection board as
follows:
 The Inspector must confirm that the material supplied meets the referenced standards.
 The boards must be placed onto the waterproofing membrane before it loses its initial
tackiness, with the length of the board running transversely to the deck.
 Subsequent rows of protection boards must be placed with the longitudinal joints staggered
and all joints lapped according to specifications, starting at the low end of the bridge. The
direction of laps must produce a shingling effect. This will prevent water from becoming
trapped under or against the edges of the board, which can result in the premature
deterioration of ACP surfacing.
 The boards must be cut to fit within 6 mm of the curb and wick drains, and boards must
overlap by 25 mm. Excessive laps may result in boards curling or becoming damaged prior
to the placement of ACP surfacing. The Inspector must use a measuring jig to easily and
rapidly check lap dimensions.
 For decks with medians, it is necessary to place waterproofing membrane under the median
concrete.
 It is important to schedule ACP placement immediately after waterproofing to avoid potential
deterioration of the protection board.
September 2015 16-4

Section 16 – Bridge Deck Waterproofing Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 Pre-Activity Inspection: Materials and Equipment

Was the Contractor’s submittal documentation for materials reviewed?
Were the products supplied identifiable and identical to those

reviewed?
16.2 Did tack coat primer meet the requirements of CGSB-37-GP-9MA?
16.2 Were asphalt membrane cakes supplied in sealed packages labelled

by the manufacturer?
16.2 Did asphalt membrane materials meet the requirements of MTO

Specification OPSS 1213?
16.2 Did rubber membrane consist of either butyl rubber or EPDM rubber
that met the requirements of CGSB-37.52M and had a thickness of
1.2 mm?
16.2 Was asphalt membrane reinforcing fabric supplied in widths of
300 mm?
16.2 Did the material consist of a spun bonded sheet structure composed
of 100% continuous filament polyester fibres bonded together at their
crossover points?
\ 16.2 Did wick drains have dimensions of 3.6 mm total thickness and
100 mm width?
16.2 Was puncture strength of wick drain material 45 N in accordance with

ASTM D4833?
16.2 Did waterproofing protection board meet MTO Specification

OPSS 1215?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
16.3 Was the kettle a double boiler oil-transfer type with a built-in agitator
and built-in dial thermometer?
16.3 Was a separate and calibrated thermometer with an accuracy of +/-

2°C provided by the Contractor to verify the kettle thermometer
accuracy?
16.4 Did the Contractor provide a weighted linoleum or lawn type roller for
use during placement of protection board?
16.2, Were the supplied protection boards durable and free of distortion,
16.4 warping or other damage?
2 Pre-Activity Inspection: Deck Condition

16.4 Was the air and concrete deck surface temperature 5°C or higher?
16.4 Were P/T grout tubes cut flush with the deck surface?
16.4 For a new surface, was the concrete cured for at least 14 days and
exposed to drying conditions for three (3) additional days?
16.4 Was the concrete ‘dry’ immediately prior to application of tack coat, as
confirmed by condensation test?
16.4 Was a localized heat source that may be damaging used for drying?
16.4 For a new surface, did sandblasting or shotblasting result in a

uniformly sound, laitance and dust-free surface?
16.4 At the start of the operation, was the intensity of blasting

demonstrated effective without exposing concrete aggregate?
16.4 Was all sand, dust, dirt and other debris effectively removed by
vacuuming, air blasting, pressure washing or other means?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
16.4 Immediately prior to the application of tack coat primer, was the entire
surface air blasted using oil and water-free compressed air?
16.4 Did the surface preparation also meet the tack coat primer
16.4 For a rehabilitated surface, was the concrete cured for at least
seven (7) days and exposed to drying conditions for three (3)
additional days?
16.4 For a rehabilitated surface, did grinding, scabbling or bush hammering

result in a surface texture profile with a 3 mm amplitude?
3 Placement Inspection
16.4 Did the Contractor provide 48 hours advance notice to the Project
Manager or Inspector prior to commencing operations?
16.4 Was the tack coat primer cut back with an equal volume of gasoline or
an alternative product? If an alternative product, was it accepted by
16.4 Was the tack coat primer consistently applied at a rate of

approximately 0.25 L/m sq, as measured by the Contractor?
16.4 Was the tack coat primer absorbed into the concrete, as evidenced by
a dull black appearance, or was it over-applied, resulting in a shiny
appearance?
16.4 Did the Contractor protect the work by preventing equipment and
materials from being placed onto the tacked surface until it was fully
cured and tack free as defined by the manufacturer’s
recommendations?
16.4 Was a separate and calibrated thermometer with an accuracy of +/-
2°C provided by the Contractor to verify the kettle thermometer
accuracy?
16.4 Was asphalt membrane prepared in the heating and mixing kettle to a
temperature not exceeding that recommended by the asphalt
membrane manufacturer?
3
Compliance
Section
SSBC
16.4 Was the tack coat primer fully cured prior to placing asphalt
membrane as determined by the manufacturer’s recommendations?
16.4 Was the asphalt membrane within the range of temperature

recommended by the manufacturer at the time of placement?
16.4 Was it free flowing and free of clumps?
16.4 Was the final in-place thickness of the asphalt membrane within 4 mm
to 6 mm, except at those locations where membrane reinforcing fabric
or rubber membrane were placed?
16.4 Was the asphalt membrane placed in a continuous manner, and

where cold joints were unavoidable, was hot membrane lapped over
cold membrane by a minimum width of 150 mm and a thickness of
2 mm to 3 mm?
16.4 Did the Contractor identify and mark all cracks that exceeded 0.2 mm
in width, all construction joints, all P/T grout tubes, all lift hook pockets
and all patches?
16.4 Was asphalt membrane placed to a thickness of 3 mm to 4 mm and

200 mm beyond these discontinuities?
16.4 Were strips of membrane reinforcing fabric placed onto hot and tacky
membrane for 150 mm beyond these discontinuities?
16.4 Was membrane reinforcing fabric lapped for a minimum of 100 mm?
16.4 Was the membrane reinforcing fabric covered by a thickness of 2 mm

to 3 mm of asphalt membrane?
16.4 Was asphalt membrane placed vertically to the thickness of ACP and
by 150 mm beyond the vertical face, for a depth of 3 mm to 4 mm
along all curbs, barrier walls and deck drains?
16.4 Was a rubber membrane placed onto hot and tacky membrane for
50 mm at the vertical face and by 100 mm beyond the vertical face?
4
Compliance
Section
SSBC
16.4 Was a rubber membrane lapped for a minimum of 100 mm?
16.4 Was a rubber membrane covered by a thickness of 2 mm to 3 mm of

asphalt membrane?
16.4 Did the application of the continuous asphalt membrane extend over
all areas, including locations where membrane reinforcing fabric or
rubber membrane were placed?
16.4 Were wick drains installed along the full length of gutters onto hot and
tacky asphalt membrane?
16.4 Were deck drains and wick drain tubes free of obstruction from
asphalt membrane or protection board?
16.4 Were protection boards placed onto hot and tacky asphalt membrane?
16.4 Were protection boards placed with the length of the boards in the
transverse direction?
16.4 Were protection board lapped between 12 mm and 25 mm?
16.4 Were laps shingled in both the longitudinal and transverse directions?
16.4 Were longitudinal joints staggered by 150 mm minimum?
16.4 Were protection boards placed 5 mm shy of all wick drains, vertical
faces of expansion joints and vertical faces of drains?
16.4 Were protection boards secured using a weighted roller?
5
Compliance
Section
SSBC
16.4 Were all boards secured to the asphalt membrane?
16.4 Where protection board edges had curled, were these areas
adequately cemented into position using additional asphalt
membrane?
16.4 When rain occurred after protection board placement but before ACP
placement, were measures taken to prevent water from ponding on
the protection boards at the bridge ends?
Signature Date
6
16.1 Deck surface preparation by shot-blasting. 16.2 Deck surface preparation by shot-blasting.
16.3 Surface preparation by shot-blasting. 16.4 Waterproofing equipment and materials. Heating
and mixing kettle on site. Workers unloading
protection board.

16.5 Tack coat on deck surface. Tack has changed from 16.6 Asphalt membrane heating in kettle.
a dull black to a dull brown, indicating the tack coat
has cured and is ready for the next stage.
16.7 Wick drain placement along edges of barriers. 16.8 Membrane reinforcing fabric placed along
Wick drains are installed over the asphalt construction joint.
membrane while it is still tacky. Protection boards
are not placed over wick drains.

16.9 Asphalt membrane is poured from a pail and 16.10 Protection board placed immediately after asphalt
spread with a rubber squeegee. membrane has been placed.
16.11 Protection board is rolled with a water-filled garden 16.12 Waterproofing complete. Clean up of sand and
roller before membrane cools. debris from protection board required before tack
coat for ACP. Joints and laps in protection boards
shown.

ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
17.1 General ..................................................................................................................... 17-1

17.2 Environmental Considerations ............................................................................... 17-1
17.3 Safety Considerations ............................................................................................. 17-1
17.4 Materials................................................................................................................... 17-1
17.5 Quality Control Testing ........................................................................................... 17-2
17.6 Equipment ................................................................................................................ 17-2
17.7 Spreading and Compaction .................................................................................... 17-2
17.8 Defects ..................................................................................................................... 17-5
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 17, Asphalt Concrete Pavement
17.1 General
Asphalt Concrete Pavement (ACP) is placed as a wearing surface onto bridge decks, roof and
approach slabs, and roadway transitions. Special requirements exist for ACP placement that are
unique to bridge construction and may not be followed in normal road paving practice. When
properly designed, mixed, placed and compacted, ACP provides a durable and smooth bridge
surfacing.
ACP for bridges is hot mix asphalt concrete produced by heating the asphalt binder to decrease
its viscosity and drying the aggregate to remove moisture prior to mixing.
Mixing is done at high temperature, and the placing and compaction must be done while the mix
is still hot. The time from mixing to placement, as well as environmental factors such as wind
and cool weather, will affect the ability to properly compact ACP.
ACP is normally placed in two courses (mats or lifts). The lower course is purposely compacted
at a cooler temperature so that the waterproofing membrane is not damaged. When the
pavement has reached the end of its service life, only the top lift is milled and replaced while the
bottom lift remains in place.
 Before final acceptance of the ACP on a bridge, the Contractor is required to remove all
excess material, clean up and restore the site to its original state.
 All oversprayed tack coat must be satisfactory removed and cleaned.
 Asphalt materials must not be wasted into stream or adjacent embankments.
The following safety considerations exist during paving operations:
 ACP is hot when placed and protective clothing, including gloves and eye protection, needs
to be worn when working near ACP.
 Heavy equipment, including trucks and rollers, is dangerous due to its speed and congestion
on the deck. Take care when working around heavy equipment, especially when equipment
is being operated in reverse direction.
17.4 Materials
The material requirements for the supply of asphalt cement, aggregates and tack coat are
specified in the Standard Specifications for Highway Construction. This specification contains
references to other internal Department documents, such as test methods, procedures and the
products list. This specification also references AASHTO requirements. These referenced
documents include requirements for recycled ACP, asphalt grades and mix design.
Two different asphalt mix types exist for bridges. Type H2 is specified for bridges with a higher
volume of traffic, while Type M1 is specified for lower volume highways and local roads. The
asphalt cement grade for Type H2 is superior to that of Type M1. Prior to any placement, the
Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager that the Contractor’s material submissions are
complete and are acceptable.
September 2015 17-1

17.5 Quality Control Testing
Quality control testing is required for projects that exceed a specified volume of production.
Quality control and testing is done by the Contractor. It is necessary that testing be performed
only by a qualified supplier’s laboratory or a qualified independent laboratory licensed to
practice in Alberta.
Since performance grades of asphalt are used in ACP, the Contractor is required to submit a
Quality Control Plan for bridge ACP that is jointly prepared with his supplier. Prior to any hot mix
production, the Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager that the Contractor’s Quality
Control Plan is complete and acceptable. The Inspector must also confirm with the Project
Manager that the supplier’s initial compliance testing results are acceptable prior to any ACP
placement.
The asphalt plant must be properly calibrated to produce a uniform mixture in accordance with
the job mix formula. Prior to any ACP production, the Inspector must confirm with the Project
Manager that the supplier’s certification of calibration has been received.
Certain tests are required from the Contractor at the Consultant’s discretion. Some tests are
required at the time of construction, and the need is determined by the Inspector and the Project
Manager. These include cores for density, pavement segregation and pavement smoothness.
The Inspector must be aware of the situations that will result in the need for additional testing,
and must be knowledgeable in the test methods. The ATT test methods specified are available
on the Department’s website.
Normally, the Consultant will use Quality Assurance (QA) testing to determine the asphalt
content and the aggregate gradation for conformance requirements. The Inspector must discuss
this requirement with the Project Manager and collect the necessary samples during the ACP
placement.
17.6 Equipment
The equipment and methods used by the Contractor are subject to the acceptance of the
Consultant. If the Inspector has concerns regarding the suitability of equipment or methods prior
to the start of placement, he must discuss these with the Project Manager.
The Inspector must also be aware of equipment limitations during placement, including:
 Insufficient compaction equipment to match placing rate.

 Dirty or leaky truck boxes, and truck boxes without tarps.
 Inadequate compaction effort, especially for smaller self-powered rollers and walk-behind
tampers used to compact the ACP at gutters and paving lips.
17.7 Spreading and Compaction
The Inspector must be present at all times during the spreading, placement and compaction
operations. The lower lift of ACP, if defective, is very difficult to remove and replace due to the
existence of the waterproofing membrane and protection board. It is essential that the
Contractor and his supplier be knowledgeable of the specified requirements. The Inspector must
conduct a pre-activity meeting with the Contractor and his supplier to discuss the following:
September 2015 17-2

 Understanding of project specifications, especially those requirements for ACP that are
unique to bridges.
 Suitability of proposed equipment, particularly the number of haul trucks, pavers and
compaction equipment.
 Concerns due to weather, especially related to compaction in cooler temperatures.
 Location of longitudinal joints.
 Final acceptance criteria and consequences for not meeting this criteria, especially with
regard to smoothness and segregation.
During the spreading and compaction operations, the Inspector must consider the following
requirements:
 Paving of the bridge deck must commence within seven days of waterproofing completion,
or in the event of inclement weather as determined by the Inspector.
 Tack coat must not be applied during conditions that are cooler than specified, or when
moisture exists under the waterproofing protection boards. The corners of protection boards
can be lifted to check for moisture because condensation and rainwater can frequently
become trapped under the laps of the board. These areas must be dried before tacking may
begin. The Inspector must confirm that the correct tack coat product is used, and that the
surfaces to be tacked are clean, dry and of adequate temperature. Paving must begin as
soon as practical after tacking, and damage to the freshly tacked surface must be
prevented.
 Care must be taken to prevent tacking over wick drains. Care must also be taken in
protecting curb faces from overspray of tack. Drains and curb faces are commonly protected
with tape and sheets of polyethelene.
 ACP delivery trucks must be able to supply materials at an acceptable rate. Delays or
disruptions to delivery may cause delays in placement and compaction, which may result in
cooling of the mix below the specified limits.
 ACP delivery trucks must be cleaned of foreign materials and hardened asphalt mixture.
Boxes and tools must not be cleaned or lubricated with diesel fuel or detergent since this
may damage the ACP mix. The Inspector must inspect truck boxes as the ACP is being
discharged.
 The self-propelled, rubber-tired paving machine screed needs to be capable of placing a
constant lift of ACP of adequate width to minimize the number of longitudinal joints. The
paving machine must have an automatic screed or strike-off system to produce the
designed cross-section and profile. The contractor must continuously probe the depth of the
mix as it leaves the screed.
 Compaction needs to follow closely behind placement with no unnecessary delays since
delays will allow the mix to cool, and consequently compaction will become more difficult to
achieve. The main areas of the deck are compacted by self-propelled rollers. The areas
adjacent to the gutters and paving lips are normally compacted using smaller self-propelled
rollers or heavy hand-operated vibratory plate tampers. The Inspector must confirm that the
Contractor supplies self-propelled rollers that are capable of compacting the ACP
immediately adjacent to curbs and barriers; many rollers have drums that cannot compact
against vertical objects because their frame or roller yoke projects beyond the edge of the
roller itself. Deterioration of the ACP at gutters and paving lips is common because water
tends to pond at gutters and there is a transition from ACP to concrete at paving lips. It is
very important that proper compaction of ACP is done at the paving lip transition and over
the gutter wick drain. The Inspector must pay particular attention to these locations. The
Contractor will need multiple self-propelled rollers and plate tampers to efficiently compact
the mix at all locations.
September 2015 17-3

 A control strip must be established to monitor the compaction process. One control strip is
required for each lift of ACP. The Inspector must confirm that the roller(s) have been
ballasted to their maximum weight capacity, which is a minimum of 10 tonnes. The Inspector
must be diligent in confirming that the density for the first strip of the bottom lift has been
achieved. If density requirements are not achieved, the Inspector must require corrections to
the Contractor’s methods or equipment.
 The bottom lift of ACP must be carefully placed to avoid damage to the waterproofing
membrane or protection board. The paver and trucks must travel only in the direction of the
protection board laps and must avoid turning while travelling. No dumping of material ahead
of the paver is permitted; material may only be dumped directly into the paver hopper. The
Inspector must carefully monitor the protection board for signs of movement and must
require changes to the Contractor’s methods if distress to the waterproofing system is
observed.
 The proper temperature of the mix is critical to achieve the specified density and texture.
The bottom lift is compacted at a cooler temperature so as to protect the waterproofing
membrane, and consequently the required density of the bottom lift is lower than the top lift.
It is important that delivery trucks are staged so that the time between mixing and dumping
is minimized. To maintain the required temperature of the mix, the truck boxes must keep
their tarps in place while parked at site until they are required to discharge. The Inspector
must check the temperature of the mix of each load as it is being discharged into the
hopper. Care must be taken to record the internal temperature of the load and not the outer
surfaces, which may provide an inaccurate cooler reading. The temperature of the mix must
also be checked and recorded at the screed and during compaction.
 The Inspector must calculate the distance from the curb to the wheel paths in advance of
paving so that he can quickly verify at the time of paving that the longitudinal joints will not
coincide with the wheel paths. The exact location of joints must be determined before paving
begins. All longitudinal joints must be carefully sealed. The Inspector must pay particular
attention to this detail for the top mat because pavement deterioration is common at poorly
constructed joints.
 The top lift is normally placed on the same day as the lower lift and as soon as the lower lift
has sufficiently cooled. The tack coat on the first lift of ACP must be applied and cured prior
to placement of the top lift. Placement of the top lift must be delayed by the Inspector after
consultation with the Project Manager if the Contractor’s equipment or methods have proven
to be ineffective and not immediately correctable.
 Following the placement of the first strip of the bottom lift, the Inspector must carefully
examine the surface for open texturing and segregation. If these exist, the Inspector must
immediately discuss with the Contractor his plans for improvement. The Contractor’s
successful completion of the first lift will demonstrate his ability to achieve a final product
that meets the specified requirements. Following the placement of the top lift, the Contractor
must perform smoothness testing, which is monitored by the Inspector.
 All ACP must be protected from damage due to solvents. Paving tools and truck boxes must
not be washed with diesel or other solvents while on the freshly placed ACP. Curbs and
barriers must be finished and silaned prior to paving, or else the pavement must be
adequately protected from overspray from silane application. Silane must not be allowed to
drip down the face of curb or barrier onto the pavement.
September 2015 17-4

17.8 Defects
The Contractor must perform straight-edge testing checks on the finished product. The
Inspector must also perform spot checks using a straight-edge similar to the Contractor’s. The
smoothness of the bottom lift will provide an indication of the potential smoothness achievable
by the Contractor for the upper lift. The Inspector must check the bottom lift and advise the
Contractor of any necessary corrections to the paving process. The compaction effort must
continue until no further tire or roller marks are visible.
Segregation is defined as an area greater than 0.1 m2 where the texture differs visibly from the
texture of the surrounding pavement. Areas smaller than 0.1 m2 are called defects. Segregation
is classified into degrees of severity and described by the Department’s Paving Guidelines and
Segregation manual. Classifications can be slight, moderate and severe. The Inspector must
make sure that the Contractor understands the definition of segregation and its consequences.
If the compaction effort for the top lift of ACP is not achieving the specified densities, the
compaction effort must continue unless the mix has cooled to a temperature where further
densification is unachievable. In this instance, coring may be required to determine the in-place
densities. The Inspector must discuss the circumstances with the Project Manager and advise
the Contractor of the locations and frequency of coring.
September 2015 17-5

Section 17 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement Check Sheets
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Was the equipment and manpower of the Contractor recorded?
Were asphalt temperatures and samples taken during paving

operations?
Was the longitudinal smoothness of the surface checked?
Was the surface texture (e.g., segregation, roughness and porous

areas) monitored?
Was cross fall for drainage checked?
Was the ACP volume and tonnage that was placed calculated and
recorded?
Was the longitudinal sawcut and excess removal of ACP, where

required, inspected?
For projects where transition ACP was required, did the Contractor
cold-mill to achieve a 40 mm minimum thickness of ACP?
Was the joint between the existing ACP and the new transition ACP
sawcut a minimum of 40 mm across the full width of roadway?
2 Materials
17.2 Was the asphalt cement and aggregate supplied in accordance with
Sections 3.50.2.1 and 3.50.2.2 of the Standard Specifications for
Highway Construction?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
17.2 Was the liquid asphalt applied as a tack coat to ensure a bond
between the surface being paved and the subsequent course?
17.2 Did the tack coat consist of SS-1 or RC 30/70?
17.2 If SS-1 was used, was it diluted with an equal volume of water?
17.2 Did the tack coat materials conform to the Specifications listed in
Tables ASPH6 and ASPH7 of Specification 5.7 of the Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction?
17.3 Did the Contractor prepare and submit asphalt mix designs in
accordance with Section 3.50.3 Asphalt Mix Design and Job Mix
Formula of the Standard Specifications for Highway Construction?
17.4 Was QA testing completed on two (2) 6 kg samples per lift to

determine the uncorrected asphalt content and aggregate gradation,
using the Contractor’s measured correction factor to establish the
actual asphalt content?
17.4 Was the actual asphalt content determined by test method ATT-12 or
ATT-74 and did it include the correction factor for asphalt binder lost
due to absorption by the aggregate or aggregate loss?
17.5 Was QA testing done on projects with 50 tonnes of ACP or more?
17.5 Were the results received within seven (7) days of test completion?
17.5 Did the Contractor produce crushed aggregates in accordance with

Specification 3.2 Aggregate Production and Stockpiling for
Designation 1 aggregate and requirements listed in Section 3.50.3.2
Design Requirements of the Standard Specifications for Highway
Construction?
17.5 Were test methods and minimum frequencies of testing in
accordance with requirements shown in Table 17.5 Quality Control
Testing Requirements?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
3 Equipment and Methods

17.6.1 Was the equipment and methods used adequate to place and
compact the material as specified, and was it acceptable?
17.6.2 Did the asphalt mixing plant used by the Contractor conform to the
requirements of Section 3.50.5.1.2 of the Standard Specifications for
Highway Construction?
17.6.2 Did the Contractor provide a certificate of calibration certifying that

the plant had been calibrated to produce a uniform mixture in
accordance with the Job Mix Formula?
17.6.3 Was the mixture transported to the worksite in trucks with smooth
metal boxes in good and leak proof condition, previously cleaned of
all foreign materials or hardened asphalt concrete mixture?
17.6.3 Was prevention taken so that truck box lubricants, such as detergent
or lime solutions, did not contaminate the mix?
17.6.4 Did pavers maintain required levels, cross-falls and joint matching?
17.6.5 Was there sufficient self-propelled equipment to obtain the required

degree of compaction of the asphalt concrete mixture?
17.6.5 Was the compaction equipment operating such that uniform and
complete compaction was obtained throughout the entire width, depth
and length of the pavement being constructed?
17.6.5 Were rollers configured to ensure uniform and complete compaction

up to the face of barriers, curbs and medians, and did they leave a
smooth, properly finished surface, true to grade and cross-section
without ruts or other irregularities?
17.6.5 Was a minimum of one (1) rubber tired roller and one (1) smooth
steel drum type roller provided?
4 Construction
17.7.1 Was the asphalt temperature maintained within ± 10°C of that
specified?
17.7.2 Was the asphalt mixture produced in accordance with Section

3.50.5.1.3 Mix Production of the Standard Specifications for Highway
Construction?
3
Compliance
Section
SSBC
17.7.3 Were all bridge components protected to prevent splatter or staining

from asphaltic materials?
17.7.4 Was asphalt tack coat applied at the locations and to the dimensions
designated by the Inspector?
17.7.4 Were surfaces to be tacked dry and free of loose or deleterious

material when the tack was applied?
17.7.4 Was the asphalt tack coat applied in a uniform manner at an

application rate of 0.5 ℓ/m2 and at the asphalt temperature
designated by the Inspector?
17.7.4 Was the ambient air temperature at the time of application 5°C or
higher?
17.7.4 Where traffic accommodation was required, was the surface tacked
in two operations?
17.7.4 Did the Contractor retack all areas on which the tack was damaged
by traffic?
17.7.5.2 Was the mix temperature during spreading, sufficient for the specified
compaction and finishing at the final placement area?
17.7.5.2 Were the longitudinal and transverse edges of each lane straight in
alignment, uniform and of the same thickness as the adjoining
pavement layer?
17.7.5.2 Was each layer placed, finished and compacted for the full width, and
then allowed to cool down to 50°C or colder prior to commencing the
subsequent layer?
17.7.5.2 Was longitudinal joints in the successive lifts not less than 0.30 m?
17.7.5.2 Was the longitudinal joint of the final lift of asphalt concrete pavement
not located within the wheel path areas?
17.7.5.2 Was any evidence of surface segregation exhibited?
4
Compliance
Section
SSBC
17.7.5.2 Was the compaction monitored using a Control Strip Method?
17.7.5.2 Following the initial pass of the breakdown roller, were moisture and
density measurements for determining the Control Density taken at
five (5) locations within the Control Strip area and continued following
repeated passes of the compaction equipment until the apparent
maximum density was attained by the Contractor using nuclear
testing equipment?
17.7.5.2 Was compaction of the pavement to a minimum average density of
97% of Marshall density with no individual density less than 95%?
17.7.5.2 After compaction was achieved, were cores of the top lift taken for
testing?
17.7.5.2 Were the results provided to the Project Manager?
17.7.5.2 Were core holes completely de-watered and dried?
17.7.5.2 Was a generous application of liquid asphalt applied to the bottom

and sides of the core hole and allowed to cure?
17.7.5.2 Was asphalt mix tamped in lifts into the core hole until flush with the
surface of the surrounding pavement?
17.7.5.4 Was the ACP wearing surface for Hot-Applied Rubberized Asphalt
Waterproofing Membrane System Paving placed and compacted in
two nominal 40 mm lifts?
17.7.5.4 Was the first lift of ACP spread by the asphalt paver in the direction of
the protection board laps (downhill)?
17.7.5.4 If not carried out in the direction of the protection board laps, did the
Contractor submit a procedure for review identifying measures that
were taken to ensure that the protection board and waterproofing
membrane was not damaged during paving?
17.7.5.4 Was the allowable temperature range for compaction of ACP lifts on
the hot-rubberized asphalt waterproofing membrane system as per
the Table in Section 17.7.5.4 of the SSBC?
5
Compliance
Section
SSBC
17.7.5.4 Was the minimum average Marshall density of the first lift 95%, with
no individual test less than 93%?
17.7.5.4 Was the minimum average Marshall density of the second lift 97%,
with no individual density less than 95%?
17.7.5.5 Was the ACP wearing surface placed in one lift of 50 mm nominal
thickness on top of a polymer waterproofing membrane?
Note: Dumping of the asphalt mixture onto the polymer waterproofing
membrane ahead of the paver will not be permitted.
17.7.5.5 Was the temperature of the asphalt mixture between 123°C and
138°C at the start of compaction?
17.7.5.6 Was ACP placed on transition or approach roads, as shown on the

drawings and in lifts not exceeding 70 mm?
17.7.5.6 Was the temperature of the asphalt mixture between 123°C and
138°C at the start of compaction?
17.7.6.1 Was the surface checked for smoothness using a 3 m long

straightedge, resulting in no gaps greater than 3 mm, done by the
Contractor immediately after the final rolling?
17.7.6.1 Were any final lift pavement surfaces not meeting the smoothness
requirements repaired by the Contractor?
17.7.6.2 Did the Contractor make every effort to achieve a finished surface
that has a uniform closed texture and free of segregated areas?
17.7.6.2 If segregation was present, did the Contractor take immediate

corrective action to the paving process to prevent any further
occurrence of segregation?
17.7.6.2 Did the Contractor repair segregated areas of all severities following
the procedure outlined in Section 17.7.6.2 of the SSBC?
17.7.6.3 Did the Contactor repair any obvious defects promptly and in an
acceptable manner?
17.7.6.4 Was the average asphalt content in the top lift material not greater
than ± 0.50% from the accepted mix design asphalt content?
6
Compliance
Section
SSBC
17.7.6.4 Was the average asphalt content in the bottom lift material not
greater than ± 0.65% from the accepted mix design asphalt content?
17.7.6.5 Was a check done to make sure that the difference between the
average gradation and the Job Mix Formula gradation did not exceed
the amounts shown in Table 17.6 Aggregate Gradation Variation of
the SSBC?
Signature Date
7
17.1 Protection of deck drain and barriers prior to tack 17.2 Application of tack coat by hand sprayer.
coat and ACP placement.
17.3 Application of tack coat by spray truck. 17.4 Wick drain and barriers protected from tack spray.
Plastic strip placed over wick drain, and barriers
covered with poly during spraying of tack coat.

17.5 Placing first lift of ACP. Small smooth drum roller 17.6 Large smooth drum and rubber tired rollers used to
following as soon as practical. compact ACP.
17.7 Control strip method used to determine maximum 17.8 Longitudinal joint shown. Compaction equipment
density. Location for nuclear densometer marked must be capable of travelling immediately adjacent
for consistent testing. to curbs, barriers and median as required.

17.9 Unacceptable, uneven longitudinal joint. 17.10 Unacceptable segregation near barrier face.
17.11 Cracking at approach slab transition. 17.12 Unacceptable segregation in travel lanes.

CSP AND SPCSP STRUCTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
18.1 General ..................................................................................................................... 18-1

18.4 Materials................................................................................................................... 18-2
18.4.1 Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP) ....................................................................... 18-2
18.4.2 Structural Plate Corrugated Steel Pipe (SPCSP) ......................................... 18-2
18.4.3 Durability...................................................................................................... 18-3
18.5 Supply, Fabrication and Delivery ........................................................................... 18-3
18.5.1 CSP Supply and Fabrication ........................................................................ 18-3
18.5.2 SPCSP Supply and Fabrication ................................................................... 18-3
18.6 Installation ............................................................................................................... 18-4
18.6.1 Coating Repair ............................................................................................. 18-4
18.6.2 Excavation ................................................................................................... 18-5
18.6.2.1 Preparation ................................................................................................ 18-5
18.6.2.2 Limits of Excavation ................................................................................... 18-6
18.6.2.3 Stability of Excavation ................................................................................ 18-6
18.6.3 Bedding ....................................................................................................... 18-6

18.6.4 Haunch Area ................................................................................................ 18-7
18.6.5 CSP Culvert Assembly................................................................................. 18-7
18.6.6 SPCSP Culvert Assembly ............................................................................ 18-8
18.6.7 Backfill ......................................................................................................... 18-8
18.6.7.1 Compaction ................................................................................................ 18-9
18.7 Final Reporting .......................................................................................................18-10

18.8 Details of Culvert Enhancements ..........................................................................18-10
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
 Culvert Installation Form
 Culvert Barrel Measurement Form
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 18, CSP and SPCSP Structures
18.1 General
Flexible metal culverts are commonly used as drainage structures and bridge crossing
structures. The actual culvert structure consists of both the flexible metal culvert and the
surrounding granular backfill material. Flexible metal culvert structures develop their strength
through a complex composite soil-steel interaction.
The Department differentiates between roadway drainage and watercourse culverts on the
basis of opening area. All culverts that are 1500 mm or greater in diameter are considered
‘Standard Bridge Sized’. All culverts that are 4500 mm or greater in diameter are considered
‘Major Bridge Sized’. For culverts with a non-round section, these are considered ‘Bridge Sized’
if their equivalent end-area is greater than a 1500 mm diameter culvert. This Section deals only
with ‘Bridge Sized’ culverts. Standard Drawing S-1418 normally applies to all culverts with
diameters between 1500 mm and 3000 mm.
At any particular location of cross-section within the culvert, the following terms are used:
 The ‘span’ of the culvert is the maximum horizontal opening as measured from inside the
culvert from crest to crest of the corrugations. The ‘springline’ is the elevation of maximum
span.
 The ‘rise’ of the culvert is the maximum vertical opening as measured from inside the culvert
from interior crest to crest of the corrugations.
 The ‘invert’ is the lowest point of the culvert as measured on the corrugation crest and not
streambed.
 The ‘crown’ or ‘obvert’ is the highest interior point or soffit of the culvert at the corrugation
crest.
The Corrugated Steel Pipe Institute (CSPI) is the association of CSP manufacturers in Canada.
This association publishes the Handbook of Steel Drainage & Highway Construction Products
as well as other technical bulletins and technical resources.
The Inspector must be aware of the environmental considerations identified in Sections 1 and 2
of this Manual.
The Inspector must be aware of the following safety considerations, including those from
Sections 1 and 2 of this Manual:
 Trenching operations must follow the applicable regulations for sloping and stability. The
Inspector must be aware of the hazards associated with working in the trench and must be
able to identify deficiencies with the excavation.
 Working inside of a culvert structure may lead to tripping over protruding bolts and slips from
ice or water within the culvert.
 Working at heights from ladders or scaffolding within culverts may present a falling hazard.
Appropriate protection measures must be taken.
 Working within a confined trench may result in hazards from overhead equipment and
equipment working within the excavation. High visibility and awareness are required.
 Smaller diameter and longer culverts may be defined as ‘restricted’ or ‘confined’ spaces.
The Inspector must knowledgeable regarding the regulated access requirements.
 The location of utilities must be determined prior to the start of any excavation work.
September 2015 18-1

18.4 Materials
Two main types of flexible metal culverts are commonly used: corrugated steel pipe and
structural plate corrugated steel pipe.
18.4.1 Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP)
CSP culverts are manufactured from rolls of steel coil. The steel coil is normally pre-coated. The
coil is processed by first corrugating it and then rolling it into a helix or spiral, thereby forming a
pipe. The edges of the coiled corrugated pipe sheet are crimped to each other to form
lockseams.
CSP is most commonly manufactured in round sections, but many other shapes are produced,
including horizontal and vertical ellipses, high profile arches, low profile arches and boxes.
Arches and boxes may be open-bottomed.
CSP culverts are manufactured in varying corrugation profiles. The corrugation profile is a
measure of the distance from crest-to-crest (pitch) and the depth from crest-to-valley. The
values are given as “pitch x depth” (152 x 25). Corrugation profiles are standardized, though
various corrugation profiles are available, from low profile spiral rib to large profiles for boxes
and arches. Larger corrugations are generally used where greater culvert strength is required.
CSP culverts are supplied to the job site as complete pipe ‘barrel’ sections of specific length.
The sections are connected by means of mechanical couplers. Because the corrugations of the
CSP are helical, the ends of the barrel sections are re-corrugated to make the corrugations
square to the edge of the barrel. Mechanical couplers are bolted connectors that secure two
adjacent barrel sections by friction. The couplers have corrugations that ‘nest’ neatly into the
barrel corrugations. Annular ‘corrugated band’ type couplers are the only type of couplers
permitted. Dimpled, semi-corrugated or flat band type couplers are not permitted.
18.4.2 Structural Plate Corrugated Steel Pipe (SPCSP)
SPCSP culverts are manufactured from steel plate. The plate thickness is normally heavier than
that of CSP culverts.
The corrugation profile for SPCSP is larger than that of CSP. Since SPCSP is made from plate
and not from coil, the corrugations for SPCSP are square to the length of the plate and are not
helical. This orientation of corrugation makes the culvert section stronger as well. Corrugation
profiles for SPCSP are standardized.
SPCSP culverts are typically round in section, but also come in various shapes, similar to CSP.
SPCSP culverts are generally used for structures that require a larger cross-sectional opening,
or are subjected to higher loadings.
SPCSP is commonly known by its proprietary names.
SPCSP is supplied to the job site in plates, which are assembled by bolting in-place. SPCSP
does not have barrel sections or couplers; rather, it is assembled in a specific sequence with
consideration given to lap and seam locations. Plates join at ‘circumferential’ and ‘longitudinal’
locations, and reference in shop drawings is made to circumferential seams and longitudinal
seams.
September 2015 18-2

SPCSP plate width is designated ‘N’, where ‘N’ is the distance between two adjacent
circumferential bolt holes, or one circumferential bolt hole space.
18.4.3 Durability
The performance of the CSP or SPCSP depends primarily on the thickness of the steel and the
type of coating. Aside from structural considerations, the designed steel coil or plate thickness is
determined by the corrosivity of the soil and water at the site. To achieve an acceptable design
life, the culvert thickness is increased when aggressive soils or water are present. CSP and
SPCSP are coated to further resist corrosion, which may typically include hot dip galvanizing,
laminated or powder coated polymer, or hot dip aluminized. The life expectancy of a CSP or
SPCSP is reached when the culvert becomes excessively perforated or deformed.
18.5 Supply, Fabrication and Delivery
Supply and Fabrication of CSP and SPCSP must be in accordance with CSA Standard G401
with additions and exceptions described in Section 18 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge
Construction. This Standard provides material, fabrication and quality control requirements, for
which the Contractor is responsible.
18.5.1 CSP Supply and Fabrication
Contract Administration Manual contains the Bridge Construction Administration Form titled
‘CSP Inspection Report’. This form is completed by the Consultant’s Level 1 certified visual
welding inspector. Prior to releasing the CSP materials from the fabrication facility, the Inspector
must confirm that the Project Manager has received the Level 1 inspector’s report and that no
outstanding deficiencies exist. The report confirms that the CSP dimensions, shape, lockseams
and coating are acceptable. The Contractor is required to provide 72 hours of notice to the
Consultant prior to shipping materials.
After the materials have arrived at the site and before they are installed, the Inspector must be
aware of the following requirements:
 All pipe arriving at site must be marked by the supplier as required by the specifications. The
Inspector must confirm that all properties match those required by the specifications.
 If any aspects of the pipe are found to be visually defective, the Inspector must confirm that
all necessary repairs have been performed in accordance with the specifications and CSA
Standard G401. Notably, the bevels must be cut to the correct dimensions as shown on the
tables contained in the specifications. The lockseams must be welded at the cut ends for
larger pipes, and any coating damage must be repaired.
 The Inspector must measure the rise and span at each end of all barrel sections after they
are unloaded to confirm that they have not been damaged during transit. Barrel sections are
often relatively light and therefore must be properly unloaded to prevent damage.
18.5.2 SPCSP Supply and Fabrication
‘SPCSP Inspection Report’. This form is completed by the Consultant’s Level 1 certified visual
welding inspector. Prior to releasing the SPCSP materials from the fabrication facility, the
Inspector must confirm that the Project Manager has received the Level 1 inspector’s report and
September 2015 18-3

that no outstanding deficiencies exist. The report confirms that the SPCSP plate dimensions,
bolt holes, stacking and coating are acceptable. The Contractor is required to provide 72 hours
of notice to the Consultant prior to shipping materials.
After the materials have arrived at the site and before they are installed, the Inspector must be
aware of the following requirements:
 Since plates arrive in nested bundles, it is not possible for the Inspector to review the plates
immediately upon delivery. However, the Inspector must review the storage conditions and
the condition of the individual plates at the time they are separated for installation.
 Storage stains take the form of a white residue that can damage the coating and require
repair. Storing plate materials in the concave-down orientation will prevent the formation of
stains.
18.6 Installation
The installation of CSP and SPCSP includes excavation, bed preparation, pipe assembly,
backfill and additional culvert enhancements.
The culvert performance depends greatly on its position relative to the watercourse channel. For
most watercourses, the culvert invert will be placed lower than the natural streambed elevation
by one-quarter of the culvert diameter. The elevation of the invert relative to the streambed is
important to prevent scour and to maintain natural velocities for fish passage. It is very important
that the culvert be installed at the elevations specified.
The culvert performance depends greatly on the alignment relative to the watercourse channel.
The channel transitions have been designed with the purpose of maintaining velocities and
other flow characteristics without causing scour. The Inspector must discuss any field-fitting of
the channel realignment beyond the culvert ends with the Project Manager. It is very important
that the culvert be installed on the alignment specified, therefore the channel realignment must
match that shown on the Plans.
18.6.1 Coating Repair
The requirements for coating repair are provided in CSA Standard G401. The Inspector must be
knowledgeable regarding the content of this Standard. The Inspector must carefully examine the
pipe materials before and during assembly and backfilling since damage may occur during
these operations.
Small, localized areas of damage such as scratches, storage stains or welding burns are
repairable by cleaning and subsequent application of a repair product. Areas where the entire
coating has been scratched to bare steel may also be repaired by cleaning and subsequent
application of a repair product if the defect does not exceed 3 mm in width and 50 mm in length.
Cut ends for CSPs are exempt from this requirement. If scratches to bare metal exceed these
dimensions or if an excessive number of scratches exists, the Inspector must consult with the
Project Manager to determine if the affected sections need to be removed from the Work and
repaired by hot dipping, or if they can be repaired in place by zinc-metallizing.
Damage to metallic coatings, including galvanized and aluminized coatings, is repaired with
zinc-rich paint if the conditions for paint repair have been met. The paint must contain a
minimum concentration of zinc particulate and must be applied to a minimum thickness. Paint is
normally applied by brushing on two coats, but it is permissible to spray under certain conditions
September 2015 18-4

with permission from the Department and adherence to G401. If sprayed, coatings must be
thinned and must be applied in a single continuous wet film. Prior to painting, the surfaces must
be prepared by power-disc or sanding to a bright metal finish. The Inspector must confirm that
the repair paint material and application methods meet the requirements of CSA Standard
CGSB-1.181. Commercially available products with unknown properties must not be used.
Damage to polymer coating is repaired in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Normally, the defective areas or scratched areas are repaired with a special
adhesive tape. These areas must be adequately prepared, and the tape must extend sufficiently
beyond the defect. Repairs may also be done by application of a brush-on cold repair product.
The Inspector must confirm that the Project Manager has accepted the Contractor’s proposed
repair procedure. It should be noted that polymer coated pipes are usually also galvanized,
therefore damage may have occurred not only to the polymer but also to the galvanizing.
18.6.2 Excavation
Refer to Section 1 of this Manual for more excavation information. Culvert excavation may
include ‘Structural Excavation’ for when a trench needs to be dug at an existing roadway
embankment. For culverts on a new grade, ‘Structural Excavation’ may not be necessary.
Culvert excavation may include ‘Channel Excavation’ if the channel beyond the ends of the new
culvert requires realignment or other modification. Standard Drawing S-1418 provides details for
‘Structural Excavation’.
18.6.2.1 Preparation
The ends of the culvert are located by the Contractor, using the Consultant’s control points and
benchmark. The Inspector must check the Contractor’s layout.
The watercourse is diverted around the site using pumps or a temporary diversion channel. The
Inspector must confirm that the Contractor has followed all environmental permitting
requirements for Restricted Activity Periods (RAP), turbidity monitoring and fish salvage. The
Inspector must also confirm that the Contractor has properly constructed and lined the diversion
channel, or alternatively that the necessary pumping equipment is in place. The tie-in points for
diversion channels are important and these must not be constructed too close to the excavation
site since the diversion channel may limit the ability to construct drainage sumps beyond the
culvert end on the bed, or may limit the ability to cut back trench slopes if necessary.
The site is excavated to an elevation 600 mm below the invert. The Inspector must confirm that
the base at this elevation is firm with no wet or soft areas, no abrupt change in soil type and no
large rocks or boulders. At sites where a bridge has previously been removed, the Inspector
must confirm that wooden piles have been adequately removed from the location within the
excavation because piles below this level may heave and damage the culvert.
If the quality of the soil at the excavated surface is questionable, the Inspector must obtain the
advice of the Project Manager. The use of geosynthetic materials or further excavation may be
required. The Inspector must notify the Project Manager of the excavation schedule. To protect
the excavated surface from deterioration, the Contractor should begin placing bedding materials
immediately following excavation. The Project Manager must be available to immediately
consult with his geotechnical engineer as the condition of the excavation base becomes known.
The Inspector must confirm that the profile and elevations are correct at the base of the
excavation.
September 2015 18-5

18.6.2.2 Limits of Excavation
The Contractor must carefully plan the width and length of his excavation trench before
beginning the work. Any slope cuts higher than 6 m must be designed by the Contractor’s
engineer. For lower slopes, the Contractor must plan his cutslope and benching requirements
based on the stability of the natural soil. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide a safe and
stable slope.
The width and length of the excavation will also need to accommodate placing and backfilling
equipment. The Inspector must confirm with the Contractor his planned use of equipment. If
excavators are located above the cut, the slopes need to be constructed to be safe under this
load. If the placing equipment will directly deposit materials into the excavation at the level of
backfill placement, then an access road and sufficiently wide trench needs to be constructed to
safely accommodate both workers and equipment.
The length of the trench needs to be sufficient to accommodate not just the culvert structure
itself, but also the full riprap apron and new channel construction. Sufficient area for drainage
sumps needs to be accommodated if they are needed at the low end of the excavation beyond
the end of the pipe.
If sub-excavation is required lower than 600 mm below the invert, the excavation slopes will
need to be cut back further to maintain a safe angle. This work is paid for as specified in the
Special Provisions.
18.6.2.3 Stability of Excavation
A stabilized trench may require slopes shallower than those shown on S-1418. Slopes that are
seeping or those that have sand lenses may slough during excavation. Dry, silty or sandy clays
may be stable at a steeper slope.
The exposure time of the excavation faces must be reduced by backfilling as soon as practical.
The top of the slope must be unloaded by removing spoil piles, construction materials, etc.
Subsurface water may seep into the trench. The Contractor must construct the trench of
sufficient width so that drainage ditches or perforated drain pipe can be constructed at the bed
elevation beyond the width of the granular backfill zone, and the trench must be of sufficient
length so that a sump and pumps are located at the low end of the culvert beyond the riprap
apron. The Contractor must also intercept or otherwise prevent surface runoff from entering the
trench.
Under special circumstances and approval from the Project Manager, it may be necessary to
excavate and place bedding in short sections to prevent deterioration of the excavation due to
the ingress of water.
Under special circumstances and approval from the Project Manager, it may be necessary to
undertake excavation during freezing conditions.
18.6.3 Bedding
The bedding material consists of the granular backfill material that is below the pipe invert and
may also include a portion of the haunch if pre-shaping of the bed is required.
September 2015 18-6

A minimum depth of 600 mm of granular backfill is placed below the invert. This material serves
to provide a consistent bearing surface, utilizing the Class of granular material shown on the
Plans.
The 200 mm of granular material immediately below the pipe invert is placed in an uncompacted
state. It is necessary for this material to completely fill all of the corrugations at the invert. This
strip of uncompacted fill is placed for the full length of the granular backfill and at a width that is
one-half of the span. The uncompacted section can be constructed either by first compacting
the entire surface up to the invert elevation and then ripping the strip to de-compact it, or else
the adjacent surfaces may be placed and compacted, with the strip of loosened material placed
afterwards.
The bed must be shaped in the longitudinal direction to match the profile shown on the Plans.
After the bed has been constructed and before the pipe is placed, the Inspector must check by
survey the elevations at all culvert 10th points. A crest-cambered profile is usually required. The
culvert will typically experience greater loading and settlement under the roadway, where the fill
is the deepest. Therefore, the culvert profile may flatten after the roadway embankment is
placed. It is very important that the culvert be installed at the profile specified.
18.6.4 Haunch Area
For any section along a round pipe, the haunch area is located between the top of bedding and
the underside of pipe. For pipe arches, the haunch area is located beneath the location that has
the smallest radius of curvature. Over time and under high loads, pipes may distort in shape and
ultimately fail at their haunch location. It is critical that particular attention be given to the proper
placement and compaction of backfill at the haunch.
For larger pipes or non-round pipes, pre-shaping of the bed is specified. The 200 mm deep
uncompacted zone is constructed as normal, but the uncompacted zone is extended above the
invert elevation and partially into the haunch zone. The limits of the pre-shaping are provided in
the specifications or Special Provisions. The pre-shaping activity is normally done by over-
constructing the elevation of the loosely-placed bedding material and then preparing its final
shape using a template. Pre-shaping is important to prevent the pipe from twisting or rolling
during backfilling operations.
18.6.5 CSP Culvert Assembly
After placement of barrel sections, the Inspector must confirm through close-up visual
observation that the uncompacted bedding is in intimate contact with the pipe invert and that all
corrugations are completely filled.
CSP barrel sections must be positioned for assembly with the ends true in alignment and a
constant gap maintained as shown on the shop drawings. The pipe sections must be placed
sequentially, starting at the upstream end and working towards the downstream end. Annular
couplers must be well fitted and evenly tightened all around the pipe. The corrugations of the
coupler and the corrugations of the re-corrugated barrel ends must neatly ‘nest’ together so that
there is direct contact between the coupler and the barrel at every corrugation. Where a gap
exists between the coupler and the barrel corrugations, the gaps must be sealed by using
materials recommended by the manufacturer, or else an internal coupler may be added. These
procedures must be submitted by the Contractor for the Project Manager’s acceptance.
September 2015 18-7

18.6.6 SPCSP Culvert Assembly
After placement of each plate assembly, the Inspector must confirm through close-up visual
observation that the uncompacted bedding is in intimate contact with the pipe invert and that all
corrugations are completely filled.
The Inspector must thoroughly review and be knowledgeable regarding the details contained in
the shop drawings. The shop drawings provide details regarding the assembly sequence,
location of laps, location of circumferential and longitudinal seams, and stagger of longitudinal
seams.
When the plates have been assembled to form complete rings or shapes, the Contractor must
check the rise and span and other chord dimensions as necessary to confirm that the shape of
the culvert has been maintained within 2% of the design dimensions. Both the rise and span
measurements must also be within 2%. If the pipe shape is not within tolerance, the Contractor
must mechanically secure the pipe using restraining devices, scaffolding or shoring towers. The
Inspector must calculate shape dimensions as follows:
 (Actual Rise +/– Design Rise) / (Design Rise) = % Magnitude of Sag or Peaking
 (Actual Span +/- Design Span) / (Design Span) = % Magnitude of Sidewall Deflection
SPCSP bolts are tightened to the specified torque and not by the turn-of-nut method. The
Inspector must confirm that the Contractor is checking bolt torque for all bolts, and that over-
torqued bolts are removed and discarded. The Inspector must physically check, with a
calibrated torque wrench, a representative number of randomly located bolts to confirm that the
torque applied meets the specified requirements.
Bolts in the valley of each longitudinal seam must be nearer to the visible edge of the plate than
the bolts in the crest. This requirement is noted on the shop drawings, and the Inspector must
carefully observe that the practice is followed in the field as the work proceeds. It is more
difficult to correct this condition after the pipe has been fully assembled. If bolts are incorrectly
placed nearer to the visible edge of the crest, future cracking of the plate across the bolt hole
may occur.
18.6.7 Backfill
Refer to Section 2 of this Manual for more backfill information. Backfill consists of granular
backfill material except at the ends of the pipe when clay seepage cutoffs are specified within a
structural fill envelope. Material beyond the structural fill envelope is considered embankment
fill.
Structural issues arising in culverts during construction are often the result of unsuitable backfill
properties, including unacceptable gradation, plasticity, moisture content, poor compaction or
the use of frozen material. Granular backfill material has the following favourable characteristics
as compared to other soils:
 Compaction is easier to control since it is not too sensitive to moisture content and
temperatures.
 Higher shear strength and bearing capacity can be obtained and is not significantly affected
by moisture content.
 Low potential for frost action exists due to free-draining characteristics and large void ratio.
 Material can be placed and compacted at 0°C, allowing more flexibility for installation.
September 2015 18-8

 Material is generally non-corrosive compared to clay material.

 Material exhibits negligible compressibility under high loads when saturated.
 Material has good workability.
‘Culvert Barrel Measurements’. This form is completed by the Inspector and is used for both
CSP and SPCSP. The completed form is submitted to the Department by the Inspector. The
form confirms that the final culvert dimensions conform to the design dimensions within the
allowable tolerance. The Inspector must measure the span and rise at each coupler or at each
circumferential ring, and repeat these measurements for different stages of backfill, including up
to the midpoint, crown and 300 mm overtop. The Inspector must closely monitor the pipe shape
as backfill proceeds, and advise the Contractor of any out of tolerance measurements. It is
worth noting that thinner culverts sometimes ‘peak’ temporarily as they are backfilled to the
springline. The culvert will normally return to its design shape as backfill is placed over the
crown. The Inspector must obtain advice from the Project Manager if the pipe dimensions are
out of tolerance by 4% or more.
The Inspector must confirm that the culvert has maintained its proper alignment by use of plumb
bobs. The use of extendable measuring rods or a laser level will result in more accurate
measurements for rise and span.
18.6.7.1 Compaction
All backfill materials are compacted to:
 Increase the soil strength and bearing capacity.

 Decrease the compressibility of the soil, thereby reducing settlement.
 Decrease the void ratio, which reduces inter-granular movement.
 Increase the passive resistance of the fill and reduce horizontal deflections.
 Provide uniform support along the pipe, thus enhancing the soil-steel interaction.
The compaction of backfill material in the haunch area is critical to the performance of the
structure. Backfill must be carefully placed in thin layers and compacted using manually
operated air driven compactors, vibrating pogos, shovels and poles. It is important that all
corrugations are completely filled and compacted.
Backfilling of the non-granular seals is critical, since ‘piping’ seepage pathways through the
granular backfill may develop if the seals are not impermeable. The Contractor must mark the
limits of non-granular material onto the pipe. Seals must be placed and compacted
simultaneously with the granular backfill.
The Contractor must mark the culvert barrel to identify the heights of lift placement targets. The
Inspector must carefully monitor the Contractor’s lift placement to confirm that the lifts are not
too thick. The placement of fill must not be excessively unbalanced from one side of the culvert
to the other so that the barrel does not distort or roll.
Special backfill requirements may typically exist for culverts with diameters larger than
3000 mm, and again for diameters larger than 4500 mm.
September 2015 18-9

18.7 Final Reporting
‘Culvert Installation Inspection Record’. This form is completed by the Inspector and is used for
both CSP and SPCSP. The form is a final construction checklist that confirms the final
parameters for the structure, including excavation, bedding, assembly, backfill, end treatments
and riprap. The Inspector must complete and submit this form to the Department upon the
completion of the Work.
18.8 Details of Culvert Enhancements
The following structural enhancements are specially designed additions or special features
added to culverts to increase the limits of their structural performance and their scope of
application.
End Treatment provides a smooth transition, decreasing entrance and exit losses while
increasing flow capacity. Standard end treatment consists of cut-off walls that prevent scouring
and undermining at the ends of the culvert, and also consists of shoulders and a collar over the
crown of the pipe to provide stiffening and counteraction of buoyant hydraulic uplift at the bevel
ends. Standard Drawings S-1444 and S-1445 provide Standard End Treatment details.
Concrete Headwalls are used for aesthetics or to retain fill at the upper portion of the culvert.
Headwalls reduce the culvert length and eliminate bevel ends.
Substrate Holders consist of metal, precast concrete or rock riprap. They are used to facilitate
the passage of fish. These types of baffles provide several benefits. In addition to providing
resting areas for fish, they increase the invert roughness, which locally reduces velocities and
promotes natural sedimentation within the culvert.
Reinforcement Ribs are commonly used in large elliptical culverts to provide additional
capacity for the top arch to withstand dead loads from high cover.
Thrust Blocks are continuous longitudinal structural stiffeners attached to the culvert where the
side and top arcs meet. These provide additional stiffness and facilitate easy backfill placement.
Attached Concrete slabs consist of a reinforced concrete slabs cast onto the top arc portion of
low profile horizontal ellipses and open arch culverts. The slabs act compositely with the culvert.
When the depth of cover does not meet the minimum requirements, Unattached Concrete
Slabs can be used to transfer some live loads to the backfill at the sides of the pipe.
Releasable Joints are used on large horizontal ellipse or arch pipes to promote positive
arching and/or permit relative vertical movement of the top and bottom arcs. The joint between
two arcs can be left loose to enable their relative movements, and these can eventually be
tightened.
September 2015 18-10

Section 18 – CSP and SPCSP Structures Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Were arrangements of access routes and disposal areas reviewed?
Was the behaviour of excavation and in-situ material that was

exposed to weather and water observed?
Were elevations and dimensions at the bottom of excavation

confirmed?
Was any excavation extending beyond the required depth recorded?
2 Materials
18.2 Were the culvert materials new?
18.2 Were material in accordance with CSA G401?
18.2 Were shop drawings submitted and reviewed for SPCSP, bevels and
for non-standard items like elbows, arches, ellipses, etc.?
18.2 Were materials stockpiled neatly and in such a manner as to facilitate

inspection and inventory prior to assembly?
18.2 Were 5-bolt annular couplers supplied for CSP culverts?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
18.2 Were SPCSP plates stockpiled in the concave-down position to

prevent storage stains?
18.2 Were materials handled carefully to prevent damage to the coating?
18.2 Where damage to the coating existed, were the affected plates or
sections set aside by the Contractor for further inspection?
18.2 Did the Contractor make adequate provisions for the care of water, in
accordance with Special Provisions, permits and other direction from
resource agencies?
3 Installation Inspection – Assembly

18.3 Was the excavation done to the neat lines shown on the Drawings?
Were the excavation walls competent, and did they meet requirements
for safety?
18.3 Were foundation conditions determined to be soft or unstable? Was

woven geotextile placed, and did it meet the specified physical
properties?
18.3 Was the bottom of the excavation 600 mm or lower than the pipe
invert?
18.3 Was this material compacted to 95% SPD at the 600 mm level and
above, as measured at 150 mm lifts?
18.3 Was the culvert bed preshaped as required?
18.3 Did the top of bedding have a gradual crest curve profile?
18.3 Was pre-shaping of bed material done where specified?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
18.3 Was the top 150 mm of bedding placed in a loose uncompacted

state?
18.3 Were CSP barrel sections placed so that the ends were in close
contact and couplers were well nested?
18.3 Where gaps of 5 mm or more existed between the barrel and coupler,
were these joints sealed using materials approved by the Project
Manager?
18.3 Were SPCSP bolted seams properly lapped with adjacent plates in full
contact for the full width and length of the lap?
18.3 Was the SPCSP assembled in the approved sequence, with invert
plates being first bolted on the bed, followed by loose bolting
assembly of the side and top arc plates into complete rings starting
from the upstream end?
18.3 For SPCSP, were all bolts in corrugation valleys at longitudinal seams
located nearest to the visible edge and not to the corrugation crest?
18.3 After loose bolting of two (2) SPCSP rings, were the vertical
dimensions checked, and were consequent adjustments using
mechanical means made where necessary?
18.3 Was this continued for the remainder of loosely bolted rings?
18.3 Was local plate distortion observed?
18.3 Were the longitudinal seams of the SPCSP straight, and was the
vertical axis upright?
18.3 Were all SPCSP bolts torqued between 200 Nm and 340 Nm?
18.3 Was a representative number of bolts checked by the Inspector using

a torque wrench?
3
Compliance
Section
SSBC
18.3 Did distortion exist due to over-torquing, and if so, were additional
holes properly drilled?
18.3 Was the final rise and span dimensions of the torqued and un-
backfilled SPCSP within 2% of design dimensions?
4 Installation Inspection – Backfill

General – See also Section 2, Backfill Check Sheet.
18.3 Was the specified type and gradation of backfill materials used?
18.3 Was backfilling completed in accordance with S-1418?
18.3 Was backfilling done only when the air temperature was above 0°C?
18.3 Were all backfilling materials in an unfrozen state at the time of

placement?
18.3 Was backfill material placed on unfrozen substrate?
18.3 Did backfill completely fill all the corrugations at the haunches?
18.3 Was the backfill material placed so that the level between sides did
not exceed 300 mm?
18.3 Was appropriate compaction equipment used, and were proper

techniques used?
18.3 Did non-granular backfill meet the specified material properties for
type and plasticity?
5 Installation Inspection – Backfill
4
Compliance
Section
SSBC
General – See also Section 4, Cast-in-Place Concrete Check Sheet

and Section 5, Reinforcing Steel Check Sheet.
18.4 Were submittals made for all collars for culverts exceeding 3000 mm
in diameter?
6 Installation Inspection – Rock Riprap

General – See also Section 10, Heavy Rock Riprap Check Sheet.
18.6 Was all rock riprap placed at the location shown on the Drawings,
including provisions for geotextile, gradation, thickness and depth of
key-into banks?
Signature Date
5
18.1 Culvert bed excavation completed and filter fabric 18.2 Compacting of culvert bedding material.
placed.
18.3 Assembling SPCSP culvert. Plates lifted into 18.4 Assembling SPCSP culvert.
position with crane.

18.5 Assembling SPCSP culvert. 18.6 Compacting haunch area using air tampers (pogo
sticks).
18.7 SPCSP showing that bolts in the valley of each 18.8 Compacting haunch area with pogo stick. Shovels
longitudinal seam are nearer to the visible edge of and small equipment are also used to fill all
the plate than the bolts in the crest. corrugations.

18.9 Backfilling of SPCSP. Small equipment only 18.10 On site storage of round CSP on timber dunnage.
permitted to work within 1.0 m of pipe. Backfill
progressing evenly on both sides of the pipe.
18.11 CSP bevel ends cut by fabricator. Coating repaired 18.12 Storage of CSP couplers in concave down position
using zinc-rich paint to prevent storage staining.

18.13 Temporary watercourse diversion. 18.14 Temporary diversion for watercourse. Silt fence
and filter fabric lining the temporary streambed.
18.15 Excavation for culvert bed. Excavation crowned 18.16 Backfilling of culvert bed.
and sides trenched to control water.

18.17 Backfill being placed at haunches. 18.18 Removal of existing bridge structure.
18.19 Removal of existing bridge structure. Abutment 18.20 Formwork for cast-in-place collar cut-off wall.
piles removed to specified depth below streambed.

18.21 Formwork and reinforcing steel for cast-in-place 18.22 Concrete placement for collar.
cut-off wall.
18.23 Compaction of granular backfill material. 18.24 Completed culvert outlet.

18.25 Completed collar and heavy rock riprap. 18.26 Soft conditions at culvert bed elevation.
18.27 Backfilling at culvert bed. 18.28 Installation of CSP structure at pre-shaped bed.

18.29 Installation of CSP structure. Backfilling and 18.30 Pre-shaping and compacting bed material for
compaction at haunches. second CSP structure.
18.31 Installing CSP couplers. 18.32 Backfilling and compacting haunch area.

18.33 Small equipment spreading granular backfill 18.34 Completing backfill placement at crown of culverts.
material between culverts.
18.35 Completed culvert outlet. 18.36 Damage to polymer coated CSP structure. Special
adhesive tape or approved brush on coating is
required.

CULVERT INSTALLATION
Inspection Record
Project: Contract #: Bridge File

Contractor:
Project Sponsor: Consultant Inspector:
STRUCTURAL DESIGNATION SOURCE TESTED BY APPROVED BY

FILL REQUIRED
Granular Fill Des 2 - Class 20 or
Crush Des 2 - Class 40
Pit run Des 6 - Class 80
Clay Fill
INSTALLATION INSPECTED BY DATE COMMENTS

Culvert Settings
Excavation
Bedding
Assembly
Backfill
Haunch Area
Sidewall Area
COMPACTION
EQUIPMENT
Lift Thickness mm Passes per Lift
CONCRETE END TREATMENT INSPECTED BY DATE COMMENTS

Rebar and Formwork
Finished Work
Concrete Compressive Strength
Riprap
Special Features
Final Trimming/Cleanup
Please return form to Project Sponsor

CULVERT BARREL MEASUREMENTS
Project: Contract #: Bridge File #:
From: To:
Contractor:
Project Sponsor: Consultant's Inspector:
Design Dimension Maximum Dimension Minimum Dimension

Design Dimensions (mm) (mm) (mm)
& Allowable Limits Rise
Span
Assembly Backfill at Backfill to Backfill 0.3 m Grade

Actual Complete Midpoint of Rise Top of Culvert Above Top of Culvert Complete
Measurements Rise Span Rise Span Rise Span Rise Span Rise Span
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Upstream End
m from U/S End
m from U/S End
Centreline of Road
m from D/S End
m from D/S End
Downstream End
Date Measured
Measured By
NOTE: Measurements to be taken top of corrugation to top of corrugation.

Location of measurements should be marked (eg. Spray paint) for future reference.
Please return form to Project Sponsor.

PAINTED ROADWAY MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
19.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 19-1

19.4 Material ....................................................................................................................... 19-1
19.5 Application ................................................................................................................. 19-1
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 19, Painted Roadway Markings
19.1 General
Painted roadway markings on bridge decks and approach roadways consist of lane lines, edge
lines and directional arrows or dividing lines.
The Inspector must be aware of the following considerations:
 Prevent soil and water contamination from paint, oil and chemical leaks or spills.
 Immediately clean up any accidental spills and report hazardous material spills.
The Contractor is responsible to accommodate traffic safely through the work zone.
19.4 Material
All materials are supplied by the Contractor. The materials must be ‘approved’ products
currently on the Alberta Transportation Products List. The suppliers and their paint formulations
must meet all specified requirements in the List’s referenced specifications, which include ‘TPC-
05: Specification for White and Yellow Traffic Paint’ and ‘GB-05: Specification for Glass Beads
for Pavement Markings’. Included in these specifications are requirements for low VOC
formulations and field sampling and testing requirements.
The Special Provisions may include additional requirements to those referenced in the Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction or the Highway Maintenance Specifications.
The Inspector must review the referenced specifications and manufacturer’s literature and be
knowledgeable of all requirements for field sampling and testing. The Inspector must confirm
that the Project Manager has received and accepted the written confirmation from the
Contractor stating that all supplied materials meet the specified requirements.
19.5 Application
For bridge sites with high volumes of traffic and lane closure requirements, a Traffic
Accommodation Strategy (TAS) must be developed by the Contractor and accepted by the
Project Manager. The Inspector must carefully monitor traffic activity and report to the Project
Manager if changes are needed.
Before the Work begins, the Inspector must be knowledgeable regarding the specified mixing
procedures, application rates for paint, application rate for glass bead, marking locations and
marking dimensions.
The Inspector must assess the existing pavement conditions prior to the Work to confirm that
the surfaces are sufficiently clean and dry, with no loose materials or existing paint. Premature
paint failure is most commonly caused by the application of paint onto pavement that is in poor
surface condition.
Construction and public traffic are not permitted to travel on the painted markings until after the
paint has sufficiently cured. The Inspector must be aware of the cure time of the paint used.
September 2015 19-1

The Inspector must confirm that all paint markings are uniform in thickness with no spatter,
excessive overspray or other defects.
September 2015 19-2

Section 19 – Painted Roadway Markings Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 Materials
19.2 – Did the Contractor advise the Consultant of any change in paint
formulation?
Note: No paint formulation can be diluted or mixed with a different
formulation or with any other material without the specific acceptance
of the Department.
19.2 Did the Contractor take all necessary steps to prevent contamination
of the materials?
19.2 Was the paint protected from freezing?
19.3 Did the Contractor take due precautions against damaging or

disfiguring any portion of the structure, guarding against spatters,
overspray, splashes or smirches of paint or associated paint materials,
and damages caused by fuel or lubricants used with his equipment?
2 Application
10.3 Did the Contractor paint lines or directional arrows on the roadway
and bridge deck, either restoring what existed prior to the construction
work or as shown on the Drawings, or as specified?
19.4 Were centrelines and shoulder lines 100 mm wide?

Were broken centrelines 3 m in length followed by a 6 m space?
Did the Contractor ensure that painted lines matched the existing lines
exactly?
19.4 Was the substrate surface clean, dry and at least 10°C in temperature
during the paint application?
1
Section 19 – Painted Roadway Markings Check Sheet
Compliance
Section
SSBC
19.4 Were painted messages and lines applied at the rate of 0.4 ℓ/m2 of
actual painted area, and were glass beads applied immediately
following the paint application at a uniform application rate of 600 g/ℓ
of paint?
19.4 Were all painted markings uniform in thickness with no spatter,
excessive overspray or other defects?
19.4 Was construction or public traffic permitted to travel on the painted

markings before the paint had sufficiently cured?
Signature Date
2
19.1 Protecting paint with cones during curing period. 19.2 Shoulder and centreline paint lines.
19.3 Shoulder and centreline paint lines.

DECK OVERLAY AND CONCRETE REHABILITATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
20.1 General ..................................................................................................................... 20-1

20.4 Traffic Accommodation........................................................................................... 20-1
20.5 Deck Concrete Overlay Process............................................................................. 20-1
20.6 Surface Removal and Disposal .............................................................................. 20-2
20.7 Identification of Concrete Repairs ......................................................................... 20-2
20.7.1 Removal of Existing Concrete ........................................................................ 20-3
20.7.2 Partial Depth Repair on Deck Surface ............................................................ 20-3
20.7.3 Full Depth Repair for Deck ............................................................................. 20-3
20.7.4 Partial or Full Depth Repair at Non-Deck Surfaces ......................................... 20-4
20.8 Deck Surface Preparation for Overlay Concrete ................................................... 20-5
20.9 Dry Run Criteria ....................................................................................................... 20-5
20.10 Concrete Production ............................................................................................... 20-5
20.11 Concrete Placement ................................................................................................ 20-5
20.12 Surface Defects and Tolerances ............................................................................ 20-6
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 20, Deck Overlay and Concrete Rehabilitation
20.1 General
Rehabilitation work may include localized repair to the concrete deck or substructure elements,
as well as milling of the entire deck surface and overlaying with either concrete or Asphalt
Concrete Pavement (ACP). Concrete decks deteriorate due to chlorides contained in de-icing
agents. Significant performance issues, including cracking and delamination, generally begin as
the chlorides penetrate to the reinforcing steel.
Refer to the requirements of Section 4 of this Manual for more information.
The Contractor’s Environmental Construction Operation (ECO) Plan must contain provisions for
concrete delivery, discharge, spills and emergency procedures.
Specific precautions must be taken for all phases of construction to prevent concrete or
construction debris from entering a watercourse or water body. Contaminated soil must be
isolated and treated or else removed from the job site.
Refer to the requirements of Section 4 of this Manual for more information.
Precautions must be taken to prevent falling debris. Work areas may require cordoning off to
keep workers and the public out.
Contact with plastic concrete or cement mixtures can cause skin irritation, severe chemical
burns and serious eye damage. Gloves, glasses and other protective clothing must always be
worn when working with concrete.
20.4 Traffic Accommodation
Bridge rehabilitation is usually performed on active highways where it is necessary to stage the
work to accommodate traffic. Rehabilitation is generally completed for one direction of travel
before beginning work for the other direction.
The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor follows all requirements for traffic
accommodation, including lane restrictions, closures, hours of operation, lighting and signage.
These requirements must be addressed in the Contactor’s Traffic Accommodation Strategy
(TAS).
Where applicable, the traffic accommodation must include provision for the collection of debris
during demolition.
20.5 Deck Concrete Overlay Process
The process for concrete overlay includes:
 Surface removal of deteriorated concrete or existing ACP, generally done by cold-milling.

 Cleaning and sandblasting the milled surface.
 Inspection of the deck for unsound concrete. Unsound concrete is removed and replaced
through partial depth repair or full depth repair methods.
September 2015 20-1

 Producing gradeline profiles and “dry-running” the deck finishing machine.

 Applying slurry grout to the deck substrate and placing, texturing, curing and seaing HPC
concrete.
20.6 Surface Removal and Disposal
It is important that the removal of the existing wearing surface be completed to the limits
specified. Before removal, the Inspector must carefully review the Contractor’s removal
procedure.
The removal equipment must be capable of milling close to curbs and barriers with minimal
removal by chipping.
The milling depth must be carefully monitored by the Contractor as the Work progresses, and
adjustments may need to be made as the Work proceeds. The Inspector must check the milling
depth to confirm the Contractor’s measurements.
Care must be taken when milling existing ACP as the thickness may vary; however, a minimal
thickness of deck concrete needs to be removed. Existing concrete paving lips also need to be
removed using light chipping hammers. The Inspector must confirm that existing deck
reinforcing steel is not damaged as a result of milling procedures.
20.7 Identification of Concrete Repairs
It is the Inspector’s role to identify all locations that require concrete removal for partial or full
depth concrete replacement. The Inspector’s judgment is required to determine the exact limits
of concrete removal.
Deck concrete will generally be tested in advance to estimate the extent of concrete
deterioration. Plots of the test results may be used to assist in identifying areas with deteriorated
concrete. The precise location of deteriorated concrete is determined at the site by the
Inspector.
Delamination of concrete occurs when chlorides cause corrosion of the reinforcing steel. As the
reinforcing steel corrodes, it expands, causing cracking and ultimately delamination, which can
be seen as concrete cracks. If not visible, delaminations can be identified using sounding
methods.
The Inspector must use visual observation, hammer sounding and chain dragging methods to
identify the limits of concrete removal. In the chain dragging method, a heavy chain is dragged
in a systematic pattern along the entire surface area, and where concrete is delaminated, the
chain will produce a hollow sound. Once the chain drag has been completed, the precise
boundary of the delaminated concrete must be determined by sounding using repetitive taps
with a light hammer. The limits of the deteriorated concrete must then be marked onto the deck
surface.
The Inspector must visually inspect the deck soffit to identify locations where leakage may
occur. These areas are often identified by the presence of a white leachate or efflorescence.
The Inspector must determine if these areas coincide with visible deterioration noted at the deck
surface, and if such defects extend full-depth through the deck.
September 2015 20-2

20.7.1 Removal of Existing Concrete
Concrete must be removed in such a manner as to prevent damage to adjacent concrete, to

other components and to utilities that are to remain in the structure. Care must be taken to
prevent damage to reinforcing steel, pre-stressing tendons, shear connectors, structural steel
and deck joints.
 Concrete removal is not permitted where injurious vibrations may damage freshly placed
concrete.
 Areas marked for removal must have well-defined edge prepared by saw-cutting to a depth
of 25 mm around the perimeter.
 Only small chipping hammers may be used for removal of concrete near or around
reinforcing steel.
 Chipping hammers must not contact reinforcing steel in a manner that will cause de-bonding
at the adjacent concrete areas.
 All surfaces of exposed reinforcing steel, except for epoxy coated reinforcing steel, must be
sandblasted. The entire bar area must be sandblasted, including the undersides.
 Reinforcing steel that has suffered more than 20% section loss will require additional bars to
be installed. The Inspector must be aware of the requirements for splicing and anchoring
additional bars.
 Existing epoxy coated reinforcing steel must either be repaired using an approved brush-on
patch product or through the installation of galvanic anodes. The requirements are detailed
in the Special Provisions and the Plans. The Department has no standard specifications for
galvanic anode protection. The exact placement of anodes depends on the density of
reinforcing steel and will be site-specific.
20.7.2 Partial Depth Repair on Deck Surface
Partial depth repair procedures are performed when the deteriorated concrete does not extend
through the full thickness of the deck.
Partial depth repairs at the deck surface are poured monolithically with the overlay concrete.
Concrete for partial depth repair areas must meet the same requirements as HPC for deck
overlay concrete, as specified in Section 4 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge
Construction.
Normally, concrete removal extends to a depth of 25 mm below any exposed reinforcing steel.
After concrete around the reinforcing steel has been acceptably removed, the Inspector must
check to confirm that sound concrete exists at the sides and base of all prepared areas.
20.7.3 Full Depth Repair for Deck
Full depth repair procedures are used when the deteriorated concrete extends the full thickness
of the deck. The deck soffit requires forming on the deck underside.
Full depth repairs at the deck are generally poured monolithically with the overlay concrete;
however, large areas are often repaired prior to casting the overlay concrete. The Inspector
must discuss the pour sequence with the Project Manager in advance.
Concrete for full depth repair areas must meet the same requirements as HPC for deck overlay
concrete, as specified in Section 4 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction.
September 2015 20-3

After the concrete around the reinforcing steel has been acceptably removed, the Inspector
must check to confirm that sound concrete exists at the sides of all prepared areas. The
underside of the deck must be formed to neatly restore the original lines of the concrete.
Formwork must be adequately secured and sealed to prevent paste leakage and form lines.
20.7.4 Partial or Full Depth Repair at Non-Deck Surfaces
Concrete repair areas may occur at curbs, barriers and substructure elements. Full depth
repairs typically occur at curbs and barriers, and partial depth repairs typically occur at piers,
abutment, seats and wingwalls.
Partial depth repairs are completed using an approved concrete patching material, as identified
in the Alberta Transportation Products List. Approved concrete patching materials are classified
into five types according to performance requirements. These types are:
 High Early Horizontal (HEH)

 Low Temperature Horizontal (LTH)
 Normal Horizontal (NH)
 Overhead or Vertical (OH-V)
 Form and Pour (FP)
The Alberta Transportation Products List provides details for the applications of each type. The
Inspector must be aware of the following details:
 Approved concrete patching material for partial depth repair areas must be extended with
aggregates.
 Full depth repair areas must be re-cast using Class C or Class HPC concrete, depending on
location.
 Surface removals and preparation are similar to those required for partial and full depth
repairs for deck concrete.
Beyond a specified volume, patches for partial depth repair areas must be repaired using Class
C or Class HPC concrete. Concrete patches must be placed and cured in accordance with the
requirements of Section 4 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction and the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
When concrete is used as a patching material and is not poured monolithically with the deck
overlay concrete, reduced payment rates for low-strength concrete are specified in Section 20 of
the Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction.
Placing of patching materials requires specific attention to detail. Curing of patches is important
to their performance. It is difficult to effectively cure vertical and overhead patches. The
Inspector must carefully monitor the entire patching and curing process to confirm that
requirements are precisely followed.
September 2015 20-4

20.8 Deck Surface Preparation for Overlay Concrete
The deck surface and all other vertical surfaces that will be in contact with the deck overlay
concrete must be adequately sandblasted. The Inspector must confirm that:
 Adequate shielding is in place to protect any epoxy coated reinforcing steel or galvanic
anodes.
 The sandblasted surfaces must uniformly expose the fine aggregate in the concrete
substrate.
 The final surfaces are adequately cleaned of all sand and other contaminants.
20.9 Dry Run Criteria
The Inspector must survey the prepared deck surface to determine the existing elevations at
specified locations. The Inspector must then determine the required thickness of the concrete
overlay in order to provide the desired gradeline. In determining the desired gradeline, the
Inspector must take into account the anticipated deadload deflection from the overlay, drainage
requirements and rideability.
The screed rails for the deck finishing machine are set by the Contractor to meet the profile
provided by the Inspector. The Inspector must confirm through the dry-run that the finishing
roller(s) is set to achieve the desired gradeline and that the minimum thickness of overlay
concrete specified.
Payment for the overlay concrete is based on the dry-run values. The Inspector and Contractor
must be in agreement of the measurement for payment before any overlay concrete is placed.
The location of all construction joints must be determined and agreed to by the Inspector before
the start of concrete placement.
20.10 Concrete Production
Site batching with pre-bagged materials may be done at remote locations when there is no
availability of ready-mix concrete. The Inspector must confirm that the batching and mixing
requirements are strictly followed. The Inspector must review Section 4 of this Manual, which
describes the process for truck-mixing.
20.11 Concrete Placement
The Inspector must confirm that the specified slurry grout is mixed to the correct proportions and
that it is applied immediately in advance of concrete placement. The slurry grout acts as a
bonding agent; however, if it dries, it becomes ineffective and may instead inhibit the bond
between the overlay concrete and the deck concrete.
The concrete overlay is usually the final riding and wearing surface and care must be taken to
achieve the desired profile and texturing. The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor
performs the following tasks:
 Straight-edge checks to demonstrate that there are no local depressions, and the crossfall
and crown are preserved.
 Bull floating achieves a smooth and closed surface, before texturing.
 Texturing must not cause plucking of aggregate or tearing of the surface.
September 2015 20-5

20.12 Surface Defects and Tolerances
Areas of the overlay concrete that do not meet the required surface tolerance must be clearly
identified by the Inspector and removed or replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
If the surface is damaged by construction operations, or if the concrete overlay shows signs of
distress or scaling prior to final completion, it must be removed and replaced.
September 2015 20-6

Section 20 – Deck Overlay and Concrete Rehabilitation Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Have traffic control devices been properly implemented to provide
safety to the public?
Was depth of milling checked to prevent over milling?
Were unsound concrete areas marked for removal?
Was the deck profile and minimum thickness of overlay (normally

50 mm) set?
Was the Inspector present at the “Dry Run”?
2 Surface Preparation for Concrete Overlay

20.3.1 General – Were jack hammers less than nominal 14 kg class and
chipping hammers less than nominal 7 kg class used for concrete
removal?
20.3.2 Did the Contractor submit details of his proposed surface removal
methods to the Consultant for review and acceptance?
20.3.2 Was surface removal carried out in stages to the depth(s) shown on
the Drawings or as described in the special provisions?
20.3.2 Was surface removal carried out as close as possible to all curbs,
medians, barriers, drains, deck joints and other bridge components
without causing damage?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
20.3.2 Were concrete curbs, deck joints and paving lips within the limits of
the surface removal area removed, including the reinforcing steel
projecting into these components?
20.3.2 On bridges with no formal deck joints, did the Contractor sawcut
through the full depth and width of the wearing surface at both ends
of the bridge or at the transition paving limits prior to commencing
removal operations?
20.3.2 Did the Contractor use small milling machines having a maximum
removal width of 1.2 m in areas where the specified removal depth
includes more than 5 mm of concrete removal?
20.3.2 Did the Contractor remove milling debris from behind the cold-milling
machine and clean the milled surface on a continuous basis?
20.3.2 Was any reinforcing steel that was damaged as a result of the
Contractor’s surface removal operations repaired or replaced?
20.3.2 Was the completed surface of removal operations inspected to

identify unsound concrete to be repaired?
20.3.2 Were repairs carried out in accordance with Subsection 20.4,

Concrete Repair of the SSBC?
20.3.3 Did the Contractor sandblast the entire deck surface and the vertical
faces of the curb, median and parapet up to a height equal to the
overlay thickness prior to deck overlay concrete placement?
20.3.3 Did the Contractor clean the sandblasted area to the satisfaction of
the Inspector and dispose of debris at an approved location?
20.3.3 Did the Contractor maintain the cleaned deck in satisfactory condition
until placement of deck overlay concrete?
3 Concrete Repair
20.4.1 General – Were the limits of concrete removal determined?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
20.4.1 General – Were the perimeters of repair areas sawcut with neat,
perpendicular, 25 mm deep cuts?
20.4.1 General – Did the Contractor address the areas of unsound concrete
by chipping, scabbling or other means approved by the Inspector,
resulting in a sound surface suitable for bonding to the deck overlay
concrete or repair material?
20.4.1 General – Did the Contractor contain all debris resulting from
concrete removal operations and dispose of it at an approved
location?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Was partially exposed reinforcing steel entirely
exposed by removal of the concrete to a depth of 25 mm below the
bars?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Was reinforcing steel sandblasted to a white

metal finish?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Was epoxy coated reinforcing steel

sandblasted clean, and was the exposed reinforcing steel protected
by installing discrete galvanic anodes?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Was the epoxy coating repaired in accordance
with the requirements of Section 5, Reinforcing Steel of the SSBC?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Was additional reinforcing steel of the same
type installed at locations where the existing reinforcing steel suffered
sectional loss greater than 20%?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Did the Contractor follow splicing and/or
development requirements?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Was the repair area acceptable for placement
of repair material?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Did the Contractor saturate the approved area
with clean water for 30 minutes?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Were the repairs finished smooth, levelled
flush to adjacent surfaces and given the appropriate concrete surface
finish?
3
Compliance
Section
SSBC
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Did the Contractor re-establish the original
design concrete cover at each repair location?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Were all partial depth repair areas located on
the deck surface poured monolithically with placement of deck
overlay concrete?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Were other partial depth repair areas formed
and recast with an appropriate Alberta Transportation approved
concrete patching product?
20.4.2 Partial Depth Repair – Was a rubber paddled mortar mixer of

adequate size used for mixing where the volume of patching product
required exceeded the volume produced by three (3) 25 kg bags?
Note: The use of free fall mixers are not permitted.
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Did areas where concrete deterioration extended
completely through the deck, curbs or other elements, as determined
by the Consultant, have all unsound concrete removed and replaced
with new concrete?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Was exposed reinforcing steel sandblasted and
the area blown clean with oil-free compressed air?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Was reinforcing steel sandblasted to a white

metal finish?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Was epoxy coated reinforcing sandblasted clean,
and was the exposed reinforcing steel protected by installing discrete
galvanic anodes?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Was the epoxy coating repaired in accordance
with the requirements of Section 5, Reinforcing Steel?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Was additional reinforcing steel of the same type
installed at locations where the existing reinforcing steel suffered
sectional loss greater than 20%?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Did the Inspector determine splicing and/or
development requirements?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Was the underside of the deck, curbs and other
areas requiring full depth repair formed to neatly restore the original
lines of the concrete?
4
Compliance
Section
SSBC
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Did the Contractor saturate the approved area
with clean water for 30 minutes?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Was the concrete for the repair areas vibrated,
trowelled smooth, levelled flush to adjacent surfaces, and given the
appropriate concrete finish?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Did the concrete cure in accordance with
Subsection 4.23 of Section 4, Cast-In-Place Concrete?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – Were full depth repairs located on the deck
surface recast monolithically with placement of deck overlay
concrete?
20.4.3 Full Depth Repair – When conditions did not permit a monolithic pour
with the deck overlay concrete, was concrete placed to a depth such
that, once the subsequent overlay concrete was placed, the specified
design overlay thickness was achieved?
4 Deck Overlay
20.5.1 General – Was deck overlay concrete placed as shown on the
Drawings in accordance with the requirements of this specification
and Section 4, Cast-in-place Concrete of the SSBC?
20.5.3 Were two parallel profile lines the entire length of the bridge for each
construction stage provided by the Consultant +as follows:
 Line No. 1 located 1.0 m from curb face
 Line No. 2 located 0.3 m in from the opposite edge of
proposed pour
20.5.3 Were the stations of Line No. 1 and Line No. 2 square to each other?
20.5.3 Were additional profile lines produced when determined by the

Inspector?
20.5.3 Were stations established at 3.0 m intervals at the edges of existing

deck joints to be retained and/or at new deck joint locations?
20.5.3 Did profiles include 30 m of approach at each end of the bridge at

3.0 m intervals?
20.5.3 Was fluorescent paint used to mark profile locations on the existing
deck surface, curbs and approaches?
5
Compliance
Section
SSBC
20.5.3 Did the Contractor remove all exposed markings remaining after the
deck overlay work was complete?
20.5.3 Were screed rails properly set to match the gradeline provided by the
Consultant?
20.5.3 Were screed guide rails placed with enough rails for the entire
contemplated placement?
20.5.3 Did the screed "dry-run" confirm proper adjustment of the machine
and guide rails?
20.5.3 Were proposed longitudinal overlay construction joint locations

accepted by the Inspector prior to commencement of overlay
construction?
20.5.4 Prior to the commencement of concrete placement operations, was a
cement/silica fume slurry grout applied to all surfaces to be overlaid?
20.5.4 Was the slurry grout mixed and applied as outlined in Section 20.5.4
of the SSBC?
20.5.6 Did the Contractor employ adequate equipment in order to mix

concrete and provide a suitable, dedicated water source for the
purpose of batching concrete?
20.5.6 Were the mixers maintained in good condition at all times while the
work was being carried out?
20.5.6 Did the Contractor ensure that mixers were not loaded with more
than 3 m3 of concrete or in excess of 85% of its rated capacity,
whichever was less, and only operated at the speeds recommended
by the manufacturer?
20.5.6 Did the Contractor test the air content, slump and temperature of
each batch at the mixing site?
20.5.6 Was concrete discharged within 70 minutes after initial introduction of

water.
5 Concrete Placement
6
Compliance
Section
SSBC
20.5.7.1 Was adequate lighting provided for night pours?
20.5.7.1 Was concrete placed in such a manner that segregation of materials

did not occur?
20.5.7.2 Did the deck overlay concrete receive a Class 6 or a Class 4 finish as
specified?
20.5.7.3 Where an overlay did not terminate at a deck joint, such as on roof
slabs, was the overlay extended for a distance of 150 mm beyond the
required end of the overlay to a bulkhead?
20.5.7.4 Did the Contractor construct acceptable bulkheads at each
Longitudinal or Transverse construction joint location?
20.5.7.5 Was curing of overlay concrete in accordance with Subsection 4.23.3

of Section 4, Cast-In-Place Concrete of the SSBC?
20.5.7.6 After the concrete has cured for a minimum of 14 days, did the
Contractor apply a Type 1c sealer to all areas where a Class 6
surface finish had been applied and along trowelled gutter areas?
20.5.7.6 Was sealer applied in accordance with Subsection 4.26 of Section 4,
Cast-In-Place Concrete of the SSBC?
20.5.7.7 Opening to Traffic – Did the concrete reach a minimum strength of

35 MPa before being opened to traffic?
Signature Date
7
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 20, Deck Overlay And Concrete Rehabilitation
20.1 ACP milling operation. 20.2 ACP removed and locations requiring full or partial
depth repair are identified and marked out with
paint by the inspector.
20.3 Partial or full depth repair areas prepared. 20.4 Full depth repair area prepared.

20.5 Full and partial depth repair areas prepared. 20.6 Crew preparing repair areas.
20.7 Bonding agent applied to full depth repair area. 20.8 Full depth repairs are marked onto the deck soffit
as well.

20.9 Concrete being placed into repair area. 20.10 Concrete being placed into repair area.
20.11 Workers routing cracks in preparation for epoxy. 20.12 Cracks prepared for epoxy repair.

20.13 Cracks being filled with gravity flow epoxy. 20.14 Existing deck joint removal using pneumatic
hammer.
20.15 Deck joint set into position using erection angles. 20.16 Checking deck joint elevation.

20.17 Type I strip seal deck joint ready for concrete 20.18 Deck finishing machine for concrete overlay pour.
placement.
20.19 Overlay concrete placed and curing fabric being

installed.

REMOVAL AND SALVAGE OF BRIDGE STRUCTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
21.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 21-1

21.4 Workmanship and Handling of Materials ................................................................. 21-2
21.5 Removal ...................................................................................................................... 21-2
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 21, Removal and Salvage of Bridge Structures
21.1 General
Materials that are typically salvaged during bridge demolition include:
 CSP barrel sections, SPCSP plates, RCP and PBC sections

 Precast concrete girders
 Treated timber stringers and other members
 Structural steel girders and other members
All materials that are to be salvaged for Department usage will be listed in the Special
Provisions. All other bridge materials to be demolished become the responsibility of the
Contractor and must be disposed of accordingly.
The Contractor must provide a Demolition Plan that identifies the equipment used, protection to
the public, noise attenuation, protection to the roadway surface or watercourse, capture of
debris and protection of salvageable components.
The Inspector must discuss the list of items to be salvaged with the Contractor and must be
confident that the Contractor clearly understands the quantities and limits of the items to be
salvaged.
The Inspector must perform a pre-inspection of each component that is listed for salvage.
Photographs and sketches must be collected and reviewed with the Contractor before the work
begins. These records must be sufficiently detailed to confirm the pre-existing condition of the
salvageable components.
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that all utilities attached to or in the vicinity of the bridge
are accurately located, protected or relocated.
The following environmental considerations may exist:
 Restricted Activity Periods (RAP) may exist for watercourse crossings. The Inspector must
review all requirements of the Special Provisions. Underslung tarps or netting may be
required to prevent debris from entering the watercourse.
 Prior to final acceptance of the Work, the Contractor is required to tidy the site and restore
disturbed areas to the specified requirements or the original condition.
The following safety considerations may exist:
 The Contractor’s Demolition Plan must specifically identify and locate the mobile equipment
and must consider the safe lifting capacity of such equipment.
 Since concrete removal operations may produce flying and falling debris, it is important to
confirm that this area is isolated from the public.
September 2015 21-1

21.4 Workmanship and Handling of Materials
The methods of removal and salvage employed by the Contractor are his responsibility. The
Inspector must not advise the Contractor regarding demolition or salvage methods. However,
the Inspector must advise the Contractor that he is responsible for any damage caused to
salvageable items by his work methods.
The Inspector must be present at all times during demolition and salvage.
A variety of equipment is generally used to demolish and salvage bridge structure components,
such as hand-operated or excavator-mounted pneumatic hammers, cutting saws, torches,
wrecking balls, excavator-mounted hydraulic breakers, cranes, loaders and trucks.
The Inspector must review the Contractor’s methods of removal, handling, transporting and
stockpiling of materials. If the Inspector has concerns that the Contractor’s methods may cause
damage to salvageable items or damage to other infrastructure, the Inspector must discuss
these concerns with the Project Manager before any work commences.
The Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager that all traffic accommodation submissions
have been received and accepted prior to the start of the Work. The Inspector must be
knowledgeable of all traffic accommodation requirements and must confirm that all devices and
measures are in place prior to the start of the Work.
After the Work begins, if work methods are determined to unnecessarily cause damage to
salvageable components, the Inspector must instruct the Contractor to change his methods
before proceeding further.
The Inspector must be aware of any limiting physical condition or frailty of the components that
are listed for salvage. The Inspector must use fair judgment when determining if any damage to
components during salvage was caused by the Contractor’s equipment or carelessness, or
rather by the inherent weakness of the component. The Inspector must use judgment to
differentiate between major damage caused by careless handling from the slight damage
caused from normal wear-and-tear of a properly executed salvage.
Where public access or traffic must be maintained, the Inspector must confirm that proper
protection measures are in place. This may include underslung tarps, netting or screening.
Where falling debris may potentially cause damage to the roadway structure below, the
Inspector must confirm that cushioning materials or other protection measures are in place.
21.5 Removal
Materials listed for salvage must be dismantled one piece at a time by removing all connecting
hardware and grout. Removal of multiple components from the structure at one time is not
permitted.
SPCSP plates must not be bent, and bolts must be removed in a manner that does not damage
the plate or the coating. After removal, the sections of plate must be properly stacked and
nested with separators so that there is no plate-to-plate contact. During excavation, care must
be taken to prevent gouges, dents or coating damage.
CSP barrel sections must not become distorted due to excavation, lifting or loading. During
excavation, care must be taken to prevent gouges, dents or coating damage.
September 2015 21-2

RCP and PBC sections must be carefully winched apart so that no spalling occurs at the joints.
Precast concrete girders must be individually dismantled using the following requirements:
 Grout must be carefully chipped-out in shear keys and connector pockets, taking care not to
damage reinforcing
 Connector bolts must be removed
 Precast concrete girders must be carefully jacked away from adjoining girders
 Drift pins and other hardware must be removed prior to girder removal
Precast concrete girders must be lifted only at the designed lifting points with the top of each
unit in the up position at all times, and they must be supported only on their designed bearing
points. If the original lifting hardware has been removed, slings or other lifting methods must be
proposed by the Contractor and accepted by the Project Manager.
September 2015 21-3

Section 21 – Removal and Salvage of Bridge Structures Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
Were the conditions of bridge materials to be salvaged reviewed and
documented with photographs?
Did the Contractor tidy up the site and restore all disturbed areas to
their original state or to the specified requirements?
21.1 Prior to removal of bridge structures, did the Contractor obtain a list of
materials to be salvaged and permission to proceed, from the
Consultant?
Note: Treated timber, structural steel, corrugated steel pipes and
precast concrete units may be considered for salvage and when
required will be specified in the special provisions of the contract.
2 Workmanship and Handling of Materials
21.2 Did the Contractor perform the work in a manner that prevented
damage to or loss of materials listed for salvage?
3 Excavation
21.3 Did the excavation conform to Section 1, Excavation of the SSBC?
21.3 Did the culvert excavation extend to the invert elevation, and was the
width at this level the culvert width plus 3.0 m?
21.3 Did the bridge abutment excavation extend to the ground level at the
front of the abutment, and were the sides excavated at one horizontal
to one vertical or as required for stability?
4 Removal
1
Section 21 – Removal and Salvage of Bridge Structures Check Sheet
Compliance
Section
SSBC
21.4.1 Were all the salvaged materials listed by the Consultant removed and
stockpiled, either at the site or at the Contractor’s storage area, and
was the work area left in a tidy and safe condition?
21.4.2 Were the materials listed by the Consultant for salvage dismantled
piece by piece removing all nails, bolts, drift pins and other hardware?
Note: Torch cutting to remove hardware or to dismantle these
materials is not permitted.
21.4.2 Were SPCSPs dismantled to yield lengths not exceeding eight (8)
metres?
21.4.2 Were CSPs dismantled by removing the couplers to achieve the

original fabricated lengths?
21.4.2 Were precast concrete units individually removed after disconnecting

the units by removing the grout from shear keys and connector
pockets and by removing connector bolts, drift pins and other
hardware?
21.4.3 Were materials in bridge structures not listed for salvage disposed of
in a manner and location acceptable to the Consultant?
21.4.3 Did the Contractor provide written acceptance from the owners of the
disposal site(s) and evidence of their acceptance of the disposal site
cleanup?
21.4.3 Was the portion of bridge abutments and piers located above natural
ground level completely removed, and the portion 1 m below the
natural ground level left in place?
Signature Date
2
21.1 Concrete box girders salvaged. Girders lifted at 21.2 Concrete box girders salvaged. Girders lifted at
their bearing points. their bearing points.
21.3 Concrete box girder salvage. 21.4 Demolition of substructure. Piles are removed or
cut to specified elevation below streambed.

21.5 Girder removal. 21.6 Girder removal.

PAINTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
22.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 22-1

22.4 Bridge Inspector’s Record ........................................................................................ 22-3
22.5 Bridge Inspector’s Role ............................................................................................. 22-3
22.5.1 Existing Bridge Structure ................................................................................ 22-4
22.5.2 Inspector’s Equipment .................................................................................... 22-4
22.5.3 Contractor’s Proposed Schedule and Methodology ........................................ 22-4
22.5.4 Inspector’s Safety and Proper Access ............................................................ 22-4
22.5.5 Inspection and Measurements ....................................................................... 22-4
22.5.6 Product Information ........................................................................................ 22-5
22.5.7 Visual Standard for Surface Preparation ........................................................ 22-5
22.5.8 Documentation ............................................................................................... 22-5
22.6 Inspection of the Painting Procedures ..................................................................... 22-5
22.6.1 Inspecting the Enclosure ................................................................................ 22-5
22.6.2 Assessment of Containment Design and Function in the Field ....................... 22-6
22.6.3 Components of a Containment System .......................................................... 22-6
22.6.4 Bridge Washing .............................................................................................. 22-7
22.6.5 Surface Preparation ....................................................................................... 22-7
22.6.6 Material/Pre-Painting ...................................................................................... 22-9
22.7 Paint Application.......................................................................................................22-10
22.7.1 Environmental Conditions............................................................................. 22-10
22.7.2 Application ................................................................................................... 22-11
22.7.3 Brush, Roller and Mitt Application................................................................. 22-11
22.7.4 Common Paint Problems.............................................................................. 22-12
22.7.5 Inspector’s Responsibilities .......................................................................... 22-14
22.7.6 Project Manager’s Responsibilities ............................................................... 22-14
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 22, Painting
22.1 General
Cleaning and painting a bridge structure has become an expensive operation. There is growing
emphasis on environmental, health and safety related issues. Consequently, it is more
important now than ever to obtain the longest possible life from bridge coatings. Like all quality
products, bridge coatings require adequate specifications, high quality materials, proper usage,
maintenance of equipment and effective inspection.
Most of the premature coating failures are caused by either deficient surface preparation or
coating application. This makes it clear that the Inspector is a vital part of the bridge painting
process. The Inspector diligently carrying out duties can help assure that the painting project
that is inspected will perform throughout its expected service life.
The following emission levels will be specified in the Special Provisions and detailed in the
SSPC-Guide 6:
 Minimum percentage (%) of blasting spoil that must be recovered.

 Class of containment required.
 Method to monitor the quantity of emissions escaping the enclosure.
The Inspector must be aware of the environmental considerations governing the project and
confirm that paint being removed and materials used to accomplish the removal are contained
and properly and safely disposed of in accordance with the applicable laws and regulations.
The Contractor must comply with all Federal, Provincial and Municipal air, soil and water
pollution control regulations, as well as any requirements included with the environmental
permits issued for the project. At a minimum, the Contractor must:
 Identify background contamination levels.

 Prevent noise, air, soil and water pollution/contamination.
 Contain and clean up any paint, fuel, oil or chemical leaks or spills.
The Contractor must ensure that no deleterious material enters waters during his painting
operations. Some of the basic requirements to achieve this include:
 Detergent used to wash bridge structures must be biodegradable and not harmful to fish.
 Paint debris and other solids washed from the bridge structure require filtering out.
 De-icing salts washed from the bridge structure must be allowed to settle.
 Siltation of water must be avoided.
The Contractor must obtain approval from Alberta Environment before withdrawing water from
any stream or waterbody.
The Contractor must take all necessary precautions to fully protect the environment, the
workers, traffic, parked vehicles, adjacent property and other portions of the bridge structure
from damage caused by cleaning debris, blast cleaning materials, dirt, dust equipment oils,
solvent, acids, burning matter and paint drifts, drops, spray or spatter.
September 2015 22-1

If the Contractor’s activities contravene the environmental permit conditions, the Inspector must
require the Contractor to stop work and the Inspector must immediately contact the Project
Manager.
Refer to the current edition of Alberta’s Occupational Health and Safety Act, Regulation and
Code for specific approved safety requirements for a typical paint project, including but not
limited to:
 Health and Safety Plan

 Hazard Assessment, Elimination and Control
 Specifications and Certifications
 Chemical Hazards, Biological Hazards and Harmful Substances
 Confined Spaces
 Cranes and Hoists
 Emergency Preparedness and Response
 Entrances, Walkways, Stairways and Ladders
 Fall Protection
 Fire and Explosion Hazards
 First Aid
 General Safety Precautions
 Joint Work Site Health and Safety Committee
 Lifting and Handling Loads
 Noise Exposure
 Overhead Power Lines
 Personal Protective Equipment
 Powered Mobile Equipment
 Rigging
 Safeguards
 Scaffolds and Temporary Work Platforms
 Toilets and Washing Facilities
 Ventilation Systems
 Violence
 Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
The Contractor is responsible for meeting all public and occupational health and safety
requirements and must:
 Develop an appropriate traffic accommodation strategy through the work zone.

 Develop and implement a Lead Health and Safety Program (LHASP) for any project
involving lead paint removal.
The Inspector is responsible for identifying to the Contractor any safety violations that he
discovers and to take necessary action where there is non-compliance.
September 2015 22-2

22.4 Bridge Inspector’s Record
The Inspector must keep an accurate record of the following information:
 Environmental conditions
o Ambient air temperature

o Steel surface temperature
o Relative humidity
o Dew point
o Wind speed and direction
 Record of quality control test results from Contractor and any independent quality assurance
testing pertaining to:
o Abrasive blasting media sieve analysis, petrographic/contaminant analysis, etc.

o Product Material Data sheets and Material Safety Data Sheets
o Colour, gloss, and formulation testing for each paint batch
o Toxic Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) tests
o Background contamination levels of air, soil and water
o Chloride, soluble ferrous ion and sulphate levels after wash cleaning
o Surface profile (replica tape) after blast cleaning
o Blotter tests for compressed air dryness
o Blast spoil recovery calculations
o Areas of bridge painted each day
o Batch numbers for paint applied to each bridge area
o Thinners used, and in what quantities
o Record location of each Wet Film Thickness (WFT) taken, rejected or accepted
o Record location of each Dry Film Thickness (DFT) taken, rejected or accepted
 Agreements between the Contractor and private landowners, and designated hazardous
waste disposal sites pertaining to disposal areas for hazardous and non-hazardous
materials.
 Traffic disruptions, queuing of the traffic or minor traffic mishaps through the work zone.
22.5 Bridge Inspector’s Role
As with any assignment, the first step is to become familiar with the scope of the project by
reviewing the Plans, specifications and any Special Provisions for the project. In addition, the
Inspector must become familiar with the project site, including the areas noted that may be
difficult for equipment access as well as sensitive areas such as homes, schools, playgrounds
and other areas of public activities. Painting operations generate dust, solvent fumes and noise.
Every effort must be made to minimize the impact of these activities on the surrounding
community. This can best be accomplished through the cooperative effort between the
Contractor and the community itself. The Contractor’s schedule must be reviewed, noting when
weather conditions that could negatively impact the proposed work. Concerns and questions
must be brought to the attention of the Project Manager. Some issues may need to be referred
to the Department’s Project Sponsor.
September 2015 22-3

22.5.1 Existing Bridge Structure
The Inspector must inspect the bridge structure to be painted to identify the existing coating
type, thickness, adhesion, localized rust and presence of mill scale. Areas that will be hard to
coat — such as confined areas, or areas with weld spatter, weld flux, skip welds, rough welds,
sharp corners or laminations — must be identified and discussed with the paint contractor.
These areas may require special treatment, such as grinding all burrs and sharp edges prior to
painting or painting by mitt in difficult to access locations.
Localized rust areas are shown to be prone to premature coating failure. Extra effort must be
made by the paint contractor to ensure that proper surface preparation and coating thickness
are achieved. The presence of mill scale under the existing paint indicates a potential need for
additional surface preparation.
22.5.2 Inspector’s Equipment
The Inspector must inventory, inspect and calibrate inspection equipment to make sure these
are in good working order. It is good practice to calibrate equipment, such as Dry Film
Thickness (DFT) meters, in coordination with the Contractor to prevent disputes. Backup
equipment and batteries must be readily available.
22.5.3 Contractor’s Proposed Schedule and Methodology
In reviewing the Contractor’s schedule and methodology, the Inspector must verify that the
Contractor understands the magnitude of the Work to be performed and is prepared to do the
Work in a satisfactory manner.
Further to the OH&S safety requirements, the Contractor must have a Health and Safety Plan
for all projects involving paint removal. The Inspector must discuss the following with the
Contractor:
 Monitoring and sampling requirements.

 The manner in which the Contractor is planning to protect his workers and the environment
from contamination, including shower/washing facilities, work clothing, debris containment
and handling of emergencies.
 Proper location of the Contractor’s recycling dust collection and storage equipment to
ensure that they are out of the way of potential vehicle collisions. The Contractor should be
aware that lead-contaminated waste cannot be stored on site for more than 90 days.
 Any concerns with the work schedule and mitigating measures if required.
22.5.4 Inspector’s Safety and Proper Access
The Contractor must provide safe and proper access for the Inspector at all times. Inspection
staff must not be expected to risk their safety at any time on the job site.
22.5.5 Inspection and Measurements
The Inspector must discuss the inspection and measurement procedures, especially those
related to payment with the Contractor.
September 2015 22-4

The Inspector must:
 Inform the Contractor of the inspection control points that must be inspected and approved
before he is allowed to proceed. The control points are usually:
o after a water blast and SP-1 cleaning

o after the completion of the surface preparation
o after each individual paint coating application, prior to overcoating
 Identify potential inaccessible areas and discuss a method of acceptable treatment with the
Contractor.
22.5.6 Product Information
The Contractor must provide copies of the Product Material Data Sheets and Material Safety
Data Sheets for the paint system and any solvents or cleaning materials that will be used during
the project. These sheets contain the information on the materials to be used and are necessary
to complete the material inspection.
22.5.7 Visual Standard for Surface Preparation
SSPC publishes reference photographs (SSPC-VIS 1) for steel surfaces prepared by dry
abrasive blast cleaning, which can be used as the reference standard. A good practice is to
have the Contractor blast a section of the bridge or a separate steel plate and seal with clear
coat. This can be used as an on-site reference for the rest of the project.
22.5.8 Documentation
The Inspector must document all discussions and instructions given at the pre-construction
meeting and especially any agreements that were reached that may modify the Contract
proposal or specifications requirements.
22.6 Inspection of the Painting Procedures
22.6.1 Inspecting the Enclosure
A containment system, or enclosure, is needed to prevent the debris generated during surface
preparation from entering the environment and to facilitate its gathering and disposal.
Enclosures are generally made up of combinations of cover panels, scaffolds, supports, screens
and tarps. The containment system requirements will be specified in the Special Provisions and
described in SSPC-Guide 6. The complexity of any given enclosure will vary depending on the
amount and type of paint being removed, the method of paint removal being employed and the
degree of surface preparation that is specified. For simple scraping operation, ground-covering
tarps may be sufficient, while for a blasting operation, the enclosure must be a designed
structure often including a negative pressure ventilation system.
The Inspector must check the adequacy of the containment system to confirm that:
 The work area be clearly distinguishable from the surroundings.

 Tarps are overlapped with seams fastened, are in good condition and are free of holes.
 During blasting operations with negative pressure, the tarps have a concave inward
appearance.
September 2015 22-5

 The containment is tightly sealed to prevent any dust from escaping. Check the ground
around the containment.
 Dust collectors are operated at the rated capacity or at a capacity consistent with the
ventilation design of the containment system.
 The containment is able to support workers, construction loads, spent abrasive loads and
wind loads without placing undue stress on the bridge structure. Confirm that the
containment is constructed in accordance with an approved plan stamped by a professional
engineer.
22.6.2 Assessment of Containment Design and Function in the Field
Containment for abrasive blast and other paint removal operations are designed to protect the
surrounding environment and the public from debris and potentially hazardous material during
paint removal. These containment structures are intended to help contain and collect the lead-
containing debris for proper treatment and disposal.
 The standard features of containment systems are described in detail in the SSPC Guide 6.
 The purpose of the containment is so that a conscientious and diligent job of containing and
collecting debris is done. While 100% containment is often not practical nor necessary,
close to 100% containment can be achieved with appropriate specifications, designs and
implementation.
 Containment of abrasive blast involving lead is mandatory and is required by law.
 Fugitive emissions of abrasive blast dust must be limited to 3% (for example, 15 minutes
over an 8-hour work shift). These emissions can be controlled by properly designing and
maintaining the containment and ventilation system.
 If high or ultra-high pressure water jetting is used, the Contractor is responsible for
performing all work and disposing of all waste water and debris properly. This may include
filtering the waste water and folding the cloth filters so as to contain all debris prior to
disposal. These requirements will be stipulated in the Special Provisions.
22.6.3 Components of a Containment System
Support Structure: Containment can be a scaffold from the ground or rigged to hang from the
bridge structure. The key issues to consider are structural integrity under wind load, abrasive
waste load and dynamic loads on the bridge. Access, air movement and visibility must also be
considered.
Ventilation: Proper ventilation is necessary to facilitate workers and inspectors within the
containment structure. Ventilation also reduces the concentration of lead dust in the work
environment and makes clean-up operations easier prior to painting.
Lighting: Proper lighting is required to address safety concerns and facilitate proper surface
preparation and painting procedures.
Debris Handling: The manner in which spent debris is collected is a key element to the quality
and timeliness of the job. It is critical to clear debris and dust prior to paint application.
Acceptable or suitable debris handling is a major part of a bridge painting project.
September 2015 22-6

Air Movement: Air movement is necessary for work inside an enclosure to avoid a build-up of
dust. High dust concentrations impair visibility and increase hazardous exposure levels to
workers. Air movement is dependent upon the capacity of dust collectors, the volume of air input
by makeup fans and blast nozzles, and interference to airflow caused by the bridge structure
itself.
Debris Storage: Spent shot blasting waste resulting from the removal of paint from steel
surfaces is classified as a hazardous material unless it can be shown to contain less than 5 ppm
of lead. It is subject to strict disposal requirements and can only be temporarily contained and
stored at the site when the Environmental Permit states that this is acceptable.
22.6.4 Bridge Washing
Prior to any surface preparation procedures, the Contractor must hand-clean all surfaces to be
coated, including removing all organic materials such as bird droppings and other non-structural
items attached to the bridge. Oil, grease and road tar must be removed manually by solvent
cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP1. Any remaining areas contaminated with residual oil or
grease must be cleaned with an approved environmentally friendly, biodegradable detergent.
The entire area to be coated must be washed clean of road spatter, salts and other surface
contaminants using water of sufficient pressure and volume.
The Contractor must determine the level of cleanliness achieved after washing by testing for
chloride levels, ferrous ion levels and sulphate levels on the cleaned steel and runoff water at
the lower extremities of the steel being cleaned.
Chloride contamination of the cleaned surface will be determined by using either the Quantab
Method or by Kitagawa Tube testing. The results must be less than 7 µg/cm2.
Ferrous ion levels will be determined using ferrous ion test strips, and the results must be less
than 10 µg/cm2.
Sulphate contaminants will be determined by use of a barium chloride optical comparator, or

another method approved by the Consultant, with a maximum level of 17 µg/cm2.
22.6.5 Surface Preparation
Surface preparation is typically accomplished by abrasive blasting; however, it can also be

achieved in some circumstances by water jetting methods. The Society for Protective Coatings
(SSPC) has developed a nomenclature for the different types of surface preparation methods:
 SP-1 denotes “solvent” cleaning and can refer to solvent wiping, water washing or steam
cleaning. The surface is cleaned to remove oil, grease, etc.
o Lint-free clean rags and solvent must be used to assess the acceptability of the
surface.
 SP-2 denotes hand tool cleaning in small areas. Hand tools are used to remove loose mill
scale, loose rust, loose or otherwise defective paint, weld flux, slag and spatter. This is done
either by brushing, sanding, chipping or scraping the surface. Tightly adhering rust, mill
scale and paint are allowed to remain.
o A dull putty knife must be used to assess the acceptability of the surface.
September 2015 22-7

 SP-3 denotes power tool cleaning. This is similar to SP-2 except power tools are used to
clean larger areas.
o A dull putty knife must be used to assess the acceptability of the surface.
 SP-7 denotes abrasive brush off blast cleaning. The resulting surface must be free of oil,
grease, dirt, loose mill scale, loose rust and loose coatings.
 SP-6 denotes abrasive commercial blast cleaning. The resulting surface must be free of oil,
grease, dirt, all rust, mill scale, paint and foreign matter except for slight shadows, streaks or
discoloration caused by rust stains, mill scale stains and tight residue of previous coatings.
 SP-10 denotes abrasive near-white blast cleaning. The resulting surface must be free of oil,
grease, dirt, all rust, mill scale, paint and foreign matter, leaving only slight stains from rust
and mill scale.
 SP-5 denotes abrasive white metal blast cleaning. The resulting surface must be free of oil,
grease, dirt, all rust, mill scale, paint and foreign matter, leaving only a uniform gray-white
color.
 SP-12 denotes high and ultra-high pressure water jetting. There are four levels of visual
surface cleanliness identified in this standard:
o WJ-1: Surface free of all previously existing visible rust, coatings, mill scale and
foreign matter and have a matte metal finish.
o WJ-2: Surface cleaned to a matte finish, with 5% of area containing only
randomly dispersed stains of rust, coatings and foreign matter.
o WJ-2: Surface cleaned to a matte finish, with at least 2/3 of the surface free of all
visible residues (except mil scale) and allows 1/3 of the area to contain only
randomly dispersed stains of rust, coatings and foreign matter.
o WJ-4: Surface free of all loose rust, loose mill scale and loose coatings.
Prior to blast cleaning, the Contractor must demonstrate that the compressed air is dry, typically
by blowing air on blotter paper.
Visual and written standards can often be interpreted differently by contractors and inspectors. It
is therefore important to clarify the standards to be used for the project.
The anchor pattern needs to be checked to ensure that proper paint adhesion will occur. Profile
inspection requires the use of a surface profile gauge or a micrometer and replica impression
tape. Comparison coupons can also be used for a qualitative visual comparison of the profile. It
is particularly important to verify that the required surface profile has been achieved if water
jetting has been used for the surface preparation as this preparation method does not impart
any additional surface profile to the underlying steel surface.
Pack rust between mated steel surfaces must be cleaned and all connections treated with
sealant and caulk to provide a watertight seal along the top edge.
The Contractor must only prepare as much surface area as can be coated with primer the same
day. If unprimed surfaces must be left overnight due to unusual circumstances, the Contractor is
required to re-clean the steel using a light blast cleaning.
September 2015 22-8

22.6.6 Material/Pre-Painting
Shelf life is considered as the length of time from date of manufacture that paint will remain
usable when stored in its container. The date printed on the can must be checked to make sure
the shelf life of paint has not expired. Consequences of exceeding the shelf life include:
 Gelling
 Odour
 Changes in viscosity
 Formation of lumps
 Pigment settling
 Colour separation
 Liquid separation
Paint must be stored and secured in a climate-controlled environment that keeps its
temperature between 10°C and 25°C. If more stringent storage requirements are indicated on
the manufacturer’s Material Product Data Sheets, they must be adhered to. The Contractor’s
paint storage site must be equipped with a high/low thermometer for monitoring the required
temperature range for proper paint storage.
Paint storage exceeding the acceptable temperature range can cause changes in viscosity and
shelf life. Water-based paint will spoil when stored below freezing temperatures. Solvent-based
paint will gel or become flammable or explosive when stored at high temperatures.
‘Pot life’ is considered as the length of time that paint is useful after opening its original package
for single component systems, and the length of time after it has been mixed for multi-
component systems. Pot life is dependent on temperature, and can be affected by humidity and
multi-component reaction times. Exceeding the pot life can result in a variety of application and
performance problems. The Contractor must never mix more paint than can be applied within
the specified pot life.
The Inspector must witness and document the mixing operation:
 All paint must be thoroughly mixed in a clean container in correct proportions.

 The bottom of the original containers must be checked for evidence of unmixed pigment.
 Unused paint must not be left in buckets or spray pots; instead, it must be placed in a clean
container and re-mixed prior to use.
 Zinc rich coatings require that the spray pot has adequate agitation at all times.
Thinner may be added to paint to achieve optimum viscosity for proper paint application. The
Product Material Data Sheets will indicate the specific type and maximum amount of thinner to
be used.
The Inspector must witness and document any addition of thinner. Adding too much thinner can
prevent proper application thickness, cause runs and sags, and may extend the cure time of the
paint. Addition of thinners may also result in the mixture exceeding acceptable limits for Volatile
Organic Compounds (VOC). Wet film thickness measurements during paint application will vary
with the amount of thinner added.
Drying time of paint refers to the length of time a coating is sensitive to local damage. The
Drying Schedule on the Product Material Data Sheet indicates how long the paint is:
September 2015 22-9

 Dry to touch – the paint will not collect dust.

 Dry to tack free – the paint does not feel sticky and can be handled without damage.
 Dry to re-coat – time the paint needs to dry until applying the next coat of paint.
 Paint drying time varies significantly with temperature.
Curing time of paint refers to the length of time required to reach full integrity and be ready for
service. Re-coating before enough time has passed can seriously affect the curing and integrity
of both the layer being over-coated and the layer being applied. Some paint has a maximum
time to re-coat. Exceeding the maximum time limit can jeopardize adherence of the topcoat.
22.7 Paint Application
Once the level of surface preparation has been achieved and approved and the quality of the
coating system has been verified, the Contractor can proceed to paint. If painting proceeds
before approval has been given, any applied coatings must be blasted off.
To prevent “rust-back” or “flash-rust” of the cleaned surface, the first coat of paint must be
applied as soon as possible after blast cleaning and on the same day that the steel was
cleaned. Painting must begin at a practical time to avoid weather changes that could cause
significant adverse changes to the surface condition of the steel.
Stripe painting must be applied along all sharp changes in steel surfaces either prior to or after
the primer coat has been applied.
Faying surfaces may require special treatment, coatings or no coatings. The Inspector needs to
be aware of these areas and what treatments are required.
22.7.1 Environmental Conditions
The Inspector must record ambient conditions every four hours to confirm that the paint is
applied and allowed to dry and cure under reasonable environmental conditions. Excessively
high or low temperatures or the presence of surface moisture, including frost, can have a
detrimental effect on the performance of the paint.
 The ambient temperature range to ensure proper curing will be specified in the Product
Material Data Sheet for each paint material; however, the paint must not be applied if the
ambient temperature is at or below 4°C, or if it is possible that the air temperature may drop
below 0°C before the paint has dried.
 The acceptable surface temperature range for the paint products will also be specified in the
Product Material Data Sheets; however, the paint must not be applied if the surface
temperature is above 50°C. The minimum surface temperature is usually given in the
Product Material Data Sheets as a certain amount of degrees above the dew point
temperature, but it must be at least greater than 5°C with the ambient temperature rising.
This dew point spread is used to ensure that there is no moisture present on the steel prior
to paint application.
 Maximum or minimum permissible relative humidity is given in the Product Material Data
Sheets. A dew point meter or a sling psychrometer is used to determine the relative
humidity.
 Heavy winds can cause airborne overspray to be carried onto adjacent properties and result
in premature drying of the paint. If heavy winds are present, it may be prudent to delay the
painting operation or restrict spray application.

22.7.2 Application
The following are spray application good practices:
 The spray pot must have two pressure regulators: one for pot pressure and one for
atomization pressure. The pot pressure must be sufficiently high enough to provide enough
material at the spray gun. The atomization pressure regulator must be set just high enough
to atomize the material. Too high a setting will result in the paint drying before it hits the
surface. Too low a setting will cause the paint to clump and could clog the gun.
 The spray gun must be held perpendicular to the work surface. The ideal distance between
spray nozzle and surface can vary depending on the equipment used; however, it must be
kept uniform, and the common habit of supplementing the painter’s reach by increasing the
spraying distance is unacceptable.
 Angling the gun or holding it too far away could result in the paint drying before it hits the
surface. The spray pattern must overlap the previous pass by approximately 50%. A good
paint applicator will make a pass of the spray gun by moving his arm and body rather than
rotating his wrist to "fan" the gun. The technique of the operator and the adjustment of the
gun must be observed by the Inspector for any deficiencies that would result in non-uniform
thicknesses.
 Surfaces that are hard to reach by spray applications must be brushed or swabbed with
coating.
22.7.3 Brush, Roller and Mitt Application
The material used in brushes or rollers must be tested with the paint to confirm that they are
chemically compatible with the paint being used. In general, natural bristled brushes are
recommended for solvent-based paints, while synthetic bristles work better for waterborne
paints. The nap of the roller must be as recommended by the coating manufacturer for the
desired finish.
Brushing must be done as neatly as possible to ensure a uniform coating thickness. Rolling
must be done in a "W" pattern and finished by rolling in one direction. Rolling the coating out
over too large of an area must be avoided as this can cause thin spots or holidays.
The Inspector must:
 Confirm that all areas with runs, drips, pinholes, fisheyes, blisters, blushing, wrinkling or
overspray are repaired immediately.
 Confirm that the Wet Film Thickness (WFT) is periodically checked, due to variances to the
spray pressure, the "load" of paint on the brush or roller, and the orientation of the surface
being painted.
It is important to check the Dry Film Thickness (DFT) after the application of each coat as this is
the most direct measure of the Contractor’s work. The thickness must be checked at five
locations for every 10 m2 of coated area. Three separate gauge measurements must be taken
and averaged to determine the paint thickness reading at each location. Individual gauge
measurements that are unusually high or low that cannot be repeated can be discarded. The
paint thickness at any location must be reported as the average of the three individual gauge
measurements. Each paint thickness reading must be not less than 80% of the specific
thickness nor greater than 150% of the specified thickness (SSPC-PA2 Level 4 Restriction
Level).

It is important to monitor thickness for areas too thin or too thick, as it is not necessarily true that
"thicker is better". Excessively thick applications can cause the coating to sag or fail to achieve
a full cure.
22.7.4 Common Paint Problems
Runs
When this defect occurs, the wet paint film runs in rivulets. It is caused by over thinning, extra
slow thinners, improperly cleaned surface or the surface being too cold. Holding the spray gun
too close to the surface and depositing too much paint on the surface can also cause runs.
Remedy: The affected area must be sanded or washed off and refinished, and then the surface
must be thoroughly cleaned. Thinning must be carried out as recommended using specified
solvents.
Sags
Sags consist of a heavy thickness of paint that has slipped and formed curtains on the surface.
This is caused by insufficient thinner, insufficient drying time between coats, low air pressure
causing insufficient atomization, spray gun too close to work or out of adjustment.
Remedy: The affected area must be sanded or washed off and refinished. Reduce viscosity as
recommended, use proper thinning solvent, adjust the air pressure and spray gun for correct
atomization and keep the spray gun at correct distance from work.
Blistering
There are many causes of blistering. Some of them are:
 Failure of the topcoat to stick to the primer.

 Painting over oil or moisture on the surface that prevents proper bonding of paint to the
surface.
 Applying too much paint at one time so that the solvents in the coating cannot escape
before the top of the coating has dried.
 Coating has been cleaned by steam and the steam has penetrated it and caused
debonding.
 Finger prints on metal.
 Trapped air when very thick coatings are being applied.
Remedy: The blistered area must be sanded down and refinished.
Blushing
Blushing occurs when the surface of the coating turns milky. This is almost always a reaction of
the coating with surface moisture or excessive moisture in the air. Using fast or unbalanced
thinners in high humidity is the primary cause of blushing.
Most epoxies, regardless of the curing system, can be made to blush because of moisture if the
curing agent is not properly mixed in and allowed to set a while before application.

Remedy: Blushing may be overcome by the addition of a "retarder", which is a high boiling,
slow evaporating solvent. However, in high humidity, this might fail and then painting must stop.
Fisheyeing
This is the separation of the coating over slick surfaces or over oil or greasy surfaces. Silicone
contamination from lubricants, greases, etc., can also cause this to happen, but this is rare.
Fisheyes allow corrosion to start because of insufficient paint coverage.
Remedy: The affected area of wet paint must be washed off, and the surface must be cleaned
properly. The source of silicone must be removed. Silicone contamination on the surface must
be removed by washing off with solvent. A fisheye preventer must be used in paint sprayed over
old film containing silicone.
Pinholing (Bubbling, Solvent Pops)
These defects are quite common to coating application. Pinholing often is the result of water
contamination in the air line or of a solvent imbalance (a solvent that is drying too quickly). If the
solvent is too “fast”, the coating will not have enough time to flow out before it becomes a solid
and little holes are left in the coating. In addition, trapped solvents, settling of pigments and
insufficient atomization of the material may cause pinholing.
Bubbling and pinholing are quite common with inorganic zinc coatings. These coatings are quite
porous, and when a topcoat is applied over them, the pressure of the coating filling the voids in
the zinc film forces air to the surface.
Remedy: Often, the best remedy is to use a tie coat of primer thinned considerably, or to thin
the topcoat 25% to 50%. If allowed to dry, this will seal the porous surface of the zinc-rich primer
and allow the final topcoat to be applied without problem. If the use of a tie coat is not
acceptable, a mist coat of the topcoat over the surface before following it with a full wet coat
may prevent the problem. This acts very much like a tie coat. In extremely severe cases of
pinholing, it may be necessary to sand down to a smooth surface and refinish.
Prevention: The drain valve of the air line extractor must be opened daily to allow drainage of
collected moisture. The internal cleaning section of older type extractors must be removed and
cleaned at regular intervals. Paint needs to be applied in uniform, normal coats to allow proper
evaporation of solvents. Using recommended thinners and increasing air pressure for proper
atomization should prevent pinholing.
Wrinkling
This may occur either in cold weather when the thickened paint is improperly applied, or in hot
weather when the topcoat dries quickly but the paint underneath is still wet. The resulting
stresses cause the paint to wrinkle.
Remedy: Paint must be applied within prescribed weather requirements.

22.7.5 Inspector’s Responsibilities
 Review specifications, drawings and special provisions.

 Become familiar with the project site, including the surrounding area.
 Inspect the bridge structure for existing coating type, thickness, adhesion and presence of
mill scale.
 Inventory and calibrate inspection equipment.
 Attend pre-construction meeting.
 Ensure that the Paint Contractor provides all relevant Product Material Data Sheets and
Material Safety Data Sheets and be familiar with the information they contain.
 Ensure ladders and scaffolding are in good condition and that they provide safe access to all
necessary areas. Any required alternations must be immediately brought to the Contractor’s
attention.
 Locate areas that will be difficult to coat.
 During blasting operations, check that no dust leaks are visible outside the enclosure. If
working inside the enclosure, ensure appropriate breathing apparatus has been provided.
 During blasting operations, ensure that no blast debris is present on the ground or in any
waterways.
 Ensure hazardous waste is stored away from public access and in an area where it is not
vulnerable to being struck by traffic or wind drift.
 Check that the anchor pattern is as specified.
 Check that the surface preparation is as specified.
 Check that all dust has been removed from the surface to be painted.
 Check that coatings are as specified.
 Check that coatings are correctly mixed/thinned.
 Check that coatings do not exceed pot life.
 Check that stripe coating has been completed.
 Check that correct WFT is being done.
 Check that correct DFT has been achieved.
 Check that there are no flaws.
 Check that the weld treatments have been acceptably done.
 Record weather conditions.
 Ensure Contractor’s work schedule and work procedure conforms to the contractual
requirements.
 Ensure Contractor complies with Environmental Permit conditions and Occupational Health
and Safety requirements.
 Review containment system and methods of spoil collection and acceptability of disposal
areas.
 Communicate any concerns or questions to the Project Manager as required and refer
issues to the Department’s Project Sponsor.
22.7.6 Project Manager’s Responsibilities
The Consultant will address the following issues in the pre-construction meeting:
 The nature of the work and its effects on the surroundings, including possible mitigation
measures.
 Contractor’s method of operation, including equipment and personnel.
 Contractor’s schedule – discuss weather related concerns.
 Contractor’s Traffic Accommodation Strategy.

 Contractor’s Lead Health and Safety Program if lead paint is present.

 Proper storage of material and equipment, including lay down area.
 Location of recycling, dust collection and storage of equipment.
 Inspector safety, including provision of safe access and lead contamination monitoring in
accordance with OHS requirements.
 Inspection and measurement procedures, including control points.
 Areas to be coated/not coated.
 Treatment of faying surfaces.
 Identification and treatment of inaccessible areas.
 Product Material Data Sheets and Material Safety Data Sheets for all relevant materials.
 Visual or other standards to be met – Discuss Contractor’s preparation of field reference
sections.

Section 22 – Painting Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
1.1 Have the specifications, drawings and special provisions been
reviewed?
1.2 Was the inspection equipment inventoried and calibrated?
1.3 Were all relevant Material Safety Data Sheets obtained and
reviewed?
1.4 Were weather conditions recorded?
1.5 Were containment systems, methods of spoil collection and

acceptability of disposal areas reviewed?
2 Contractor Qualifications
2.1 22.3 Did the Contractor conform to one of the following four competency
levels as specified in the Special Provisions of the Contract?
 CQ1: The Contractor or painting subcontractor must have
certification in good standing with the Society for Protective
Coatings (SSPC) under SSPC-QP2.
 CQ2: The Contractor or painting subcontractor must have
certification in good standing with the Society for Protective
Coatings (SSPC) under SSPC-QP1.
 CQ3: The Contractor or painting subcontractor acceptance
will be based on submission of documented experience,
which should include but not be limited to: the names of
owners, projects and dates of previous bridge painting
projects where containment and disposal of blasting spoil
was practiced, copies of any relevant environmental permits
and any citations for failure to comply. A list of qualified
personnel responsible for the actual paint removal and
application will be required. Once accepted, no personnel
changes shall be made without the Consultant’s written
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
acceptance. Permission for the Consultant to interview the

owners, environmental departments and personnel listed
above. Falsifying information in the submission will be
grounds for disqualification of the bid.
 CQ4: No specific pre-qualification requirements.
3 Environmental Considerations
3.1 22.5.1 Was the percentage of blasting spoil, specified in the contract Special
Provisions and detailed in the SSPC-Guide 6, recovered?
3.2 22.5.2 Did the Contractor ensure that existing paint to be removed and any
abrasive material used to accomplish the removal was contained and
properly and safely disposed of in accordance with the applicable
laws and regulations?
3.3 22.5.2 Did the Contractor comply with all Federal, Provincial and Municipal
air, soil and water pollution control regulations when cleaning and
repainting the structural steel and when disposing of any waste
generated and performed additional work to modify containment or
disposal procedures to ensure compliance with all applicable laws
and regulations?
3.4 22.5.3 Did the Contractor conform to the requirements of the Alberta
Transportation Fish Habitat Manual?
3.5 22.5.4 Was the containment system for the blast cleaning and painting
installed such that the minimum specified percentage of the blast
spoil and paint removed, as listed in the Special Provisions, was
contained?
3.6 22.5.5 Did the Contractor take necessary precautions to fully protect the
environment, the workers, traffic, parked vehicles, adjacent property
and other portions of the structures from damage caused by cleaning
debris, blast cleaning materials, dirt, dust, equipment oils, solvents,
acids, burning matter and paint drifts, drops or spray and spatter
during cleaning and painting procedures?
3.7 22.5.6 Was an Environmental Auditor retained by the Consultant to assure
compliance with the requirements of the Environmental Permits
and/or Screening Report and to monitor the performance of the
containment system in particular and that of the Contractor?
3.8 22.5.7 Did the Contractor identify locations in which to establish background
soil, water/snow and air contamination levels in his work proposal?
3.9 22.5.7 After the Contractor’s work proposal was reviewed and accepted by
the Consultant and prior to commencement of the work, did the
Contractor collect — in the presence of the Consultant and at
locations most likely affected by the work, such as at the dust
collector, recycling unit, key points along the spoil material transfer
lines and spoil material storage areas — soil, water/snow and air
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
samples from the project site for analysis?

Was a minimum of three (3) samples collected at each location and
sent to an accredited laboratory approved by the Consultant for
analysis, and was analysis consistent with regulatory reporting
requirements and results submitted to the Consultant?
3.10 22.5.7 Were any additional soil, water/snow and air samples requested
where contamination is suspected?
Were results received within a week?
3.11 22.5.7 Did the Contractor collect a minimum of two (2) post-construction
composition test samples at all established background locations,
after painting was done and equipment removed, and was analysis
performed at the approved laboratory using the same test methods
used for initial background analysis?
Did analysis show any adverse effect on the environment requiring
remediation be carried out to the full satisfaction of the Department
and the Consultant?
4 Permits, Licences and Approvals
4.1 22.6 Did the Contractor obtain the necessary permits, licences and
approvals, and conform to all requirements of Environmental
Screening Reports, Municipal bylaws, Provincial and Federal
Environmental Protection laws, for all work carried out?
4.2 22.6 Did the Contractor comply with all regulations, such as but not limited
to, environmental permits, the Worker's Compensation Act, the
Occupational Health and Safety Act, Regulation and Code that
control the exposure of workers to chemical hazards?
5 Work Proposal
5.1 22.7 Did the Contractor submit a work proposal to the Consultant for
review and acceptance a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to the pre-
construction meeting, and did it include:
 Schedule
 Sequence of operations
 Traffic accommodation strategy
 Site lay down plan, including placement of equipment
 Proposed sampling locations for establishment of
background contamination levels
 Bridge washing strategy
 Storage, handling and disposal of new and contaminated
blasting material
 Methods of weighing blasting material on and off the project
 Method of separating hazardous and non- hazardous
blasting spoil
 Sample documentation for tracking the disposal of
hazardous waste
 Final destination of hazardous waste
 Chosen coating system from the Alberta Transportation
Product List – Approved Products “Bridge Coating Systems
(Paint)”
3
Compliance
Section
SSBC
 Bridge load evaluation report
5.2 22.7 Did the Contractor submit drawings signed and sealed by a
Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Alberta detailing
his containment structure, scaffolding, platforms, swing stages and
attachments for the Consultant’s review?
6 Work Site Health and Safety
6.1 22.8 Did the Contractor develop and implement a Lead Health and Safety
Program (LHASP) that met all the requirements of the Occupational
Health and Safety Act and Regulations (Attention is drawn to OH&S
Bulletin MSB-06 and in particular the chemical requirements) and all
other Municipal, Provincial and Federal Regulations that may apply
when working in a hazardous environment?
6.2 22.8 Did the Contractor provide shower and change facilities for all
personnel associated with the Contract, in accordance with governing
regulations and ordinances?
6.3 22.8 Were respirators furnished by the Contractor and used when such
equipment was necessary to protect the health of employees?
Were extra protective clothing and clean respirators available for use
by visitors to the work site?
6.4 22.8 Did the Contractor designate a Health and Safety officer to act as the
primary on-site monitor of the program and to ensure that the LHASP
was implemented on a daily basis and that all work on the site was in
compliance with the LHASP?
7 Protection of Surfaces
7.1 22.10 Did the Contractor protect and maintain the painted surfaces until
acceptance of the entire project?
8 Areas Not To Be Painted

8.1 22.10 Unless noted in the Special Provisions, were any surfaces, such as
surfaces that will be cast into concrete (ie. the top and sides of the
top flange of girders or the side of expansion joints) in contact with
concrete, sliding metal to metal contact bearing surfaces and mating
surfaces of spherical bearings, galvanized surfaces, concrete
surfaces adjacent to painted steel surfaces such as sidewalks and
the underside of bridge decks?
9 Work Execution
9.1 22.12.1 Temporary Attachments – Were all clamps or other devices attached
to the structure, padded or designed such that they did not mark or
damage the surface?
4
Compliance
Section
SSBC
9.2 22.12.2 Containment System – Did the containment system and its operation
meet or exceed the class of containment specified in the Special
Provisions?
9.3 22.12.3 Containment System Monitoring
(1) Abrasive Blasting
Did the Contractor maintain a documented reporting system to
provide gross weights, tare of containers and the calculated weight of
the material provided to and removed from the structure?
9.4 22.12.3 Did the Contractor take whatever measures were necessary to
prevent the release of dust or spent material from ground tarpaulins
and other components of the containment enclosure during moving or
removal?
9.5 22.12.3 Was debris collected on temporary work platforms, ground cloths or
walls of the containment structure removed each workday with a
vacuum system equipped with High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA)
filters adequately sized to collect all spent material?
9.6 22.12.3 Did the Contractor provide a temporary platform located directly
underneath the area enclosed for surface preparation cleaning,
power tool cleaning or blast cleaning and paint application?
9.7 22.12.3 Did the containment system fail to function properly at any time?
9.8 22.12.3 (2) Water Blasting

Was the filtration or collection and treatment of water used in the
cleaning as specified in the Special Provisions?
Was the wastewater filtered through a cloth system of specified
porosity, and when the cleaning was completed, were the cloth filters
carefully folded to contain the debris collected and disposed of as
outlined in Section 22.16 of the SSBC?
9.9 22.12.4 Was the ventilation system used as specified in the Special
Provisions and described in the SSPC-Guide 6?
9.10 22.12.5 Did the Contractor have monitoring equipment to ensure that the
containment was performing to the required level as specified in the
Special Provisions and as described in the SSPC-Guide 6?
10 Surface Cleaning
10.1 22.13 Did the Contractor carry out surface cleaning on all steel designated
to receive a coating system and adjacent surfaces that could
contaminate surfaces prior to commencement?
10.2 22.13 Was oil, grease and road tar removed manually by solvent cleaning
in accordance with SSPC Specification SP1?
5
Compliance
Section
SSBC
10.3 22.13 Was residual oil or grease cleaned with an approved biodegradable
detergent?
Did the Contractor supply copies of the Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) sheets of the proposed cleaning products for review and
acceptance?
10.4 22.13 Were all areas to be coated washed clean of road spatter, chlorides
and other contaminates using water of sufficient pressure and volume
to flush the contaminants from the structure?
10.5 22.13 Were areas of cleaned steel tested for chloride contaminants, soluble
ferrous ions and sulphate contaminants?
10.6 22.13 Did the Contractor submit the test results to the Consultant for review
and acceptance prior to commencing surface preparation operations?
10.7 22.13 Was wash water captured, filtered and disposed of in compliance
with all applicable laws and regulations?
11 Surface Preparation
11.1 22.14.1 Abrasive Blast Cleaning – Prior to abrasive blast cleaning, did the
Contractor demonstrate to the Inspector that the air was moisture
free and that air driven power tools that were properly lubricated in
accordance with the respective manufacturer’s instructions, did not
deposit lubrication onto the surface being prepared?
11.2 22.14.1 Was blast cleaning of steel surfaces in preparation for painting in
accordance with the SSPC Surface Preparation Standards specified
in the Special Provisions?
11.3 22.14.1 Did the Contractor grind all burrs and sharp edges to the satisfaction
of the Consultant?
11.4 22.14.1 Did the Contractor prepare only as much surface as can be coated
with primer the same day?
11.5 22.14.1 Did any areas require compressed air cleaning before the application
of any coat of paint?
12 Pack Rust
12.1 22.15 Were pack rust areas cleaned and treated with an approved
penetrant and caulked to form a water tight seal along the top edge
and the two sides of plates involved?
12.2 22.15 Was the type of penetrant and caulking used compatible with the
paint system used, applied according to the manufacturer’s
instructions, and was it accepted by the Consultant?
6
Compliance
Section
SSBC
12.3 22.15 Were all connection plates, regardless of whether pack rust was
evident or not, treated with an approved penetrant and caulked?
13 Disposal of Blasting Spoil

13.1 22.16 Was the collection, storage and disposal of blasting residue carried
out in compliance with Federal, Provincial and Municipal laws?
13.2 22.16 Was all waste residue collected during the surface preparation
process stored at the site in containers acceptable to the Inspector in
an acceptable area and protected at all times with waterproof covers?
13.3 22.16 Were collected and stored waste residues sampled and tested by the
Contractor in accordance with the Toxic Characteristic Leachate
Procedure (TCLP) test, and were test results for each batch provided
to both the Consultant and the Department before disposal of waste
was undertaken?
13.4 22.16 Did the Contractor provide documentation to the Consultant that all
hazardous waste was disposed of, in conformance with all applicable
regulations governing the disposal of such materials, consisting of a
certificate of disposal that provided information such as the quantity
of material, truck manifests, way bills and other information
necessary to clearly document the transportation of, and the final
disposal method and disposal site used?
14 Priming and Painting
14.1 22.17.1 Did the Contractor apply stripe paint along all sharp changes in steel
surfaces, including but not limited to edges of flanges, stiffeners,
bracing, plates, bolts, nuts, washers, rivets, plates and sections with
sharp profile?
Was stripe coat applied over the primer or intermediate coat tinted to
contrast the underlying coat?
14.2 22.17.2 Was paint applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions,
and when required, was the coating manufacturer's representative
available at the site to provide guidance and solve problems?
14.3 22.17.2 (Was paint applied when the air and/or steel temperatures were
above 4°C and 50°C?
14.4 22.17.2 Was paint applied to dry, frost-free surfaces when there was no risk
of dew and the dry bulb temperature exceeded the wet bulb
temperature by more than 5°C and the ambient temperature was
rising?
14.5 22.17.2 Was only the anticipated quantity of paint required for one day’s
work opened on that day?
Note: Leftover paint must not be left exposed to air, and any paint
that becomes oxidized, thickened, ropy, lumpy or dirty must be
discarded.
7
Compliance
Section
SSBC
14.6 22.17.2 Was the paint mixed in a manner that ensured breaking up of all
lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment and a uniform
composition, and was it agitated often enough during application to
keep the pigment in suspension?
14.7 22.17.2 Was any paint left in spray pots, painter’s buckets, etc., overnight?
14.8 22.17.2 Did the Contractor store paint safely in a location that kept its
temperature between 10°C to 25°C?
14.9 22.17.1 Was paint applied by spraying, brushing, rolling or a combination of

these methods?
Where surfaces were inaccessible, were sheepskin mitts, specifically
manufactured for this purpose, used?
14.10 22.17.2 Was touched-up primer dry before finish coat paint was applied?
14.11 22.17.2 Were all portions of the paint system within the range of film
thicknesses in which it was originally approved?
14.12 22.17.2 Was the wet film thickness checked at the time the paint was applied
to ensure that the proper dry film thickness was obtained?
Was dry film thickness verified with a Type 2 constant pressure probe
magnetic gauge, calibrated in accordance with SSPC-PA 2, as
defined by SSPC-PA 2?
15 Quality Control
15.1 22.18 Did the Contractor have an experienced quality control person solely
dedicated to actively monitoring and correcting the work of his
employees whenever cleaning, surface preparation and coating
application was taking place?
15.2 22.18 Did the Consultant provide a NACE certified quality assurance
inspector to monitor and accept the work, and did the Contractor
provide safe and free access to all areas of the work in all stages of
completion?
15.3 22.18 Was all cleaning and surface preparation inspected and accepted
before painting?
Was each coat thoroughly dry and mil thickness accepted by the
Consultant prior to applying an additional coat?
16 Acceptance
16.1 22.20 Were any painted surfaces showing defects, listed below, that
resulted in rejection?
(1) Runs, sags, holidays or shadowing.
(2) Evidence of poor coverage at bolts, plate edges, lap joints,
crevices, pockets, corners and re-entrant angles.
8
Compliance
Section
SSBC
(3) Surfaces that were struck, scraped, spotted by rain or otherwise

damaged.
(4) Surfaces that exhibited an objectionable texture, such as orange
peel, mud cracking, fish eyes, etc.
(5) Surfaces damaged by overspray.
17 Repair
17.1 22.21 Did the Contractor carry out all repairs to the satisfaction of the
Inspector by cleaning all damaged paint and re-applying the system
using all coats typical to the original paint system?
17.2 22.21 Were support points for work platforms or containment structures
painted with the accepted paint system, or did the Contractor submit
a proposed alternate paint system and application procedure for the
painting of touch points?
18 Site Clean-Up
18.1 22.22 Did the Contractor leave the entire site in a neat and tidy condition
with all paint cans, masking materials and other debris removed from
the site and disposed of in an acceptable manner?
Signature Date
9
Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction Section 22, Painting
22.1 Environmental containment system. 22.2 Environmental containment system
22.3 Chloride test. 22.4 Washing steel.

22.5 Salt test. 22.6 Girder after sandblasting.
22.7 Primer applied to girder. 22.8 Applying finish coat of paint.

22.9 Typical paint setup.

STRUCTURAL LUMBER AND PILING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
23.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 23-1

23.2 Material ....................................................................................................................... 23-1
23.3 Inspection by the Contractor .................................................................................... 23-2
23.4 Acceptance................................................................................................................. 23-2
ATTACHMENTS
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 23, Structural Lumber and Piling
23.1 General
The Contractor must supply all dimensional structural lumber and round timber piling, including
the independent inspections required by the referenced standards and material specifications.
The Inspector must review and accept the quality of materials at the work site prior to any
materials being incorporated into the Work.
23.2 Material
The Inspector must be familiar with the following material specifications:
 Planking (Strip Deck): Species Group HEM-FIR conforming to stress grade “No. 1
Structural Joists and Planks”, 20% conforming to stress grade No. 2 of each size length
supplied.
 Sheeting, Retainers, Nailers and S 1 S 1 E (Sanded 1 Side 1 Edge) Subdeck: Coast
Douglas Fir or Pacific Coast Hemlock species conforming to stress grade “No. 1 Structural
Joists and Planks”, 15% conforming to stress grade No. 2.
 Rough Caps: Coast Douglas Fir species conforming to stress grade “Structural Posts and
Timbers”.
 Framed Subcaps: Coast Douglas Fir species conforming to stress grade “Structural Posts
and Timbers”.
 Wheel Guards: Coast Douglas Fir or Pacific Coast Hemlock species conforming to stress
grade “No. 1 Structural Beams and Stringers”, 15% of BM conforming to stress grade No. 2.
 Rough Stringers: Coast Douglas Fir species conforming to stress grade “Selected
Structural Beams and Stringers”.
 Struts and Handrails Posts: Coast Douglas Fir or Pacific Coast Hemlock species
conforming to stress grade “No. 1 Structural Posts and Timbers”.
 S 1 S 1 E Cleats: Coast Douglas Fir or Pacific Coast Hemlock species conforming to stress
grade “No. 2 Structural Joists and Planks”.
 Railings: Coast Douglas Fir or Pacific Coast Hemlock species conforming to stress grade
“No. 1 Structural Joists and Planks”.
Pilings are to be cut from sound trees of Douglas Fir or Pine.
 Piling lengths are normally 6.1 m, 12.2 m and 18.3 m.

 Corresponding tip diameters are approximately 230 mm, 205 mm and 180 mm +/- 12 mm.
 Corresponding butt diameters are approximately 305 mm, 305 mm and 330 mm +/- 12 mm.
 Sapwood (the part of the section where the sap flows, towards the outer edge of the
circumference) thickness is to be 12 mm but not less than 10 mm.
 Knots that are loose, show signs of decay or clustered are defects and cause for rejection.
 Pile straightness is checked with a stringline. A line drawn from the centre of the butt and to
the centre of the tip must lie within the body of the pile.
 Pitch streaks that extend through the length of pile is cause for rejection.
 Material may be kiln dried or seasoned, provided that moisture content is no greater than
19%.
 Material is to be incised and pressure treated with 100% creosote, unless it is planking
material, in which case it must be treated with Chromate Copper Arsenate.
 Wood must be stored properly, be free of dirt and not allow water to pond. Conditions that
allow rapid drying must be avoided.
 Wood must be given three coats of creosote to repair all cuts.
September 2015 23-1

Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 23, Structural Lumber and Piling
23.3 Inspection by the Contractor
The supplier is responsible for the inspection of the material by an independent inspector who is
qualified and has a minimum of 10 years of experience. All material must be inspected prior to
and after the treatment. All material must be stamped by the inspector identifying the inspection
date and that the material meets or exceeds the required specifications. The stamp must be
placed at the end of each member at a location that is clearly visible, even when the material is
in stockpile.
23.4 Acceptance
 All material is subject to inspection by the Inspector prior to usage.

 Where S 1 S 1 E or S4S (sanded 4 sides) size is specified, the material must be not more
than 6 mm scant per side.
 When 15% “No. 1” or 15% “No. 2” grade is allowed, this means that 85% must be the
specified grade and not more than 5% of the 15% below “No. 1” or 15% “No. 2” grade or
there will exist the need for re-inspection.
September 2015 23-2

Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction Section 23, Structural Lumber And Piling
23.1 Treated strip decking properly stacked on timber 23.2 Strip deck partially removed.
dunnage.
23.3 Strip deck replacement ongoing. 23.4 Strip deck replacement ongoing, boards staggered.

Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction Section 23, Structural Lumber And Piling
23.5 Completed strip deck. 23.6 Treated timber pier cap replacement.
23.7 Treated timber pier cap with splice bearing on

treated timber subcap.

SIGN STRUCTURES AND PANELS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
24.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 24-1

24.3 Materials and Fabrication .......................................................................................... 24-1
24.4 Construction .............................................................................................................. 24-2
24.4.1 Foundation ..................................................................................................... 24-2
24.4.2 Assembly and Erection ................................................................................... 24-2
24.4.3 Sign Panels .................................................................................................... 24-3
24.5 Bridge Inspector’s Role ............................................................................................. 24-3
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 24, Sign Structures and Panels
24.1 General
Sign structures may contain sign panels and, less commonly, permanent electronic message
boards. Sign structures are generally of two types: overhead bridge or cantilevered.
Cantilevered sign structures have only one foundation pile, whereas overhead bridge sign
structures have two foundation piles. Overhead bridge sign structures are used when the length
limitation for cantilevered signs has been reached. Sign structure supports consist of tubular
columns. Sign structure cantilever arms consist of tubular sections. Overhead bridge sign
superstructures are either tubular sections or trusses, often with an access platform.
Sign panels are made of extruded aluminum and are bolted to the sign structure after erection
using stainless steel hardware.
Sign structures are founded on drilled cast-in-place concrete pile bases, secured by an anchor
rod system.
Sign structures may include illumination.
The following safety considerations may exist:
 Sign structure erection involves the use of cranes and other heavy equipment.
 Inspection at heights is required from aerial lifts or platforms.
 Open excavations exist with drilled piles.
 Temporary stabilizing measures must be deemed adequate before traffic is permitted under
sign structures with non-tightened anchor rod nuts.
24.3 Materials and Fabrication
Sign structures are considered ‘major’ steel components and are inspected during fabrication by
the Consultant’s Level III visual welding inspector. Sign structure components are also Non-
Destructive Tested (NDT) and are pre-assembled prior to galvanizing and delivery. Prior to
accepting sign structure components delivered to site, the Inspector must confirm that the
material and testing reports have been accepted by the Project Manager.
Each sign structure must have a unique identification plaque. The Inspector must confirm that
the plaque is fabricated and located as shown on Standard Drawing S-1682.
The Inspector must confirm that the materials delivered to the site meet the specified
requirements, including:
 Bolting hardware to ASTM A325

 Reinforcing steel to CSAG30.18 Grade 400
 Concrete Class C Type HS or HSb
 Sika 212 grout or equivalent
The Inspector must thoroughly inspect all components for damage to coating or base plate
protection that may have occurred during transport, handling and installation. Any damage to
the galvanized coating must be metallized.
September 2015 24-1

24.4 Construction
24.4.1 Foundation
The Inspector must review the requirements of Sections 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 of the Standard
Specifications for Bridge Construction and this Manual for related requirements.
The Inspector must confirm that the concrete mix design has been accepted.
The foundation piles must be accurately located by the Contractor’s survey, which is checked by
the Inspector. It is important that the location of the piles be located as shown on the Plans. The
distance between piles for bridge sign structures must be precise so that the anchor rod
assemblies are centred within the piles. The location of the piles relative to the roadway must be
accurate to maintain the required distance to the travel lanes, specified as the Clear Zone
distance.
Prior to the start of any drilling for foundation piles, the Inspector must confirm that the
Contractor has accurately located and managed any utilities in the vicinity of the Work.
The foundation piles are designed by the Contractor. The Inspector must confirm that the pile
dimensions and bearing soils are consistent with those shown on the shop drawings.
If the pile hole is extended deeper than shown on the shop drawings, the reinforcing steel cage
must be revised accordingly. The pile diameter must be large enough to compensate for any
construction tolerances. The reinforcing steel cage must be chaired securely so that it is in the
precise location specified.
The pile hole must be dry at the time of concrete placement. The top of the concrete pile
foundations must project between 700 mm and 850 mm above the finished grade on the traffic
side. The Inspector must determine the final ground height at the pile location and confirm the
projection requirements.
Anchor rods are assembled into a single unit for installation. The assemblies are positioned by
survey to the locations specified. For bridge sign structures, the actual distance between the
column base plates is measured to determine the required positioning of the anchor rod
assemblies. Plywood templates may be used to accurately position and secure the assemblies
before they are cast into the pile. The Inspector must confirm that the assemblies are correctly
located.
Anchor rod projection must be checked by the Inspector. Anchor rod projection must take the
grout pad depth into account.
24.4.2 Assembly and Erection
No field welding is permitted at any location on the sign structure.
The sign structure is often assembled at the site and erected as a completed unit; however,
some large sign structures are assembled in place. It is important that the sections be handled
in a manner that prevent bending and twisting of the component sections. The Inspector must
confirm that the Contractor’s assembly staging area, lifting slings and equipment are suitable.
Sign structures must be erected as soon as they are delivered to site. If they are not erected
immediately, they must be stored on dunnage and protected so that they do not suffer damage
to the coating or distress to the components.
September 2015 24-2

After the sign structure is erected and prior to panel installation, temporary measures must be
employed to maintain the structure’s stability until the anchor rod nuts are acceptably tightened.
The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor’s temporary measures have been accepted by
the Project Manager. The Inspector must monitor the use of temporary stabilization measures to
confirm that the structure does not pose a risk to public safety.
The proper placement of the grout pad is important to the performance and protection of the
structure. The Inspector must review the Contractor’s grout placement procedure. The
procedure must contain requirements for placement, temperature, extending grout with
aggregate and curing. It is important that the Inspector witness the entire grouting operation,
and that he confirms that the grout is placed so that it is fully in contact with the underside of the
base plate with no air pockets.
Anchor rod nuts are tightened by using the turn of nut method after the grout has achieved the
design strength. The Inspector must confirm that all nuts meet the tightening requirements.
24.4.3 Sign Panels
The Inspector must review the shop drawings to confirm the location of the sign panels. The
Inspector must confirm that the panels meet the specified requirements. Panels are normally
installed after the sign structure has been erected. Following panel installation, the Inspector
must confirm that all hardware has been acceptably installed and the clearance requirements
have been met. The signs must be positioned accurately over the travel lanes and angled
towards traffic.
24.5 Bridge Inspector’s Role
The Inspector must check with the Project Manager to confirm that the following items have
been submitted and accepted or confirmed:
 Shop drawings
 Material mill certificates
 Repair procedures for damaged galvanizing
 NDT and visual inspection reports
 Traffic accommodation strategy
 Grouting procedure
The Inspector must confirm the following:
 Bolts and hardware markings meet the specified grades.

 Utilities have been located.
 Accurate lay-out survey has been completed.
 Lighting conduit has been properly installed.
 Identification plaque has been installed.
 Pile concrete placed into a ‘dry’ hole. Depth of pile is as designed.
 Pile concrete has correct projection and has attained sufficient strength prior to erection of
structural components.
 Accurate placement and alignment of anchor rod assembly, including projection and
plumbness.
 Base plate corrosion protection has been applied.
 Structure has been set on galvanized shims with 75 mm cover to the edge of the grout.
September 2015 24-3

 Components are stored and handled appropriately. Fabric slings are used.
 Bolts and hardware meet the grades specified.
 Turn of nut method was used to check bolt tightening.
 Grouting was compliant with procedure.
 Panels are at the correct location, orientation and clearance. Correct connection hardware
has been used.
 Coating damage has been repaired acceptably.
 Protective traffic measure, if required, were installed correctly.
September 2015 24-4

Section 24 – Sign Structure and Panels Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 General
24.1 Did the Contractor, prior to design and construction, confirm
underground and overhead utility conflicts with the sign bases and
support structure and immediately inform the Consultant of any
conflicts?
2 Erection
24.2.3 Was any part of the sign structure damaged in shipping or during
erection?
24.2.3 Was the substructure concrete cured a minimum of three (3) days,
and did it achieve 80% of the 28 day specified concrete strength?
24.2.3 Were all components handled with care, and were any additional
supports required to maintain stability until the anchor rod nuts were
fully tightened?
24.2.3 Was the structure set accurately on galvanized shims on top of the
concrete foundation, and did shim stacks have 75 mm of cover from
the edge of grout pads?
24.2.3 Were base plates grouted with Sika 212 flowable grout or equivalent
with top of the finished grout elevation not higher than the underside of
the column base plate?
Note: Dry pack methods of constructing grout pads will not be
accepted.
24.2.3 Were hand hole bolts coated with anti-seize lubricant?
24.2.3 Did bolted parts fit solidly together when assembled?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
24.2.3 Were contact surfaces free of dirt, grease, burrs, pits and other
defects preventing solid seating of the parts?
24.2.3 Were connections assembled with a hardened washer under the bolt
head or nut, whichever is the element turned in tightening and
surfaces of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head and nut parallel?
24.2.3 Were bolts tightened to at least the minimum bolt tension as shown in
Section 24.2.3, Table 1, Bolt Tension of the SSBC?
24.2.3 Were all structural bolts tightened by using turn-of-nut method as

outlined in Table 1, Bolt Tension of the SSBC?
24.2.3 Were enough bolts brought to a “snug tight” condition to ensure that
the parts of the joint were brought into full contact with each other?
24.2.3 Were remainder of bolts placed in holes and brought to snug tight?
24.2.3 Was additional tightening done based on the specified nut rotation
and using a tolerance of 1/6 turn (60 deg) over, nothing under?
3 Foundation
General – Section 3, Bearing Piles; Section 4, Cast-In-Place
Concrete; and Section 5, Reinforcing Steel shall apply.
24.2.4 Did all reinforcing steel conform to CSA G30.18-M92 Grade 400?
24.2.4 Were anchor rods installed true and plumb in one complete assembly
and accurately positioned and secured to prevent movement or
displacement during concreting procedures?
Note: No welding of any component is allowed.
24.2.4 Where necessary, did top anchor nuts have bevelled washers to
ensure full contact with the top of the column base plate?
24.2.4 After grout attained sufficient strength, were the anchor rod nuts
tightened an additional 1/3 turn, past the snug-tight condition?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
24.2.4 Were all voids, including the slots and annular space around anchor
rods in the base plate, filled with an approved corrosion inhibiting
paste?
24.2.4 Were the grout pockets filled and grout pads constructed using
Sika 212 flowable grout or approved equivalent?
24.2.4 Was the grout pocket 25 mm deep and the total grout thickness not
less than 75 mm?
24.2.4 Was the grout packaged in waterproof containers with the production
date and shelf life shown, and mixed, placed and cured in strict
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations?
24.2.4 Was the sign structure erected in a manner that addressed all safety
issues, including the interim period between erection grouting and final
tightening of anchor rod nuts?
24.2.4 After erection, did the Contractor place grout pockets and pads and
tighten anchor rod nuts as soon as possible after grout achieved
sufficient strength?
24.2.4 Was adequate safe traffic accommodation provided until tightening

and grouting was complete?
24.2.4 When minimum air temperature or substrate concrete in the

immediate area of grouting was expected to be below 5°C, did the
Contractor employ provisions for grouting in cold weather?
4 Sign Panels
24.3.3 Did the Contractor erect the sign panels onto the sign structures as
shown on the Plans, ensuring that the signs were located correctly
over the indicated lanes and that the correct vertical clearance was
maintained?
24.3.3 Did the Contractor provide the T-stiffeners, J-clips, bolts, flat washers,
nylon insert lock nuts, slip arresting bolts and all of the necessary
hardware to securely assemble the sign and connect the sign panels
to the sign structure, as detailed on Alberta Transportation drawing
TCS-A4-335A and shown on the accepted shop drawings?
24.3.3 Was the face of the sign panels cleaned prior to acceptance?
3
Signature Date
4
Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction Section 24, Sign Structures and Panels
Drilling foundation pile. Checking depth of pile.
Anchor rod assembly. Threaded ends wrapped in Plastic chairs used to maintain bottom cover and
poly to maintain cleanliness, and tubes sealed to prevent cage form punching into ground at base.
protect from concrete paste.

Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction Section 24, Sign Structures and Panels
Installation of plain reinforcing steel cage. Anchor rod assembly installed. Angle iron on
formwork to hold anchor rod assembly at correct
elevation.
Sign structure erection. Workers tightening bolts to

connect horizontal and vertical columns using
aerial lifts.

MECHANICALLY STABILIZED EARTH WALLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
25.1 General ..................................................................................................................... 25-1

25.3 Special Considerations ........................................................................................... 25-1
25.4 Components ............................................................................................................ 25-1
25.5 Materials – General.................................................................................................. 25-3
25.5.1 Precast Concrete Fascia Panels – Transport and Handling ....................... 25-3
25.5.2 Soil Reinforcement .................................................................................... 25-4
25.5.3 Crushed Aggregate Backfill ....................................................................... 25-4
25.6 Construction – General ........................................................................................... 25-4
25.6.1 Ground Improvements ............................................................................... 25-5
25.6.2 Levelling Pad............................................................................................. 25-5
25.6.3 Fascia Panel Installation and Wall Erection ............................................... 25-5
25.6.4 Placement and Testing of Crushed Aggregate Backfill .............................. 25-6
25.6.5 Placement of Soil Reinforcement .............................................................. 25-6
25.6.6 Drainage ................................................................................................... 25-7
25.6.7 Geomembrane .......................................................................................... 25-7
25.7 Construction Records ............................................................................................. 25-7
25.7.1 Final Shop Drawings ................................................................................. 25-7
25.7.2 Supplier’s Construction Inspection Records .............................................. 25-7
25.7.2.1 Qualifications and Duties of On-Site Personnel ......................................... 25-7
25.7.2.2 Hold Points and Engineering Documentation ............................................ 25-8
25.7.3 Identification of Corrective Action .............................................................. 25-8
25.8 Inspector’s Tools ..................................................................................................... 25-8
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
FIGURES
 Figure 25 – 1: Typical MSE Wall Section

 Figure 25 – 2: MSE Wall Installation (Components)
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 25, Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls
25.1 General
Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) walls are gravity-type earth retaining walls. They are
commonly used at bridge abutments where headslopes are otherwise constructed. Gravity walls
depend on their mass to resist earth pressure. The MSE wall structure consists of compacted
lifts of reinforced engineered fill that act together to form a single mass. The fill material is
composed of granular backfill that has special properties of strength, drainage and
corrosiveness. The soil reinforcement consists of either galvanized steel or geosynthetic
material that is placed between lifts of the engineered fill material. The walls typically
incorporate a fascia surface that does not resist earth pressure but protects the wall face. This
fascia consists of precast concrete panels that are mechanically connected to the soil
reinforcement. MSE walls are constructed with a slightly battered near-vertical face.
Specific safety hazards that may exist during MSE wall construction include:
 Inhalation of silica dust from crushed aggregate backfill.

 Working in close proximity to earthmoving and compaction equipment.
 Working at heights at wall face.
 Crushing from precast concrete elements.
25.3 Special Considerations
MSE type retaining walls are unique. The basic structural components are standardized by the
specification, but their details are proprietary. Suppliers of MSE wall components produce wall
designs based on the Consultant’s project-specific design parameters and specifications.
MSE walls are:
 Durable and able to achieve a design life of 100 years.

 Generally tolerant of some differential settlements.
 Sensitive to changes in backfill moisture content, requiring adequate drainage systems to
prevent hydrostatic pressures from acting on the fascia panels.
 Usually built as single-stage walls where the fascia panels are installed at the same time as
backfill and are in direct contact with backfill — these are generally used where long-term
settlement is not an issue.
 Occasionally built as two-stage walls where a temporary face is constructed with
geosynthetic or wire wrap, and fascia panels are installed after backfilling and after long-
term settlement has occurred.
25.4 Components
Following is a detailed description of the typical components of the MSE wall, as illustrated in
Figure 25-1 and 25-2.
Engineered Foundation: The Special Provisions will often require ground improvement
measures to the soil beneath the wall. This may include compaction of soils at the bottom of
wall elevation, de-watering and drying, or it may include excavation and backfill of native soil
below the wall. Foundation improvements must strictly follow the project requirements since
these are intended to reduce wall settlement.
September 2015 25-1

Crushed Aggregate Backfill Material: This material is specially designed to meet the
structural requirements for strength, durability and drainage. This material is placed and
compacted in lifts of specific depth since adequate compaction is required to achieve the
specified density and strength. Electrochemical properties (pH, resistivity, limits of sulphates,
chlorides, organics) are specified to control the corrosiveness of the backfill material so that the
soil reinforcement is not prematurely corroded. Backfill material that has higher permeability
may be specified for placement immediately behind the fascia panels. This drainage layer
usually extends 2 m from the wall face, in plan view as shown in Figure 25-1. The drainage
layer material must not have more than 5% of material passing the 80 um sieve size.
Common Backfill Material: This is fill material that is placed into the excavation beyond the
crushed aggregate backfill material. The common backfill is placed in lifts simultaneously with
the crushed aggregate backfill.
Soil Reinforcement: Reinforcement is placed horizontally throughout the crushed aggregate

backfill. The reinforcement material is placed directly onto a lift of compacted backfill. The length
and spacing of reinforcement is specified by the proprietary wall designer. The reinforcement
material acts compositely with the backfill, resulting in a wall structure that acts as a gravity unit.
The reinforcement may consist of galvanized steel strips or mesh, or geosynthetic polymer grid.
The reinforcement is mechanically connected to the precast concrete fascia panels by means of
a proprietary system of bolting, clipping or lapping.
Concrete Levelling Pad: The levelling pad is not reinforced and is cast onto the prepared
excavated surface. It does not act as a bearing footing; rather, it provides a neat surface at
design grade from which to set the bottom course of fascia panels. The top surface of the pad is
marked with a chalk line before panel erection to maintain horizontal alignment. The panels are
placed so that they are centred on the pad.
Precast Concrete Fascia Panels: Panels may be produced in a variety of size and shape
configurations. Panel faces may be cast with either a smooth form finish or a textured motif
finish. Panel edges have a ship-lap detail that provides a gap at the joints yet prevents the
exposure of backfill. Joints between the panels are important since they accommodate
differential settlements. Mechanical anchorages are cast into the panels, which connect to the
soil reinforcement.
Filter Fabric: Non-woven geotextile material strips are placed on the backside of panel joints
before backfilling. They are attached with a construction adhesive. These strips prevent backfill
from spilling out from the face at the joints.
Inspection Components: Access ports are located at certain fascia panels. These ports
access sacrificial wires that are inspected periodically for corrosion. The load carrying members
of an MSE wall are the soil reinforcements, which cannot be inspected once backfilled. The
inspection wires are made of the same material and coating as the soil reinforcement. Also, it is
necessary to provide an access walkway at the top of the wall to facilitate future bridge
inspections.
Bearing Pads, Spacer Bars, Wedges, Braces, Clamps: Commonly, fascia panels are placed
onto elastomeric pads that separate them from the lower course of panels. Bars and other
spacers maintain the panel-to-panel alignment during the panel placement and backfilling
operations. Temporary wooden wedges are often used to level panels before they are
backfilled. Wooden braces and clamps are also used to maintain the panel-to-panel alignment
before they are backfilled.
September 2015 25-2

Swale and Geomembrane: It is important that surface water be directed away from the
crushed granular backfill area since pressure on the fascia panels will increase as the backfill
becomes saturated. Additionally, contaminated water may affect performance of the soil
reinforcement. The final grade of the inspection walkway must not direct surface drainage
towards the abutment seat. Instead, the walkway must be graded to allow drainage to flow into
the swale that is constructed immediately behind the wall coping cap. This swale must direct
flow away from the site, and water must not pond at the swale. The wall is protected from the
infiltration of surface water by a geomembrane that is placed onto the completed backfill. It is
important that the surface onto which the geomembrane is placed is properly graded and that
the joints in the geomembrane material are properly lapped, shingled and welded.
Coping Cap: The top course of panels is fitted with a cast-in-place concrete coping that serves
to direct rainfall away from the top panels. The coping also provides an aesthetic finish. It must
be properly detailed with correctly spaced joints and separation from the panels.
Safety Railings: The coping is normally fitted with a pedestrian safety rail over its length.
25.5 Materials – General
Shop drawings must be submitted by the Contractor and reviewed for acceptability by the
Consultant. The shop drawings include a great deal of information that is required during
inspection, such as material lists, backfill properties, lay-out plans complete with elevations,
dimensions, typical cross-sections, component details, connection details and drainage details.
The Inspector must carefully review and understand the content of the shop drawings.
25.5.1 Precast Concrete Fascia Panels – Transport and Handling
The panels are fabricated at an off-site facility and generally arrive at site in flat vertical stacks.
Large panels are normally transported on edge in horizontal stacks. Panels are separated by
dunnage and plastic dimple spacers. Prior to being released by the precast fabrication facility,
the Consultant’s fabrication inspector will have accepted the panels for use. Damage to panels
may occur during transit and unloading. The Inspector’s responsibilities for panels include:
 Identify the shipments of panels as they arrive and confirm that the Consultant’s fabrication
inspector has accepted the panels prior to shipment. Panels are indelibly marked with
identification numbers.
 Confirm that panel shipments are immediately stored in an acceptable manner. Panels must
be separated from each other by suitable dunnage. If wooden dunnage is in direct contact
with panel faces, this may result in permanent staining. Panels must be covered to protect
the faces from contamination and staining from the elements. Panel stacks must be placed
on level ground supported by timber blocking.
 As panels are separated for installation, visually inspect each unit for physical damage,
including cracks, broken corners, broken edges, scrapes or other damage to the face, an
excess of surface cavities, contamination by road spray or form release oil, dunnage marks
or staining, damage to embedded hardware and any other damage that has occurred during
transport and handling.
September 2015 25-3

25.5.2 Soil Reinforcement
Reinforcement is fabricated at an off-site facility and generally arrives at site in wrapped bundles
or rolls. Prior to being released by the precast fabrication facility, the Consultant’s fabrication
inspector will have accepted the reinforcement for use. Damage may have occurred during
transit and unloading. The Inspector’s responsibilities for reinforcement include the following:
 Steel reinforcement fabrication and coating requirements are identified in ASTM Standards,
referenced by the specifications. The Inspector must identify the shipments by their
documentation and tags, and confirm that the Consultant’s fabrication inspector has
accepted the materials prior to shipment. The Inspector must track the type, length, gauge
and other identification of the shipment upon its arrival.
 Geosynthetic reinforcing must meet the material test methods specified and must contain
ultraviolet exposure mitigants. The Inspector must identify the shipments by their
documentation and tags, and confirm that the Consultant’s fabrication inspector has
accepted the materials prior to shipment. The Inspector must track the type, length and
other identification of the shipment upon its arrival.
 All reinforcement must be stored above ground and must be adequately covered to protect it
from the elements.
 As reinforcement is separated for installation, visually inspect each unit for physical damage
including kinks, bends, tears, breaks, broken welds, coating loss, road spray, or other
damage that may have occurred during transport and handling.
25.5.3 Crushed Aggregate Backfill
Crushed aggregate backfill material must meet the specified requirements for gradation. For
some wall designs, there may exist two soil zones. The drainage layer soil zone adjacent to the
panels must specifically not contain an excess of fines. Before the commencement of any
backfilling, the Inspector must:
 Review the Contractor’s submitted sieve analysis to confirm that the testing is current and
that the gradation requirements are met for all granular backfill types.
 Confirm that the Contractor has retained the services of a qualified and licensed testing firm.
 Confirm that the Contractor’s methods of stockpiling and handling include precautions that
will minimize material segregation.
Crushed aggregate backfill material must also strictly meet the specified electrochemical
parameter limits. These include resistivity, pH, limits of chlorides, sulphates, organics and site
temperature. Before the commencement of any backfilling, the Inspector must:
 Confirm that the electrochemical tests were performed by a qualified and licensed testing
firm.
 Confirm that the electrochemical parameters meet the specified requirements.
25.6 Construction – General
The Contractor must utilize a construction crew that is knowledgeable and experienced in MSE
construction. Well in advance of wall construction, the Inspector must request that the
Contractor produce details of related project experience for his superintendent and crew.
Before the start of construction, the Inspector must confirm that no conflicts exist between the
Plans and the shop drawings.
September 2015 25-4

25.6.1 Ground Improvements
Requirements for site preparation are generally specified in the Special Provisions. The
Inspector must confirm that the Contractor:
 Locates and identifies all underground utilities and structures in the vicinity of the
construction site before starting excavation. These locations must be identified throughout
the duration of construction.
 Excavate the site to the plan elevation and proof roll the subgrade to identify soft, yielding,
unstable, loose, wet or otherwise unsuitable foundation conditions. The Inspector must
contact the Project Manager to discuss the observed conditions, who will then advise
regarding additional measures of sub-excavation and backfill or contact the project
geotechnical engineer if required.
25.6.2 Levelling Pad
Once the ground has been prepared, the pad is cast with Class C concrete and cured for 72
hours. The pad is not a structural component of the wall; however, it is important because it sets
the horizontal and vertical alignment of the wall.
25.6.3 Fascia Panel Installation and Wall Erection
Following are typical construction sequences and details:
 Panel joints are generally staggered between horizontal courses. However, in some cases,
a continuous vertical joint (often called a slip joint) is constructed full-height. Generally,
corner panels have a continuous vertical joint over the full height of the wall.
 Panels are placed in horizontal courses, with backfill placed against the lower course before
the subsequent course is placed. The first course of panels is placed onto the levelling pad.
Shimming is done as necessary until the panels are level along the longitudinal direction of
the levelling pad. The first course is secured by external braces or struts, which are
anchored to the ground at the front face of the panel.
 Construction adhesive is applied to the panels to secure filter fabric at the joints between
panels.
 Drainage structures are placed, as specified, with ends of drains temporarily plugged or
otherwise protected.
 Backfill is placed and compacted in 150 mm lifts of loose material to the level of the first row
of reinforcement connections at the first course of panels. The compacted backfill is not
placed directly against the first course of panels because the panels are not yet connected
to any soil reinforcement and backfilling against the panels would force them off of the
levelling pad. Instead, a temporary void is left between the backfill and the panels.
 Soil reinforcement is placed onto the compacted fill and mechanically secured to the first
row of fascia panels. Further backfill lifts and reinforcement are placed until the panels are
backfilled and reinforced up to the level of their top reinforcement anchors. Since the bottom
layer of reinforcement is now backfilled and panels are secured, the void between the panel
and previously placed backfill can now be filled. At this juncture, the Inspector must confirm
that the design batter of the lower course of panels is correct.
 A second course of panels is then placed. These upper-course panels are temporarily
clamped to the lower-course panels at the panel corners so that the adjacent panel faces do
not become offset.
September 2015 25-5

 The above process is repeated, and with the completion of backfill for each course, the
wooden alignment wedges are removed. The Inspector must confirm that the design batter,
joint width, adjacent panel offset and levelness of panels in the longitudinal direction are
acceptable. The Inspector must also confirm that no panels were cracked, spalled, scraped
or otherwise damaged during construction. Panels deemed unacceptable must be replaced.
 Prior to casting the coping, the Inspector must again review the entire wall alignment, panel
offset, panel joints and panel condition to confirm that the project requirements have been
met.
25.6.4 Placement and Testing of Crushed Aggregate Backfill
Proper backfilling procedures are important to the performance and aesthetics of the wall. Most
problems encountered in MSE wall construction relate to improper backfilling procedures. The
Inspector must confirm that:
 Backfill is placed neatly to the level of the panel connection anchors. No depressions or
loose material may exist on the prepared surface. Reinforcing steel must bear evenly onto
compacted backfill for its entire length.
 Lift thicknesses are carefully monitored so that they do not exceed 150 mm after
compaction.
 Backfill materials are not segregated. After each lift is compacted, the Inspector must review
the surface and identify any areas where rock pockets or other segregation exists. The
Contractor must remove and replace segregated backfill.
 Backfill material stockpiles are protected from freezing and not placed onto a frozen
subgrade. The Inspector must regularly monitor the temperature of stockpiles and
compacted backfill surfaces using a calibrated laser thermometer. Care must be taken to
obtain accurate readings within the stockpiles and not just at the surface of stockpiles.
 Water that is added to backfill to achieve the desired moisture content for compaction must
be clean, potable and may not contain contaminants like chlorides or sulphates.
 Backfill density testing is done using the Alberta Transportation Test Method ATT-58A
“Density Test-Control Strip Method”. Section 2, Backfill of this Manual provides guidance in
using this method. The Contractor must remove and replace any material found to be
noncompliant.
 Backfill testing for electrochemical properties must be done by a certified tester at the
frequency specified. The Inspector must be aware of the required testing frequency and
monitor the volume of material placed to confirm that the required testing frequency is
performed.
 Backfill compaction equipment must not operate directly over soil reinforcement and must
only travel in the direction parallel to the wall panels. It is important that backfill equipment
be restricted to hand-operated tampers when within 1 m of the panels.
 At the end of each day of production, the backfill must be left in a compacted state and be
backsloped slightly so that any rainwater is directed away from the panels. The site must be
graded so that surface water is not introduced into the backfill area.
25.6.5 Placement of Soil Reinforcement
Steel soil reinforcement must be carefully separated from shipment bundles.
Prior to installation of reinforcement for each backfill lift, the Inspector must confirm that the
reinforcement length, type, gauge, etc., match the requirements of the shop drawings.
September 2015 25-6

Reinforcement around obstructions, such as foundation piles, may only be skewed from the
normal orientation if accepted by the Project Manager.
Soil reinforcement must be engaged with the panels prior to backfilling in accordance with the
manufacturer’s design. Polymer reinforcement must be tensioned before placing backfill
overtop.
25.6.6 Drainage
Subsurface drains and their locations are important to wall performance and must not be
crushed or blocked during construction.
Wall drain outlet locations must be suitably marked.
25.6.7 Geomembrane
It is important that the geomembrane is not breached, that all laps and splices be properly
constructed and that drainage is away from the wall.
25.7 Construction Records
25.7.1 Final Shop Drawings
At the completion of construction, the Contractor must submit to the Consultant a final set of
shop drawings that incorporate all as-built conditions. As-built changes that need to be identified
on the final shop-drawings include, but are not limited to:
 Revised location of adjacent utilities.

 Change to ground improvement procedures based on geotechnical recommendations.
 Changes to any wall elevations or locations.
 Identification of all fascia panels that have been damaged, including cracks, broken edges
or corners and other mechanical damage. Identification of repair procedure used.
 Identification of any fascia panels that are measured to be out of tolerance, including
flatness, overall vertical alignment, adjacent panel offset and joint width.
25.7.2 Supplier’s Construction Inspection Records
25.7.2.1 Qualifications and Duties of On-Site Personnel
The MSE wall supplier must provide a full-time representative during all construction activities.
The representative must be sufficiently qualified to advise the Contractor in all aspects related to
the construction and must have a thorough understanding of the ground improvement
requirements, material inventories, shop drawing details, hardware assembly details and
material quality requirements. The representative must report directly to the Contractor’s MSE
wall supervisor. The Contractor’s MSE wall supervisor must be experienced in constructing
MSE walls.
The Inspector must maintain appropriate lines of communication with both the Contractor’s
supervisor and the supplier’s representative.
September 2015 25-7

The supplier’s representative must provide the Inspector with a weekly summary report detailing
the construction activities and confirming their compliance. The report must be sufficiently
detailed to show the exact components that were constructed during the past week, which
components are presently noncompliant, and where re-work, repair or other remedial action was
necessary to achieve compliance. The Inspector must, on a weekly basis, review the supplier’s
report and obtain clarification where needed. The Inspector must notify the Contractor
immediately if it is determined that the supplier’s representative does not adequately understand
aspects of the construction, is not sufficiently present or if he otherwise fails to perform his
duties.
25.7.2.2 Hold Points and Engineering Documentation
The Contractor must provide an engineered report at the completion of specific construction
phases or hold-points. The Contractor may not proceed with subsequent phases of the work
until the reports have been received and accepted by the Project Manager or the Inspector.
These hold points include:
 Foundation base preparation: This report confirms that the foundation has been inspected
by a qualified Engineer and that the conditions meet the designer’s requirements. Casting of
the levelling pad may not proceed until this report is accepted by the Project Manager.
 On-site delivery of components: This report confirms that all materials delivered to site
meet all requirements. Materials not referenced in the report are not to be incorporated into
the Work.
 Alignment of precast wall panels: After final completion of the wall, the Contractor must
perform a final check at the face of the wall to confirm that all fascia parameters meet the
specified tolerances. These results are provided in a report and will also be used to
complete the Contractor’s as-built shop drawings. Casting of the coping cap may not
proceed until this report is accepted.
 Backfill requirements: This includes specifications for backfill materials and a summary of
density and electrochemical test results. This is a weekly reporting process by the supplier’s
representative.
25.7.3 Identification of Corrective Action
Corrective action, when required, must be identified at regular intervals during construction. It is
not acceptable for the Contractor to delay inspection and reporting. If the identification of
noncompliant conditions is identified at a late stage, significant removal and reconstruction may
be required. This may create project delays due to re-work and re-ordering of materials. The
Inspector must review the Contractor’s reports and measure the Work on an ongoing and
continuous basis.
25.8 Inspector’s Tools
It is important that the Inspector possess and maintain the tools necessary to carry out his work.
These include:
 3 m aluminum straight-edge used for checking wall alignment

 1 m carpenter’s level used for checking panel-to-panel offset and levelness of panel tops
 Gap gauge or jig to measure joint width
September 2015 25-8

Section 25 – Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Section
SSBC
1 Material Delivery and Storage

25.3.5 Did the backfill material conform to the requirements listed in
Section 25.3.5 of the SSBC for gradation and according to
reinforcement type used?
25.5.10 Was material stored safely and uniformly?
25.5.10 Was soil reinforcement stored above ground?
25.5.10 Were panels stored in a manner to prevent avoid staining of the

panel face?
2 Wall Construction
Did the Contractor employ qualified personnel experienced in
constructing MSE walls to supervise and perform the work?
Did the Contractor require the MSE wall supplier to provide a full time
representative on site during construction?
25.5.3 Was the MSE wall area excavated (if required) to the proper
elevation as shown on design and shop drawings?
25.5.3 Was the area proof rolled after excavation and backfill to locate weak
soils?
25.5.3 Was all soft or unsuitable material compacted or removed and

replaced?
25.5.4 Were the levelling pad elevations set by instrument?
1
Compliance
Section
SSBC
25.2.4 Did the levelling pad project 75 mm minimum beyond either side of
the precast concrete fascia panels?
25.5.5 Was wall backfill compaction performed in such a manner that

equipment ran parallel to the wall panels, moving away from the
precast fascia panels to the end of the soil reinforcement?
25.5.5 Was only hand operated compaction equipment used within

1000 mm of the fascia panels?
25.5.5 Was proper compaction testing of the backfill material done (1 test
per lift or every 45 m of wall)?
25.5.5 Was the back fill material placed and compacted in 150 mm loose
lifts?
25.5.5 Was equipment kept off the soil reinforcement until a minimum of
150 mm of soil was placed?
25.2.4 Was the soil reinforcement in the proper alignment (not exceeding
20° splay angle)?
25.5.5 Were panel vertical and horizontal alignments checked periodically

and adjusted as needed?
25.2.4 Was the 300 mm wide filter fabric adhered to the back side of panels
on both vertical and horizontal joints?
25.2.4 Was the wall battered at 50:1?
25.2.5 Were inspection wires installed at the locations shown on the

drawings?
25.2.5 Were inspection access holes in the panels patched with the
appropriate product?
2
Compliance
Section
SSBC
25.2.5 Was a survey target anchored into the patching material flush with
the wall?
25.5.7 Was closed cell foam used to isolate concrete coping from other
concrete components?
Signature Date
3
Ground improvement excavation. Soil was Ground improvement excavation. Soil was
removed since it was not competent. removed since it was not competent.
Levelling pad poured. Installation of first row of precast panels on the

levelling pad.

Installation of first course of panels. Installation of soil reinforcement.
Panels set at batter. Turnbuckle on bracing used to Hydraulic excavator pushing backfill material over
set batter. Panels clamped together at edges to soil reinforcement.
maintain alignment.

Hydraulic excavator pushing backfill material over Wooden wedges used to engage panels. Filter
soil reinforcement. fabric placed over panel joints to prevent loss of
material through gaps.
Two types of backfill material placed. Drainage Adjustment of wall batter using turnbuckles.
layer backfill material placed within 1.5m of back
face of wall.

Two stage wall construction.
Two stage wall construction. Backfilling against Checking wall batter and panel alignment with
wire wall. Fascia panels not in contact with fill. digital level and 3.0 m straight edge.

Completed backfilling and panel installation.

Panels require cleaning prior to application of
pigmented sealer.
Pigmented sealer application. Cast-in-place coping cap.

Panel damaged during erection. Panel damaged during erection.
Panel damaged during erection. Poor handling of soil reinforcement. Fabric slings
and spreader bar should be used.

Damaged soil reinforcement. Correct handling using spreader bar.
Storage of fascia panels onsite. Panels should be Soil reinforcement stored on timber blocks. Colour
stacked neatly with blocking between panels. system used to identify reinforcement gauge.

Wire wall completed at two stage wall. Installation of 2nd stage panels after settlement has
occurred at Stage 1.
Installation of 2nd stage panels.

Space between 1st and 2nd stage. Panel

anchorages shown.

RCP AND PBC STRUCTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
26.1 General ....................................................................................................................... 26-1

26.4 Supply and Manufacture ........................................................................................... 26-1
26.4.1 Shop Inspection and Site Inspection .............................................................. 26-2
26.5 Installation .................................................................................................................. 26-2
26.5.1 Excavation ..................................................................................................... 26-2
26.5.2 Bed preparation.............................................................................................. 26-2
26.5.3 Placement of Units ......................................................................................... 26-3
26.5.4 Backfilling – General ...................................................................................... 26-4
26.5.4.1 RCP............................................................................................................ 26-4
26.5.4.2 PBC ............................................................................................................ 26-4
26.5.4.3 Post-Backfill Inspection .............................................................................. 26-5
ATTACHMENTS
 Check Sheet
 Photographs
Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Section 26, RCP and PBC Structures
26.1 General
Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) and Precast Box Culverts (PBC) can be used as bridge
culverts instead of CSP and SPCSP structures. RCP and PBC normally are used where the
typical life expectancy of 50 years for CSP and SPCSP needs to be increased, where quality
granular backfill materials are not as readily available, or where geotechnical site conditions
warrant their usage. The manufacturing, transportation and installation costs for RCP and PCB
may be higher than for CSP and SPCSP.
Precast RCP and PBC units are considered ‘rigid’ in that they are less dependent on the backfill
properties as compared to ‘flexible’ metal CSP and SPCSP pipes. Like CSP and SPCSP pipes,
RCP and PBC also depend on soil-pipe interaction, but the majority of their soil-pipe structure is
contained within the pipe itself.
RCP and PBC units are joined to provide water-tightness and soil-tightness with the ability to
accommodate some lateral and longitudinal movements. The connection joint for RCP between
adjacent mating units consists of a bell at one end and a spigot on the other, whereas PBC units
utilize rubber gaskets or coil sealants. Several possible details for joint sealants and gaskets
exist.
The environmental considerations are identical to those identified in Sections 1, 2 and 18.
In addition to the requirements stated in Sections 1, 2 and 18, the following must be considered:
 Precast units may roll and crush if adequate precautions are not taken to mitigate this
hazard.
 Heavy equipment, including cranes, earthmoving equipment and compaction equipment,
creates a hazard in the confined area of the trench.
26.4 Supply and Manufacture
RCP and PBC units are produced in standard cross-sectional shapes and for standard loading
classifications. Culverts may be installed into open-cut excavations and subsequently backfilled,
or they may be jacked into place by trenchless methods. Individual units are typically precast by
either of the following methods:
 batched using a dry mix zero-slump concrete, which is vibrated and then the forms are
immediately removed
 batched using self-consolidating concrete, which is not vibrated and the unit is left in the
forms until stripping strength is attained
The Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction reference various technical specifications
and standards that must be followed in the design and manufacture of units:
 Prior to the start of production, the Consultant’s fabrication inspector must confirm with the
Project Manager that the Contractor’s supplier is certified in accordance with the Standard
Specification for Bridge Construction Requirements. This is a third-party certification
program that audits the production process.
September 2015 26-1

 Prior to the start of production, the Consultant’s fabrication inspector must confirm with the
Project Manager that all shop drawings and design reports for concrete, reinforcing steel
and gaskets have been submitted and acceptably reviewed.
26.4.1 Shop Inspection and Site Inspection
Upon receipt of 72 hours’ notice, the Consultant’s fabrication inspector must conduct quality
inspections of the units. Prior to the transport of units from the fabrication facility, the
Consultant’s fabrication inspector will confirm with the Project Manager that no outstanding
deficiencies exist.
Upon delivery to the site, the Inspector must perform a thorough review of all units for the
purpose of identifying cracks. All cracks 0.2 mm in width or less should have been previously
identified at the shop; however, any additional cracks of this width need to be documented at
the site. The Inspector must also identify all cracks that are greater than 0.2 mm. No units may
be installed that have cracks 0.2 mm in width or greater until the appropriate actions have been
determined by the Project Manager and implemented by the Contractor.
During transport and handling, the bell and spigot ends of units are susceptible to chips and
spalls. The Inspector must monitor unloading and stockpiling to confirm that the Contractor
handles the units in a manner that will not result in damage. If damage does occur, the
Inspector must review the referenced Standards and the Special Provisions and obtain the
advice of the Project Manager.
The Inspector must perform a thorough check of the ends of each unit. It is imperative that the
bell and spigot ends for RCP units make a satisfactory joint. Roughness, honeycomb, form
bleeding voids, chips, formline fins and cracks all may impede the performance of a joint.
26.5 Installation
The referenced CAN/CSA S6 Bridge Design Code requires that the Inspector be experienced in
the work of soil installations for buried concrete structures. Inspection records must include
details of foundation conditions, bedding installation, soil identification and control, and
compaction.
26.5.1 Excavation
The excavation requirements are similar to those for CSP and SPCSP culverts. The
requirements of Section 1 and Section 18 of this Manual must be reviewed by the Inspector.
26.5.2 Bed preparation
The provision of a competent bed is very important for RCP and PCB culverts. The undisturbed
in-situ soil beneath the bedding layer must provide uniform support, consisting of moderately
firm to hard soil or stabilized soil. No rock or hard-points may exist immediately below the bed
material. Rigid RCP and PCB culverts are sensitive to local variations in the capacity of the bed
and consequent stresses must be taken up in the joints. These stresses may cause breaking of
the bell or spigot, joint leaking or joint faulting between adjacent units. These deficiencies are
very difficult to correct after the culvert has been backfilled and is in service.
September 2015 26-2

The installation of RPC and PCB must be done in accordance with CAN/CSA S6 Bridge Design
Code and other technical Standards referenced in the Standard Specifications for Bridge
Construction. The Inspector must be knowledgeable of the content of the referenced documents
in advance of the Work.
The Inspector must be knowledgeable of the specific requirements for foundation preparation
and acceptance. The Inspector must notify the Project Manager of the schedule for the
completion of excavation so that the Project Manager and his geotechnical engineer can be
available for consultation when required.
The installation of bedding material must follow the requirements shown in the Standard
Specification for Bridge Construction Figure 3 ‘Standard Trench Installations’ and Figure 7.11
‘Standard Installations for Concrete Box Sections in Trenches’ for RCP and PCB, respectively.
These figures supersede the dimensions and details of Standard Drawing S-1418, but otherwise
the requirements of S-1418 apply, including the need to pre-shape the bed and to construct clay
seals.
26.5.3 Placement of Units
The Inspector must not permit the placement of units until the excavation, foundation condition
preparation and bedding suitability has been inspected and accepted.
Prior to the start of installation of the units, the Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager
that the manufacturer’s recommended installation methods have been received and accepted.
The Contractor must carefully control the line and grade during the installation of all units.
The construction of ‘bell holes’ beneath each RCP connection is required when installing a pipe
with expanded bells, as described in the Standards and CAN/CSA S6 Code referenced in the
Standard Specification for Bridge Construction. It is important that the pipe is supported by the
barrel and not the bells. The Inspector must be knowledgeable of the specific requirements in
the referenced Standards and Special Provisions that apply to the Work.
The Inspector must carefully monitor the installation of each unit. If a unit is out of alignment, it
must be completely disconnected, the alignment corrected by adjustment to the bedding and
then re-installed. The Inspector must immediately identify units that are out-of-alignment as the
work progresses and not after the problem is compounded when a further number of units have
been installed. The use of external force must never be permitted during the installation of units.
The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor is only using lifting hardware, clutches and slings
that are approved by the manufacturer. These details must be confirmed in advance of any
scheduled installation.
The Inspector must confirm that the Contractor is using gasket materials and installation
procedures that are approved by the manufacturer and that meet the requirements of the
referenced technical Standards. Gasket materials are sensitive to heat, moisture, light and
contamination. It is important to properly install gaskets so that the units are adequately sealed
at their joints.
September 2015 26-3

26.5.4 Backfilling – General
Backfilling requirements are similar to those for CSP and SPCSP culverts. The requirements of
Section 2 and Section 18 of this Manual and Standard Drawing S-1418 must be reviewed by the
Inspector and discussed with the Contractor prior to the start of Work.
The Inspector must confirm that a qualified tester employed by the Contractor is performing
density tests during the backfilling operation.
During backfilling operations, the measurement of rise and span is not necessary; however, the
invert profile needs to be carefully surveyed by the Contractor and checked by the Inspector.
Any misaligned or faulted joints must be identified and corrected before any backfilling takes
place.
Trench width must be sufficient to permit proper compaction and temporary drainage systems.
Construction loads imposed on the installed structure must not exceed the design loads of the
structure. The Inspector must obtain the advice of the Project Manager if he suspects that the
structure may be exposed to damaging loads during construction.
26.5.4.1 RCP
Backfill materials do not follow the gradations shown in Section 2 of the Standard Specification
for Bridge Construction. Instead, backfill criteria is specified on the Plans and Special
Provisions. Backfill criteria and required density are specified as Installation Type 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Figure 3 ‘Standard Trench Installations’ in Section 26 of the Standard Specifications for Bridge
Construction illustrates dimensional requirements.
The backfill material properties are classified into Category I, II, III or IV.
The Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager that the proposed backfill material for
each Category to be used has been accepted and the Contractor’s sampling and testing results
have been submitted and accepted.
26.5.4.2 PBC
Backfill materials do not follow the gradations shown in Section 2 of the Standard Specification
for Bridge Construction. Instead, backfill criteria is specified on the Plans and Special
Provisions. Backfill dimensions and required density are specified as Installation Type B1 or B2.
Figure 7.11 ‘Standard Installations for Concrete Box Sections in Trenches’ in section 26 of the
Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction illustrates dimensional requirements.
The backfill material properties are classified into Soil Group I, II or III.
The Inspector must confirm with the Project Manager that the proposed material source for each
Soil Group to be used has been accepted and that the Contractor’s sampling and testing results
have been submitted and accepted.
September 2015 26-4

26.5.4.3 Post-Backfill Inspection
The Inspector must conduct a post-backfill inspection of the interior of the culvert after all backfill
has been placed and before flow is diverted into the culvert. The Inspector must confirm that all
seals are functional and that the joints are not faulted. The culvert profile must be surveyed to
confirm that it matches the design profile. The Inspector must visually inspect all interior
surfaces for cracks that may have developed during installation and backfilling, particularly at
the crown and invert.
September 2015 26-5

Section 26 – RCP and PBC Structures Check Sheet
Project Name:
Date:
Time:
Project No.:
Stage of Activity:
Element:
Compliance
Observations and
Reference
Section
Comments
SSBC
1 Identification
26.2.5.1 Pipe – Were all pipes supplied marked in accordance with ASTM 1417M
standards:
 Was the pipe designation indicated as follows: Di, T, H, where
o Di = designated pipe nominal inside diameter, mm
o T = type
o H = minimum-maximum fill height, m
 The date of manufacture
 The manufacture’s name or trademark
 The plant identification
Note: For pipe with elliptical reinforcement or otherwise requiring special
placement, appropriate marking to indicate the correct installed
orientation.
26.2.5.2 Box Sections – Were all boxes supplied marked in accordance with
ASTM 1433M standards:
 The box designation was indicated as follows: S, R, H, where
o S = designated box section span, mm
o R = designated section rise, mm
o H = minimum-maximum fill height, m
 The date of manufacture
 The manufacture’s name or trademark
 The plant identification (Box Id)
Note: One end of each box section designed to be installed with the top
slab up must be legibly marked during the process of manufacturing or
immediately thereafter on the inside and outside of the top slab, or must
have the top identified by the location of one or more lift holes or
devices.
26.2.6.3 Crack Identification/Repairs – Were any cracks equal to or less than
0.2 mm in width, considered minor, documented on the inspection
report?
26.2.6.3 Were any cracks greater than 0.2 mm and less 0.3 mm in width
assessed by the manufacturer, and was a repair or replacement
strategy developed and submitted to the Department and Consultant for
review and acceptance prior to the commencement of the repair or
replacement work?
1
Compliance
Observations and
Reference
Section
Comments
SSBC
26.2.6.3 Were any sections with cracks 0.3 mm in width or greater identified for
rejection?
26.2.7 Did stockpiled materials meet the specified requirements at the time
they were to be used?
26.2.7 Was RCP stockpiled at ground height?
26.2.8 Were all RCP and PBC material handled carefully to prevent damage,
and were rubber gaskets kept at room temperature prior to installation?
2 Installation
26.3 Did the Contractor submit documentation of lifting procedures for the
Consultant’s review two (2) weeks prior to installation of RCP or PBC?
26.3.1 Was excavation done to the lines and grades as shown on the drawings
or as determined by the Consultant, and in accordance with the
appropriate sections of Section 1, Excavation of the Standard
26.3.2.1 Reinforced Concrete Pipe – Did the excavation and backfill
requirements follow Section 26.3.2.1, Figure 3, standard trench
installations in the SSBC?
26.3.2.1 Did the bedding and haunch criteria for reinforced concrete pipe follow
one of the bedding types, based on the Consultant’s design and as
shown in the chart in Section 26.3.2.1 of the SSBC?
26.3.2.1 Did the categories of soil for haunch and bedding material follow the
Table shown in Section 26.3.2.1 of the SSBC?
26.3.2.1 Was the fill material below the bottom of the pipe invert compacted by
the Contractor to a minimum of 95% of Standard Proctor Density at
optimum moisture content up to the bedding material?
26.3.2.1 Was the bedding material placed in a loose, uncompacted state under
the middle third of the pipe?
26.3.2.1 Did the haunch material extend only to the ‘springline’ of the pipe?
2
Compliance
Observations and
Reference
Section
Comments
SSBC
26.3.2.1 Was the material in the overflow zone, from the springline of the pipe to
the road surface, clean and void of rocks and sharp objects?
26.3.2.2 Precast Box Culvert – Did the excavation and backfill requirements
follow Section 26.3.2.2, Figure 7.11, Standard Installations for Concrete
Box Sections in Trenches in the SSBC?
26.3.2.2 Did the bedding and haunch criteria conform to the installation types as
shown in Section 26.3.2.2, Table 7.11 in the SSBC?
26.3.2.2 Did the soil group categories for bedding conform to Table 7.11 in
Section 26.3.2.2 of the SSBC?
26.3.2.2 Was the fill material below the bottom of the pipe culvert compacted by
the Contractor to a minimum of 95% of Standard Proctor Density at
optimum moisture content?
26.3.2.2 Was the thickness of the bedding material under the middle 1/3 of the
culvert placed in a loose, uncompacted state?
26.3.3.1 Installation – Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) – Was excavation,

foundation and bottom bedding material accepted by the Inspector?
26.3.3.1 Was the Contractor’s installation method in conformance to the

manufacturer’s recommendations, and did the rubber gasket at each
joint conform to CSA 257.3, and were joint gaps less than 13 mm?
26.3.3.1 Did the Contractor install the RCP from the lowest elevation to the
highest elevation with the bell end upstream?
26.3.3.1 Did the Contractor clean the inside of the bell end and outside of the
spigot end prior to installation?
26.3.3.1 Were rubber gaskets kept at room temperature, out of direct sunlight,
free of dirt, oil and grease?
26.3.3.1 Where pipe sections were supplied with a protruding bell, did the
Contractor excavate at each bell section, ensuring uniform support
underneath the pipe as per Section 26.3.3.1, Figure 4 of the SSBC?
3
Compliance
Observations and
Reference
Section
Comments
SSBC
26.3.3.2 Precast Box Culvert (PBC) – Was excavation, foundation and bottom
bedding material and shape accepted by the Inspector?
26.3.3.2 Did installation include a rubber gasket and/or coil sealants, such as
Kent Seal or Con Seal, at each joint conforming to CSA 257.3?
26.3.3.2 Did the Contractor install and join sections in conformance to the
26.3.3.2 Did the Contractor install the PCB from the lowest elevation to the
highest elevation?
26.3.3.2 Did the Contractor clean the inside of both ends prior to joint
installation?
26.3.3.2 Were rubber gaskets kept at room temperature, out of direct sunlight,
free of dirt, oil and grease?
26.3.3.2 Did the Contractor use lifting clutches in conjunction with the embedded
lifting pins (anchors)?
26.3.3.2 If a section was installed on an unacceptable grade, did the Contractor

completely unjoin the sections, correct the grade and rejoin the box
sections?
26.3.4 Backfilling – After installation was accepted by the Consultant, was

backfilling done with materials as per the drawings and Section 26.3.2
of the SSBC and in accordance with the current version of the standard
drawing S-1418 Installation of Large Steel Pipes?
26.3.4 Was the ambient air temperature below 0°C?
Note: No backfilling is allowed unless otherwise accepted by the
Department and the Consultant.
26.3.4 Where acceptance to backfill was granted, was all backfill material in a
thawed state when placed, compacted, and was substrate in a thawed
condition?
26.3.4 Was backfilling under the haunches compacted to achieve density as

per Section 26.3.2, Bedding/Backfill of the SSBC?
4
Compliance
Observations and
Reference
Section
Comments
SSBC
26.3.4 Was backfilling free of voids, providing uniform support to the structure
and such that the level of fill on one side did not exceed the level of fill
on the other side of the structure by more than 300 mm, at any time?
26.3.4 Was vibratory equipment, if required, moving parallel to the structure

with simultaneous handwork along the structure?
26.3.4 Was clean material void of rocks and sharp objects used from the
springline of the structure to the road surface?
26.3.4 If in-situ material was used in place of granular material, did the
Inspector confirm the in-situ material conforms to the type and
compaction level as specified on the drawings?
26.3.4 Did the Contractor supply suitable material for the compacted non-
granular backfill, and was it accepted by the Inspector before
commencement of this stage of construction?
3 Fish Passage Infrastructure

26.4 Was fish passage infrastructure constructed as shown on the drawings
and fabricated in accordance with the applicable specifications?
4 Rock Riprap
26.5 Was rock riprap placed as shown on the drawings and conforming to
Section 10, Heavy Rock Riprap of the Standard Specifications for
Bridge Construction?
Signature Date
5
Standard Specifications for Bridge Construction Section 26, RCP and PBC Structures
26.1 Excavation for bedding complete. Placing filter 26.2 Bedding material placed and compacted.
fabric prior to bedding material.
26.3 Rig mats placed to allow for ease of access to 26.4 Crews unloading RCP. RCP lifted with slings from
work. truck bed. Small swale dug at unloading area.

26.5 Placing first section of RCP. 26.6 Gasket placed at spigot end of pipe.
26.7 Placing gasket adhesive. 26.8 Pipe section joint.

26.9 Loader loosening bedding material at bell. 26.10 Joining RCP sections. Typically done with chucks
or winches. Rubber softeners and 2x6 blocks used
here to lift and push pipe.
26.11 Compacting haunch area with a rammer. 26.12 Both sides of pipe simultaneously backfilled. Skid
steer and remote controlled walk behind packer
used to compact material.

26.13 Clay seal compacted at end of pipe. Filter fabric 26.14 Completed placement of heavy rock riprap.
material in place.
26.15 Installation of PBC units onto prepared bed, using 26.16 Erection of PBC unit.
string for alignment control.

26.17 Erection of PBC units. 26.18 Winching of PBC unit into position.
26.19 Typical Winching bracket hardware. 26.20 Backfilling of PBC culvert.

Bridge Construction Manual Dec 2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bridge Construction Manual Dec 2015

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bridge Construction Manual Dec 2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the Bridge Construction Inspection Manual?

What is the purpose of the Bridge Construction Inspection Manual?

What are some of the main components involved in RCP and PBC structure construction?

What are some of the main components involved in RCP and PBC structure construction?

Bridge Construction

Technical Standards Branch

© Copyright, September 2015

The Crown in right of the Province of Alberta, as represented

Permission is given to reproduce all or part of this document

Alberta Transportation Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Edition 2 page ii

ISL Engineering and Land Services Ltd.

Alberta Transportation Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Edition 2 page iii

Section C - Role of the Inspector

Section 3 - Foundation Piles

Section 4 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

Section 5 - Reinforcing Steel

Section 6 - Structural Steel

Section 7 - Precast Concrete Units

Section 8 - Bridge Bearings

Section 9 - Drain Trough Terminal Protection

Section 10 - Heavy Rock Riprap

Section 11 - Ducts and Voids

Section 13 - Miscellaneous Iron

Section 15 - Non-Skid Polymer Overlay

Section 16 - Bridge Deck Waterproofing

Section 17 - Asphalt Concrete Pavement

Section 18 - CSP and SPCSP Structures

Alberta Transportation Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Edition 2 page iv

Section 20 - Deck Overlay and Concrete Rehabilitation

Section 21 - Removal and Salvage of Bridge Structures

Section 23 - Structural Lumber and Piling

Section 24 - Sign Structures and Panels

Section 25 - Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls

Section 26 - RCP and PBC Structures

Alberta Transportation Bridge Construction Inspection Manual Edition 2 page v

A.1 General ......................................................................................................................... A-1

Bridge construction inspection includes inspection of major bridge structures, bridge

The purpose of this Manual is to:

A.2 Qualifications of the Inspector

September 2015 A-1

 understands construction limitations, sequencing and duration of activities

The Inspector’s aptitude is equally as important as the qualification requirements. An effective

 pragmatic and logical approach to the resolution of problems and issues

A.3.1 Activities Related to Inspection

Review: An evaluation of a document, procedure, construction activity or process for general

September 2015 A-2

A.3.2 Quality Roles Defined

September 2015 A-3

A.3.3 Language Defining Accountability

A.4 The Inspector’s Tools

A.4.1 Basic Equipment

A.4.2 Survey Equipment

A.4.3 Specialized Equipment

 Optical Hand Level or Clinometer: Used to estimate slope angles.

September 2015 A-4

September 2015 A-5

B.1 General ......................................................................................................................... B-1

B.2 Contract Terminology

B.2.1 Project Team Definitions

Consultant: Retained by the Department to administer a construction contract between the